A133

Operating Instructions
 A1338607

Operator Safety:
This copier is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The
Copier contains a 15-milliwat, 760-800 nanometer wavelength, GaAIAs laser diode.
Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye
damage. Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent
any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.

Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical unit in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a
factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the filed. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical
subsystem is required.

Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified
in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

As an Energy Star Partner, we have determined that this copier model

meets Energy Star Guidelines for energy efficiency.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated
with copying equipment by means of energy saving feature such as Auto Off, Low
Power, and Duplex Mode Priority modes.
For details, see the following pages.
❖ Auto Off Mode : see page 138.
❖ Low Power Mode : see page 137.
❖ Duplex Mode Priority : see page 141.

For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner.

Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that may result from the
use of parts other than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.

Note: Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine.

Note: Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details,
please contact your local dealer.

Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz, more than 12A

Please make sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details
about power source, see page 160.

 Copyright 1996, Ricoh Co., Ltd.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
WHERE IS IT & WHAT IS IT
SYSTEM OVERVIEW....................................................................................3

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR................................................................4

OPERATION PANEL ....................................................................................6

Hard Keys .................................................................................................... 6
Touch Panel Display.................................................................................... 8

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS COPIER

FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................12
without optional finisher ............................................................................... 12
with optional finisher .................................................................................... 12

BASICS
STARTING THE COPIER .............................................................................24
When The Main Switch Is In The Stand-by Position .................................. 24
When The Display Is Off And The Indicator Of The Clear Modes/Low
Power Mode Key Is Lit ............................................................................... 24
When The Copier Is Set For User Codes ................................................... 25
USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY.......................................................26

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY.............................................................28

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS..........................29

Recommended Originals ............................................................................. 29
Non-recommended Originals For The Optional Document Feeder ............ 29
SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS.................................30

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT

FEEDER (ADF)..............................................................................................30

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT

FEEDER (SADF) ...........................................................................................32

iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

COPYING
BASIC OPERATIONS...................................................................................36
One-to-one Copying (Full Size Copying) ..................................................... 36
Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Period (Auto Start) .......37
Adjusting Copy Image Density ..................................................................... 37
Selecting The Copy Paper Size (Manual Paper Select) ..............................38
Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size(Auto Paper Select) ................39
Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction Ratios
(Auto Reduce/Enlarge) ................................................................................. 41
Selecting Original Type Setting
(Letter, Letter/Photo, Photo, Generation Copy) ..........................................43
Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort, Rotate Sort) ....................................44
Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page (111,222,333) (Rotate Stack) ...48
Copying From The Bypass Tray .................................................................. 50
Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else (Interrupt) ..........53
Recalling Job Settings (Job Recall) ............................................................. 53
Storing Your Copy Setting In Memory (Program) ........................................54
REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge) ....................................55
Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios (Preset R/E) ........................55
Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps ......................................................... 56
Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size .....................................58
WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES
(Duplex/Series Copies)................................................................................61
Making Two-sided Copies (Duplex) ............................................................. 61
Making One-sided Copies (Series Copies) .................................................. 68
COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine) ...........................70

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)74

Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your Copies (Background
Numbering) ................................................................................................... 74
Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies
(Auto Stamping) - English Only.................................................................... 75
Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies (User Stamping) ................79
Printing Dates And Page Numbers (Date Stamping, Page Numbering) .....81
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image) .............................................86

Copying The Image Twice On One Page
(Double Copies) ........................................................................................... 86
Erasing The Centre And The Border
(Erase Centre/Border) ................................................................................. 88
Adjusting The Margin (Margin Adjustment) ................................................. 89
Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy (Image Repeat) ..................... 91
Reversing Black and White (Positive/Negative) .......................................... 93
Merging Images (Overlay/Merge) ................................................................ 94
OPTIONAL FINISHING .................................................................................96
Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort) ........................................................ 96
Stapling (Staple) .......................................................................................... 100
Stapling Position And Original Setting ........................................................ 101
When Setting One Original At A Time ........................................................ 104
When Setting A Stack Of Originals In The Document Feeder ................... 104
COMBINATION CHART................................................................................105

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING GOES WRONG

IF YOUR COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE AS YOU WANT .......................110

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES .................................................112

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT.....................................113

LOADING PAPER.........................................................................................117
Non-recommended Paper ........................................................................... 117
Notes For Paper .......................................................................................... 117
Loading Paper In The Paper Tray ............................................................... 118
Loading Paper In The Large Capacity Tray ................................................ 119
ADDING TONER ...........................................................................................120

ADDING STAPLES .......................................................................................121

CLEARING MISFEEDS.................................................................................122
Check The Display ...................................................................................... 122

vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

When Misfeeds Occur In A, B, C, Y, Or Z Section .....................................123

When Misfeed Occurs At The Large Capacity Tray ....................................123
When Misfeed Occurs In P Section ............................................................. 124
When Misfeeds Occur In R Section ............................................................. 124
REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES.................................................................125

CHANGING THE COPIER’S SETTINGS

CHANGING PAPER SIZE.............................................................................128
Changing Paper Size In The 1st Tray ......................................................... 128
Changing The Paper Size In The Optional Tray Unit (Trays 2, 3, and 4) ..133
USER TOOLS................................................................................................134
User Tools Menu .......................................................................................... 134
How To Change The Basic Settings And Copy Features ...........................136
Basic Settings............................................................................................... 137
Copy Features .............................................................................................. 141
How To Register User Stamp ...................................................................... 152
SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS ..................................................153

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER

DO’S AND DON’TS
REMARKS
WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER
USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES
MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER.....................................................................156
Copier ........................................................................................................... 156
Document Feeder (Option)........................................................................... 156
DO’S AND DON’TS.......................................................................................157
Copier ........................................................................................................... 157
Document Feeder (Option)........................................................................... 158
Finisher (Option)........................................................................................... 158
REMARKS.....................................................................................................159
Copier ........................................................................................................... 159
WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER.................................................................160
Copier Environment...................................................................................... 160
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Power Connection ....................................................................................... 160

Access To The Copier ................................................................................. 161
USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES...........................................................162
Copy Paper.................................................................................................. 162
Paper Storage.............................................................................................. 163
Toner Storage .............................................................................................. 163

SPECIFICATIONS
COPIER..........................................................................................................166

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION) .................................................................169

FINISHER (OPTION).....................................................................................170

1000-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)............................................................171

1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)............................................................171

viii
 eu-1

INTRODUCTION
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and mainte-
nance of this copier. To get maximum versatility from this copier all opera-
tors should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please
keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Please read the next section before using this copier. It contains important
information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT
PROBLEMS.

SAFETY INFORMATION
When using your copier, the following safety precautions should always be
followed.

Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:

R This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of impor-

tant operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the machine.
nx This symbol is attached to some components to alert the user not
to touch them, because they may be very hot.

In addition, all safety messages are identified by the words "WARNING" and
"CAUTION". These words mean the following:

RWARNING: Important information to alert you to a situation that

might cause serious injury and damage to your property
if instructions are not followed.

RCAUTION: Important information that tells how to prevent damage to

equipment, or how to avoid a situation that might cause minor
injury.

i
 eu-1

RWARNINGS:
Since some parts of the copier are supplied with high voltage, touch
only the parts specified in this manual.

Do not modify or replace any parts other than the ones specified in
this manual.

Do not incinerate toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite

when exposed to open flames.

Do not store toner where it will be exposed to heat.

Do not eat or swallow toner, and keep it out of reach of children.

The fusing unit may be very hot. Be careful when handling it.

RCAUTIONS:
While copying, do not turn off the main switch.

While copying, do not open the front cover.

While copying, do not unplug the power cord.

While copying, do not lift the platen cover, or the document feeder.

Do not lay anything weighing more than 10 kg (22 lb) on the exposure
glass.

Keep corrosive liquids, such as acid, off the machine.

Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the machine.

ii
 eu-1

General Safety Information

❐ Always turn the copier off when you have finished copying for a day, but leave it
plugged in.
❐ When the copier will not be used for a long period, disconnect the power cord.
❐ If the copier must be transported by vehicle, please contact your service repre -
sentative.
❐ When the main switch is in the Stand-by position, the optional heaters are on. In
case of emergency, unplug the machine’s power cord.
❐ To disconnect the power source, the main plug must be pulled.

iii
 eu-2

WHERE IS IT &

WHERE IS IT & WHAT IS IT

WHAT IS IT
SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................. 3

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR ............................................................................................... 4

OPERATION PANEL ................................................................................................................. 6

Hard Keys............................................................................................................................................... 6
Touch Panel Display ............................................................................................................................. 8

1
 eu-2

2
 eu-2

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

WHERE IS IT & WHAT IS IT

1

4
5

1. Document feeder Insert a stack of originals here. They will be fed

(Option) automatically.
2. Copy tray Completed copies are delivered here.
(Option)
3. Finisher Sorts, stacks, and staples copies.
(Option)
4. 1500-sheet tray unit Holds 1500 sheets of copy paper.
(Option)
5. 1000-sheet tray unit Holds 1000 sheets of copy paper.
(Option)

❐ Other options: platen cover and key counter

3
 eu-2

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR

4
3
2 5
1

7
8

10

13

11
12

14
15

4
 eu-2

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR

1. Copy tray (option) Completed copies are delivered here. Regarding

WHERE IS IT & WHAT IS IT

the capacity of the tray, ☛ see page 166.
2. Main switch Switches the copier between on and standby con -
ditions.
3. Auto response When someone comes close to the copier, it will
(human) sensor automatically switch from Low Power mode to
standby mode.
4. Platen cover (option) Lower this cover over originals for copying.
5. Exposure glass* Position originals here face down for copying.
*After turning off the main switch, the exposure glass might be hot
because of the anticondensation function. This is not a problem.

6. Front cover Open to access the inside of the copier.

7. Unit for two-sided Makes two-sided copies.
copies (Duplex unit)

8. Paper tray Holds 500 sheets of copy paper.

9. Bypass tray Use to copy onto OHP sheets, adhesive labels,
translucent paper, post cards, and non-standard
size paper.
10. Large capacity tray Holds 1,000 sheets of copy paper.
11. Right cover of Open to remove misfed paper.
the optional tray unit
12. Key counter holder Insert the optional key counter here.
13. Operation panel Operator controls and touch panel are located
here. ☛ See the next page.
14. Toner bottle Replace the toner bottle when " Add Toner"f
is displayed on the display. ☛ See page 120.
15. Fusing unit Fuses the copy image to the paper. When ac -
cessing the inside of the copier, use caution.
This unit may be very hot.

5
 eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

OPERATION PANEL
Hard Keys
2 3
4

1. Contrast Dial 5. Program key

Changes the brightness of the Press to select the program
display. mode. ☛ See page 54.

2. User Tools key 6. Job Recall key

Changes the basic settings and Use to recall your previous copy
copy features. ☛ See page 134. settings. ☛ See page 53.

3. Guidance key
Shows guidance for functions.
☛ See page 28.

4. Touch Panel Display

☛ See page 26.

6
 eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

WHERE IS IT & WHAT IS IT

5 6 7

12 11 10

7. Clear Modes/Low Power Mode 10. Clear/Stop key

key While entering numbers, press to
Press to clear the previously en- cancel a number you have en-
tered copy job settings. Also use tered. While copying, press to
to switch to and from Low Power stop copying.
mode. ☛ See pages 24 and 137.
11. Enter key
8. Interrupt key Use to enter data in selected
Press to make interrupt copies modes.
during a copy run.
☛ See page 53. 12. Number keys
Use to enter the desired number
9. Start key of copies and data for selected
Press to start copying. Use to set modes.
the Auto Start. ☛ See page 37.

7
 eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

Touch Panel Display

without optional finisher

Message area
Copier status and messages
Original Counter
Number of originals scanned so far.
Copy Set Total
Total number of copy
sets entered.

Copy Set Counter

Number of copy sets
made so far.

with optional finisher

Message area
Original Counter

Copy Set Total

Copy Set Counter

8
 eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

❐ Regarding detailed information about each key and its functions, ☛ see page

WHERE IS IT & WHAT IS IT

12.
❐ For how to use the touch panel display, ☛ see page 26.

9
 eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

10
 eu-3

WHAT YOU CAN DO

WITH THIS COPIER

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH

THIS COPIER

11
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

FUNCTIONS
without optional finisher
☛ See page 37. ☛ See page 37. ☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 39.

☛ See page 43.

☛ See page 41.

☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 36.

☛ See page 48.

☛ See page 44.

☛ See page 86. ☛ See page 70. ☛ See page 55.

☛ See page 74. ☛ See page 61.
with optional finisher
☛ See page 37. ☛ See page 37. ☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 39.

☛ See page 43.

☛ See page 41.

☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 36.

☛ See page 100.

☛ See page 96.

☛ See page 86. ☛ See page 70. ☛ See page 55.

☛ See page 74. ☛ See page 61.

12
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Getting Help On The Display

☛ See page 28.

Adjusting Copy Image Density

☛ See page 37.

Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size

☛ See page 39.

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH

THIS COPIER
Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction Ratios
☛ See page 41.

Selecting Original Type Setting

☛ See page 43.

Sorting Into Sets

☛ See page 44.

13
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page

☛ See page 48.

Copying From The Bypass Tray

☛ See page 50.

Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else

☛ See page 53.

Recalling Job Settings

☛ See page 53.

Storing Your Copy Settings In Memory

☛ See page 54.

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

☛ See page 55.

14
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps

☛ See page 56.
Using the [+] and [-] keys or Number keys

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH

Stretching and squeezing the image

THIS COPIER
Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size
☛ See page 58.
Fitting the image in the copy area as it is

Stretching and squeezing the image into the copy area

15
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Making Two-sided Copies

☛ See page 61.
From one-sided originals

From two-sided originals

From book originals (Single) (Multi)

Making One-sided Copies

☛ See page 68.

16
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Combining Originals Into One Copy

☛ See page 70.

From 2 one-sided
originals

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH

From 4 one-sided
originals

THIS COPIER
From 8 one-sided
originals

From 16 one-sided
originals

Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your Copies

☛ See page 74.

17
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies

☛ See page 75.

Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies

☛ See page 79.

Printing Dates And Page Numbers

☛ See page 81.

18
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Copying The Image Twice On One Page

☛ See page 86.

Erasing The Centre And The Border (Erase Centre/Border)

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH

☛ See page 88.

THIS COPIER

19
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Adjusting The Margin

☛ See page 89.

Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy

☛ See page 91.

Reversing Black And White

☛ See page 93.

Merging Images
☛ See page 94.

20
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Optional Finishing

Sorting into sets (123, 123, 123) ☛ See page 96.

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH

Stapling ☛ See page 100.

THIS COPIER

21
 eu-3

FUNCTIONS

22
 eu-4

BASICS
STARTING THE COPIER............................................................................................................ 24
When The Main Switch Is In The Stand-by Position .......................................................................... 24
When The Display Is Off And The Indicator Of The Clear Modes/Low Power Mode Key Is Lit . 24
When The Copier Is Set For User Codes ............................................................................................ 25

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY....................................................................................... 26

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY ............................................................................................ 28

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS....................................................... 29

Recommended Originals .................................................................................................................... 29
Non-recommended Originals For The Optional Document Feeder ............................................. 29

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS................................................................... 30

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF) .............. 30

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF) ......... 32

BASICS

23
 eu-4

STARTING THE COPIER

STARTING THE COPIER

When The Main Switch Is In The Stand-by Position

.
Turn on the main switch.
1

.
Wait for the copier to warm up. Dur-
2 ing the warm-up period (within 140
seconds), "u Please wait." ap-
pears on the display.

.
After warm-up, "v Ready" ap-
3 pears on the display.

When The Display Is Off And The Indicator Of The

Clear Modes/Low Power Mode Key Is Lit

The copier is in Low Power mode.

Hold down the Clear Modes/Low

1 Power Mode key until the indica-
tor is not lit. The machine will
return to the standby condition.
❐ For details about Low Power mode,
☛ see page 137.

24
 eu-4

STARTING THE COPIER

❐ The following actions will also make the copier ready:

♦ The copier detects anyone operating it.
♦ Opening or closing the optional platen cover.
♦ Opening or closing the optional document feeder.
♦ Setting originals in the optional document feeder.
♦ Opening or closing the bypass tray.
♦ Pressing any key.

When The Copier Is Set For User Codes

The display instructs you to input

1 your user code, as shown in the
illustration.

Input your user code (6 digits)

2 using the Number keys.

BASICS
❐ To change the entered code, touch the
[C] key or press the Clear/Stop key.
Then, enter the new code.

Touch the [#] key or press the

3 Enter key.
❐ To prevent others from making copies
with your user code, when you have
finished using the machine, hold down
the Clear/Stop key and press the
Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key.
❐ Regarding user codes, ☛ see page
140.

25
 eu-4

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY

On the touch panel display, you can find keys, instructions and messages.
By touching keys on the display, you can select or deselect functions and
enter data for the selected modes. The display uses the following conven-
tions:

Keys that have the option of being selected.

Keys that have been selected.

Keys that have no option to select.

In this manual, we use the following convention:

Key on the display:

In the manual : [Auto Paper Select] key

RCaution: Do not press the touch panel display with any hard or sharp
object (pen, pencil, etc.). Always use your fingers or something
with a soft tip.

Initial display

Messages and instructions ap-

pears here.

tag sheets

26
 95.2.14 eu-4

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY

Display after selecting functions on the tag sheets

After selecting functions on tag sheets,

the clip appears on the tag.

[Check Modes] key

When you have selected functions on tag sheets, this key appears on the
upper right area on the touch panel display. Touch this key to see at a
glance all the modes you selected.

[Prev.] key

This key appears in the upper right corner of the display when you touch

BASICS
the [Check Modes] key. Press to go back to the previous display.

[Change Modes] key

When you select functions on the tag sheets, this key appears on the dis-
play. Touch this key to change settings of the following modes:

image density, original type settings, copy paper size,

Auto Reduce\Enlarge, and finishing

27
 eu-4

95.2.14

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY

Press the Guidance key when you want to know detailed information about
functions you use.

Press the Clear Modes/Low

1 Power Mode key then the Guid-
ance key.

Touch the key you want to know

2 about on the touch panel display.

For example, if you want to know

about "How to operate the dis-
play", touch the [How to operate
the display ] key.
❐ To go to the next page, touch the
[Next] key. To return to the previous
page, touch the [Prev.] key.
❐ To go back to the display shown af -
ter pressing the Guidance key, touch
the [Menu] key.
❐ To exit from the guidance display,
touch the [Exit] key.

28
 eu-4

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED

ORIGINALS
Recommended Originals
❐ Regarding originals that the optional document feeder can handle, ☛ see page
169.

Non-recommended Originals For The Optional

Document Feeder

RCAUTION: The following types of originals are not recommended for use
with the document feeder. Place them directly on the expo-
sure glass.
❐ Originals thicker than 128 g/m 2, 34 lb
❐ Originals thicker than 105 g/m 2, 28 lb when using two-sided originals
❐ Originals thinner than 40 g/m 2, 11 lb. But for originals between 40 and 52 g/m 2
(11 and 14 lb), the document feeder must be set to Thin Paper mode. ☛ See
page 139.
❐ Originals larger than A3, 11" x 17"
❐ Originals smaller than A5, 5 1/2" x 81/2"
❐ Paper with any king of coating (such as carbon) on the back

BASICS
❐ Folded, curled, creased, or damaged originals
❐ Mailing labels, or perforated originals
❐ OHP transparencies
❐ Translucent paper
❐ Pasted originals
❐ Damp originals
❐ Sticky originals
❐ Wavy originals
❐ Originals that are not made from paper
❐ Originals written in pencil on both sides, or two-sided carbon originals
❐ Thermal fax paper, CRO (camera ready original) or aluminum foil
❐ Originals with globs of ink from a ball-point pen

29
 eu-4

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE

GLASS
.
Lift the optional platen cover or
1 the optional document feeder.

.
Set the original face down on the
2 exposure glass. The original
should be aligned to the rear left
corner.

.
Lower the optional platen cover
3 or the optional document feeder.

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE

OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)
You can insert a stack of originals (one-sided or two-sided) of the same size
into the document feeder. These originals are individually fed onto and
removed from the exposure glass.
❐ If you want to set originals of different sizes at the same time, use the user
tools. ☛ See page 151.

Correct any curl, fold, or crease

1 in the originals before setting.

30
 eu-4

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)

Confirm that the Insert Original

2 indicator is lit before setting the
originals.

Confirm that no previous originals

3 remain on the exposure glass.

Adjust the guide to the original

4 size.

Set the originals face up into the

5 document feeder until the Insert
Original indicator goes off.
❐ The last page should be on the bot -
tom.

BASICS
❐ The guide must touch the front side
of the originals.

❐ Do not stack originals above the limit

mark.

31
 eu-4

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE

OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)
You can insert one original at a time into the document feeder. The original
is automatically fed onto and removed from the exposure glass.

Correct any curl, fold, or crease

1 in the originals before setting.

Confirm that the Insert Original

2 indicator is lit before setting the
originals.

Confirm that no previous originals

3 remain on the exposure glass.

Adjust the guide to the original

4 size.

Set the original face up into the

5 document feeder until the Insert
Original indicator goes off.
❐ If you are copying a stack of originals
one sheet at a time and you want to
keep them in order, start with the last
page of the originals.
❐ The original guide must touch the
front side of the original.

32
 eu-4

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

Press the Start key.

6
While the Auto Feed indicator is
7 lit after an original is fed, set the
next original. The original is auto-
matically fed and copied.
❐ If you have set more than two origi -
nals, the Auto Feed indicator is not
lit after the last original is fed. In this
case, press the Start key again after
setting an original.

BASICS

33
 eu-4

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

34
 eu-5

COPYING
BASIC OPERATIONS................................................................................................................ 36
One-to-one Copying (Full Size Copying) .......................................................................................... 36
Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Period (Auto Start) .......................................... 37
Adjusting Copy Image Density ........................................................................................................... 37
Selecting The Copy Paper Size (Manual Paper Select).................................................................. 38
Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size(Auto Paper Select) ................................................... 39
Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction Ratios (Auto Reduce/Enlarge)........................... 41
Selecting Original Type Setting (Letter, Letter/Photo, Photo, Generation Copy) ....................... 43
Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort, Rotate Sort)............................................................................. 44
Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page (111,222,333) (Rotate Stack) ...................................... 48
Copying From The Bypass Tray ........................................................................................................... 50
Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else (Interrupt) ............................................ 53
Recalling Job Settings (Job Recall) ................................................................................................... 53
Storing Your Copy Setting In Memory (Program)............................................................................. 54

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge) ............................................................... 55

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios (Preset R/E) .............................................................. 55
Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps................................................................................................. 56
Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size ........................................................................... 58

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)........ 61

Making Two-sided Copies (Duplex) ................................................................................................... 61
Making One-sided Copies (Series Copies) ....................................................................................... 68

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine) ..................................................... 70

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp) ................................. 74

Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your Copies (Background Numbering) .................... 74
Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies (Auto Stamping) - English Only.................................. 75
Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies (User Stamping)..................................................... 79

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp) ................................. 79

Printing Dates And Page Numbers (Date Stamping, Page Numbering) .................................... 81

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)......................................................................... 86

Copying The Image Twice On One Page (Double Copies) .......................................................... 86
Erasing The Centre And The Border (Erase Centre/Border) .......................................................... 88
Adjusting The Margin (Margin Adjustment) ...................................................................................... 89
Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy (Image Repeat) ....................................................... 91
Reversing Black and White (Positive/Negative)............................................................................... 93
Merging Images (Overlay/Merge) ..................................................................................................... 94
COPYING

OPTIONAL FINISHING............................................................................................................. 96
Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort) .................................................................................................. 96
Stapling (Staple) ................................................................................................................................... 100
Stapling Position And Original Setting ............................................................................................... 101
When Setting One Original At A Time ............................................................................................... 104
When Setting A Stack Of Originals In The Document Feeder ....................................................... 104

COMBINATION CHART .......................................................................................................... 105

35
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

BASIC OPERATIONS
One-to-one Copying (Full Size Copying)

You can make copies that are the same size as your originals.

Set your original on the exposure

1 glass or in the optional document
feeder. ☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.

Enter the number of copies re-

2 quired using the Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
press the Clear/Stop key, then enter
the new number.

Confirm that the [Auto Paper Se-

3 lect] key is dark. If not, touch the
[Auto Paper Select] key, or se-
lect the proper paper size using
keys on the display.
❐ Regarding Auto Paper Select, ☛ see
page 39.
❐ Regarding selecting paper size,
☛ see page 38.

Make sure that the [Full Size]

4 key is dark. If not, touch it.

36
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Press the Start key.

5
❐ To stop the copier during the multi -
copy run, press the Clear/Stop key.
❐ Press the Start key to resume copy-
ing, or press the Clear/Stop key to
clear the entered copy number.

Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up

Period (Auto Start)

During the warm-up period (within 140

seconds), the display is as shown. If
you enter your copy job settings and
press the Start key during the warm
up period, the copier will start copying
automatically when the copier reaches
the ready condition.
❐ To cancel Auto Start, press the
Clear/Stop key.

Adjusting Copy Image Density

Auto and manual image density

If the [Auto Image Density] key is
dark, Auto Image Density is selected.
If not, touch the [Auto Image Den-
sity] key.

If the [Auto Image Density] key is

COPYING

light, Manual Image Density mode is

selected. To get a darker image,
touch the [Darker] key. To get a
lighter image, touch the [Lighter] key.

37
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Erasing Background (Erase Background)

Use this mode to mask out a dirty background (e.g. with a newspaper) and
get clear copies.

Confirm that the [Erase Background]

key is dark. If not, touch it.

Selecting The Copy Paper Size (Manual Paper

Select)

You can select the desired copy pa-

per size manually by touching one of
the tray keys in the display.
❐ Regarding setting copy paper in the
bypass tray, ☛ see page 50.

❐ The keys that have an * (asterisk)

cannot be used for Auto Paper Se -
lect.

38
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size(Auto

Paper Select)

The copier selects a suitable size of

copy paper based on the original size
and the reproduction ratio. Make sure
that the [Auto Paper Select] key is
dark. If not, touch the [Auto Paper
Select] key.

❐ If you use translucent or transparent originals or originals with tags, the original
size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When placing the original on the exposure glass directly, make sure that the
optional platen cover or optional document feeder is lowered before pressing
the Start key. Otherwise, the original size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When the original is set at a different direction from the copy paper in the paper
tray and the required paper size is A4, 8 1/2" x 11" or smaller, the copier auto -
matically rotates the original image by 90 o to match the copy paper direction
and make copies.

❐ The tray keys that have an * (asterisk) cannot be used for the Auto Paper Select.
❐ Regarding the combination of the Auto Paper Select and Stapling, ☛ see page
101.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

COPYING

39
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

❐ When you use Auto Paper Select, refer to the following table for possible copy
paper sizes
Metric version
Original Possible selected paper sizes for copy
A or B type* A or B type*
8" x 13" 8" x 13"***, A or B type*
81/4" x 13" 81/4" x 13"***, A or B type*
81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 13"***, A or B type*
LT type**, 8" x 10" LT type**, 8"x 10", A or B type*
* :A type (A3, A4, A5), B type (B4, B5, B6)
** :LT type: 11" x 17", 8 1/2" x 11"
*** :F/F4 size selected by user tools. ☛ See page 138.

Inch version
Original Possible selected paper sizes for copy
LT type LT type
A4 A4, LT type
8" x 13" 8" x 13"**, LT type
81/4" x 13" 81/4" x 13"**, LT type
81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 13"**, LT type
11" x 15", 10" x 14", 8" x 10" 11" x 15", 10" x 14", 8" x 10", LT type
* :LT type: 11" x 17", 8 1/2" x 14", 8 1/2" x 11", 5 1/2" x 81/2"
** :F/F4 size selected by user tools. ☛ See page 138.

40
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction

Ratios (Auto Reduce/Enlarge)

The copier can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the

paper and original sizes you select.
❐ If you use translucent or transparent originals or originals with tags, the original
size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When placing the original on the exposure glass directly, make sure that the
optional platen cover or optional document feeder is lowered before pressing
the Start key. Otherwise, the original size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When the original is set at the different direction from the selected copy paper,
the copier cannot rotate the image by 90 o. Make sure to set the original in the
same direction as the copy paper.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Example:
Metric version: Original: A3 ;, Copy paper: A4 ;
Inch version: Original: 11" x 17" ;, Copy paper: 81/2" x 11" ;

Touch the [Auto/Reduce En-

1 large] key.

Set your original on the exposure

2 glass or in the optional document
feeder. ☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.
COPYING

41
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Select the copy size you require:

3
Metric version:
Touch the [A4 ;] paper tray key.

Inch version:
Touch the [81/2" x 11" ;] paper
tray key.

Press the Start key. The original

4 image is reduced to fit the se-
lected copy paper.

42
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Selecting Original Type Setting

(Letter, Letter/Photo, Photo, Generation Copy)

There are four types of original type setting. Select the appropriate original
type to match the kind of originals you are copying from.
❐ Letter mode is the default. You can change this setting using the user tools.
☛ See page 141.
Letter
Select Letter mode when your originals contain only letters (no picture).
Letter/Photo
Select Letter/Photo when your originals contain photographs or pictures with
letters.
Photo
Delicate tones of photographs and pictures can be reproduced with this
mode.
Generation copy
If your originals are copies, so called generation copies, the copy image can
be reproduced sharply and clearly.

Letter mode is selected by de-

1 fault. Select the desired setting
by touching one of four keys.
COPYING

43
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort, Rotate Sort)

The copier puts images of more than two originals into memory and copies
are collated into sets. In Sort mode, every copy set is delivered on the copy
tray. In Rotate Sort mode, every other copy set is rotated by 90o and
delivered to the copy tray, so that each set can be easily separated.
Notes for above modes
❐ You can make up to 999 copy sets at a time. However, when the number of
copies exceeds the capacity of the copy tray, remove copies from the copy
tray. Regarding the capacity of the copy tray, ☛ see page 166.
❐ After starting copying, the only setting you may change is image density, The
change will apply from the next copy. ☛ See page 37.
❐ The maximum number of pages that can be stored is as follows:
A4, 81/2" x 11": Approximately 100 pages (images)
❐ You can change the settings of these modes with the user tools. ☛ See page
151.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Notes for Rotate Sort mode

❐ Paper sizes that can be used in Rotate Sort mode are as follows:
A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11"
❐ Two paper trays that are identical in size and different in direction are required.
You can change this setting using the user tools. ☛ See page 151.
❐ This mode does not support different size originals.

44
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Notes for Sort mode

❐ When you make two-sided copies in Sort mode, the maximum number of cop -
ies stacked in the unit for two-sided copies (duplex unit) is as follows:
A3, 11" x 17": 30 sheets
Other sizes: 50 sheets
❐ Different size originals can be used only when you make one-sided copies
from one-sided originals.

Touch the [Sort], or [Rotate Sort]

1 key.

Enter the number of copy sets with the Number keys.

2
When setting one original at a time
3
➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see page 30 or 32). Then press the Start key. The copier
starts memorizing the original image.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green, or the Auto Feed indicator on the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original in the same direction as step ➊.
❐ When the memory reaches 0%, the copier stops memorizing. Press the
Start key to finish copy jobs which are already into memory. After that,
follow the instructions on the display.

➌ Repeat step ➋ until all originals are scanned.

➍ After all originals are put into memory, press the Enter key.
❐ If you are making one-sided copies, the first set of copies will have completed.

➎ Press the Start key.

COPYING

45
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

When setting a stack of originals in the

3 document feeder
➊ Set a stack of the originals in the document feeder ( ☛ see page 30),
then press the Start key.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.
❐ When memory runs out during copying, the machine can be programmed to
behave in two ways with the user tools.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [Yes]

→ After all images in memory are copied, the machine will re-start
scanning automatically.
You should re-order your copies after all copy jobs are finished.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [No]

→ The machine will wait for you to press the Start key. At this point you
should remove your copies from the copy tray. Press the Start key
and then follow the instructions on the display to continue copying.

If you want to change the setting with the user tools, ☛ see page 151.
❐ If you make one-sided copies, the first set of copies has been completed
when all original images are stored in the memory.

46
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Stopping storing images and deleting stored images dur-

ing copying
Press the Clear/Stop key.
1 ❐ The copying run of the 1st set and scanning will stop.

Press the Clear/Stop key again. If you want to delete stored images,
2 touch the [Yes] key following the instructions on the display.
❐ You cannot delete the stored images by press the Clear/Stop key, if copies
have been stacked in the unit for two-sided copies (duplex unit) when mak -
ing two-sided copies. In this case, after the step 1, press the Clear
Modes/Low Power Mode key. So that, all settings and stored images will
be cleared. Then remove copies in the duplex unit by opening the front
cover. For position of the duplex unit, ☛ see page 4.

COPYING

47
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page

(111,222,333) (Rotate Stack)

Each original is copied together. Every other copies is delivered to the copy
tray, turned 90o.
❐ You can make up to 999 copy sets at a time. However, when the number of
copies exceeds the capacity of the copy tray, remove copies from the copy
tray. Regarding the capacity of the copy tray, ☛ see page 166.
❐ These modes do not support different size originals.
❐ After starting copying, the only setting you may change is image density, The
change will apply from the next copy. ☛ See page 37.
❐ Two paper trays that are identical in size and different in direction are required.
You can change this setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 151.
❐ The paper sizes that can be used in the Rotate Stack mode is as follows:
A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11"
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

48
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Touch the [Rotate Stack] key.

1

Enter the number of copies with the Number keys.

2
When setting one original at a time
3
➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see page 30 or 32). Then press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator on the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original in the same direction as step ➊.

➌ Repeat step ➋ until your copying is finished.

When setting a stack of originals in the

3 document feeder
➊ Set a stack of the originals in the document feeder ( ☛ see page 30),
then press the Start key.
❐ Last page should be on the bottom.
COPYING

49
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Copying From The Bypass Tray

Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translu-
cent paper, post cards, and copy paper that cannot be set in the paper tray.
❐ Approximately 40 sheets of copy paper (64 g/m 2, 17 lb) can be inserted at a time.
❐ Before making copies onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent
paper, and post cards, read the notes for them. ☛ See page 162.
❐ When you make copies using the bypass tray, it is recommended to set paper
in the bypass tray lengthwise ( ;).
❐ When using the bypass tray, the large capacity tray cannot be used.
❐ The following sizes can be used as standard size copy paper. If you use other
paper sizes, you should input vertical and horizontal dimensions.

Metric version Inch version

A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;, B5 : ;, A5 : ;, 11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;, 51/2" x 81/2" : ;,
B6 : ;, A6 : ;, 11" x 17" ; 8" x 13" ;,
❐ Regarding the functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Set your original on the exposure

1 glass or in the optional document
feeder. ☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.

Open the bypass tray. The [By-

2 pass Tray] key appears on the
display.
❐ If the [Bypass Tray] key is not dark,
touch it.

50
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

When copying onto standard size copy paper

3
➊ Slide the paper guides to the
paper width and, if necessary,
swing out the extender to sup-
port large size copy paper.

➋ Insert the copy paper into the

bypass tray until the beeper
sounds.
❐ The beeper can be canceled with
the user tools. ☛ See page 137.

➌ Press the Start key.

When copying onto non-standard size paper

3 Acceptable non-standard paper sizes:
Metric version:
Vertical: 100 ~ 297 mm (in 1 mm steps)
Horizontal: 148 ~ 432 mm (in 1 mm steps)
Inch version:
Vertical: 4.0" ~ 11.7" (in 0.1" steps)
Horizontal: 6.0" ~ 17.0" (in 0.1" steps)

➊ Press the Enter key.

➋ The display changes as shown.
COPYING

51
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

➌ Enter the vertical size of the pa-

per using the Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key.

➍ Touch the [#] key in the display

or press the Enter key.

➎ Enter the horizontal size of the

paper using the Number keys.
Then, touch the [#] key in the
display or press the Enter key.
➏ Touch the [Exit] key to close
this menu.

➐ The [Bypass Tray] key changes

to [Special Paper Size] key.

➑ Adjust the guides to copy paper

size and insert the copy paper
until the beeper sounds.
❐ The beeper can be canceled with
user tools. ☛ See page 137.

➒ Press the Start key.

52
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy

Something Else (Interrupt)

You can make urgently needed copies

during a multicopy run by pressing the
Interrupt key. The interrupted copy job
settings are stored in the machine’s
memory. After interrupt copying is com-
pleted, press this key again to recall the
previous copy job settings.
❐ In Interrupt mode, t is displayed on
the display.
❐ If you use this function with the op -
tional document feeder, you might
have to reset originals not to be copied
after interrupt copying is finished. Fol -
low the instructions on the display.
❐ Regarding the functions that cannot
be used together with this function,
☛ see page 105.

Recalling Job Settings (Job Recall)

The previous copy job settings before

auto reset or Low Power mode can
be recalled by pressing the Job Re-
call key. When the previous copy job
setting is saved, the Job Recall indi-
cator is lit.
COPYING

53
 eu-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Storing Your Copy Setting In Memory (Program)

Your ten frequent copying jobs can be stored in the machine’s memory.
❐ The stored program cannot be deleted. If you want to change the stored pro -
gram, overwrite the stored program.

Storing your settings

Set the copy settings you want to
1 put into memory.

Press the Program key.

2

❐ If you want to cancel storing, touch the [Cancel] key.

Touch the [Store] key.

3
Touch one of the [1] ~ [10] keys
4 that you want to store your set-
tings in.
❐ A key with m has already settings in
it. If you want to overwrite settings,
touch the key with m and follow the
instructions on the display.

Recalling a program
Press the Program key.
1
Make sure that the [Recall] key is dark. If not, touch it.
2
Touch one of the [1] ~ [10] keys that has m on it.
3

54
 eu-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

REDUCING AND ENLARGING

(Reduce/Enlarge)
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

(Preset R/E)

You can select one of 12 preset ratios

(5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduction ra-
tios).

❐ You can add 2 fixed preset ratios using the user tools. ☛ See page 142.

Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

1

Confirm that the [Preset R/E] key

2 is dark. If not, touch the [Preset
R/E] key.

Touch the desired reproduction

3 ratio.
❐ Refer to the copy and paper sizes on
keys to select the appropriate ratio to
COPYING

match your originals and copy paper.

55
 eu-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps

Using the [+] and [-] keys or Number keys (Zoom)

The reproduction ratio can be
changed from 25% to 400% in 1%
steps. There are two ways to change
ratios.

Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

1
Touch the [Zoom] key.
2

When using the [+] and [-] keys

3
➊ Enter the desired reproduction
ratios touching the [+] and [-]
keys on the display.

When using number keys

3
➊ Touch the [Number Keys] key.

56
 eu-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

➋ Enter the desired ratio using the

Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key, then enter the
new number.

➌ Touch [#] key on the display or

press the Enter key.

Stretching and squeezing the image

(Directional Magnification)
Copies can be reduced or enlarged at
different reproduction ratios horizon-
tally and vertically. There are two
ways to change ratios.

Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

1
Touch the [D. Mag. (%)] key.
2

When using number keys

3
➊ Touch the [Horizontal] or [Ver-
tical] key that you want to
change the ratio.
➋ Enter the desired ratio using the
Number keys.
❐ To change the entered ratios,
COPYING

touch the [C] key or press the

Clear/Stop key. Then, enter the
new ratios.

➌ Touch the [#] key or press the

Enter key.

57
 eu-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

When using [+] and [-] keys

3
➊ Touch the [+- Keys] key.

➋ Touch the [Horizontal] or [Verti-

cal] key that you want to change
the ratio. Select the desired ratios
using [+] and [-] keys.

Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size

Fitting the image in the copy area as it is

(Size Magnification)
The suitable reproduction ratio will be
automatically selected when you enter
the lengths of the original and copy
image you want.

Original Copy size Copy

you want

Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

1
Touch the [Size Magnification]
2 key.

58
 eu-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

Enter the original size with the

3 Number keys.
❐ To change the entered size, touch
the [C] key or press the Clear/Stop
key. Then, enter the new size.

Touch the [#] key or press the

4 Enter key.

Enter the copy size by the Num-

5 ber keys. Touch the [#] key or
press the Enter key.

Stretching and squeezing the image into the copy area

(Directional Size Magnification)
Copies can be reduced or enlarged to
match independent horizontal and
vertical size settings.

Original Copy size Copy

you want
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.
1
Touch the [D. Size Mag. (mm)]
2 key.
COPYING

59
 eu-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

Enter the original horizontal size

3 by the Number keys.
❐ To change the entered size, touch
the [C] key or press the Clear/Stop
key. Then, enter the new size.

Touch the [#] key or press the

4 Enter key.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter

5 the other sizes, following the dis-
play instructions.

60
 eu-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS

AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)
Making Two-sided Copies (Duplex)

From one-sided originals From two-sided originals

(1 Sided ➝ 2 Sided) (2 Sided ➝ 2 Sided)

From book originals (Single) From book originals (Multi)

This mode makes two-sided copies This mode makes the copies face
from two facing pages of a bound each other exactly as the bound
(book) original. (book) originals do.

❐ When you make two-sided copies from one-sided originals, a right margin of 5
mm (0.2") is automatically set on the back side. You can change this setting
with the user tools. ☛ See pages 142 and 143.
❐ You can change a setting of this mode with the user tools. ☛ See page 150.
COPYING

❐ Single and Multi modes do not support different size originals.

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

61
 eu-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

❐ The following paper limitations apply:

Metric version: Maximum size: A3 ;
Minimum size: A5 :
Weight: 64 ~ 105 g/m 2
Inch version: Maximum size: 11" x 17" ;
Minimum size: 51/2" x 81/2" :
Weight: 17 ~ 24 lb
❐ Maximum number of copies (not in Sort, Rotate Sort, or Staple mode):
Metric version: 50 sheets
30 sheets (A3, 81 ~ 105 g/m 2)
Inch version: 50 sheets
30 sheets (11" x 17", 22 ~ 24 lb)

62
 eu-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

❐ If you select Stapling ([Top]) and Page Numbering ( [P1, P2...] or [1/5, 2/5...])
together when making two-sided copies, it is recommended to set Duplex and
Page Numbering modes as described below to avoid page numbers and staple
position overlap on the reverse side of copies.

1 At first, set the Duplex mode as you want.

2 Touch the [Stamp] key.
3 Touch the [Page Numbering] key and select [P1,P2...] or [1/5,2/5...].
☛ See pages 82 ~ 85.
4 If you select [Top to Top] in step 1, it is recommended that the [Shift
Position] key is selected (dark). If you select [Top to Bottom] in step 1,
it is recommended that the [Shift Position] key is not selected.

[Top to Top]

[Top to Bottom]

COPYING

63
 eu-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

Originals and copies directions when making two-sided

copies from one-sided originals
When making two-sided copies from one-sided originals, you can select the
orientation ([Top to Top], [Top to Bottom]). Referring to the illustration
below, select one of them.
Original setting
Stapling
in the document Copies
position on the exposure glass
feeder

:
direction

[Top to ;
Top] direction

;
direction*

:
direction

[Top to ;
Bottom] direction*

;
direction*

❐ * recommended when your original is larger than B4, 8 1/2" x 14" or larger.

64
 eu-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

Touch the [Duplex/Series Cop-

1 ies] key.

Confirm that the [Duplex] key is

2 dark. If not, touch the [Duplex] key.

When you want to make two-sided copies from

3 one-sided originals
➊ Touch the [1 Sided ➝ 2 Sided]
key.

➋ Select [Even] or [Odd] for the

number of originals.
➌ Select [Top to Top] or [Top to
Bottom] for the orientation re-
ferring to the table on page 64.
➍ Touch the [Exit] key.

➎ Set your originals ( ☛ see pages 30~33) and make your copies.
❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be
on the bottom.
COPYING

❐ If you set one original in the optional document feeder at a time, start with
the last page to be copied. Follow the procedures on pages 32 ~ 33.
❐ If you place originals on the exposure glass, start with the last page to be
copied. After setting your original, press the Enter or Start key following the
instructions on the display.

65
 eu-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

When you make two-sided copies from two-sided

3 originals
➊ Touch the [2 Sided ➝ 2 Sided]
key.

➋ Set your originals ( ☛ see pages 30 ~ 33) and make your copies.
❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be
on the bottom.
❐ If you set one original in the optional document feeder at a time, start with
the last page to be copied. Follow the procedures on pages 32 ~ 33.
❐ If you place originals on the exposure glass, start with the last page to be
copied. After setting your original, press the Enter or Start key following the
instructions on the display.

When you make two-sided copies from book originals

3 (Single, Multi)
➊ Touch the [Single] or [Multi] key.

➋ Touch the [Change Modes]

key and select the copy paper
size, because Auto Paper Se-
lect is canceled.

66
 eu-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

➌ Confirm that the reproduction ratio is appropriate. If not, select the

proper ratio by touching the [Reduce/Enlarge] key referring to the fol-
lowing table.
Book original size Copy paper Ratio
A3 ; A4 : 100%
A4 ; A4 : 141%
11" x 17" ; 81/2" x 11" : 100%
81/2" x 11" ; 81/2" x 11" : 129%
➍ Set your originals. Start with the last page of your book original and
work your way to the beginning.

Place the original face down on

the exposure glass and align
the last page with the left scale.

Or, set the facing original in the

optional document feeder as
shown in the illustration.

❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be
on the bottom.
❐ If you place your original on the exposure glass, or set one original at a time
in the document feeder, start with the last page to be copied.

➎ Make your copies by pressing the Start key.

❐ If you select the [Multi] in step ➊ and set your original on the exposure
glass, repeat steps ➍ and ➎ until all originals are finished. To finish your
COPYING

job, press the Enter key following the instructions on the display.
❐ If you select the [Multi] in step ➊ and set one original at a time in the
document feeder in step ➍, press the Enter key to finish your job following
the instructions on the display.

67
 eu-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

Making One-sided Copies (Series Copies)

You can make one-sided copies from

two facing pages of bound (book)
originals and from two-sided originals.

Note: The optional document feeder is required when you select one-sided
copies from two-sided originals.
❐ When making one-sided copies from book originals, the maximum paper size
(: only) that can be used is as follows:
Metric version: A4 :
Inch version: 81/2" x 11" :
❐ Book ➝ 1 Sided mode does not support different size originals.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Touch the [Duplex/Series Cop-

1 ies] key.

Touch the [Series Copies] key.

2

Select the desired mode by

3 touching a key.

68
 eu-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

If you select the [Book ➝ 1 Sided] key in step 3, touch the [Change
4 Modes] key and select the copy paper size because Auto Paper Select
is canceled. Confirm that the reproduction ratio is appropriate. If not,
select the proper ratio by touching the [Reduce/Enlarge] key. ☛ See
the table on page 67.

Set your originals (☛ see pages 30 ~ 33) and make your copies.
5
❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be on
the bottom. ☛ See the second illustration on page 67.
❐ When you set a book original on the exposure glass, start with the last page to
be copied aligning it with the left scale. ☛ See the top illustration on page 67.

Press the Start key.

6

COPYING

69
 eu-6-2

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY

(Combine)
From 2 One-sided Originals To 1 One-sided Copy

From 4 One-sided Originals

From 8 One-sided Originals To 1 Two-sided Copy

From 16 One-sided Originals To Booklet

70
 eu-6-2

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

❐ If you want to make a booklet from

16 originals, fold copies as shown in
the illustration.
❐ If you want to make a booklet that
reads from right to left, change the
default setting with the user tools.
☛ See page 144.

❐ Even if the number of originals in the

optional document feeder is less than
the number required in the selected
mode, copies can be made as shown
in the illustration. You can change
this setting with the user tools.
☛ See page 150.

❐ If you add a blank sheet to the bot -

tom of the stack of your originals, the
copies can be made as shown in the
illustration.

❐ Auto Stamping, Date Stamping and

Page Numbering will be copied one
per copy paper as shown in the illus-
tration. This doesn’t apply to Booklet
mode.

❐ Auto Stamping, Date Stamping and

COPYING

Page Numbering will be copied one

per original when you make a booklet
from 4 or 16 originals as shown in
the illustration.

71
 eu-6-2

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

❐ When you make a booklet from 4 or 16 originals, the maximum paper size that
can be used is as follows:
Metric version: A4
Inch version: 81/2" x 11"
❐ In this mode, the copier selects the reproduction ratio automatically. This repro -
duction ratio depends on the original and copy paper sizes as follows:
Metric version: original: A4, copy paper: A4
Inch version: original: 8 1/2" x 11", copy paper: 8 1/2" x 11"
❐ Even if the direction of originals is different from that of copy paper, the copier
will automatically rotate the image by 90 o to make copies properly.
❐ The original size is decided when the first original is stored in the memory. So,
you cannot use originals containing different sizes and directions together.
❐ Separation line between originals can be printed using the user tools. ☛ See
page 144.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Touch the [Combine] key.

1

Select one of the desired com-

2 bine modes.
❐ The suitable reproduction ratio is se -
lected automatically.

Touch the [Change Modes] key.

3

72
 eu-6-2

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

Select the same size copy paper

4 as the original.

When setting one original at a time

5
➊ Set the original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder
(☛ see page 30 or 32). Then press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator on the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
➌ Repeat step ➋ until all originals are scanned.
❐ If the number of scanned originals is the required number in the selected
mode, copying will start automatically.

➍ To finish your copying job, press the Enter and Start keys following the
instructions on the display.

When setting a stack of originals in

5 the document feeder
➊ Set a stack of originals ( ☛ see page 30) in the document feeder and
press the Start key.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.
COPYING

73
 eu-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS,

AND MESSAGES (Stamp)
Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your
Copies (Background Numbering)

You can number your copies by print-

ing a number on the background of
the copy. This function can help you
to keep track of confidential docu-
ments.

❐ Background Numbering cannot be ro -

tated. For example, if you select Ro -
tate Sort with the Background Num -
bering, the copies will be as shown in
the illustration.

❐ You can change some settings (size, density) of the numbers with the user
tools. ☛ See page 150.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Touch the [Stamp] key.

1

74
 eu-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Touch the [Background Num-

2 bering] key.

Enter the number you want to

3 print on the first set using the
Number keys.
❐ To change the entered number,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key. Then, enter the new
number.

Touch the [Exit] key.

4
Set your originals (☛ see pages
5 30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies

(Auto Stamping) - English Only

NOTE: If your machine is the metric version, this function cannot be used
as a default setting. If you want to use this function, contact your
sales or service representative.
One of the following seven messages
can be stamped on copies.

URGENT, COPY, PRIORITY

PRELIMINARY, CONFIDENTIAL,
For Your Information,
For Internal Use Only
*A frame is printed around the message.
❐ You can change some settings of Auto Stamping (stamping position, size, den -
COPYING

sity) using the user tools. ☛ See pages 146 ~ 147.

❐ One message can be stamped at a time.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

75
 eu-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Original setting, stamping position and direction

Key on Display
Stamping Position ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈

Direction: Horizontal
Original Setting
COPY COPY COPY

➀ ➁ ➂

COPY COPY COPY

➃ ➄ ➅

: direction COPY COPY COPY

➆ ➇ ➈ ➀ ➁ ➂
COPY COPY COPY
COPY COPY COPY
➃ ➄ ➅

➆ ➇ ➈
COPY COPY COPY
; direction

Direction: Vertical
COPY

COPY

COPY

Original Setting

➀ ➁ ➂
COPY

COPY

COPY

➃ ➄ ➅
➆ ➇ ➈
COPY

COPY

COPY

: direction ➀ ➁ ➂
COPY

COPY

COPY

COPY

COPY

COPY

➃ ➄ ➅
COPY

COPY

COPY

➆ ➇ ➈
; direction

76
 eu-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Touch the [Stamp] key.

1
Touch the [Auto Stamping] key.
2

Select the desired message by

3 touching a key.

If changing the stamping position and direction

4
➊ Touch the [Change] key.

➋ Select the desired position and

direction by touching keys. For
position and direction, refer to
the previous page. Touch the
[Exit] key.
COPYING

77
 eu-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

If stamping on the front page only

4
➊ Touch the [Front Page Only]
key.

➋ Enter the total number of pages

of your originals using the
Number keys.
❐ Example:
If you have 2 two-sided originals,
the number of pages is 4.
❐ When you want to change the en -
tered number, touch the [C] key
or press the Clear/Stop key.
Then, enter the new number.

➌ Touch the [Exit] key.

Touch the [Exit] key. Set your

5 originals (☛ see pages 30 ~ 33)
and press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

78
 eu-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies

(User Stamping)

Up to four messages which you use frequently can be stored in the

machine’s memory. You can make copies with your message stamped.
❐ Before using this function, you have to store your messages using the user
tools. ☛ See page 152.
❐ You can change some settings of User Stamping using the user tools. ☛ See
page 148.
❐ Regarding original setting, stamping position and stamping direction, ☛ see page
76.
❐ One message can be stamped at one time.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Touch the [Stamp] key.

1
Touch the [User Stamping] key.
2

Select the desired number where

3 your message is stored by touch-
ing a key.
❐ Keys with no stored message cannot
be selected. In the illustration, user
stamps 1 and 2 have been stored.
COPYING

79
 eu-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

If changing the stamping position and direction

4
➊ Touch the [Change] key.

➋ Select the desired position and

direction by touching keys. For
position and direction, ☛ see
page 76.
➌ Touch the [Exit] key.

If stamping on the front page only

4
➊ Touch the [Front Page Only]
key.

➋ Enter the number of your origi-

nals using the Number keys.
❐ When you want to change the
number entered, touch the [C]
key or press the Clear/Stop key.
Then, enter the new number.

➌ Touch the [Exit] key.

Touch the [Exit] key.

5
Set your originals (☛ see pages
6 30 ~33 ) and press the Start key.

80
 eu-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Printing Dates And Page Numbers

(Date Stamping, Page Numbering)

Date Stamping

❐ You can change the settings of Date Stamping with the user tools. ☛ See
page 148 ~ 149.
❐ If you select Date Stamping and Page Numbering together, the last stamping
direction selected takes priority.
❐ Regarding copies in Date Stamping and Combine mode, ☛ see page 71.
❐ The size and fonts of Date Stamping cannot be changed.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Original setting, stamping position and direction

Direction: Horizontal Top Left Bottom Right

Direction: Vertical Top Left Bottom Right

COPYING

81
 eu-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Touch the [Stamp] key.

1
Touch the [Date Stamping] key.
2

Select the desired direction and

3 position of Date Stamping using
the keys on the display. Regard-
ing position and direction, ☛ see
previous page.

Touch the [Exit] key.

4

Set your originals (☛ see pages

5 30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

Page Numbering
You can print page numbers on your
copy. There are three types of page
numbering (P1, P2..., 1/5, 2/5..., or
Original
-1-, -2-...)

82
 eu-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

❐ You can change the settings of page numbering with the user tools. ☛ See
pages 144 ~ 145.
❐ If you select Date Stamping and Page Numbering together, the last stamping
direction selected takes priority.
❐ Regarding copies in Page Numbering and Combine mode, ☛ see page 71.
❐ If you select Stapling ([Top]) and Page Numbering ( [P1, P2...] or [1/5, 2/5...])
together when making two-sided copies, page numbers and staple position
might overlap. To avoid this, do the procedure described on page 63.
❐ The size and font of Page Numbering cannot be changed.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Original setting, stamping position and direction

Original setting Horizontal

Vertical

Touch the [Stamp] key.

1
COPYING

Touch the [Page Numbering]

2 key.

83
 eu-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Select the desired format and ori-

3 entation by touching the keys on
display. Then, touch the [Exit]
key.
❐ Regarding the [Shift Position] key,
☛ see page 62.

If you selected [P1, P2...] or [-1-,-2-...] in step 3

4
➊ Enter the total page number of
originals using the Number
keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key, and then enter a
new number.

➋ Touch the [Exit] key.

☛ Go to step 5

If you selected [1/5,2/5...] in step 3

4
➊ Confirm that the [Total pages]
key is dark. If not, touch it. En-
ter the total number of originals
using the Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key, and then enter a
new number.

➋ Touch the [Exit] key.

❐ Regarding [Last page] key, ☛
see page 85.
☛ Go to step 5

84
 eu-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

[Last page] key

In most cases, it is not necessary to input the data for this key. Use this key
for the following conditions:
❐ Example 1: If you want to make an insertion into a completed copy set (in this
case 2/3)

➊ Enter "3" for the [Total pages]

key.
➋ Enter "2" for the [Last page]
key.
➌ Using the original for 2/3 page,
make your copy.

❐ Example 2: If you have 80 originals, and want to make copies using 40 origi -
nals at a time.
First copy set Second copy set
➊ Set 80 ~ 41 pages of originals.
Enter "80" for the [Total pages]
key, and make your copies.
➋ Set 40 ~ 1 pages of originals.
Enter "80" for the [Total pages]
key. Enter "40" for the [Last
page] key, and make your cop-
ies.

When setting one original at a time

5
➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see pages 30 or 32). Then, press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator of the docu-
ment feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original on
the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
➌ Repeat step ➋ until your copying is finished.

When setting a stack of originals in

COPYING

5 the document feeder

➊ Set a stack of originals in the document feeder ( ☛ see page 30), then
press the Start key.
❐ Last page should be on the bottom.

85
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Copying The Image Twice On One Page
(Double Copies)

The one original image is copied

twice on one copy as shown in the
illustration. The separation line is cop-
ied in broken line.

❐ You can change the type of separation line or delete it with the user tools.
☛ See page 143.
❐ Please refer to the following table when you select original and copy paper
sizes with 100% ratio:
Metric version:
Original Copy paper
A5 ; A4 :
B6 ; B5 :

Inch version:
Original Copy paper
51/2" x 81/2" ; 81/2" x 11" :

❐ It is impossible to turn lengthwise ( ;) original images 90° on lengthwise ( ;)

copy paper. In this case, select : copy paper referring to the above table.
❐ A5 ;, B6 ; and 51/2" x 81/2" ; originals cannot be detected properly on the
exposure glass. Make sure to select the copy paper manually or set the origi -
nals in the optional document feeder. This setting can be changed by your
service representative. ☛ See page 153.

86
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Confirm that the [Auto Paper Se-

1 lect] and [Full Size] keys are
dark.

Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2

Touch the [Double Copies] key.

3

Set your originals in the optional

4 document feeder (☛ see page
30).
❐ If your original is A5 ;, B6 ; or
51/2" x 81/2" ; and you do not set
your originals in the document feeder,
select the copy paper manually before
making copies by touching the
[Change Modes] key.

Press the Start key.

5
COPYING

87
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Erasing The Centre And The Border

(Erase Centre/Border)

This function erases the centre and/or

all four sides of the original image,
such as book originals.

❐ The default setting of the erased margin is as follows. You can change this set -
ting using the user tools. ☛ See page 143.
Metric version: 10 mm
Inch version: 0.4"
❐ The position of the margin to be erased is determined according to the original
size and reproduction ratio. If your original is non-standard size, undesired ar -
eas might be erased.

copy ; original copy

: original

❐ If you select copy paper manually, make sure to select the same direction as
that of your original.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

88
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

1
Touch the [Erase Centre/Border]
2 key.

Select keys.
3
Touch [Exit] key.
4

Set your originals (☛ see pages

5 30 ~33) and press the Start key.

Adjusting The Margin (Margin Adjustment)

You can shift the image either left or

right to make a binding margin.

❐ The margin width default is as follows. You can change this setting using the
user tools. ☛ See page 142.
Metric version: 5 mm
COPYING

Inch version: 0.2"

❐ Margin for two-sided copies (orientation: Top to Top):
For copies that read from left to right, set the front left and back right margins.
For copies that read from right to left, set the front right and back left margins.

89
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

❐ When you make two-sided copies from one sided originals, a right margin 5
mm (0.2") is set on the back side automatically as a default setting. You can
change this setting using the user tools. ☛ See page 143.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

1
Touch the [Margin Adjustment]
2 key.

Set the margin width by touching

3 the right or left arrow key.
❐ To clear the width entered, touch the
[Clear] key.

Touch the [Exit] key.

4

Set your original (☛ see pages

5 30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

90
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy

(Image Repeat)

The original image is copied repeat-

edly.

❐ The number of repeated images depends on the original size, copy paper size,
and reproduction ratio. Refer to the following table.
Metric version:
Original size Copy Paper Size Reproduction ratio and number of repeat image
A5 : A4 : 71% ➝ 4 images
A5 ; A4 ; 35% ➝ 16 images
A5 : A4 ; 100% ➝ 2 images
50% ➝ 8 images
A5 ; A4 : 25% ➝ 32 images
Inch version:
Original size Copy Paper Size Reproduction ratio and number of repeat image
51/2" x 81/2 " : 81/2" x 11" : 65% ➝ 4 images
51/2" x 81/2" ; 81/2" x 11" ; 32% ➝ 16 images
51/2" x 81/2" : 81/2" x 11" ; 100% ➝ 2 images
50% ➝ 8 images
51/2" x 81/2" ; 81/2" x 11" : 25% ➝ 32 images

❐ Separate lines between repeated images can be printed using the user tools.
☛ See page 144.
❐ Part of a repeated image might not be copied depending on copy paper size,
copy paper direction, or reproduction ratio.
COPYING

❐ If your original is non-standard size, the copier might not detect the original size
correctly. It is recommended to use originals of standard size.
❐ The copying speed might be slower in this mode.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

91
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

1
Touch the [Image Repeat] key.
2

Touch the [Change Modes] key.

3

Select the copy paper size by

4 touching a key referring to the
table on the previous page.

Select the reproduction ratio by

5 touching the [Reduce/Enlarge]
key referring to the table on the
previous page.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

6 30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

92
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Reversing Black and White (Positive/Negative)

Black and white images of the original

are reversed.

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

1
Touch the [Positive/Negative]
2 key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

3 30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

COPYING

93
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Merging Images (Overlay/Merge)

Making 1 image from 2 (Overlay)

Two different originals can be merged
onto the same copy paper.

Merging a template into several copies (Copy Merge)

The image of the original which is
copied first will be a background image
(master) on all copies. Then, the re-
maining originals which follow the first
one will be copied with the background.

❐ The copying speed might be slower in this mode.

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

1
Touch the [Overlay/Merge] key.
2

94
 eu-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Select the [Overlay] o r [Copy

3 Merge] key.

Touch the [Exit] key.

4

When setting one original at a time

5
➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see page 30 or 32). Then, press the Start key.
❐ When you select the [Copy Merge] in step 3, the original for the template
(master) should be read first.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator of the docu-
ment feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original on
the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
➌ Repeat step ➋ until your copying is finished.
❐ To clear the template (master), or finish your copying, press the Enter key.

When setting a stack of originals in the

5 document feeder
➊ Set a stack of originals ( ☛ see page 30) in the document feeder and
press the Start key.
❐ When you select the [Copy Merge] in step 3, the original for the template
(master) should be on the bottom.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.
❐ To clear the template (master) or finish your copying, press the Enter key.
COPYING

95
 eu-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

OPTIONAL FINISHING
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort)

Copies can be assembled as sets in

sequential order by sliding the shift
tray from side to side.

Note: This function can be used only when your machine is equipped with
the optional finisher.

Notes for Sort mode

❐ You can make up to 999 copy sets at a time. However, when the number of
copies exceeds the capacity of the shift tray, remove copies from the copy tray.
Regarding the capacity of finisher, ☛ see the table on page 97.
❐ Different size originals can be used only when you make one-sided copies from
one-sided originals.
❐ After starting copying, the only setting you may change is image density, The
change will apply from the next copy. ☛ See page 37.
❐ The maximum number of pages that can be stored is as follows:
A4, 81/2" x 11": Approximately 100 pages (images)
❐ You can change settings of this mode using the user tools. ☛ See page 151.
❐ When you make two-sided copies, the maximum number of copies stacked in
the duplex unit at a time is limited. For details, ☛ see page 45.

96
 eu-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

❐ For this finisher, the following limitations apply:

Metric version
Paper size Paper weight Maximum capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum A4 or smaller: 1,500 sheets
A3 A5 157 g/m2 52 g/m2 B4 or larger: 1,000 sheets

Inch version
Paper size Paper weight Maximum capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum 81/2" x 11" or smaller: 1,500 sheets
11" x 17" 51/2" x 81/2" 42 lb 14 lb 81/2" x 14" or larger: 1,000 sheets

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

To select Sort mode, touch the

1 [Sort] key.

Enter the number of copies re-

2 quired using the Number keys.
COPYING

97
 eu-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

When setting one original at a time

3
➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see pages 30 or 32). Then press the Start key. The copier
starts memorizing the original image.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green, or the Auto Feed indicator of the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original in the same direction as step ➊.
❐ When the memory capacity reaches 0%, the copier stops memorizing.
Press the Start key to finish copy jobs which are already in memory. After
that, follow the instructions on the display.

➌ Repeat step ➋ until all originals are scanned.

➍ After all originals are put into memory, press the Enter key.
➎ Press the Start key.
❐ If you want to stop storing images or to delete stored images, ☛ see page
47.
❐ If you make one-sided copies, the first set of copies has been completed
when all originals are stored in memory.

98
 eu-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

When setting a stack of originals in the

3 document feeder
➊ Set a stack of the originals in the document feeder ( ☛ see page 32),
then press the Start key.
❐ Last page should be on the bottom.
❐ When memory runs out during copying, the machine can be programmed to
behave in two ways with the user tools.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [Yes]

→ After all images in memory are copied, the machine will re-start
scanning automatically.
You should re-order your copies after all copy jobs are finished.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [No]

→ The machine will wait for you to press the Start key. At this point you
should remove your copies from the copy tray. Press the Start key
and then follow the instructions on the display to continue copying.

If you want to change the user tools setting, ☛ see page 151.
❐ If you want to stop storing images or to delete stored images, ☛ see page
47.

COPYING

99
 eu-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stapling (Staple)

Note: This function can be used only when your machine is equipped with
the optional finisher.
❐ For this mode, the following limitations apply:
Metric version:
Paper size Paper weight Stapler capacity Shift tray capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum A4 or smaller:
A4: 1,500 sheets
from 2 to 50 sheets
(30 sets of 50 sheets)
A3 B5 80 g/m2 64 g/m2 B4 or larger: A3: 1,000 sheets
from 2 to 30 sheets
Inch version
Paper size Paper weight Stapler capacity Shift tray capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum 81/2"x11" or smaller:
81/2"x11": 1,500 sheets
from 2 to 50 sheets
(30 sets of 50 sheets)
11" x 17" 81/2" x 11" 21 lb 17 lb 81/2"x14" or larger: 11"x17": 1,000 sheets
from 2 to 30 sheets

❐ Post cards, tracing paper, OHP sheets, and adhesive labels, and paper that is
curled or has low stiffness cannot be used.
❐ If the number of copies is over the stapler capacity, the copies will be delivered
to the shift tray without stapling.
❐ If memory reaches 0% during copying, the copies will be delivered to the shift
tray without stapling.
❐ If "d Add Staples" is displayed during copying, copies might be delivered to
the shift tray without stapling.
❐ Copy paper with different sizes and directions cannot be stapled.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

100
 eu-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stapling Position And Original Setting

Single staple in the top left corner in Auto Paper Select

If you select Stapling with the Auto Paper Select and there is no paper that
matches the direction of originals, the copier automatically rotates the copy
image. As a result, you can get copies stapled in the left upper corner.
❐ The maximum original image size that can be rotated is as follows:
Metric version: A4
Inch version: 81/2" x 11"
❐ The copy image cannot be rotated if you select [2 Staples].
If your original is A4, 81/2" x 11", set originals and select the [Top] key to
get copies stapled at the left upper corner.
Stapling
Original Original setting Stapled copies
position
on the exposure glass When the image is not rotated.

: direction in the document feeder When the image is rotated.

[Top]
on the exposure glass When the image is not rotated.

; direction in the document feeder When the image is rotated.

COPYING

101
 eu-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

❐ If your original is larger than A4, 8 1/2" x 11", (ex. or 11" x 17"), the original
image cannot be rotated. In this case, set original and select the [Top] or [Bot -
tom] keys as shown to get copies stapled at the left upper corner.

Stapling
Original setting Stapled copies
position
on the exposure glass

If your
original is
[Bottom] portrait in the document feeder
direction.

on the exposure glass

If your
original is
[Top]
landscape in the document feeder
direction.

102
 eu-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stapling positions when there is copy paper that is identical

in size and direction as your original
Stapling Original setting
Copies
position on the exposure glass in the document feeder

:
direction

[Top]

;
direction

:
direction

[Bottom]

;
direction*

:
direction

[2 Staples]

;
direction*
COPYING

❐ * recommend when your original is larger than B4, 8 1/2" x 14" or larger.

103
 eu-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

When Setting One Original At A Time

Select one of three stapling by

1 touching a key.

Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document

2 feeder. (☛ See pages 30 or 32.) Then, press the Start key. The copier
starts memorizing the original images.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

When the Start key turns green, or the Auto Feed indicator of the
3 document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step 2, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original at the same direction in step 2.

Repeat step 3 until all originals are scanned.

4
After all originals are put into memory, press the Enter key.
5
Follow the instructions on the display. In some cases, you must press
6 the Start key.

When Setting A Stack Of Originals In The

Document Feeder

Select one of three stapling by touching a key.

1
Set a stack of originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 30) , then
2 press the Start key.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.

104
 eu-6-5

COMBINATION CHART

COMBINATION CHART
The combination chart on pages 106 and 107 shows which modes can be
used together. When you read the chart, please refer to the following tables.

BLANK CELL means that these modes can be used together.

➙ means that the mode after you select will be the mode you’re working in.
✗ means that these modes cannot be used together.

A Setting originals
B Finishing
C Selecting copy paper
D Image Rotation
E [Duplex]
F [Series Copies]
G [Combine]
H [Overlay/Merge]
I [Reduce/Enlarge]
J [Adjust Image]
K Adjusting image density
L Selecting original setting
M [Stamp]

COPYING

105
 eu-6-5

COMBINATION CHART

Mode after you select A B C D

Mode before you select 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 Setting original on the exposure glass ➙ ➙
A 2 Setting an original in the DF (SADF) ➙ ➙
3 Setting a stack of originals in the DF (ADF) ➙ ✗
4 Sort ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗
5 Rotate Sort ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗
B 6 Rotate Stack ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗
7 Sort with optional finisher ➙ ✗ ✗
8 Staple with optional finisher ➙ ✗ ✗
9 Using the bypass tray (standard size) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗
✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗
C 10 Using the bypass tray (non-standard size)
11 Selecting paper size manually ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙
12 Auto Paper Select ➙ ➙ ➙
13 Image Rotation in Auto Paper Select ➙ ➙ ➙
D
14 Image Rotation in Duplex ✗ ✗
15 one-sided → two-sided ✗ ✗
E 16 two-sided → two-sided ✗ ✗ ➙
17 Single (from book original) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙
18 Multi (from book original) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙
19 two-sided → one-sided ➙
F
20 Book → one-sided ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙
21 2 one-sided → 1 one-sided (2 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
22 4 one-sided → 1 one-sided (4 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
G 23 4 one-sided → 1 two-sided (4 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
24 8 one-sided → 1 two-sided (8 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
25 4 one-sided → booklet (4 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
26 16 one-sided → booklet (16 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
H 27 Overlay/Merge ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
28 Reducing/Enlarging
I
29 Auto Reduce/Enlarge ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙
30 Double Copies ✗ ✗ ✗
31 Image Repeat ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
32 Erase Centre
J 33 Erase Border
34 Margin Adjustment for front side ✗ ✗
35 Margin Adjustment for back side ✗ ✗
36 Positive/Negative
37 Erase Background
K 38 Auto Image Density
39 Manual Image Density
40 Letter mode
L 41 Letter/Photo mode
42 Photo mode
43 Generation Copy mode
44 Auto Stamping ✗ ✗
45 User Stamping ✗ ✗
M 46 Date Stamping ✗ ✗
47 Page Numbering ✗ ✗
48 Background Numbering
49 Interrupt Copying ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗

106
 eu-6-5

COMBINATION CHART

E F G H I J K L M
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1
A 2
3
4 ✗ ✗
5 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
B 6 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
7 ✗ ✗
8 ✗ ✗
9 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
10 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
C
11
12 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙
13 ➙ ✗
D
14 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
15 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
16 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
E
17 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
18 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
19 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
F
20 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
21 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
22 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
G 23 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
24 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
25 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
26 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
H 27 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
28 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙
I
29 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙
30 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
31 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
32
J 33
34
35
36
37 ➙
K 38 ➙
39 ➙
40 ➙ ➙ ➙
41 ➙ ➙ ➙
L
42 ➙ ➙ ➙
43 ➙ ➙ ➙
COPYING

44
45
M 46
47
48
49 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗

107
 eu-6-5

COMBINATION CHART

108
 eu-7

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
WHAT TO DO IF

GOES WRONG
SOMETHING GOES
WRONG
IF YOUR COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE AS YOU WANT......................................................... 110

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES ............................................................................... 112

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT .................................................................. 113

LOADING PAPER..................................................................................................................... 117

Non-recommended Paper ................................................................................................................. 117
Notes For Paper .................................................................................................................................... 117
Loading Paper In The Paper Tray....................................................................................................... 118
Loading Paper In The Large Capacity Tray...................................................................................... 119

ADDING TONER ...................................................................................................................... 120

ADDING STAPLES .................................................................................................................... 121

CLEARING MISFEEDS .............................................................................................................. 122

Check The Display................................................................................................................................ 122
When Misfeeds Occur In A, B, C, Y, Or Z Section ............................................................................ 123
When Misfeed Occurs At The Large Capacity Tray........................................................................ 123
When Misfeed Occurs In P Section.................................................................................................... 124
When Misfeeds Occur In R Section ................................................................................................... 124

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES .............................................................................................. 125

109
 eu-7

IF YOUR COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE AS YOU WANT

IF YOUR COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE AS

YOU WANT
Copier’s Condition Action
Check the power cord. Is it properly plugged into the
Nothing happens when the main switch outlet?
is turned on.
➠ Plug it in firmly.
The indicator of the Clear Modes/Low The copier is in Low Power mode.
Power Mode key is lit, and the display ➠ Press the Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key.
is off.
and messages are displayed. Follow the instructions on the display.
Paper runs out. Load paper. ☛ See page 117.
f is displayed. Add toner. ☛ See page 120.
i is displayed. Add staples. ☛ See page 121.
Y is displayed. Remove misfed paper. ☛ See page 122.
Z is displayed.
k is displayed. Close the indicated doors or covers.
Set the fusing unit correctly. For position of the fusing
is displayed.
unit, ☛ see page 4.
e is displayed. Remove the jammed staples. ☛ See page 125.
Turn the main switch off, wait a few seconds, and then
L is displayed. turn it on. If L appears again, call your service
representative.
E is displayed. Used toner bottle is full. Call your service representative.

110
 eu-7

IF YOUR COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE AS YOU WANT

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
Copier’s Condition Action
After loading a new staple cartridge, staples might not
be ejected the first few times you try to use the stapler.

GOES WRONG
➠ Try again.
Staples do not come out at all. A few sheets might not be stapled. To correct this, try
turning over the paper stack in the tray unit. If there is
no improvement, change to copy paper with less curl.
There are jammed staples in the stapler.
➠ Remove jammed staples. ☛ See page 125.
Is the right kind of paper in the paper tray?
➠ Paper size and weight must be within the
specification for this copier.
Is folded, wrinkled, damp, or curled paper in the paper
tray?
➠ Always use dry, undamaged paper.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Is the paper properly set in the paper tray?
➠ Always load paper correctly.
Are there any pieces of misfed paper or other foreign
objects in the machine?
➠ Make sure that the paper path is completely clear of
paper and other material after a misfeed.
Copy paper size setting is not correct.
➠ Set the proper paper size using the user tools.
☛ See page 138.
❐ If you cannot correct the problem by taking the above actions, please contact
your service representative.

111
 eu-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES

Problem Cause Action
Adjust the image density.
The image density is too dark.
☛ See page 37.
Confirm that the [Erase
Erase Background is not
Copies appear dirty. Background] key is dark. If not,
selected.
touch it.
The platen cover, exposure
glass, or document feeder belt is Clean them. ☛ See page 156.
dirty.
Adjust the image density.
The image density is too dark.
☛ See page 37.
The reverse side of an
original image is copied. Confirm that the [Erase
Erase Background is not
Background] key is dark. If not,
selected.
touch it.
The original has a low contrast
image. Adjust the image density.
☛ See page 37.
Copies are too light. The image density is too light.
Damp or rough grain paper is Use dry paper without rough
used. grain.
Toner bottle is almost empty. Add toner. ☛ See page 120.
The same copy area is The platen cover, exposure
dirty whenever making glass, or document feeder belt is Clean them. ☛ See page 156.
copies. dirty.
Set originals correctly.
The original is not set correctly.
Parts of the image are not ☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.
copied. An improper paper size is
Select the proper paper size.
selected.
Set originals correctly.
Copies are blank. The original is not set correctly.
☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.
A moire pattern is
produced on copies as
shown in the illustration.
Your original has dot pattern Place the original on the
image or many lines. exposure glass at a slight angle.

❐ If you cannot correct the problem by taking the above actions, please contact
your service representative.

112
 eu-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU
WANT

GOES WRONG
Finishing
Problem Cause Action
After loading a new staple cartridge, staples might not be ejected the
first few times you try to use the stapler.
A few sheets might not be stapled. To correct this, try turning over
the paper stack in the tray unit. If there is no improvement, change to
Copies are not stapled. copy paper with less curl.
There are jammed staples in the Remove jammed staples. ☛ See
stapler. page 125.
The number of copies exceeds Check the stapler capacity.
the capacity of the stapler. ☛ See page 100.
Staples are wrongly Set originals correctly.
Originals are not set correctly.
positioned. ☛ See pages 101 ~ 103.

Adjust Image
Problem Cause Action
In Double Copies mode, Select the proper original and
Combination of original and copy
parts of the original image copy paper.
paper is not correct.
are not copied. ☛ See the table on page 86.
In Centre/Border mode, You set the wide erased margin. Set the narrower margin using
parts of the original image Your original has narrow margins the user tools.
are not copied. on four sides. ☛ See page 143.

113
 eu-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

Adjust Image (continued)

Problem Cause Action
In Margin Adjustment Set the narrower margin using
mode, parts of the original You set the wide margin. the user tools.
image are not copied. ☛ See page 142.
Select copy paper larger than
You selected the same size copy originals.
In Image Repeat mode, the ☛ See page 91.
paper as originals, and did not
original image is not copied
select the proper reproduction Select the proper reproduction
repeatedly.
ratio. ratio.
☛ See page 91.

Stamp
Problem Cause Action
Auto Stamping does not Set originals correctly.
The original is not set correctly.
appear on copies. ☛ See page 76.
Change the density of Auto
Original image and Auto You selected the solid density. Stamping using the user tools.
Stamping overlap on ☛ See page 146.
copies and original image
cannot be read. Your original has narrow margins Change the stamping position.
on four sides. ☛ See page 76.
Register User Stamping again
User Stamping is not registered
using the user tools.
correctly.
☛ See page 152.
User Stamping does not Register User Stamping again
appear on copies. The low density image is with the high density original
registered. using the user tools.
☛ See page 152.
Set originals correctly.
The original is not set correctly.
☛ See page 76.

114
 eu-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
Stamp (continued)
Problem Cause Action

GOES WRONG
Date Stamping does not
appear in the desired The stamping position decided
direction. You have selected Date
afterwards takes priority. Select
Stamping and Page Numbering
Page Numbering does not the same directions for both
together.
appear in the desired modes.
direction.
Set originals as follows:

Background Numbering cannot

Directions of Background
be rotated. If you set originals
Numbering and original
incorrectly, the Background
images on copies do not
Numbering does not appear
match.
copies in correct direction.

Date Stamping does not Set originals correctly.

The original is not set correctly.
appear on copies. ☛ See page 81.

Duplex
Problem Cause Action
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder, the last
Order of copies is not You set originals in the incorrect page should be on the bottom.
correct. order. If you set a original on the
exposure glass, start with the
last page to be copied.
Orientation of copies (Top You set originals in an incorrect Select the correct orientation, or
to Top, or Top to Bottom) direction or the orientation setting set originals correctly.
is not correct. is incorrect. ☛ See page 64.

115
 eu-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

Combine
Problem Cause Action
You cannot make a booklet Change setting using the user
Combine Original Booklet Format
from 16 originals by folding tools.
is not correct.
copies. ☛ See page 144.
The maximum original size that
Your original is larger than A4 or
can be used is A4, 81/2" x 11".
81/2" x 11".
Use the correct original.
Copy paper must be the same
Parts of the image are not size as your original. Select the
copied. You selected a different size correct paper size.
copy paper from your originals.
Select the correct reproduction
ratio before using Combine mode.
Your originals are not identical in Use originals that are identical in
size and direction. size and direction.
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder, the last
Order of copies is not You set originals in the incorrect page should be on the bottom.
correct. order. If you set an original on the
exposure glass, start with the
last page to be copied.

116
 eu-7

LOADING PAPER

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
LOADING PAPER

GOES WRONG
❐ Regarding paper sizes that can be set, see the following pages:
1st tray ☛ See page 128, 130, and 131.
optional tray unit ☛ See page 133.
large capacity tray ☛ See page 153.
❐ If you want to change the paper size, see the following pages:
1st tray ☛ See page 128, 130, and 131.
optional tray unit ☛ See page 133.
large capacity tray ☛ See page 153.

Non-recommended Paper
❐ Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper
❐ Torn paper
❐ Perforated paper
❐ Paper with conductive or low electrical resistance coating such as carbon or
silver coating
❐ Thermal paper, art paper
❐ Thin paper that has low stiffness

Notes For Paper

❐ Load paper with the copy side down in the 500-sheet trays, and with the copy
side up in the large capacity tray. If copies are curled, try turning the copy
paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy paper with
less curl.
❐ Do not use copy paper that has been already copied on.
❐ The following types of paper cannot be fed from the paper tray. Load them in
the bypass tray. ☛ See page 50.
• OHP transparencies • adhesive labels • translucent paper
• post card
❐ Correct curls in copy paper before loading.
❐ Fan copy paper to get air between the sheets before loading.

117
 eu-7

LOADING PAPER

Loading Paper In The Paper Tray

Pull out the paper tray until it

1 stops.

Load paper in the paper tray. Do

2 not stack paper above the limit
mark inside the paper tray.

Push the tray in until it stops.

3

118
 eu-7

LOADING PAPER

Loading Paper In The Large Capacity Tray

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
GOES WRONG
If the Down key is not lit, press it
1 to lower the bottom plate. The
key will blink while the bottom
plate is moving down.
❐ If the key is lit or blinking, proceed to
step 2.

After the Down key stops blinking

2 and lights, open the cover.

Load paper into the tray (not

3 more than 1,000 sheets). The pa-
per stack must be flush with the
left side.

Close the cover.

4

119
 eu-7

ADDING TONER

ADDING TONER
When " f Add Toner" is displayed on the display, it is time to supply toner.
RWARNING: Do not incinerate the used toner bottle. Toner bottle
might ignite when exposed to open flame.

RWARNING: Dispose of the used toner bottle according to your local

regulations.
NOTE: When adding toner, do not turn off the main switch. If you do, your
copy settings are cleared.
NOTE: Before setting the new toner bottle, shake it well at least 5 or 6
times.
NOTE: Do not remove the toner cap of the new toner bottle.

Open the front cover of the cop-

1 ier.

You can find the sticker (with f

2 at the top) explaining how to add
toner, inside the front cover as
shown in the illustration.

Load the new toner bottle follow-

3 ing the instructions on the sticker.

120
 eu-7

ADDING STAPLES

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
ADDING STAPLES

GOES WRONG
When " i Add Staples" is displayed, add staples as follows:
❐ Do not remove the tape before set -
ting the new staple refill in the car - cartridge
tridge. If you do, the staples fall into
pieces.

refill tape

Open the front door of the fin-

1 isher.

You can find a sticker (with i at

2 the top) explaining how to add a
staple cartridge, inside the front
door as shown in the illustration.

Add the new staple cartridge fol-

3 lowing the instructions on the
sticker.

121
 eu-7

CLEARING MISFEEDS

CLEARING MISFEEDS
Since some parts of the copier are supplied with
nxWARNING: high electrical voltage, touch only the parts specified
in the instructions on the sticker inside the ma-
chine’s cover.
When removing misfed paper from sections B and C,
nxWARNING:
use cautions. The fusing unit may be very hot. See
page 4 for the position of the fusing unit.

RCAUTION: Do not leave any torn scraps within the machine.

NOTE: When clearing misfeeds, make sure that all units and levers are
returned to their original positions and all covers are closed.
NOTE: Do not touch originals in the optional document feeder when a pa-
per misfeed occurs in the copier. If you do, the copier cannot know
which originals have been copied, and which should be copied.

Check The Display

The display shows the location of mis-

fed paper. Remove them following in-
structions.
❐ P is indicated only when your ma -
chine is equipped with the optional
document feeder.
❐ R1 and R2 are indicated only when
your machine is equipped with the
optional finisher.

122
 eu-7

CLEARING MISFEEDS

When Misfeeds Occur In A, B, C, Y, Or Z Section

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
GOES WRONG
Open the front cover of the cop-
1 ier.

2 You can find a sticker (with Y at

the top) explaining how to re-
move misfed paper, inside the
front cover as shown in the illus-
tration.

Remove misfed paper following

3 the instructions on the sticker.

When Misfeed Occurs At The Large Capacity Tray

Swing out the tray grasping the

1 tray handle, and remove any mis-
fed paper.

Return the tray to its original po-

2 sition.

123
 eu-7

CLEARING MISFEEDS

When Misfeed Occurs In P Section

You can find a sticker, explaining

1 how to remove the misfed paper,
on the optional document feeder
as shown in the illustration.

Remove the misfed original refer-

2 ring to the sticker.

When Misfeeds Occur In R Section

Open the front door of the op-

1 tional finisher.

2 You can find a sticker (with Y at

the top) explaining how to re-
move misfed paper, inside the
front door as shown in the illus-
tration.

Remove misfed paper following

3 the instructions on the sticker.

124
 eu-7

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

WHAT TO DO IF SOMETHING
REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

GOES WRONG
When "e Check Staple Unit" is displayed, staples are jammed in the
optional finisher. Remove jammed staples as follows:

Since some parts of the finisher are supplied with

nxWARNING:
high electrical voltage, touch only the parts specified
in the instructions on the sticker inside the finisher’s
cover.
❐ After loading a new staple cartridge, staples might not be ejected the first few
times you try to use the stapler.

Open the front door of the op-

1 tional finisher.

You can find a sticker (with e at

2 the top) explaining how to re-
move jammed staples, inside the
front door as shown in the illus-
tration.

Remove jammed staples follow-

3 ing the instructions on the sticker.

125
 eu-7

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

126
 eu-8

CHANGING THE
COPIER’S SETTINGS
CHANGING PAPER SIZE ......................................................................................................... 128
Changing Paper Size In The 1st Tray.................................................................................................. 128
Changing The Paper Size In The Optional Tray Unit (Trays 2, 3, and 4) ........................................ 133

USER TOOLS ............................................................................................................................ 134

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

User Tools Menu .................................................................................................................................... 134
How To Change The Basic Settings And Copy Features ................................................................ 136
Basic Settings......................................................................................................................................... 137

SETTINGS
Copy Features....................................................................................................................................... 141
How To Register User Stamp ............................................................................................................... 152

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS...................................................................................... 153

127
 eu-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

Changing Paper Size In The 1st Tray

Standard size paper

❐ You can select paper of the following sizes:

Metric version Inch version

A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;, B5 : ;, A5 : 11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
81/2" x 11" : ; 51/2" x 81/2" :, A3 ;, A4 : ;, A5 :

Pull the paper tray out until it

1 stops.

Remove the copy paper.

2

Remove the left guide as shown

3 in the illustration.

128
 eu-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

Set the left guide to the paper

4 size you want to use as shown in
the illustration.

Load paper in the tray.

5
❐ Do not stack paper over the limit

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

mark.

SETTINGS
While pressing the release lever
6 on the front guide, slide the front
and rear guides to the paper size
you want to use.

Select the paper size by adjusting

7 the paper size selector on the
back side of the tray.

Push the paper tray in until it

8 stops.

129
 eu-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

F/F4 size paper (8" x 13", 81/4" x 13", or 81/2" x 13)

Follow steps 1 to 6 on pages

1 128 and 129.

Select "F/F4" by adjusting the pa-

2 per size selector on the back side
of the tray.

3 Press the User Tools key.

Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

4

Touch the [Next] key three times to reach the paper size setting menu.
5
In the "Tray 1 <F/F4> Paper Size Setting" menu, the present size
6 setting is displayed. Touch the [Change] key. Select the new paper
size by touching a key. Then, touch the [Exit] key.

Press the User Tools key, then push the paper tray in until it stops.
7

130
 eu-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

Special size paper

❐ You can select paper of the following sizes:

Metric version Inch version

11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 51/2" x 81/2" :, 11" x 15" ;, 10" x 14" ;, 8" x 101/2" ;,
8" x 10" ; 8" x 10" ;, B4 ;

Follow steps 1 to 6 on pages

1 128 and 129.

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

Select * by adjusting the paper
2 size selector on the back side of

SETTINGS
the tray.

Press the User Tools key.

3

Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

4

131
 eu-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

Touch the [Next] key three times to reach the paper size setting menu.
5
In the "Tray 1 <*> Paper Size Setting" menu, the present size setting is
6 displayed. Touch the [Change] key. Select the new paper size by
touching a key. Then, touch the [Exit] key.

*
❐ " " (asterisk) is displayed on the key for paper sizes that cannot be detected in
some modes (ex. Auto Paper Select).

Press the User Tools key, then push the paper tray in until it stops.
7

132
 eu-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

Changing The Paper Size In The Optional Tray Unit

(Trays 2, 3, and 4)
❐ You can select paper of the following sizes:

Metric version Inch version

11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;, B5 : ;
11" x 15" ;, 10" x 14" ;, 8" x 101/2" ;,
11" x 17" ; , 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
8" x 10" ;, A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;,
8" x 10" ;, 8" x 13" ;, 81/2" x 13" ;,
8" x 13" ;, 81/2" x 13" ;,
81/4" x 13" ;
81/4" x 13" ;

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

Follow steps 1 to 6 on pages
1

SETTINGS
128 and 129.

Press the User Tools key.

2

Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

3

Touch the [Next] key three times to reach the paper size setting menu.
4
Find the paper tray (2, 3, or 4) and touch the [Change] key. Select the
5 new paper size by touching a key. Then, touch the [Exit] key.

Press the User Tools key, then push the paper tray in until it stops.
6

133
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

USER TOOLS
This section is for the key operators in charge of this copier. You can
change or set the copier’s default settings using the following user tools.

User Tools Menu

Menu ☛ See
Auto Response (Human) Sensor
Operation panel beeper
Copy count display page 137
Set date
Set time
Auto Reset
Basic Settings

page 137
Low Power Timer
Paper Type Display (for each tray) page 138
Tray 1 <*> Paper Size Setting
Tray 1 <F/F4>Paper Size Setting page 138
Paper Size Setting (for tray 2, 3, and 4 (option))
Paper Tray Priority
Original: <F/F4> Size Setting page 139
ADF: Thin Paper Mode
Auto Tray Switching
Set User Code(s) page 140

Menu ☛ See
Copy Auto Paper Select Priority
Modes Auto Image Density Priority
Copy Features

Original Mode Priority page 141

Full Main Menu Display
Duplex Mode Priority
User Reproduction Ratio 1, 2
Maximum copy quantity page 142
Original beeper

134
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

Menu ☛ See
Adjust Margin Adjust Front
page 142
Image Margin Adjust Back
Erase Border
Erase Centre page 143
1 → 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust
Double Copies Separation Line page 143
Combine Originals Booklet Format
page 144
Image Repeat/Combine Separation Line

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

Stamp Page Numbering Format page 144
P1,P2 1/5,2/5... Format Position
page 145
-1-,-2- Format Position

SETTINGS
Copy Features (continued)

Auto Stamping
Size page 146
Stamp Layout Density
Position page 147
User Stamp
Size
User Stamp Layout Density page 148
Position
Number of Stamps Per Page
Date Format
Orientation
Date Position/Format Position
Position Top Left page 149
Position Bottom Right
Background Numbering Size
page 150
Background Numbering Density
Input/ Duplex Remaining Copy Exit
page 150
Output Combine Remaining Copy Exit
SADF Auto Reset Time
Mixed Original Sizes page 151
Auto Sort Mode
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart
page 151
Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue

135
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

How To Change The Basic Settings And Copy Features

Confirm that the copier is in the in-

1 itial condition. If not, press the Clear
Modes/Low Power Mode key.

Press the User Tools key.

2

Touch the [Basic Settings] or

3 [Copy Features] key.

Select the desired settings following the instruction on the display.

4
❐ [▼Next] : Use to go to the next page.
[▲Prev.] : Use to go back to the previous page.
[Exit] : Touch this key after entering the new data.
In the "User Tools Main Menu", touch to exit the User Tools condition.
[Cancel] : Touch to return to the previous menu without changing any data.
[Menu] : Use to go back to the previous menu.

To return to the initial condition, press the User Tools key.

5

136
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

Basic Settings

MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Response When the auto response sensor does not detect anyone
(Human) Sensor operating it, the copier will be in the some Reset modes (Auto
Reset, Low Power mode, Auto Off, or SADF Auto Reset) after
the selected time in each menu. You can cancel this setting.
❐ Default: Yes (On)
Operation panel The beeper (key tone) can be turned on or off.
beeper ❐ Default: On

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

Copy count display The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies
made (count up) or the number of copies remaining to be made
(count down).

SETTINGS
❐ Default: Up (count up)
Set date Use to set the date and copier’s internal clock. Set the date and
Set time clock following the touch panel display instructions.
❐ Date of the Date Stamping mode depends on these.
❐ If necessary, remember to adjust the clock for daylight saving time
(summer time), or return it to the standard time.
[▼ Next]
Auto Reset The copier returns to its initial condition automatically after your
job is finished. The automatic reset time can be set from 10
seconds to 180 seconds in 10 seconds steps or no auto reset
(0 second).
❐ Default: 30 seconds
Low Power Timer The copier will automatically enter a Low Power condition after
the selected time after the last copying job has been completed.
This time can be set from 10 to 180 seconds in 10 seconds
steps, or the function can be turned off (0 second).
❐ Default: 60 seconds
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]

137
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Basic Settings)
MENU DESCRIPTION
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]
Paper Type Display When recycled paper or special paper is in the paper trays,
paper type can be indicated on the touch panel display.
❐ Default: No display
❐ You cannot select both of recycled paper and special paper for one
tray.
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]
Tray 1 <*> Paper Size If you want to use special paper size, you can set the paper
Setting size for tray 1.
❐ Default: Metric version: 11" x 17"
Inch version: 10" x 14"
❐ Regarding procedures and paper sizes that can be selected,
☛ see page 131.
❐ Make sure to select * by adjusting the paper size selector on the
back side of the tray.
❐ * (asterisk) is displayed on the keys of paper sizes that cannot be
used in the Auto Paper Select.
Tray 1 <F/F4> Paper If you want to use 81/2" x 13, 8" x 13", or 81/4" x 13" paper for
Size Setting the 1st tray, use this user tool.
❐ Default: 81/2" x 13
❐ Regarding procedures, ☛ see page 130.
❐ Make sure to select F/F4 by adjusting the paper size selector on the
back side of the tray.
Paper Size Setting Use to change the paper sizes in the optional tray unit.
Tray 2, 3, and 4 ❐ Default: Metric version: A4 :
(option) Inch version: 81/2" x 11" :
❐ Make sure to change the paper size setting, when changing the
paper size in the tray. If not, misfeed might occur.
❐ Make sure to select the paper size when installing the optional tray
unit.
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]

138
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Basic Settings)
MENU DESCRIPTION
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]
Paper Tray Priority You can choose the tray which will be active under the
following conditions:
♦ when the main switch is turned on.
♦ after the Auto Reset or Low Power mode
♦ after pressing the Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key
❐ Default: Tray T (1000-sheet large capacity tray)
Original: <F/F4> Size You can select one of the following original sizes to be detected
Setting in the Auto Paper Select and Auto Reduce/Enlarge modes as F

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

size.
81/2" x 13, 81/4" x 13", or 8" x 13"
❐ Default: 81/2" x 13"

SETTINGS
ADF: Thin Paper Mode Use when changing the type of originals to be fed into the
optional document feeder. Select this setting when you use thin
originals (40 ~ 52 g/m2 or 11 ~ 14 lb).
❐ Default: Normal (Not Thin)
Auto Tray Switching If you load paper of the same size and in the same direction in
two or more trays, the copier automatically shifts to another tray
when the tray in use runs out of paper. You can cancel this
setting.
❐ Default: Yes
❐ Trays for special paper and recycled paper can be used only when
the Special Paper Size setting is the same.

139
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Basic Settings)
MENU DESCRIPTION

Set User Code(s)

If the copier is set to use the User Code function, operators must input their user codes
before the machine can operate. The copier keeps count of the number of copies made
under each user code. To have the machine set to the User Code mode, please use the
user tool "Set User Code Mode" and after that contact your sales/service representative.

Check/Reset/Print You can check the number of copies made under each user
Copy Counter code.
You can clear each code’s counter, or clear all codes’ counters.
You can print the counter data for all user codes.

User Code
Use to register, change, delete one user code, or delete all user
Register/Change/Delete
codes.
❐ Up to 20 user codes (6 digits) can be registered.
❐ When changing user codes, the number of copies made under the
old code is added to that made under the new user code.
❐ When deleting user codes, the number of copies made under the
deleted code is deleted.
❐ Registered codes will be sorted in numerical order.

Assign/Activate If you select [Yes], only operators who know the key operator
Key Operator Code code can access the user tools for the User Code mode.
❐ Default: No
❐ If you select [Yes], you should register the key operator access
code. ☛ Use the "Key Operator Code" menu.

Key Operator Code Use to register or change the key operator code.

Set User Code Mode You can select the User Code mode.
❐ Default: No (not User Code mode)
❐ After select [Yes], please contact your sales/service representative
to set your machine to the User Code mode.

[▲ Prev.]

140
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

Copy Features

Copy Modes
MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Paper Select As a default setting, Auto Paper select is selected. You can
Priority cancel this setting.
❐ Default: Yes
Auto Image Density As a default setting, Auto Image Density is selected. You can
Priority cancel this setting.

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

❐ Default: Yes
Original Mode As a default setting, Letter is selected. You can change it to
Priority Letter/Photo, Photo, or Generation Copy.

SETTINGS
❐ Default: Letter
Full Main Menu As a default setting, the tray keys are displayed only when
Display Auto Paper Select is canceled, original type setting keys are
displayed only when Letter mode is canceled, and the manual
image density keys are shown only when the Auto Image
Density is canceled. You can cancel this setting and have all
keys displayed always.
❐ Default: Hide
Duplex Mode Priority As a default setting, from one-sided originals to one-sided
copies mode is selected. You can cancel this setting, and can
select one of the following modes.

♦ [1 Sided → 2 Sided]
(from even number of one-sided originals to a two-sided
copy (orientation: Top to Top))
♦ [2 Sided → 2 Sided]
(from two-sided originals to two-sided copies)
❐ Default: [1 Sided → 1 Sided]
[▼ Next]

141
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Copy Modes in Copy Features)

[▼ Next]
User Reproduction Up to 2 reproduction ratios (from 25 ~ 400%) which you
Ratio 1, 2 frequently use can be registered.
Maximum copy The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.
quantity ❐ Default: 999
Original beeper The beeper sounds and a message is displayed, when an
operator forgets to remove originals after copying.
❐ Default: On
❐ If the Operation panel beeper setting is set to Off (☛ see page
137), the beeper does not sound and only the message is
displayed.
❐ If the Auto Response (Human) Sensor is set to No (☛ see page
137), this function does not work.
[▲ Prev.]

Adjust Image
MENU DESCRIPTION
Margin Adjust Front The default setting of the margin widths on the front and back
Margin Adjust Back page in the Margin Adjustment mode can be changed as
follows:
Metric version: 0 ~ 30 mm in 1 mm steps*
Inch version: 0" ~ 1.0" in 0.1" steps*
*both left and right
❐ Default: Metric version: front 5 mm on left
back 5 mm on right
Inch version: front 0.2" on left
back 0.2" on right
❐ Margin Adjust Back takes effect only when making two sided
copies.
❐ The margin set in the Margin Adjust Back is added on the back
side of copies automatically when making two-sided copies from
one-sided originals if you select [Yes] in the "1 → 2 Duplex Auto
Margin Adjust" menu.

142
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Adjust Image in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Erase Border The default setting of the width of the erased margins in the
Erase Centre Erase Centre/Border mode can be changed as follows:
Metric version: 3 ~ 50 mm in 1 mm steps
Inch version: 0.1" ~ 2.0" in 0.1" steps
❐ Default: Metric version: 10 mm
Inch version: 0.4"
1 → 2 Duplex Auto As a default setting, the image on the back side of copies is
Margin Adjust shifted automatically to create the binding margin when
making two-sided copies from one-sided originals. This margin

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

is decided in the Margin Adjust Back. You can cancel this
setting.
❐ Default: Yes

SETTINGS
❐ If you use the Margin Adjustment function, this setting does not
come effect.
[▼ Next]
Double Copies You can select a separation line in the Double Copies mode
Separation Line from broken line, solid line, crop marks, or no line.
❐ Default: Broken

None Solid Broken Crop Marks

143
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Adjust Image in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Combine Originals When making a booklet from 16 originals in the Combine mode,
Booklet Format you can select a booklet that reads from left to right or from
right to left.
❐ Default: L to R
R to L L to R

front front
side side

back back
side side

Image Repeat/Combine As a default setting, no separation line is printed on copies in

Separation Line the Image Repeat and Combine modes. You can cancel this
setting and print a solid separation line.
❐ Default: No
[▲ Prev.]

Stamp
MENU DESCRIPTION
Page Numbering As a default setting, [P1, P2...] is selected when entering in
Format the Page Numbering mode. You can cancel this setting and
select other formats ([1/5,2/5...] or [-1-,-2-...]).
❐ Default: P1, P2 ⋅⋅⋅

144
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
P1, P2 The printing position of Page Numbering (P1, P2 and 1/5, 2/5)
1/5, 2/5... can be shifted up/down from the top edge and left/right from the
Format Position right edge as follows:
Metric version: 4 ~ 40 mm in 4 mm steps
Inch version: 0.16" ~ 1.60" in 0.16" steps
❐ P1, P2 and 1/5, 2/5 formats can be printed on the right top corner.
❐ Default: Metric version: 8 mm (from the top edge)
12 mm (from the right edge)
Inch version: 0.32" (from the top edge)
0.48" (from the right edge)

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

4 ~ 40 mm or

SETTINGS
0.16" ~ 1.60"
40 ~ 4 mm or
1.60" ~ 0.16"

-1-, -2- The printing position of Page Numbering (-1-, -2-) can be shifted
Format Position up down from the bottom edge and left/right from the centre of
paper as follows:
Metric version: up/down: 4 ~ 40 mm in 4 mm steps
left/right: 0 (centre) ~ 20 mm in 2 mm steps
Inch version: up/down: 0.16" ~ 1.60" in 0.16" steps
left/right: 0" (centre) ~ 0.80" in 0.08" steps
❐ Only -1-, -2- format can be printed on the centre of the bottom.
❐ Default: Metric version: 8 mm (from the bottom edge)
0 mm (centre)
Inch version: 0.32" (from the bottom edge)
0" (centre)

centre ~ 20 mm or centre ~ 20 mm or
centre ~ 0.80" centre ~ 0.80"

40 ~ 4 mm or 1.60" ~ 0.16"

145
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Stamping As a default setting, "URGENT" is selected when entering in the
Auto Stamping mode. You can cancel this setting and select
other messages (CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, PRIORITY,
PRELIMINARY, For Your Information, or Internal Use Only).
❐ If your machine is the metric version, the Auto Stamping cannot be
used as a default setting. If you want to use this function, contact
your sales or service representative.
❐ Default: URGENT
Stamp Layout
You can change the size, density, and position of each message of Auto Stamping
(URGENT, COPY, PRIORITY, PRELIMINARY, CONFIDENTIAL, For Your Information,
and For Internal Use Only)
❐ If your machine is the metric version, the Auto Stamping cannot be used as a default setting. If
you want to use this function, contact your sales/service representative.

Size There are four sizes of Auto Stamping message:

1 X, 2 X, 4 X, 8 X.
❐ Default: 1 X (32 mm x 64 mm, 1.28" x 2.56")

Density There are three density levels (Solid, Fine Screen, and Coarse
Screen).
❐ Default: Solid
❐ If the copy image overlaps the Auto Stamping in
Solid, the copy image cannot be seen.
Fine Screen, the copy image can be seen.
Coarse Screen, the copy image can be seen more.

146
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Stamp Layout (continued)
Position The default printing position of Auto Stamping can be selected
from one of nine positions. Also, the default printing position can
be adjusted as follows:
❐ Default: Top Right
Metric version: 24 mm from top and right edge
Inch version: 0.96" from top and right edge

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

Top left Top right
Top Centre

SETTINGS
Centre
Centre Centre
left right

Bottom
Bottom left Centre Bottom right

Metric version Inch version

➀ from the left edge 4 ~ 104 mm 0.16" ~ 4.16"
➁ from the top edge 4 ~ 144 mm 0.16" ~ 5.76"
➂ from the right edge 4 ~ 104 mm 0.16" ~ 4.16"
➃ from the bottom
4 ~ 144 mm 0.16" ~ 5.76"
edge
➄ from the horizontal
above 72 mm ~ below 72 mm above 2.88" ~ below 2.88"
centre line of paper
➅ from the vertical
left 52 mm ~ right 52 mm left 2.08" ~ right 2.08"
centre line of paper
❐ Metric version: in 4 mm steps
Inch version: in 0.16" steps
[▼ Next]

147
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
[▼ Next]
User Stamp Using the [Register] key, you can register your own messages
as user stamps. Up to four stamp can be registered. Also, you
can delete registered user stamps using the [Delete] key.
To perform this function, ☛ see page 152.
❐ A key with m has a registered stamp in it.
User Stamp Layout
You can set the size, density, and position for each user stamp. The procedure is the
same as the "Stamp Layout" on pages 146 and 147.
Size ☛ See page 146.
Density ☛ See page 146.
Position ☛ See page 147.
Number of As a default setting, one user stamp is printed on a copy. You
Stamps Per Page can cancel this setting, and print a user stamp repeatedly on a
overall copy.
❐ Default: Single
Date Position/Format
Date Format You can select the date stamping format from one of three
(mm/dd/yyyy, dd.mm.yyyy, or dd/mm/yyyy).
❐ Default: Metric version: dd.mm.yyyy
Inch version: mm/dd/yyyy

Orientation The orientation can be selected horizontal or vertical.

❐ Default: Horizontal
<Horizontal> <Vertical>
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

148
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Date Position/Format (continued)
Position The date can be printed at Top Left or Bottom Right.
❐ Default: Top Left
<Top Left> <Top Left>

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

<Bottom Right> <Bottom Right>

SETTINGS
Position Top Left The stamping position can be shifted as follows.
Position Top Right Metric version: 4 ~ 40 mm in 4 mm steps
Inch version: 0.16" ~ 1.60" in 0.16" steps
❐ Top Left Default
Metric version: 8 mm from the top edge
20 mm from the left edge
Inch version: 0.32" from the top edge
0.80" from the left edge
4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~1.60"
(from the top edge)
4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~ 1.60"
(from the left edge)

❐ Bottom Right Default

Metric version: 8 mm from the bottom edge
12 mm from the right edge
Inch version: 0.32" from the bottom edge
0.48" from the right edge

4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~ 1.60"
(from the right edge)
4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~ 1.60"
(from the bottom edge)

149
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Background There are three sizes of the Background Numbering.
Numbering Size The size of one letter can be changed as follows:
Large (approximately 64 x 32 mm or 2.56" x 1.28")
Medium (approximately 32 x 16 mm or 1.28" x 0.64")
Small (approximately 8 x 4 mm or 0.32" x 0.16")
❐ Default: Medium
Background There are four density levels: Very Light, Light, Medium, or Dark.
Numbering Density ❐ Default: Light
[▼ Next]

Input/Output
MENU DESCRIPTION
Duplex Remaining As a default setting, when making two-sided copies from one-
Copy Exit sided, or using Multi mode with the optional document feeder,
the last copy paper can exit automatically with the back side
blank under the following conditions. You can cancel this setting.
♦ When you select [Even], although the number of originals
are odd.
♦ When you select [Odd], although the number of originals
are even.
♦ When your originals are finished in the Multi mode.

❐ Default: Yes
❐ This function does not come effect, when you set one original at a
time in the document feeder or set an original on the exposure glass.
Combine As a default setting, even if the number of originals in the
Remaining Copy optional document feeder is less than the number required in the
Exit selected Combine mode, copies can be made. You can cancel
this setting.
❐ Default: Yes
❐ This function does not come effect, when you set one original at a
time in the document feeder or set an original on the exposure glass.

150
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

(Input/Output in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
SADF Auto Reset When you set one original at a time in the optional document
Time feeder, the Auto Feed indicator lights for a selected time after an
original is fed to show that the document feeder is ready for
another original. You can adjust this time from 3 seconds to 60
seconds in 1 second steps.
❐ Default: 10 seconds
Mixed Original As a default setting, you cannot use originals of different sizes
Sizes and directions when you set originals in the optional document
feeder. You can cancel this setting.

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

❐ Default: No
❐ If you set the copier in this mode, the copying speed becomes slower
in some modes.

SETTINGS
Auto Sort Mode As a default setting, Sort mode is not selected. You can cancel
this setting and can select Sort mode as a default setting.
❐ Default: No
[▼ Next]
Memory Full Auto When memory runs out during copying, the machine can be
Scan Restart programmed to behave in two ways with the user tools.
[Yes]: After all images in memory are copied, the machine will re-
start scanning automatically. You should re-order your copies
after all copy jobs are finished.
[No]: The machine will wait for you to press the Start key. At
this point you should remove your copies from the copy tray.
Press the Start key and then follow the instructions on the
display to continue copying.
❐ Default: No
Rotate Sort Auto As a default, two paper trays identical in size but different in
Paper Continue direction must be available in the Rotate Sort or Rotate Stack
mode. If there are not two paper trays identical in size but
different in direction, the copier stops copying. Also, the copier
stops if one of the selected paper trays in use runs out of paper.
You can change this setting, so that the copier continues
copying using paper trays identical in size and direction.
❐ Default: No
[▲ Prev.]

151
 eu-8

USER TOOLS

How To Register User Stamp

Confirm that the copier is in the ready condition.

1
Press the User Tools key.
2

Touch the keys in the following order.

3 [Copy Features] key
[Stamp] key
[Next] key
[Register] key of the User Stamp menu

Select the user stamp number by

4 touching a key.
❐ A key with m has a registered stamp
in it. If you want to overwrite it, follow
the instructions on the display after
touching the key with m.

Place your message on the expo-

5 sure glass face down as shown 0.5 mm
in the illustration. Then, touch the (0.02")
top scale
[Scan] key.
32 mm
❐ The area that can be registered is 64 (1.28")
mm x 32 mm (2.56" x 1.28") as
left scale
shown in the illustration.
64 mm (2.56")
❐ Margins from the top and left scale
1 mm (0.04")
cannot be registered as shown in the
illustration.

Press the User Tools key to re-

6 turn to the ready condition.

152
 eu-8

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS

Some features can be adjusted by your service representative to suit your
needs. This section gives a brief description of these features. For more
information, contact your service representative.

LCT Paper Size Change

The large capacity tray holds A4 : (for the metric version) or 81/2" x 11" :
(for the inch version) copy paper. If you need, A4 : can be set for the inch

CHANGING THE COPIER’S

version, and 81/2" x 11" : can be set for the metric version.

SETTINGS
Auto Stamping (for metric version)
If your machine is the metric version, Auto Stamping cannot be used as a
default setting. You can cancel this setting and use this function.

A3, 11" x 17" Double Count

When you use A3, 11" x 17" paper, your service representative can set the
copier to count each A3, 11" x 17" as two copies.

Auto Image Density Level Selection

Auto Image Density level can be adjusted to lighter or darker.

APS A5/51/2" x 81/2" Detection

Your service representative can set the copier to detect the original size on
the exposure glass as A5 ; (for metric version) or 51/2" x 81/2" ; (for inch
version) whenever the copier cannot detect it with Auto Paper Select.

Set User Code Mode

☛ See page 140.

153
 eu-8

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS

154
 eu-9

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER

DO’S AND DON’TS
REMARKS
WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER
USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER ................................................................................................ 156

Copier .................................................................................................................................................... 156
Document Feeder (Option) ................................................................................................................ 156

DO’S AND DON’TS.................................................................................................................. 157

Copier .................................................................................................................................................... 157
Document Feeder (Option) ................................................................................................................ 158

OTHERS
Finisher (Option).................................................................................................................................... 158

REMARKS................................................................................................................................. 159
Copier .................................................................................................................................................... 159

WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER................................................................................................ 160

Copier Environment ............................................................................................................................. 160
Power Connection ............................................................................................................................... 160
Access To The Copier .......................................................................................................................... 161

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ........................................................................................... 162

Copy Paper........................................................................................................................................... 162
Paper Storage....................................................................................................................................... 163
Toner Storage........................................................................................................................................ 163

155
 eu-9

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER

To maintain high copy quality, clean the following parts and units regularly
with a damp cloth and wipe them with a dry cloth.

Copier

Exposure glass Platen cover

Document Feeder (Option)

Feed-in unit Belt

156
 eu-9

DO’S AND DON’TS

DO’S AND DON’TS

Copier

General operations
❐ When you make copies using the bypass tray, paper should be set in the bypass
tray lengthwise ( ;).
❐ Do not place sheets of paper or originals on the cover of the large capacity tray.
❐ Do not move the copier when the main switch is turned on.
❐ Do not move the copier a few minutes after the main switch is turned off.

When adding toner

❐ Do not incinerate toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when ex -
posed to open flame.
❐ Dispose of the used toner bottle according to local regulations.
❐ When adding toner, do not turn off the main switch. If you do, your copy settings
are cleared.

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER

❐ Before setting the new toner, shake it well, at least 5 or 6 times.

DO’S AND DON’TS

❐ Do not remove the inner cap of the new toner bottle.

When removing misfed paper

❐ Since some parts of the copier are supplied with high electrical voltage, touch
only the parts specified in the instructions on the sticker inside the machine’s
cover.
❐ When removing misfed paper from sections B and C, use cautions. The fusing
unit may be very hot. ☛ See page 4 for the position of the fusing unit.
❐ Do not leave any torn scrapes within the copier.
❐ When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the main switch. If you do, your copy
settings are cleared.
❐ After clearing misfeeds, make sure that all units and levers are returned to their
original positions and all covers are closed.

157
 eu-9

DO’S AND DON’TS

Document Feeder (Option)

❐ While originals are fed from the original table to the exposure glass, do not pull
out the originals.
❐ Do not lift the document feeder until the last original has been completely fed out.
❐ Do not press down or hold originals after inserting them.
❐ Do not press any parts of the document feeder strongly.

Finisher (Option)
❐ Do not remove copies from the shift tray while copying.

158
 eu-9

REMARKS

REMARKS
Copier
❐ To avoid problems caused by curly copies, try turning over the paper stack in the
500-sheet or large capacity tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy
paper with less curl.
❐ Load paper with the copy side down in the 500-sheet trays, and with the copy
side up in the large capacity tray. If copies are curled, try turning the copy paper
over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the copy paper with less curl.
❐ Leading and side edges of the original image are not copied, as shown in the
illustration.

a a: 2 + 2.5 mm
2 − 1.5 mm
b: 2 ± 1.5 mm
c: 3 ± 2 mm
Paper feed direction d: 2 ± 2 mm

c d

REMARKS

159
 eu-9

WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER

WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER

Copier Environment

The installation location should be carefully chosen because environmental

conditions greatly affect the performance of a copier.
Optimum environmental conditions
o
❐ Temperature: 10 - 30 C
❐ Humidity: 15 - 90 %
❐ A strong and level base.
❐ To avoid possible built-up of ozone, make sure to locate this copier in a large well
ventilated room which has an air turnover of more than 30 m 3/hr/person.
❐ The copier must be level within 5 mm both front or rear and left to right.

Environments to avoid
❐ Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1,500 lux).
❐ Dusty areas.
❐ Areas with corrosive gasses.
❐ Places higher than 2,000 m above sea level.
❐ Places where the copier might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.
❐ Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air from a
heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause condensation within the cop -
ier.)

Power Connection
❐ Connect the copier to a power source meeting the specifications given on the
inside from cover of this manual.
❐ Do not set anything on the power cord.
❐ Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10 %.
❐ Avoid multiwiring.
❐ Make sure that the wall outlet is near the copier and easily accessible.
❐ Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
❐ Always turn the copier off when you have finished copying for the day, but leave
it plugged in.

160
 eu-9

WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER

Access To The Copier

Place the copier near a power source, providing clearance as shown.

Copier
More than 10 cm or 4.0"

More than 39 cm or 15.4" More than 50 cm or 19.7"

More than 70 cm or 27.6"

WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER

Copier with the optional finisher
More than 10 cm or 4.0"

More than 72 cm or 28.4" More than 50 cm or 19.7"

More than 70 cm or 27.6"

161
 eu-9

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

Copy Paper
❐ Copy paper of the types or in the conditions listed below are not recommended
for this copier.
• Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper.
• Torn paper
• Damp paper
• Perforated paper
• Paper with conductive or low electrical resistance such as carbon or silver
coating.
• Wavy paper
• Thermal paper, art paper
• Thin paper that has low stiffness
❐ Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translu -
cent paper, and post cards. Before making copies onto them, read the following:
• Adhesive labels should be fed from the bypass tray one sheet at a time.
• OHP transparencies should be fed from the bypass tray. You can set ten
sheets at a time. However, if misfeed or multi-feed occurs, set one sheet at a time.
• OHP transparencies should be fanned to get air between the sheets before loading.
• Translucent paper should be fed from the bypass tray.
• Translucent paper should be fanned to get air between the sheets and any curls
should be corrected before loading.
• Post cards should be fed from the bypass tray.
• It is recommended to feed one post card at a time.
• Correct any curl in post cards before loading.
❐ For good copy quality, please use the type of OHP transparencies recommended
by your sales and service representatives.
❐ When using the bypass tray, the large capacity tray cannot be used.
❐ Do not touch copy paper if your fingers are wet or oily; finger prints many appear
on the copy.
❐ Do not use copy paper that has been already copied on.
❐ Do not set copy paper over the limit mark inside the tray.
❐ To avoid problems caused by curly copies, try turning over the paper stack in the
500-sheet or large capacity tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy
paper with less curl.
❐ Load paper with the copy side down in the 500-sheet trays, and with the copy
side up in the large capacity tray. If copies are curled, try turning the copy paper
over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the copy paper with less curl.

162
 eu-9

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

Paper Storage

Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly stored paper might

result in poor image reproduction. creased copies, and paper misfeeds.
Generally, avoid curling and absorption of moisture.
❐ Avoid storing paper in humid areas. Under high temperature and high humidity, or
low temperature and low humidity conditions, store paper in a vinyl bag.
❐ Do not store paper where it will be exposed to heat.
❐ Store on a flat surface.
❐ Use older stock first.
❐ Do not lay heavy objects on paper.
❐ Keep open reams of paper in the package, and store as you would unopened
paper.

Toner Storage
❐ Store toner bottles vertically in a cool, dark place.
❐ Never store toner where it will be exposed to heat.
❐ Do not lay heavy objects on toner bottles.

USE AND STORAGE OF

SUPPLIES

163
 eu-9

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

164
 eu-10

SPECIFICATIONS
COPIER .................................................................................................................................... 166

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)............................................................................................... 169

FINISHER (OPTION) ................................................................................................................. 170

1000-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION) .......................................................................................... 171

1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION) .......................................................................................... 171

SPECIFICATIONS

165
 eu-10

COPIER

COPIER
Configuration: Desktop
Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Memory capacity: approximately 1GB hard disk
Scanning method: Flatbed solid state scanner
Resolution: 400 x 400 dpi
Gray scale: 256 levels
Originals: Sheet, book
Original thickness: less than 30 mm, 1.18"
Original size: Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Copy paper size: ☛ See pages 128, 130, and 131.
Copy paper weight: 1st paper tray:
60 ~ 105 g/m2 (16 ~ 28 lb)
bypass tray:
60 ~ 157 g/m2 (16 ~ 42 lb)
large capacity tray:
60 ~ 128 g/m2 (16 ~ 34 lb)
when making two-sided copies:
64 ~ 105 g/m2 (17 ~ 28 lb)
Copy paper capacity: 1st paper tray:
500 sheets or less than 53 mm, 2.08"
bypass tray:
40 sheets or less than 4 mm, 0.15"
large capacity tray:
1000 sheets or less than 120 mm, 4.72"
Optional copy tray A3, 11" x 17": 200 sheets
capacity: B5 or smaller: 200 sheets
B4 or smaller: 500 sheets
Copying speed: 40 copies/minute
(A4 :, 81/2" x 11" :, in Full Size mode)
First copy time: less than 5.2 seconds
(A4 :, 81/2" x 11" :, feeding from the large capac-
ity tray)
Warm-up time: less than 140 seconds (20°C, 68°F)

166
 eu-10

COPIER

Toner replacement: Bottle exchange (700 g)

Power source: 220 ~ 240V , 50, 60Hz, more than 7A
Preset reproduction 5 enlargement and 7 reduction
ratios:
Metric version Inch version
400% 400%
200% 200%
Enlargement 141% 155%
122% 129%
115% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
93% 93%
87% 85%
82% 77%
Reduction 71% 74%
65% 65%
50% 50%
25% 25%

Power consumption:
Copier only Full system*
Warm-up less than 0.88 kW less than 0.90 kW
Stand-by less than 0.20 kW less than 0.22 kW
Copying less than 1.20 kW less than 1.20 kW
Maximum less than 1.50 kW less than 1.50 kW
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit

Noise emission:
Sound pressure level (The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at the
operator position)
Copier only Full system
Stand-by 25 dB (A) 25 dB (A)
Copying 54 dB (A) 59 dB (A)
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit
SPECIFICATIONS

Sound power level (The measurements are made according to ISO 7779. )
Copier only Full system
Stand-by 40 dB (A) 40 dB (A)
Copying 66 dB (A) 69 dB (A)
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit

167
 eu-10

COPIER

Dimensions:

Width Depth Height

Copier with platen cover, copy tray, and 1,150 mm 655 mm 1,024 mm
paper tray unit 45.3" 25.8" 40.4"
Copier with document feeder, finisher, and 1,551 mm 655 mm 1,110 mm
paper tray unit 61.1" 25.8" 43.8"

Weight:

Copier with platen cover, copy tray, and 1500- 137.5 kg

sheet paper tray unit 303.2 lb
Copier with document feeder, finisher, and 178.5 kg
1500-sheet paper tray unit 393.6 lb

Optional equipment: Document feeder

Finisher
Copy tray
Platen cover
1500-sheet tray unit
1000-sheet tray unit
❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

168
 eu-10

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)

Original feed: Automatic reverse document feed (ARDF)
two-sided originals mode
Automatic document feed (ADF)
one-sided originals mode
Semi-automatic document feed (SADF)
Single copies mode
Original size & weight:

Number of originals to be set:

Paper weight (g/m2) 40 47 53 64 81 105 128
Paper weight (lb) 11 12.5 14 17 22 28 34
Maximum number of
50 50 50 50 50 30 25
originals to be set
A3 lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
A4
sideways ✩ ✩ ● ● ● ● ★
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
A5
sideways ✩ ✩ ● ● ● ● ★
B4 lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
B5
sideways ✩ ✩ ● ● ● ● ★
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
B6
sideways ✩ ✩ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
●: ARDF (2 sided originals), ADF (1 sided originals), SADF, Single copies mode
❍: ARDF, ADF, SADF
★: ADF, SADF, Single copies mode
✩: ADF, SADF
Original set: Face up, first sheet on top
Original transport: One flat belt
Power consumption: DC 24V ± 10 % (from copier)
SPECIFICATIONS

Power consumption: 45 W
Weight: Approximately 10.5 kg, 23.2 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 610 x 507 x 130 mm, 24.1" x 20.0" x 5.2"
❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

169
 eu-10

FINISHER (OPTION)

FINISHER (OPTION)
Paper size: ☛ See page 97.
•When the shift tray is not shifted, A6 can be stacked.
Staple mode: ☛ See page 100.
Paper weight: ☛ See page 97.
Staple mode: ☛ See page 100.
Paper capacity: ☛ See page 97.
Staple mode: ☛ See page 100.
Staple position:

Top Bottom 2 Staples

a= 6 ± 3 mm a= 6 ± 3 mm a= 6 ± 3 mm
b= 6 ± 3 mm b= 6 ± 3 mm b= 132 ± 2 mm
c= 66 ± 3 mm

Staple replenishment: Cartridge exchange (5,000 pieces/cartridge)

Power source: DC 24V (from copier)
Power consumption: 48 W
Weight: 35 kg, 77.2 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 671 x 514 x 950 mm, 26.5" x 20.3" x 37.5"

❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

170
 eu-10

1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

1000-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

1000-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

Paper size: ☛ See page 133.
Paper weight: 52 - 105 g/m2 (14 lb - 28 lb)
Paper capacity: 1,000 sheets
(500 sheets (80 g/m 2) for each tray)
Power source: DC 24V, 5V, AC 220 ~ 240V (from copier)
Power consumption: Average: less than 50 W (copying)
Maximum: less than 110.5 W (copying)
Weight: Approximately 36 kg, 79.4 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 620 x 632 x 390 mm, 24.5" x 24.9" x 15.4"

❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

Paper size: ☛ See page 133.
Paper weight: 52 - 105 g/m2 (14 lb - 28 lb)
Paper capacity: 1,500 sheets
(500 sheets (80 g/m 2) for each tray)
Power source: DC 24V, 5V, AC 220 ~ 240V (from copier)
Power consumption: Average: less than 50 W (copying)
Maximum: less than 110.5W (copying)
Weight: Approximately 38 kg, 83.8 lb
SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions (W x D x H): 620 x 632 x 390 mm, 24.5" x 24.9" x 15.4"

❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

171
 eu-10

1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

172
INDEX

INDEX

173
INDEX

INDEX
Paper Size SettingTray 2, 3, and 4(op -
A tion), 138
Paper Tray Priority, 139
A3, 11" x 17" Double Count, 153 Paper Type Display, 138
ADF, 30 - 31 Set date/Set time, 137
ADF: Thin Paper Mode, 139 Set User Code(s), 140
Adjust Image, 86 - 95, 142 Tray 1 * Paper Size Setting, 138
1 -- 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust, 143 Tray 1 /F4 Paper Size Setting, 138
Combine Originals Booklet Format, 144 book originals, 66, 68
Double Copies, 86 bypass tray, 5, 50
Double Copies Separation Line, 143 non-standard size paper, 51
Erase Border/Erase Centre, 143 standard size copy paper, 51
Erase Centre/Border, 88
Erase Centre\Border, 89 C
Image Repeat, 91
Image Repeat/Combine Separation Line, CAUTION, i
144 CHANGING PAPER SIZE, 128 - 133
Margin Adjust Front/Back, 142 Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key, 7, 24
Overlay/Merge, 94 Clear/Stop key, 7
Positive/Negative, 93 COMBINATION CHART, 105 - 108
APS A5/5 1/2" x 8 1/2" Detection, 153 Combine, 70 - 73
Auto Image Density, 37 Combine Originals Booklet Format, 144
Auto Image Density Level Selection, 153 Combine Remaining Copy Exit, 150
Auto Image Density Priority, 141 Contrast Dial, 6
Auto Paper Select, 39 copier, 157, 166 - 168
Auto Paper Select Priority, 141 COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR, 4 - 5
Auto Reduce/Enlarge, 41 Copy count display, 137
Auto Reset, 137 Copy Features, 141
Auto Response (Human) Sensor, 137 Adjust Image, 142
auto response sensor, 5 Copy Modes, 141
Auto Sort Mode, 151 Input/Output, 150
Auto Stamping, 75, 146 Stamp, 144
Auto Stamping (for metric version), 153 Copy Modes, 141
Auto Start, 37 Auto Image Density Priority, 141
Auto Tray Switching, 139 Auto Paper Select Priority, 141
Duplex Mode Priority, 141
B Full Main Menu Display, 141
Maximum copy quantity, 142
Background Numbering, 74 Original beeper, 142
Background Numbering Density, 150 Original Mode Priority, 141
Background Numbering Size, 150 User Reproduction Ratio 1, 2 , 142
Basic Settings, 137 copy paper, 162
ADF: Thin Paper Mode, 139 copy paper, loading, 117 - 119
Auto Reset, 137 Copy Set Counter, 8
Auto Response (Human) Sensor, 137 Copy Set Total, 8
Auto Tray Switching, 139 copy tray, 3, 5
Copy count display, 137
Low Power Timer, 137
Operation panel beeper, 137
Original: /F4 Size Setting, 139

174
 INDEX

Combine Remaining Copy Exit, 150

D Duplex Remaining Copy Exit, 150
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 151
Date Position/Format, 148 Mixed Original Sizes, 151
Date Stamping, 81 Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue, 151
Directional Magnification, 57

INDEX
SADF Auto Reset Time, 151
Directional Size Magnification, 59 installation environments, 160 - 161
DO’S AND DON’TS, 157 - 158 Interrupt Copying mode, 53
document feeder, 3, 158, 169 Interrupt key, 7
Double Copies, 86
Double Copies Separation Line, 143 J
Duplex, 61
Duplex Mode Priority, 141 Job Recall key, 6
Duplex Remaining Copy Exit, 150 Job Recall mode, 53
duplex unit, 5
Duplex/Series Copies, 61 - 69 K
Duplex, 61
Series Copies, 68 key counter holder, 5

E L
Enter key, 7 large capacity tray, 5
Erase Background, 38 large capacity tray, loading paper, 119
Erase Border/Erase Centre, 143 LCT Paper Size Change, 153
Erase Centre/Border, 88 Letter mode, 43
exposure glass, 5 Letter/Photo mode, 43
Low Power mode, 24
F Low Power Timer, 137

finisher, 3, 158, 170 M

finishing, 96 - 104
front cover, 5 main switch, 5, 24
Full Main Menu Display, 141 MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER, 156
Full Size Copying, 36 Manual Image Density, 37
fusing unit, 5 Margin Adjust Front/Back, 142
Margin Adjustment, 89
G Maximum copy quantity, 142
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 151
Generation Copy mode, 43 message area, 8
GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY, 28 misfeeds, 122 - 124
Guidance key, 6, 28 Mixed Original Sizes, 151

H N
hard keys, 6 Number keys, 7

I O
image density, adjusting, 37 one-sided originals, 65
Image Repeat, 91 operation panel, 5 - 10
Image Repeat/Combine Separation Line, hard keys, 6
144 Operation panel beeper, 137
Input/Output, 150 options, 3
Auto Sort Mode, 151 Original beeper, 142
175
INDEX

Original Counter, 8
Original Mode Priority, 141 S
original setting
Date Stamping, 81 SADF, 32 - 34
Duplex, 64 SADF Auto Reset Time, 151
Erase Centre/Border, 88 SAFETY INFORMATION, i
Page Numbering, 83 Series Copies, 68
Stamp, 76 Set date/Set time, 137
Staple, 103 Set User Code Mode, 153
Staple & Auto Paper Select, 101 Set User Code(s), 140
original type, setting, 43 Size Magnification, 58
Original: /F4 Size Setting, 139 Sort, 44
originals, 29 Sort, optional, 96
originals, setting, 29 Sorting Into Sets, 44, 96
Overlay/Merge, 94 specifications
1000-sheet tray unit, 171
P 1500-sheet tray unit, 171 - 172
copier, 166 - 168
P1, P2, 1/5, 2/5...Format Position, 145 document feeder, 169
Page Numbering, 82 finisher, 170
Page Numbering Format, 144 Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page,
paper, 162 48
Paper Size SettingTray 2, 3, and 4(op - Stamp, 74 - 80, 144
tion), 138 -1-, -2- Format Position, 145
paper tray, 5 Auto Stamping, 75, 146
Paper Tray Priority, 139 Background Numbering, 74
paper tray unit, 3 Background Numbering Density, 150
paper tray, loading paper, 118 Background Numbering Size, 150
Paper Type Display, 138 Date Position/Format, 148
paper, changing size, 128 - 133 Date Stamping, 81
1st tray, 128 P1, P2, 1/5, 2/5...Format Position, 145
optional tray unit, 133 Page Numbering, 82
paper, loading, 117 - 119 Page Numbering Format, 144
paper, selecting, 38 Stamp Layout, 146
Photo mode, 43 User Stamp, 148
platen cover, 5 User Stamp Layout, 148
Positive/Negative, 93 User Stamping, 79
Preset R/E, 55 Stamp Layout, 146
Program key, 6 Staple, optional, 100
Program mode, 54 staples, adding, 121
staples, jammed, 125
R Start key, 7
SYSTEM OVERVIEW, 3
Reduce/Enlarge, 55 - 60
Directional Magnification, 57 T
Directional Size Magnification, 59
Preset R/E, 55 toner, 163
Size Magnification, 58 toner bottle, 5
Zoom, 56 toner, adding, 120
REMARKS, 159 Touch Panel Display, 6, 8, 26 - 27
Rotate Sort, 44 Tray 1 * Paper Size Setting, 138
Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue, 151 Tray 1 /F4 Paper Size Setting, 138
Rotate Stack, 48 troubleshooting

176
 INDEX

copies, 112 [Prev.] key, 27, 136

copies, Adjust Image, 113 [Shift Position] key, 63
copies, Combine, 116
copies, Duplex, 115
copies, finishing, 113 - 116

INDEX
copies, Stamp, 114
jammed staples, 125 - 126
mechanical, 110 - 111
misfeeds, 122 - 124
two-sided copies, 61
two-sided originals, 66, 68

U
User Code mode, 25
User Reproduction Ratio 1, 2 , 142
User Stamp, 148
User Stamp Layout, 148
User Stamp, registering, 152
User Stamping, 79
User Tools, 134 - 152
Basic Settings, 137
Copy Features, 141
User Tools key, 6

W
WARNING, i
WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER, 160 -
161

Z
Zoom, 56

etc
-1-, -2- Format Position, 145
1 -- 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust, 143
1000-sheet tray unit, 171
1500-sheet tray unit, 171 - 172
16 in 1, 70 - 73
2 in 1, 70
4 in 1, 70 - 73
8 in 1, 70 - 73
[Cancel] key, 136
[Change Modes] key, 27
[Check Modes] key, 27
[Exit] key, 136
[Last Page] key, 85
[Menu] key, 136
[Next] key, 136

177
INDEX

178
 A1338607

Note to users in the United States of America

Warning:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Note to users in Canada

Warning:
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions
from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard
entitled "Digital Apparatus", ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.

Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada

Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux
appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur:
"Appareils Numériques", NMB-003 édictée par le ministre des communications.

In accordance with ISO Standard 7001, this machine uses the following symbols for
the main switch:
s means POWER ON.
t means POWER OFF.
u means STAND BY.

Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A. France
RICOH CORPORATION RICOH FRANCE S.A.
5 Dedrick Place 383 Avenue de General de Gaulle,
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 B.P. 307, 92143 Clamart Cedex
(TEL) 201-882-2000 (TEL) 01- 4094-3838
Netherlands Spain
RICOH EUROPE B.V. RICOH ESPAÑA S.A.
Groenelaan 3 P.O. Box 114 Guitard, 45
1180 AC - Amstelveen Holland 08014 Barcelona
(TEL) 020-5474111 (TEL) 490-09-60
United Kingdom Italy
RICOH U.K. LTD. RICOH ITALIA S.p.A.
Ricoh House Via della Metallurgia, 12
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham, (zona Basson) - 37139 VERONA
Middlesex, TW13 7HG (TEL) 045-851 00 44
(TEL) 181-261-4000
Hong Kong
Germany RICOH BUSINESS MACHINES, LTD.
RICOH DEUTSCHLAND GMBH 23/F., China Overseas Building,
Mergenthalerallee 38-40, 139, Hennessy Road,
65760 Eschborn Wan Chai, Hong Kong
(TEL) (06196) 906-0 (TEL) 862-2888
 A1338607

RICOH COMPANY, LTD.

15-1, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama, Minato-ku, Tokyo
Printed in Japan
Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111
UE USA A1338607
 A195
General Reference
Read Me First

Operating Instructions
Please read the Safety Information section and keep this manual by the machine.
80 Copyright 1997, Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Warning:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frquency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interfer-
ence at his own expense.

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Depart-
ment of Communications.

Cet appareil numerique respecte les limites de bruits radioelectriques appli-

cables aux appareils numeriques de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le
materiel brouilleur:
“Appareils Numeriques”, NMB-003 edictee par le ministre des Communica-
tions.

Declaration of Conformity
“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive
891336lEEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC.”

Konformittitserklarung
“Das Produkt entspricht den Anforderungen der EMV-Richtlinie 89/336/
EWG und der Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23/EWG.”

Declaration de conformite
“Le produit remplit toutes les conditions requises par la directive EMC
89/336/CEE ainsi que la directive faible voltage 73/23/CEE.”

Dichiarazione di conformita
“II prodotto e conforme ai requisiti della direttiva CEE 89/336 EMC e
della direttiva CEE sulla bassa tensione 73/23.”
 Declaracicn de conformidad
“Este product0 cumple con 10s requisitos de la Directiva sobre Com-
patibilidad Electromagnetica 89/336/EEC y con la Directiva sobre
Baja Tension 73/23/EEC.”

Fcrsakran om cverensstammelse
“Denna produkt uppfyller kraven enligt EMC-direktiv 89/336/EEC och
Ggspanningsdirektiv 73/23/EEC.”

Verklaring van conformiteit

“Dit product voldoet aan de vereisten van de EMC-richtlijn 89/336/EEC
en de laagspanningsrichtlijn 73/23/EEC.”

Erkleering om overensstemmelse
“Produktet imntekommer kravene i EMC-direktivet 89/336/EEC og i
lavspenningsdirektivet 73/23/EEC.”

Erklasring om overensstemmelse
“Dette produkt overholder kravene i EMC direktiver 89/336/EEC og
lavstrsmsdirektivet 73/23/EEC.”

Declaracao de conformidade
“0 produto esta em conformidade corn OS requistos da Directiva EMC
89/336/EEC e a Directiva sobre baixa-voltagem 73/23/EEC.”

Samraamisyfirlysing
“Tzeki betta er framleitt i samriemi via krijfur i Tilskipun nr. 89/336/EBE
urn rafsegulsvi&samhsefi og Tilskipun nr. 72/23/EBE urn raff6ng sem
notud eru innan Akvedinna spennumarka.”

Yhdenmukaisuusilmoitus
“Tuote on EMC direktiivin 89/336/EEC ja heikkovirtadirektiivin
72123lEEC mukainen.”

“To llpdi6v ouppopcptiv&Tal p& TIS arralTjo&r~ T~S o6nyiaS EMC

89/336/EOK kar TQV o6qyia XapqhtjS Tdran~ 72/23/EOK”.
EMC: CISPR-22:1985/EN 55022:i 988 class B*

* Note:
This product contains Network Interface Card (NIC) options.
When using the NIC option, the product meets the requirements of
EN55022 Class A.

Operator Safety:
This copier is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/EDP
use. The Copier contains a 15milliwat, 760-800 nanometer wavelength,
GaAlAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact with the laser
beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam
exposure to the operator.

Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair
of laser-based optical unit in the field. The optical housing unit can only be
repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser
subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The
laser chassis is not repairable in the filed. Customer engineers are therefore
directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service
depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.

Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Notice:
Product names used herein are for idetification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. The manifucture disclaims any
and all rights in those marks.

...
III
 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and mainte-
nance of this machine. To get maximum versatility from this copier all
operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual.
Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Please read the next section before using this copier. It contains important
information related to user safety and preventing equipment problems.

SAFETY INFORMATION
When using your machine, the following safety precautions should always
be followed.

Important Symbols Used In This Manual

n WARNING: Ignoring this could cause injury or

death.

AcAuT’oN.’ this caution cause injury damage to

Examples
A A situation that requires you take care.

8 Do NOT carry out the operation represented by the symbol 8.

This example means “Do not take apart.“.

c A l symbol means you MUST perform this operation.

This example means “You must remove the wall plug. ”

iv
A WARNINGS:
l Only connect the machine to the power source described on the in-
side front cover of this manual.

l Avoid multi-wiring

l Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.

Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more than
necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
l Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet. Other-
wise, an electric shock might occur.

IQ . Make sure the wall out/et is near the machine and freely accessible
so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily.

l Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in

this manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and
could give you an electric shock. Also, if the machine has laser sys-
tems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye contact with the laser beam
may cause serious eye damage. When the machine needs to be
checked, adjusted, or repaired, contact your service representative.

l Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine. There

is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss of sight. If the ma-
chine has laser systems, there is a risk of serious eye damage.

l If the machine looks damaged or breaks down, smoke is coming out,

there is a strange smell or anything looks unusual, immediate/y turn
off the main switch then unp/ug the power cord from the wall. Do not
continue using the machine in this condition. Contact your service
representative.

l If metal, liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine, turn off the
main switch. and unplug the main power cord. Contact your service
representative. Do not keep using the machine with a fault or defect.
If metal, liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine, turn off the
main switch. and unplug the main power cord. Contact your service
representative. Do not keep using the machine with a fault or defect.

l Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water (e.g. vases,
flowerpots, g/asses) on the machine. If the contents fall inside the
machine, a fire or electric shock could occur.

V
 l Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might
ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the used toner
containers according to local regulations for plastics.

ACAUTIONS:
l Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an electric
shock might occur.

l Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it top-

ples over, it could cause injury.

l After you move the machine, fix it with the caster fixture. Otherwise,
the machine might move or come down to cause a personal injury.

l When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall
out/et to avoid fire or electric shock.

l When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the power
cord.

When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid
damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock.

l If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a

8 continuous air turnover.

l Do not re-use stapled paper. Do not use aluminum foil, carbon-con-

taining paper or other conductive paper. Otherwise, a fire might oc-
cur.

l When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section be-
cause it could be very hot.

l This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier’s parts
and consumables. We recommend you only use these specified sup-
plies.

Do not eat or swallow toner.

A!
l

. Keep toner or toner containers out of reach of children.

vi
 WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE
This machine can be used as a copier, printer, and scanner. Below is a
summary of the main features. For more details, refer to the separate Copy,
Printer and Scanner Reference manuals.

Copier Features

7 Basic copy & copy with editing

II Reduction and enlargement
1 Duplex
1 Date print
o Electrical sort with memory
CI Reverse sort with memory

Printer Features

This machine can be used stand-alone or as a network printer.

Options:
o PostScript2 Kit
o Ethernet NIC
o Token Ring NIC

Scanner Features

Scan in originals and load them into your PC.

vii
 MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THIS MACHINE
General Reference
Contains general information common to the Copier, Printer and Scanner
features.

Copier Reference
Information specific to the Copier feature

Printer Reference
Information specific to the Printer feature

Scanner Reference
Information specific to the Scanner feature

...
VIII
 Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION .. .... . . .... . .... . .. ... .. ... . ... .. . ... .. ... .. . .... . ... .. . .... . .. ... ... .. . .... . .... . .. ... . ... i

SAFETY INFORMATION.. ............................................................................. i

Important Symbols Used In This Manual .................................................... i
A WARNINGS:............................................................................................
ii

ACAUTIONS: ............................................................................................. iii

WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE .............................................. iv

Copier Features ......................................................................................... iv
Printer Features ......................................................................................... iv

Scanner Features.. ..................................................................................... iv

MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THIS MACHINE ........................................... V

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR PART NAMES .. . ... .. .. ... . .... . ... .. .. ... .. ... . .... . ... .. . . 4

OPERATION PANEL ................................................................................... .6

Keys.. ........................................................................................................... 6

How To Use The Operation Panel .............................................................. 8

-,A
g~~~-,~*~~~~gdir~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~~-~~-~~~~~,~~~~~~~~~~~~
STARTING THE MACHINE ... . ... .. .. ... . .... . .... . .. ... ... .. . ... .. .... . ... .. . .... ... .. . ... .. .... . . . 11
When The Main Switch Is In The Stand-by Position __................................ 11

When The Display Is Off And The Clear Modes/Low Power Mode
Key Is Lit .,_......,.....,..,..........,..,._._................................................................ 11
When Prompted For A User Code ..,.............,__........................................... 12

SWITCHING BETWEEN THE PRINTER, COPIER AND SCANNER

FUNCTIONS .. .... . .. ... . .... . .. ... .. ... . ... .. .... . .. ... . .... . .... . .. ... ... .. . .... . ... .. .. ... .. ... . ... .. ... .. . 13

INTERRUPTING THE CURRENT JOB .. . .... . .. ... .. ... . ... .. .... . .. ... . .... . ... .. ... .. .. ... . 17

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS .. .. .. ... .. ... . .. ... .... . . 18

ix
 Recommended Originals.. ........................................................................... .18

Non-recommended Originals For The Optional Document Feeder.............1 8

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS ............................... .19

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT

FEEDER (ADF) .. .. .. .. ... .. . ... .. .. .. .. ... .. . .... . .. ... .. .. .. .. ... . ... .. .. ... . .... . . .... . ... .. . .... . . .... . .. 19

SElTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT

FEEDER (SADF) . .. . .... . ... .. . .... . .. ... .. .. .. .. ... . ... .. ... .. . .... . .. ... . ... .. . .... . .. ... .. ... . ... .. . .... 21

TROUBLESHOOTING .... . .. ... .. ... . ... .. .. .. .. .... . . .... . ... .. . .... . .. ... .. .. .. ... .. . .... . .. ... . ... .. . 24

LOADING PAPER ............................................................................ ............ .26

Non-recommended Paper ............................................................................ 26
Notes For Paper.. ........................................................................................ .26
Loading Paper In The Paper Tray .............................................................. .27
Loading Paper In The Large Capacity Tray.. .............................................. .28

ADDING TONER ........................................................................................... 29

ADDING STAPLES .. . ..~...........................~.............~.............~......................... 30

CLEARING MISFEEDS.. ......................... m..

......................... m..
...................... .31
Check The Display ....................................................................................... 31

Misfeeds In A, B, C, Y, Or Z Sections.. ...................................................... .32

Misfeed In The Large Capacity Tray.. ......................................................... .32
Misfeeds In P Section .................................................................................. 33

Misfeeds In R Section ................................................................................. .33

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES ................................................................. 34

:Y”,::L:;,,,.~~~~~“,~r~,,,~~,,~:~:~~,;~~,,~,~~~~~,~~

CHANGING SElTlNGS
<^
i
:<_I
Is*j.‘l‘3<:
~~i~~-~~~“*fiDd~,~~~‘~~~~~~~~~~ -a--e1w
CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE .. .. ... . .. ... ... .. . .... . .. ... . .... . .. ... .. ... . .. ... .. ... . .... . .. ... . 36
Changing The Paper Size In The 1st Tray . ..._............._.............._............._.. 36
Changing The Paper Size In The Optional Tray Unit (Trays 2, 3, and 4) ..41

USER TOOLS .. .... . ... .. . .... .. .. .. .. ... .. ... . .... . .... . .. ... .. ... . .. ... ... .. . .... . ... .. . .... .. .. .. .. ... . ... 42
User Tools Menu . ..__.............................._._.......,...____...,..,....____.....,................ 42
X
 How To Change The Basic Settings.. ......................................................... 43

Basic Settings.. ............................................................................................ 44

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS.. ............................................... 49

MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE.. ............................................................... .52

Document Feeder (Option). ......................................................................... 52

DO’S AND DON’TS ....................................................................................... 53

General Operations ..................................................................................... 53
When Adding Toner.. ................................................................................... 53

When Removing Misfed Paper.. .................................................................. 53

Document Feeder (Option). ......................................................................... 54

Finisher (Option). ......................................................................................... 54

PAPER TIPS .................................................................................................. 55

SCANNABLE AREA ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . ... .. .. ... . ... .. . .... . . .... . ... .. .. ... . .. ... .. .. .. ... .. . ... .. . . 55

WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE .............................................................. 56

Environment.. ............................................................................................... 56

Power Connection ....................................................................................... 56

Access To The Machine.. ............................................................................ 57

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ........................................................... 58

Paper ........................................................................................................... 58

Paper Storage.. ............................................................................................ 59

Toner Storage.. ............................................................................................ 59

PRINTER . ... .. ... . .. ... . .. ... .. .. .. ... .. . .... . ... .. . .... . .. ... ... .. . ... .. .. ... . ... .. . ... .. . .... . . .... . . .... . .. .. 62

SCANNER . . . .... . .. ... . .... . .. ... .. .. .. ... .. . .... . ... .. . .... . .. ... .. ... . .. ... . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... . .. ... . ... .. . ... . 63

GENERAL .. .. .. .. .. ... . .. ... .. ... . ... .. . .... . ... .. . .... .. .. .. ... .. . ... .. ... .. . .... . . .... . .. ... . ... .. .. ... . ... .. 63

xi
 DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION) ................................................................. 64

FINISHER (OPTION) .................................................................................... .65

3-BIN SORTER ............................................................................................. .66

lOOO-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION) ............................................................ 67

1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION) ............................................................ 67

xii
 nb-2

WHERE IS IT &
WHAT IS IT

1
 nb-2

2
 nb-2

MAIN UNIT AND OPTIONS

MAIN UNIT AND OPTIONS

3 1

1. Document feeder Insert a stack of originals here. They will be fed

(Option) automatically.
2. Copy tray Copied/printed papers are delivered here.
(Option)
3. 3 - bin sorter Sorts, stacks copied/printed papers.
(Option)
4. Finisher Sorts, stacks, and staples copied/printed papers.
(Option)
5. 1500-sheet tray unit Holds 1500 sheets of paper.
(Option)
6. 1000-sheet tray unit Holds 1000 sheets of paper.
(Option)

❐ Other mechanical options: platen cover and key counter

3
 nb-2

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR PART NAMES

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR PART NAMES

4
3
2 5
1

7
8

10

13

11
12

14
15

4
 nb-2

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR PART NAMES

1. Copy tray (option) Completed copies are delivered here. Regarding

the capacity of the tray.
2. Main switch Switches the machine between on and standby
conditions.
3. Auto response When someone comes close to the machine, it
(human) sensor will automatically switch from Low Power mode
to standby mode.
4. Platen cover (option) Lower this cover over originals for copying.
5. Exposure glass* Position originals here face down for copying/
scanning.
*After turning off the main switch, the exposure glass might be hot
because of the anticondensation function. This is not a problem.

6. Front cover Open to access the inside of the machine.

7. Unit for two-sided Makes two-sided copies/prints.
copies/prints
(Duplex unit)

8. Paper tray Holds 500 sheets of copy paper.

9. Bypass tray Use to copy/print onto OHP sheets, adhesive la-
bels, translucent paper, post cards, and non-
standard size paper.
10. Large capacity tray Holds 1,000 sheets of paper.
11. Right cover of Open to remove misfed paper.
the optional tray unit
12. Key counter holder Insert the optional key counter here.
13. Operation panel Operator controls and touch panel are located
here.
14. Toner bottle Replace the toner bottle when " f Add Toner"
is displayed on the display.
15. Fusing unit Fuses the image to the paper. When accessing
the inside of the machine, use caution. This unit
may be very hot.

5
 nb-2

OPERATION PANEL

OPERATION PANEL
Keys
2 3 4

1
16
15

14

13

1. Contrast Dial 6. Job Recall key

Changes the brightness of the Use to recall your previous copy
display. settings.

2. User Tools key 7. Clear Modes/Low Power Mode

Changes the basic settings and key
copy features. Press to clear the previously en-
tered copy job settings. Also use
3. Guidance key to switch to and from Low Power
Shows guidance for functions. mode.

8. Interrupt key
4. Touch Panel Display Press to make interrupt copies.

5. Program key
Press to select the program
mode.

6
 nb-2

OPERATION PANEL

5 6 7

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6
9
0

12 11 10

9. Start key 13. Copy key

Press to start copying. Use to set Use to enter Copy mode from
the Auto Start. Printer/Scanner mode.

10. Clear/Stop key 14. Printer/Scanner key

While entering numbers, press to Use to enter Printer/Scanner
cancel a number you have en- mode from the copy mode.
tered. While copying, press to
stop copying. 15. Data in indicator

11. Enter key

Use to enter data in selected 16. On line indicator
modes.

12. Number keys

Use to enter the desired number of
copies and data for selected modes.

7
 nb-2

OPERATION PANEL

How To Use The Operation Panel

The type of operation panel is different depending on your location.

For U.S. model

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

For Europe model

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6

The panel layout is grouped as follows:

❐ Touch Panel Display
Use to make selections and navigate menus. Also shows the machine status
and various messages. The status area is blank when in Printer mode and
off-line.
❐ Numeric Keypad
Use to enter numbers and control how the machine functions.
❐ Control Keys
Other keys used when printing and configuring the machine.
When you first turn on the machine, the Touch Panel Display shows the
Copy Menu. To access Printer mode, press the [Printer/Scanner] button on
the left side of the operation panel.

8
 nb-2

OPERATION PANEL

Printer Mode (Printer controller option must be installed)

Press the Printing/Scanner key.

The on-line status screen will appear as below.

In this screen shot, access priority is "share".

Scanner Mode (Scanner kit option must be installed)

Press the Printer/Scanner key.

Touch [Scanner].

9
 nb-2

OPERATION PANEL

10
 nb-3

BASICS

11
 nb-3

STARTING THE MACHINE

STARTING THE MACHINE

When The Main Switch Is In The Stand-by Position

1
Turn on the main switch.

2
Wait for the machine to warm up.
During the warm-up period (within
140 seconds), "u Please wait." ap-
pears on the display.

After warm-up, "v Ready" ap-

3 pears on the display.

When The Display Is Off And The Clear

Modes/Low Power Mode Key Is Lit

The machine is in Low Power mode.

1
Hold down the Clear Modes/Low
Power Mode key until the indica-
tor is goes out. The machine will
return to the standby condition.

12
 nb-3

STARTING THE MACHINE

❐ The following actions will also wake up the machine:

♦ Operating the machine.
♦ Opening or closing the optional platen cover.
♦ Opening or closing the optional document feeder.
♦ Setting originals in the optional document feeder.
♦ Opening or closing the bypass tray.
♦ Pressing any key.

When Prompted For A User Code

1
The display instruct you to input
your user code.

2
Enter your user code (6 digits)
using the Number keys. 1 2 3
❐ If you make a mistake, touch the [C]
key or press the Clear/Stop key. and 4 5 6
enter the right number.
7 8 9

3
Touch the [#] key or press the 0
C
Enter key.
❐ To prevent others from making copies
with your user code, when you have
finished using the machine, hold down
the Clear/Stop key and press the
Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key.

13
 nb-3

SWITCHING BETWEEN THE COPIER, PRINTER AND SCANNER FUNCTIONS

SWITCHING BETWEEN THE COPIER, PRINTER

AND SCANNER FUNCTIONS
By default, the machine is in Share mode and set to Copier when you first
switch on.
To Use The Copier:
Press the Copy key

Depending on the machine configuration, it may not be possible to use this

function while another job is running.
To Use The Printer:
Press the Printer/Scanner key.
The display will change.
☛ refer the screen on page 9.

Depending on the machine configuration, it may not be possible to use this

function while another job is still running.
To Use The Scanner:
1. Press the Printer/Scanner key.
The machine will switch to Printer.
☛ refer the figure on page 9.

2. Touch the Scanner key.

The machine will switch to Scanner.

Depending on the machine configuration, it may not be possible to use this

function while another job is still running.

If the Scanner Only Mode is selected, scanner function can be used at the
begining.

14
 nb-3

SWITCHING BETWEEN THE COPIER, PRINTER AND SCANNER FUNCTIONS

How Are Multiple Scan, Print And Copy Jobs Handled?

Four modes are available that decide the priority the machine gives to
various jobs.

Share Mode

Share mode lets you copy, print and scan, and is the default mode when
you switch the machine on.

If there are no current print or scan jobs, the Copier screen is shown and
you can use all the normal Copier functions.
The screen will change to the Printer screen if:
❐ A print job is received.
❐ You press the [Printer/Scanner] button.
If you wish to switch back to the Copy screen, just press the [Copy] key. If
there are no current print jobs, the screen will change immediately. If the
machine is printing, however, the screen will change as soon as the current
print job has finished. Any other queued print jobs will be temporarily
suspended until you finish your copying.

Note that even if the Copier screen is shown, the machine will still receive
print jobs as long as the Online indicator is lit.

Printer Priority Mode

This is the same as Share mode, but you cannot use the [interrupt]
buttons.

Printer Only Mode

Only printing is allowed. You cannot use the [Interrupt], [Copy] or [Scan-
ner] buttons.

Scanner Only Mode

Only scanning is allowed and the machine is off-line for print jobs. You
cannot use the [Interrupt] or [Copy] keys.

15
 nb-3

SWITCHING BETWEEN THE COPIER, PRINTER AND SCANNER FUNCTIONS

Changing To Another Mode

1
Make sure the machine is in Cop-
ier mode.
Press the Printer/Scanner key to
enter Printer mode.

2
Touch [On-line/Off-line].

16
 nb-3

SWITCHING BETWEEN THE COPIER, PRINTER AND SCANNER FUNCTIONS

3
Touch [Setup Menu].

4
Touch [Configuration Menu].

5
Touch [Next].

6
Touch [Change] in the mode op-
tions.
Touch either [Share], [Scanner
only], [Printer Priority] o r
[Printer only].
Touch [Exit].

7
T ou c h [Preve. Menu] th r ee
times.

8
Touch [On-line/Off-line] to return
to the printer on-line screen.

17
 nb-3

INTERRUPTING THE CURRENT JOB

INTERRUPTING THE CURRENT JOB

This machine cannot perform two jobs at the same time. Multiple jobs are
carried out in the order that they were started.

You can interrupt a printing job to make copies.

Depending on the original configuration settings, you may not even be able
to interrupt the above cases.

After your interrupt operation has finished and the auto-clear time has
elapsed, the machine goes back tothe operation it was doing before you
interrupted it. For more about the configuration settings,

The following functions cannot be used during an interrupt operation:

❐ Duplex mode
❐ Sort, Rotate Sort
❐ Stack, Rotate Stack
❐ Stapling
❐ Adjust Image mode
❐ Stamp
❐ Combine
❐ Series Copies

Interrupting A Print Job To Make Copies

1
Press the Interrupt key.

2
Make your copies as you would normally do.

18
 nb-3

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED

ORIGINALS
Recommended Originals
❐ For details of originals that the optional document feeder can handle, ☛ see
page 66.

Non-recommended Originals For The Optional

Document Feeder

$CAUTION: The following types of originals are not recommended for use
with the document feeder. Place them directly on the expo-
sure glass.
❐ Originals thicker than 128 g/m2, 34 lb.
❐ Originals thicker than 105 g/m2, 28 lb. when using two-sided originals
❐ Originals thinner than 40 g/m2, 11 lb. But for originals between 40 and 52 g/m2
(11 and 14 lb.), the document feeder must be set to Thin Paper mode. ☛ See
the "Copy Reference".
❐ Originals larger than A3, 11" x 17"
❐ Originals smaller than A5, 51/2" x 81/2"
❐ Paper with any king of coating (such as carbon) on the back
❐ Folded, curled, creased, or damaged originals
❐ Mailing labels, or perforated originals
❐ OHP transparencies
❐ Translucent paper
❐ Pasted originals
❐ Damp originals
❐ Sticky originals
❐ Wavy originals
❐ Originals that are not made from paper
❐ Originals written in pencil on both sides, or two-sided carbon originals
❐ Thermal fax paper, CRO (camera ready original) or aluminum foil
❐ Originals with globs of ink from a ball-point pen

19
 nb-3

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE

GLASS

1
Lift the optional platen cover or
the optional document feeder.

2
Set the original face down on the
exposure glass. The original
should be aligned to the rear left
corner.

3
Lower the optional platen cover
or the optional document feeder.

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE

OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)
You can insert a stack of originals (one-sided or two-sided) of the same size
into the document feeder. These originals are individually fed onto and
removed from the exposure glass.

1
Correct any curl, fold, or crease
in the originals before setting.

20
 nb-3

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)

2
Confirm that the Insert Original
indicator is lit before setting the
originals.

3
Confirm that no previous originals
remain on the exposure glass.

4
Adjust the guide to the original
size.

5
Set the originals into the docu-
ment feeder until the Insert
Original indicator goes off.
❐ When using the machine as a scan-
ner, originals can be set either face
down and face up.
❐ The guide must touch the front side
of the originals.

❐ Do not stack originals above the limit

mark.

21
 nb-3

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE

OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)
You can insert one original at a time into the document feeder. The original
is automatically fed onto and removed from the exposure glass.
❐ SADF is not available, when using the machine as a scanner with an ISIS
driver.

1
Correct any curl, fold, or crease
in the originals before setting.

2
Confirm that the Insert Original
indicator is lit before setting the
originals.

3
Confirm that no previous originals
remain on the exposure glass.

4
Adjust the guide to the original
size.

5
Set the original into the document
feeder until the Insert Original
indicator goes off.
❐ If you are copying a stack of originals
one sheet at a time and you want to
keep them in order, start with the last
page of the originals.
❐ The original guide must touch the
front side of the original.

22
 nb-3

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

6
Press the Start key.

7
While the Auto Feed indicator is
lit after an original is fed, set the
next original. The original is auto-
matically fed and copied.
❐ If you have set more than two origi-
nals, the Auto Feed indicator is not
lit after the last original is fed. In this
case, press the Start key again after
setting an original.

23
 nb-3

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

24
 nb-4

WHAT TO DO IF
SOMETHING GOES
WRONG

25
 nb-4

TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING
Machine’s Condition Action
Check the power cord. Is it properly plugged into the
Nothing happens when the main switch outlet?
is turned on.
➠ Plug it in firmly.
The machine has automatically switches
Turn on the main switch.
itself off (Auto Off).
The Clear Modes/Low Power Mode The copier is in Low Power mode.
key is lit, and the display is off. ➠ Press the Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key.
and messages are displayed. Follow the instructions on the display.
Paper runs out. Load paper.
f is displayed. Add toner.
i is displayed. Add staples.
Y is displayed. Remove misfed paper.
Z is displayed.
k is displayed. Close the indicated doors or covers.
Set the fusing unit correctly. For position of the fusing
is displayed.

unit,
is displayed. Remove the jammed staples.

 is displayed.
Turn the main switch off, wait a few seconds, and then
turn it on. If  appears again, call your service


representative.
is displayed. Used toner bottle is full. Call your service representative.

26
 nb-4

TROUBLESHOOTING

Machine’s Condition Action

After loading a new staple cartridge, staples might not
be ejected the first few times you try to use the stapler.
➠ Try again.
Staples do not come out at all. A few sheets might not be stapled. To correct this, try
turning over the paper stack in the tray unit. If there is
no improvement, change to paper with less curl.
There are jammed staples in the stapler.
➠ Remove jammed staples.
Is the right kind of paper in the paper tray?
➠ Paper size and weight must be within the
specification for this copier.
Is folded, wrinkled, damp, or curled paper in the paper
tray?
➠ Always use dry, undamaged paper.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Is the paper properly set in the paper tray?
➠ Always load paper correctly.
Are there any pieces of misfed paper or other foreign
objects in the machine?
➠ Make sure that the paper path is completely clear of
paper and other material after a misfeed.
Paper size setting is not correct.
➠ Set the proper paper size with the User Tools.

❐ For details of printer and scanner error messages, please refer to the Printer or
Scanner Reference.
❐ If you cannot correct the problem by taking the above actions, please contact
your service representative.

27
 nb-4

LOADING PAPER

LOADING PAPER
❐ Regarding paper sizes that can be set, see the following pages:
1st tray ☛ See page 38, 40, and 41.
optional tray unit ☛ See page 43.
large capacity tray ☛ See page 51.
❐ If you want to change the paper size, see the following pages:
1st tray ☛ See page 38, 40, and 41.
optional tray unit ☛ See page 43.
large capacity tray ☛ See page 51.

Non-recommended Paper
❐ Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper
❐ Torn paper
❐ Perforated paper
❐ Paper with conductive or low electrical resistance coating such as carbon or
silver coating
❐ Thermal paper, art paper
❐ Thin paper that has low stiffness

Notes For Paper

❐ Load paper with the copy side down in the 500-sheet trays, and with the copy
side up in the large capacity tray. If copies are curled, try turning the copy
paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy paper with
less curl.
❐ Do not use paper that has been already copied/printed on.
❐ The following types of paper cannot be fed from the paper tray. Load them in
the bypass tray.
• OHP transparencies • adhesive labels • translucent paper
• post card
❐ Correct curls in paper before loading.
❐ Fan paper to get air between the sheets before loading.

28
 nb-4

LOADING PAPER

Loading Paper In The Paper Tray

1 Pull out the paper tray until it

stops.

2 Load paper in the paper tray. Do

not stack paper above the limit
mark inside the paper tray.

3 Push the tray in until it stops.

29
 nb-4

LOADING PAPER

Loading Paper In The Large Capacity Tray

1 If the Down key is not lit, press it

to lower the bottom plate. The
key will blink while the bottom
plate is moving down.
❐ If the key is lit or blinking, proceed to
step 2.

2 After the Down key stops blinking

and lights, open the cover.

3 Load paper into the tray (not

more than 1,000 sheets). The pa-
per stack must be flush with the
left side.

4 Close the cover.

30
 nb-4

ADDING TONER

ADDING TONER
When " f Add Toner" is displayed on the display, it is time to supply toner.
$WARNING: Do not incinerate the used toner bottle. Toner bottle
might ignite when exposed to open flame.
$WARNING: Dispose of the used toner bottle according to your local
regulations.
NOTE: When adding toner, do not turn off the main switch. If you do, your
copy settings are cleared.
NOTE: Before setting the new toner bottle, shake it well at least 5 or 6
times.
NOTE: Do not remove the toner cap of the new toner bottle.

1 Open the front cover of the ma-

chine.

You can find the sticker (with f

2 at the top) explaining how to add
toner, inside the front cover as
shown in the illustration.

3 Load the new toner bottle follow-

ing the instructions on the sticker.

31
 nb-4

ADDING STAPLES

ADDING STAPLES
When " i Add Staples" is displayed, add staples as follows:
❐ Do not remove the tape before set-
ting the new staple refill in the car- cartridge
tridge. If you do, the staples fall into
pieces.

refill tape

1 Open the front door of the fin-

isher.

You can find a sticker (with i at

2 the top) explaining how to add a
staple cartridge, inside the front
door as shown in the illustration.

3 Add the new staple cartridge fol-

lowing the instructions on the
sticker.
❐ After adding the new staple, several pages will be printed without stapling.

32
 nb-4

CLEARING MISFEEDS

CLEARING MISFEEDS
?I WARNING: Since some parts of the machine are supplied with
high electrical voltage, touch only the parts speci-
fied in the instructions on the sticker inside the ma-
chine’s cover.
?I WARNING: When removing misfed paper from sections B and
C, use caution. The fusing unit may be very hot.
See page 4 for the position of the fusing unit.
$CAUTION: Do not leave any torn scraps within the machine.
NOTE: When clearing misfeeds, make sure that all units and levers are
returned to their original positions and all covers are closed.
NOTE: Do not touch originals in the optional document feeder when a pa-
per misfeed occurs in the machine. If you do, the machine eill not
know which originals have been copied and which should be cop-
ied.

Check The Display

The display shows the location of mis-

fed paper. Remove them following in-
structions.
❐ P is indicated only when your ma-
chine is equipped with the optional
document feeder.
❐ Right figure shows when your ma-
chine is equipped with the optional
Finisher and Document Feeder.

33
 nb-4

CLEARING MISFEEDS

Misfeeds In A, B, C, Y, Or Z Sections

1 Open the front cover of the ma-

chine.

2 You can find a sticker (with Y at

the top) explaining how to re-
move misfed paper, inside the
front cover as shown in the illus-
tration.

3 Remove misfed paper following

the instructions on the sticker.

Misfeed In The Large Capacity Tray

1 Swing out the tray grasping the

tray handle, and remove any mis-
fed paper.

2 Return the tray to its original po-

sition.

34
 nb-4

CLEARING MISFEEDS

Misfeeds In P Section

1 You can find a sticker, explaining

how to remove the misfed paper,
P
on the optional document feeder
as shown in the illustration.

2 Remove the misfed original refer-

ring to the sticker.

Misfeeds In R Section

When The Optional Finisher Is Installed

1 Open the front door of the op-

tional finisher.

2 You can find a sticker (with Y at

the top) explaining how to re-
move misfed paper, inside the
front door as shown in the illus-
tration.

3 Remove misfed paper following

the instructions on the sticker.

When The Optional 3-bin Sorter Is Installed

1 You can find a sticker, explaining

how to remove the misfed paper,
on the optional 3 bin sorter.

2 Remove the misfed paper refer-

ring to the sticker.

35
 nb-4

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

When "
Check Staple Unit" is displayed, staples are jammed in the
optional finisher. Follow these steps to solve the problem.

?I WARNING: Since some parts of the finisher are supplied with

high electrical voltage, touch only the parts speci-
fied in the instructions on the sticker inside the fin-
isher’s cover.
❐ After loading a new staple cartridge, staples might not be ejected the first few
times you try to use the stapler.

1 Open the front door of the op-

tional finisher.

2 You can find a sticker (with

at
the top) explaining how to re-
move jammed staples, inside the
front door as shown in the illus-
tration.

3 Remove jammed staples follow-

ing the instructions on the sticker.

36
 nb-5

CHANGING SETTINGS

37
 nb-5

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE

Changing The Paper Size In The 1st Tray

Standard Size Paper

❐ You can select paper of the following sizes:

Metric version Inch version

A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;, B5 : ;, A5 : 11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
81/2" x 11" : ; 51/2" x 81/2" :*, A3 ;, A4 : ;, A5 :
*: 51/2" x 81/2" : is not available when using 3 bin sorter.

1
Pull the paper tray out until it
stops.

2
Remove the copy paper.

3
Remove the left guide as shown
in the illustration. 2

38
 nb-5

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE

4
Set the left guide to the paper
size you want to use as shown in
the illustration. 1

5
Load paper in the tray.
❐ Do not stack paper over the limit
mark.

6
While pressing the release lever
on the front guide, slide the front
and rear guides to the paper size
you want to use.

7
Select the paper size by adjusting
the paper size selector on the
back side of the tray.

8
Push the paper tray in until it
stops.

39
 nb-5

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE

F/F4 Size Paper (8" x 13", 81/4" x 13", or 81/2" x 13)

1 to 6 on pages 38
1
Follow steps
and 39.

2
Select "F/F4" by adjusting the pa-
per size selector on the back side
of the tray.

3 Press the User Tools key.

4
Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

5
Touch the [Next] key three times to reach the paper size setting menu.

6
In the "Tray 1 <F/F4> Paper Size Setting" menu, the present size
setting is displayed. Touch the [Change] key. Select the new paper
size by touching a key. Then, touch the [Exit] key.

7
Press the User Tools key, then push the paper tray in until it stops.

40
 nb-5

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE

Special Size Paper

❐ You can select paper of the following sizes:

Metric version Inch version

11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 51/2" x 81/2" :*, 11" x 15" ;, 10" x 14" ;, 8" x 101/2" ;,
8" x 10" ; 8" x 10" ;, B4 ;
*: When using 3-bin sorter, 51/2" x 81/2" : is not displayed.

1 to 6 on pages 38
1
Follow steps
and 39.

2 Select * by adjusting the paper

size selector on the back side of
the tray.

3
Press the User Tools key.

4
Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

41
 nb-5

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE

5
Touch the [Next] key three times to reach the paper size setting menu.

6 In the "Tray 1 <*> Paper Size Setting" menu, the present size setting is
displayed. Touch the [Change] key. Select the new paper size by
touching a key. Then, touch the [Exit] key.

*
❐ " " (asterisk) is displayed on the key for paper sizes that cannot be detected in
some modes (ex. Auto Paper Select).

7
Press the User Tools key, then push the paper tray in until it stops.

42
 nb-5

CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE

Changing The Paper Size In The Optional Tray Unit

(Trays 2, 3, and 4)
❐ You can select paper of the following sizes:

Metric version Inch version

11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;, B5 : ;
11" x 15" ;, 10" x 14" ;, 8" x 101/2" ;,
11" x 17" ; , 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
8" x 10" ;, A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;,
8" x 10" ;, 8" x 13" ;, 81/2" x 13" ;,
8" x 13" ;, 81/2" x 13" ;,
81/4" x 13" ;
81/4" x 13" ;

1 to 6 on pages 38
1
Follow steps
and 39.

2
Press the User Tools key.

3
Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

4
Touch the [Next] key three times to reach the paper size setting menu.

5
Find the paper tray (2, 3, or 4) and touch the [Change] key. Select the
new paper size by touching a key. Then, touch the [Exit] key.

6
Press the User Tools key, then push the paper tray in until it stops.

43
 nb-5

USER TOOLS

USER TOOLS
This section is for operators in charge of this machine. The User Tools allow
access to advanced settings.

User Tools Menu

Basic Settings

Menu
Auto Response (Human) Sensor
Operation panel beeper
Copy count display
Set date
Set time
Auto Reset
Low Power Timer
Auto Off Timer
Paper Type Display (for each tray)
Tray 1 <*> Paper Size Setting
Tray 1 <F/F4>Paper Size Setting
Paper Size Setting (for tray 2, 3, and 4 (option))
Paper Tray Priority
Original: <F/F4> Size Setting
ADF: Thin Paper Mode
Auto Tray Switching
Set User Code(s)
Output Trays
Function Timeout

44
 nb-5

USER TOOLS

How To Change The Basic Settings

1
Confirm that the machine is in the
initial condition. If not, press the
Clear Modes/Low Power Mode
key.

2
Press the User Tools key.

3
Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

4
Select the desired settings following the instruction on the display.

❐ [▼Next] : Use to go to the next page.

[▲Prev.] : Use to go back to the previous page.
[Exit] : Touch this key after entering the new data.
In the "User Tools Main Menu", touch to exit the User Tools condition.
[Cancel] : Touch to return to the previous menu without changing any data.
[Menu] : Use to go back to the previous menu.

5
To return to the initial condition, press the User Tools key.

45
 nb-5

USER TOOLS

Basic Settings

MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Response When the auto response sensor does not detect anyone
(Human) Sensor operating the machine for a while, it will switch to one of the
Reset modes (Auto Reset, Low Power mode, Auto Off, or
SADF Auto Reset). You change the delay before this cuts in.
❐ Default: Yes (On)
Operation panel The noise made when you push a button can be tumed off.
beeper ❐ Default: On
Copy count display The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies
made (count up) or the number of copies remaining to be made
(count down).
❐ Default: Up (count up)
Set date Use to set the date and copier’s internal clock.
Set time ❐ Date Stamping uses this date.
❐ Remember to adjust the clock for Daylight Saving Time.
[▼ Next]
Auto Reset The machine returns to standby automatically a while after
every job. You can change the delay from 0 (no Auto Reset) to
180 seconds.
❐ Default: 30 seconds
Low Power Timer [U.S. model]
The copier will automatically enter a Low Power condition after
the selected time after the last copying job has been completed.
This time can be set from 1 to 120 minutes in 1 minute steps.
❐ Default: 15 minutes
❐ The operator can activate the Low Power mode by pressing the
Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key for more than one second.
❐ Time required to return to a ready condition from the Low Power
mode is less than 30 seconds.
❐ In this mode, power consumption is reduced from less than 0.20 kW
(standby) to less than 0.11 kW
[Europian model]
The copier will automatically enter a Low Power mode while
after the last job has been completed. You can change the
delay from 0 (Low Power mode off) to 180 seconds.
❐ When "0" is set, the machine does not enter a Low Power mode.

46
 nb-5

USER TOOLS

Auto Off Timer To conserve energy, this copier automatically tums off 60
minutes after the last copying job has been completed. This
time can be set from 10 to 120 minutes in 10 minutes steps.
❐ Default: 60 minutes
❐ To exit Auto Off mode, turm on the main switch. The main switch for
this copier has three positions, press it all the way, and hold for 1 -
2 seconds.
❐ In Auto Off mode, power consumption is reduced from less than
0.20kW (standby) to less than 0.04W.
❐ This function is available when using the machine as a copier.
Output Trays Copy output tray and printer output tray can be select.
❐ This function is available when the 3-bin sorter is equipped.
Function Timeout 0 to 180 seconds (step 10 seconds) can be selected.
❐ Default: 30 seconds

47
 nb-5

USER TOOLS

(Basic Settings)
MENU DESCRIPTION
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]
Paper Type Display When recycled paper or special paper is in the paper trays, you
can have the paper type shown on the display.
❐ Default: No display
❐ You cannot select both recycled paper and special paper in the
same tray.
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]
Tray 1 <*> Paper Size If you want to use a special paper size, you can select Tray 1
Setting for this purpose.
❐ Default: Metric version: 11" x 17"
Inch version: 10" x 14"
❐ For paper sizes that can be selected, ☛ see page 41.
❐ Make sure you select * by adjusting the paper size selector on the
back side of the tray.
❐ * (asterisk) is displayed on paper size keys that cannot be used by
Auto Paper Select.
Tray 1 <F/F4> Paper Select if you want to use 81/2" x 13, 8" x 13", or 81/4" x 13"
Size Setting paper for the 1st tray.
❐ Default: 81/2" x 13
❐ For more details ☛ see page 40.
❐ Make sure you select F/F4 by adjusting the paper size selector on
the back side of the tray.
Paper Size Setting Use to change the paper sizes in the optional tray unit.
Tray 2, 3, and 4 ❐ Default: Metric version: A4 :
(option) Inch version: 81/2" x 11" :
❐ Make sure you change the paper size setting, when changing the
paper size in these trays otherwise a misfeed might occur.
❐ Also be sure to select the paper size when installing the optional
tray unit.
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]

48
 nb-5

USER TOOLS

(Basic Settings)
MENU DESCRIPTION
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]
Paper Tray Priority ❐ You can choose the tray which will be active under the following
conditions:
♦ when the main switch is turned on.
♦ after Auto Reset or Low Power mode
♦ after pressing the Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key
(* If "Auto Tray Switch" is on, these are valid in printer mode.)
❐ Default: Tray T (1000-sheet large capacity tray)
❐ This function is available, when using the machine as a copier.
Original: <F/F4> Size You can select one of the following original sizes to be detected
Setting in the Auto Paper Select and Auto Reduce/Enlarge modes as F
size.
81/2" x 13, 81/4" x 13", or 8" x 13"
❐ Default: 81/2" x 13"
ADF: Thin Paper Mode Use when changing the type of originals to be fed into the
optional document feeder. Select when you use thin originals
(40 ~ 52 g/m2 or 11 ~ 14 lb).
❐ Default: Normal (Not Thin)
Auto Tray Switching If you load paper of the same size and in the same direction in
two or more trays, the copier automatically shifts to another tray
when the tray in use runs out of paper. You can cancel this
setting.
* If "Auto Tray Switch" is on, these are valia in printer mode.
❐ Default: Yes
❐ Trays for special paper and recycled paper can be used only when
the Special Paper Size setting is the same.
❐ This function is available, when using the machine as a copier.

49
 nb-5

USER TOOLS

(Basic Settings)
MENU DESCRIPTION

Set User Code(s)

If User Codes are turned on, operators must input their user codes before using the ma-
chine. The machine keeps count of the number of copies made under each user code.
To switch on this mode, utilize the "Set User Code Mode" User Tool and then contact
your sales/service representative.

Check/Reset/Print Use to check the number of copies made under each user
Copy Counter code, clear each code’s counter, clear all code’s counters and
print the counter data for all user codes.

User Code
Use to register, change, delete one user code, or delete all user
Register/Change/Delete
codes.
❐ Up to 20 user codes (6 digits) can be registered.
❐ When changing user codes, the number of copies made under the
old code is added to that made under the new user code.
❐ When deleting user codes, the number of copies made under the
deleted code is deleted.
❐ Registered codes will be sorted in numerical order.

Assign/Activate If you select [Yes], only operators who know the key operator
Key Operator Code code can access User Tools from User Code mode.
❐ Default: No
❐ If you select [Yes], you should register the key operator access
code. ☛ Use the "Key Operator Code" menu.

Key Operator Code Use to register or change the key operator code.

Set User Code Mode Turn User Codes on or off.

❐ Default: No (not User Code mode)
❐ After select [Yes], please contact your sales/service representative
to set your machine to the User Code mode.

[▲ Prev.]

50
 nb-5

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS

Some features can be adjusted by your service representative to suit your
needs. This section gives a brief description of these features. For more
information, contact your service representative.

LCT Paper Size Change

The large capacity tray holds A4 : (for the metric version) or 81/2" x 11" :
(for the inch version) copy paper. If you need, A4 : can be set for the inch
version, and 81/2" x 11" : can be set for the metric version.

Auto Stamping (for metric version)

If your machine is the metric version, Auto Stamping cannot be used as a
default setting. You can cancel this setting and use this function.

A3, 11" x 17" Double Count

When you use A3, 11" x 17" paper, your service representative can set the
copier to count each A3, 11" x 17" as two copies.

Auto Image Density Level Selection

Auto Image Density level can be adjusted to lighter or darker.

APS A5/51/2" x 81/2" Detection

Your service representative can set the copier to detect the original size on
the exposure glass as A5 ; (for metric version) or 51/2" x 81/2" ; (for inch
version) whenever the copier cannot detect it with Auto Paper Select.

51
 nb-5

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS

52
 nb-6

APPENDIX

53
 nb-6

MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE

MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE

To maintain high copy quality, clean the following parts and units regularly
with a damp cloth and wipe them with a dry cloth.

Exposure glass Platen cover

Document Feeder (Option)

Feed-in unit Belt

54
 nb-6

DO’S AND DON’TS

DO’S AND DON’TS

General Operations
❐ When using the bypass tray, paper should be set in the bypass tray lengthwise
(;).
❐ Do not place sheets of paper or originals on the cover of the large capacity tray.
❐ Do not move the machine when the main switch is turned on.
❐ Do not move the machine a few minutes after the main switch is turned off.

When Adding Toner

❐ Do not incinerate toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when ex-
posed to open flame.
❐ Dispose of the used toner bottle according to local regulations.
❐ When adding toner, do not turn off the main switch. If you do, your settings are
cleared.
❐ Before setting the new toner, shake it well, at least 5 or 6 times.
❐ Do not remove the inner cap of the new toner bottle.

When Removing Misfed Paper

❐ Since some parts of the machine are supplied with high electrical voltage, touch
only the parts specified in the instructions on the sticker inside the machine’s
cover.
❐ When removing misfed paper from sections B and C, use cautions. The fusing
unit may be very hot.
❐ Do not leave any torn scrapes within the machine.
❐ When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the main switch. If you do, your machine
settings are cleared.
❐ After clearing misfeeds, make sure that all units and levers are returned to their
original positions and all covers are closed.

55
 nb-6

DO’S AND DON’TS

Document Feeder (Option)

❐ While originals are fed from the original table to the exposure glass, do not pull
out the originals.
❐ Do not lift the document feeder until the last original has been completely fed out.
❐ Do not press down or hold originals after inserting them.
❐ Do not press any parts of the document feeder strongly.

Finisher (Option)
❐ Do not remove papers from the shift tray while copying/printing.

56
 nb-6

PAPER TIPS

PAPER TIPS
❐ If you get a lot of misfeeds, try turning over the paper stack in the 500-sheet or
large capacity tray. If there is no improvement, change to paper with less curl.
❐ Load paper with the copy/print side down in the 500-sheet trays, and with the
copy/print side up in the large capacity tray. If papers are curled, try turning the
copy/print paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the
copy/print paper with less curl.

SCANNABLE AREA
Leading and side edges of the original image are not copied/scanned.

a a: 2 + 2.5 mm
2 − 1.5 mm
b: 2 ± 1.5 mm
c: 3 ± 2 mm
Paper feed direction d: 2 ± 2 mm

c d

57
 nb-6

WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE

WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE

Environment

The installation location should be carefully chosen because environmental

conditions greatly affect the performance of a machine.
Optimum environmental conditions
o
❐ Temperature: 10 - 30 C
❐ Humidity: 15 - 90 %
❐ A strong and level base.
❐ To avoid possible built-up of ozone, make sure to locate this machine in a large
well ventilated room which has an air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr./person.
❐ The machine must be level within 5 mm both front or rear and left to right.

Environments to avoid
❐ Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1,500 lux).
❐ Dusty areas.
❐ Areas with corrosive gasses.
❐ Places higher than 2,000 m above sea level.
❐ Places where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.
❐ Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air from a
heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause condensation within the ma-
chine.)

Power Connection
❐ Connect the machine to a power source meeting the specifications given on the
inside from cover of this manual.
❐ Do not set anything on the power cord.
❐ Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10 %.
❐ Avoid multiwiring.
❐ Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible.
❐ Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
❐ Always turn the machine off when you have finished using for the day, but leave
it plugged in.

58
 nb-6

WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE

Access To The Machine

Place the machine near a power source, providing clearance as shown.

More than 10 cm or 4.0"

More than 39 cm or 15.4" More than 50 cm or 19.7"

More than 70 cm or 27.6"

With the optional finisher

More than 10 cm or 4.0"

More than 72 cm or 28.4" More than 50 cm or 19.7"

More than 70 cm or 27.6"

59
 nb-6

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

Paper
❐ Paper of the types or in the conditions listed below are not recommended for this
machine.
• Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper.
• Torn paper
• Damp paper
• Perforated paper
• Paper with conductive or low electrical resistance such as carbon or silver coating.
• Wavy paper
• Thermal paper, art paper
• Thin paper that has low stiffness
❐ Use the bypass tray to copy/print onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels,
translucent paper, and post cards. Before making copies/prints onto them, read
the following:
• Adhesive labels should be fed from the bypass tray one sheet at a time.
• OHP transparencies should be fed from the bypass tray. You can set ten
sheets at a time. However, if misfeed or multi-feed occurs, set one sheet at a time.
• OHP transparencies should be fanned to get air between the sheets before loading.
• Translucent paper should be fed from the bypass tray.
• Translucent paper should be fanned to get air between the sheets and any curls
should be corrected before loading.
• Post cards should be fed from the bypass tray.
• It is recommended to feed one post card at a time.
• Correct any curl in post cards before loading.
❐ For good copy/print quality, please use the type of OHP transparencies recom-
mended by your sales and service representatives.
❐ When using the bypass tray, the large capacity tray cannot be used.
❐ Do not touch paper if your fingers are wet or oily; finger prints may appear on the
copy/print.
❐ Do not use paper that has been already copied/printed on.
❐ Do not set paper over the limit mark inside the tray.
❐ To avoid problems caused by curly papres, try turning over the paper stack in the
500-sheet or large capacity tray. If there is no improvement, change to paper with
less curl.
❐ Load paper with the copy side down in the 500-sheet trays, and with the copy
side up in the large capacity tray. If copies are curled, try turning the copy paper
over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the copy paper with less curl.

60
 nb-6

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

Paper Storage

Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly stored paper might

result in poor image reproduction, creased copies, or paper misfeeds.
Generally, avoid curling and absorption of moisture.
❐ Avoid storing paper in humid areas. Under high temperature and high humidity, or
low temperature and low humidity conditions, store paper in a vinyl bag.
❐ Do not store paper where it will be exposed to heat.
❐ Store on a flat surface.
❐ Use older stock first.
❐ Do not lay heavy objects on paper.
❐ Keep open reams of paper in the package, and store as you would unopened
paper.

Toner Storage
❐ Store toner bottles vertically in a cool, dark place.
❐ Never store toner where it will be exposed to heat.
❐ Do not lay heavy objects on toner bottles.

61
 nb-6

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

62
 nb-7

SPECIFICATIONS

63
 nb-7

COPIER

COPIER
Configuration: Desktop
Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Memory capacity: approximately 1.7GB hard disk
Scanning method: Flatbed solid state scanner
Resolution: 400 x 400 dpi
Gray scale: 256 levels
Originals: Sheet, book
Original thickness: less than 30 mm, 1.18"
Original size: Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Copying speed: 40 copies/minute
(A4 :, 81/2" x 11" :, in Full Size mode)
Warm-up time: less than 140 seconds (20°C, 68°F)
* Refer the Copier Reference for details.

PRINTER
Resolution: 300, 400*, 600 dpi ( * 400dpi is available only
when using the Postscript.)
Speed: 40 ppm (300dpi), 20ppm (600dpi)
Interface: Standard Centronics compatible
Standard RS232C
Options: 1000 sheet tray unit
1500 sheet tray unit
Finisher bin
3-bin sorter
Network Interface Card (Ether Net, Token Ring)
Postscript Kit
* Refer the Printer Reference for details.

64
 nb-7

SCANNER

SCANNER
Resolution: 400 dpi (100 to 1600 dpi internal conversion)
Grayscale: 256 levels
Interface: SCSI 2
* Refer the Scanner Reference for details.

GENERAL
Power consumption:
Copier only Full system*
Warm-up less than 0.88 kW less than 0.90 kW
Stand-by less than 0.20 kW less than 0.22 kW
Maximum less than 1.50 kW less than 1.50 kW
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit

Noise emission:
Sound pressure level (The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at the
operator position)

Dimensions:
Width Depth Height
with platen cover, copy tray, and paper tray 1,150 mm 655 mm 1,024 mm
unit 45.3" 25.8" 40.4"
with document feeder, finisher, and paper 1,551 mm 655 mm 980+130mm
tray unit 61.1" 25.8" 43.8"
with document feeder, 3-bin sorter, and pa- 1,300 mm 655 mm 1,110 mm
per tray unit 51.2" 25.8" 43.8"

Weight:
with platen cover, copy tray, and 1500-sheet 137.5 kg
paper tray unit 303.2 lb
with document feeder, finisher, and 1500-sheet 178.5 kg
paper tray unit 393.6 lb
with document feeder, 3-bin sorter, and 1500- 161.0 kg
sheet paper tray unit 355.0 lb

❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

65
 nb-7

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)

Original feed: Automatic reverse document feed (ARDF)
two-sided originals mode
Automatic document feed (ADF)
one-sided originals mode
Semi-automatic document feed (SADF)
Single copies mode
Original size & weight:

Number of originals to be set:

Paper weight (g/m2) 40 47 53 64 81 105 128
Paper weight (lb) 11 12.5 14 17 22 28 34
Maximum number of
50 50 50 50 50 30 25
originals to be set
A3 lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
A4
sideways ✩ ✩ ● ● ● ● ★
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
A5
sideways ✩ ✩ ● ● ● ● ★
B4 lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
B5
sideways ✩ ✩ ● ● ● ● ★
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
B6
sideways ✩ ✩ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
●: ARDF (2 sided originals), ADF (1 sided originals), SADF, Single copies mode
❍: ARDF, ADF, SADF
★: ADF, SADF, Single copies mode
✩: ADF, SADF
Original set: Copier: Face up, first sheet on top
Scanner: Face up/down
Original transport: One flat belt
Power consumption: DC 24V ± 10 % (from copier)
Power consumption: 45 W
Weight: Approximately 10.5 kg, 23.2 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 610 x 507 x 130 mm, 24.1" x 20.0" x 5.2"
❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

66
 nb-7

FINISHER (OPTION)

FINISHER (OPTION)

Top Bottom 2 Staples

a= 6 ± 3 mm a= 6 ± 3 mm a= 6 ± 3 mm
b= 6 ± 3 mm b= 6 ± 3 mm b= 132 ± 2 mm
c= 66 ± 3 mm

Staple replenishment: Cartridge exchange (5,000 pieces/cartridge)

Power source: DC 24V (from the main body)
Power consumption: 48 W
Weight: 35 kg, 77.2 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 671 x 514 x 950 mm, 26.5" x 20.3" x 37.5"

❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

67
 nb-7

3-BIN SORTER

3-BIN SORTER
Paper capacity: 1st bin: 500 sheets (A4, 80g/m2)
2nd bin: 250 sheets (A4, 80g/m2)
3rd bin: 250 sheets (A4, 80g/m2)
Power consumption: 30 W
Power source: DC 24V, DC5V (from the main body)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 468 x 483 x 490 mm,
18.5" x 19.1" x 19.4" (maximum)
Weight: 13 kg
❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

68
15004HEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)
INDEX
 INDEX
Index Paper Size SettingTray
2, 3, and 4(option). ....... .45
! Paper Tray Priority .......... 46
Paper Type Display.. ...... .45
paper ................................. -56 Set date/Set time.. ........... 44
1 OOO-sheet tray unit ............ .65 Set User Code(s) ............ 47
1500~sheet tray unit ............ .65, 66 Tray 1 * Paper Size
3-BIN SORTER ................... .64 Setting ............................ 45
[Cancel] key.. ....................... .43 Tray 1 /F4 Paper Size
[Exit] key.. ............................ .43 Setting. ........................... 45
[Menu] key.. ......................... .43 bypass tray .......................... 5
[Next] key ............................ .43
[Prev.] key ........................... .43 C
A CAUTION ............................. i
CHANGING PAPER SIZE ... 36, 37, 38,
A3, 11” x 17” Double 39, 40, 41
Count.. ............................... .48 Clear Modes/Low Power
ADF ...................................... 19, 20 Mode key ........................... 6, 11
ADF: Thin Paper Mode ........ 46 Clear/Stop key ..................... 7
APS A515 l/2” x 8 l/2” Contrast Dial.. ...................... 6
Detection ........................... .48 copier ................................... 60
Auto Image Density Level Copy count display .............. 44
Selection.. .......................... .48 copy paper, loading ............. 26, 27, 28
Auto Reset.. .......................... 44 copy tray .............................. 3, 5
Auto Response (Human)
Sensor ................................ 44 D
auto response sensor.. ......... 5
Auto Stamping DO’S AND DON’TS.. .......... .51, 52
(for metric version) ............ .48 document feeder.. ............... .3, 52, 62
Auto Tray Switching ............. 46 duplex unit ........................... 5

B E
Basic Settings.. ..................... 44 Enter key .............................. 7
ADF: Thin Paper Mode....4 6 exposure glass.. ................... 5
Auto Reset ....................... 44
Auto Response (Human) F
Sensor ............................ 44
Auto Tray Switching ......... 46 finisher ................................. 3, 52, 63
Copy count display.. ........ .44 front cover.. .......................... 5
Low Power Timer.. .......... .44 fusing unit ............................ 5
Operation panel beeper. ..4 4
Original: /F4 Size Setting .46

70
 INDEX

G 0
GENERAL ............................ 61 operation panel.. .................. 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
hard keys.. ....................... 6
H Operation panel beeper.. ..... 44
Original: /F4 Size Setting ..... 46
hard keys.. ............................ . originals ................................ 18
How To Use The Operation originals, setting.. ................. 18
Panel .................................. 8
P
I
paper.. .................................. 56
installation environments......54, 55 Paper Size SettingTray 2, 3,
Interrupt key ........................ .6 and 4(option). .................... .45
PAPER TIPS.. ..................... 53
J paper tray.. ........................... 5
Paper Tray Priority ............... 46
Job Recall key.. .................... 6 paper tray unit.. .................... 3
paper tray, loading paper ... .27
K Paper Type Display ............. 45
paper, changing size
key counter holder.. ............. .5
1st tray ............................. 36
optional tray unit.. ............ 41
L
paper, loading.. .................... 26, 27, 28
large capacity tray.. ............. .5 platen cover.. ...................... .5
large capacity tray, loading PRINTER ............................. 60
paper ................................. .28 Printer Mode ........................ 9
LCT Paper Size Change......4 8 Program key ........................ 6
Low Power mode ................ .l 1
Low Power Timer ................. 44 S
SADF ................................... 21, 22
M
SAFETY INFORMATION.. .. i
main switch ........................... 5, 11 SCANNABLE AREA.. .......... 53
MAIN UNIT AND SCANNER ........................... 61
OPTIONS ........................... 3, 4, 5 Scanner Mode ..................... 9
MAINTAINING YOUR Set date/Set time ................. 44
COPIER.. ............................ 50 Set User Code(s). ............... .47
misfeeds ............................... 31, 32, 33 specifications
1 OOO-sheet tray unit.. ....... 65
N 1500-sheet tray unit.. ....... 65, 66
copier ............................... 60
Number keys.. ..................... .7 document feeder ............. 62
finisher ............................. 63

71
INDEX

staples, adding .................... .30

staples, jammed ................... 34
STARTING THE
MACHINE.. ......................... 11, 12
SWITCHING BETWEEN
THE PRINTER, COPIER
AND SCA.. ......................... 13, 14, 15, 16

T
toner .................................... ,57
toner bottle .......................... ,5
toner, adding ........................ 29
Touch Panel Display ............ 6
Tray 1 * Paper Size
Setting ................................ 45
Tray 1 /F4 Paper Size
Setting ................................ 45
TROUBLESHOOTING ......... 24, 25
jammed staples.. ............. .34
misfeeds.. ........................ .31, 32, 33

U
User Code mode ................. .12
User Tools.. .......................... 42, 43, 44,
45, 46, 47, 46
Basic Settings .................. 44
User Tools key ..................... 6

W
WARNING ............................ i
WHERE TO PUT YOUR
COPIER.. ........................... .54, 55

72
Overseas Affiliates
U.S.A. France
RICOH CORPORATION RICOH FRANCE S.A.
5 Dedrick Place 383 Avenue de General de Gaulle,
West Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 B.P. 307, 92143 Clamart Cedex
(TEL) 201-882-2000 (TEL) 01-4094-3838

Netherlands S ain
RICOH EUROPE B.V. RPCOH ESPANA S.A.
Groenelaan 3 P.O. Box 114 Guitard, 45
1180 AC - Amstelveen Holland 08014 Barcelona
(TEL) 020-5474111 (TEL) 490-09-60

United Kin dam ltal

RICOH U. v? LTD. RIC?OH ITALIA S.p.A.
Ricoh House Via della Metallur ia, 12
1 Plane Tree Crescent, Feltham, zona Basson) 2%139 VERONA
Middlesex, TW13 7HG TEL) 045-851 00 44
(TEL) 181-261-4000

German %??&%%lNESS MACHINES LTD.

RICOH 8 EUTSCHLAND GMBH 23/F., China Overseas Building,’
Mer enthalerallee 38-40, 139, Hennessy Road,
657%0 Eschborn Wan Chai, Ho Kong
(TEL) (06196) 906-O (TEL) 2862.28%
 RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-1, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama, Minato-ku, Tokyo
Printed in Japan
Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111
UE m A1958507
A195
Copy Reference

Operating Instructions
Operator Safety:
This copier is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/EDP use. The
Copier contains a 15milliwat, 760-800 nanometer wavelength, GaAlAs laser diode.
Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact with the laser beam may cause serious eye
damage. Safety precautions and interlock mechanisms have been designed to prevent
any possible laser beam exposure to the operator.

Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of
laser-based optical unit in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a
factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is
replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not
repairable in the filed. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis
and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical
subsystem is required.

Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified
in this manIlaI mav result in he7ardous radiation exoosure. I

As an Energy Star Partner, we have determined that this copier model

meets Energy Star Guidelines for energy efficiency.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental impact associated
with copying equipment by means of energy saving feature such as Auto Off, Low
Power, and Duplex Mode Priority modes.
For details, see the following pages.
+ Auto Off Mode : see “CHANGING THE MACHINE’S SETTINGS”
in the “General Reference”.
+3 Low Power Mode : see “CHANGING THE MACHINE’S SETTINGS”
in the “General Reference”.
0 Duplex Mode Priority : see page 117.

Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the
inch version.

For good copy quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh toner. 1
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that may result from the
use of parts other than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.

Note: Some illustrations may be slightly different from your machine. I

Note: Certain options may not be available in some countries. For details,
please contact your local dealer.

Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz, more than 12A

Please make sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details
about Dower source, see “WHERE TO PUT YOUR MACHINE” in the “General

Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended recycled paper I
types that may be used in this copier. I

0 Copyright 1997, Ricoh Co., Ltd.

 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and mainte-
nance of this copier. To get maximum versatility from this copier all opera-
tors should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please
keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Please read the “SAFETY INFORMATION” section in the “General Refer-

ence” before using this machine. It contains important information related to
USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
TABLEOF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR... . . .... . . ..s. . ... .. .. ... . .. ... . ..~.. .. .. .. ... .. . .... . . .... . . .. 4

OPERATION PANEL ........... . ....................................................................... .6

Hard Keys .................................................................................................... 6

Touch Panel Display.. .................................................................................. 8

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY .. . .... . .. ... . ... .. . .... . . .... . .. ... . .. ... . ~. ... . ... .. ~. .. .. . 26

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS.. ................. s..... .27

Recommended Originals ............................................................................. 27

Non-recommended Originals For The Optional Document Feeder.. .......... 27

SETIING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS ............. ..#................. 28

SElTlNG A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT

FEEDER (ADF) . .. .. ... .. . .... . . .... . ~.. .. . ... .. ~.... . .. ... .. .. .. ... .. . ... .. . .... ~. .... . .. ... . ... .. . ... .. . ... 28

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT

FEEDER (SADF) .... . .. ... . ... .. .. .. .. .. ... . ... .. . ... .. . .... . ... .. . .~. .. . .... . .. ... . . .... . .. ... . .. ... . .. ... 30

One-to-one Copying (Full Size Copying) _..........__...,..,._...,..,..,..,__,..,..,..,..,_. 35

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Period (Auto Start). .... ..3 6
Adjusting Copy Image Density ..................................................................... 36

Selecting The Copy Paper Size (Manual Paper Select). ............................ .37
Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size(Auto Paper Select). .............. .38
Havin The Co ier Choose The Reproduction Ratios
(Auto w educe/ e nlarge) ................................................................................. 40

Selecting Original Type Settin

(Letter, Letter/Photo, Photo, 8 eneration Copy). ........................................ .42
Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort, Rotate Sort) .................................... 43

Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page (111,222,333) (Rotate Stack) . ..4 6

Copying From The Bypass Tray .................................................................. 48
Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else (Interrupt)..........5 1
Recalling Job Settings (Job Recall). ........................................................... .51
Storing Your Copy Setting In Memory (Program). ...................................... .52

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge) .................................... 53

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios (Preset R/E). ...................... .53

Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps ......................................................... 54

Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size.. .................................. .56

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES

(Duplex/Series Copies). .............................................................................. .58
Making Two-sided Copies (Duplex) ............................................................. 58

Making One-sided Copies (Series Copies). ................................................ .65

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine) ........................... 67

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)71

Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your Copies
(Background Numbering) ______...._...............,..,..,..,..,.....__._............................. 71

Printin Preset Messa es On Your Copies

(Auto 8 tamping) - Eng 9.rsh Only ,_.,._.__.._.......................,..._............................ 72
Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies (User Stamping) . . . . . . . . .76

Printing Dates And Page Numbers (Date Stamping, Page Numbering) . . ...78

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image) . ... .. . .... . . .... . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. 83
Copying The Image Twice On One Page (Double Copies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Erasing The Center And The Border (Erase Center/Border) . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Adjusting The Margin (Margin Adjustment) .,..,.....,....___...................,............ 86
...
Ill
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy (Image Repeat). .................... 87

Reversing Black and White (Positive/Negative). ......................................... 89
Merging Images (Overlay/Merge) ................................................................ 90

OPTIONAL FINISHING ............................................. *.................................. .92

Sorting Into Sets With Finisher (123,123,123) (Sort). ................................. 92
Stapling With Finisher (Staple). ................................................................... 95
Stapling Position And Original Setting ........................................................ 96
When Setting One Original At A Time ........................................................ 99
When Setting A Stack Of Originals In The Document Feeder ................... 99
Sorting Into Sets With 3-bin Sorter (123, 123, 123) (Sort, Rotate Sort) .... 100
Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page with 3-bin Sorter
(1 1 1, 222, 333) (Rotate Stack). .................................................................. 101

COMBINATION CHART.. ............................................................................. .103

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT .. . . .... . . .... . .. ... .. . ... .. .. .. .. .. . 109
_$ ,I i_lX <“*<*,A;ri ?ilbmi~- I .r<*ii~>~*!?^ III*,aIY@~:-;xII w*i Y*‘r*i. $~,~,~~r~,-:*~~~2~~~r-ar;,r~,,~nurr’,~,:4J~~,~~I’~~~~
*

CHANGING I
!, _, >>,j,,,,, jj ___ ,,.l,,,II ,>,;, THE
$II;COPIER’S
_,,< SETI’INGS
,l,‘i ___,
$<<,rll .;$!
-r,r,~rl12*^‘,‘,,,~l,.~~~~~~‘~
;,“qI$~Jxlii“^~-
i

USER TOOLS . .. . ... .. . .... . .. ... .. .. .. ... .. . .... . .. ... . .... . . .... . .. ... .. ... . ... .. . ... .. .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. 114
User Tools Menu . . . . . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . . .. . . . 114

How To Change The Copy Features ._.................................__...........__..,..,.. 116

Copy Features .,,..............._........_...,..,._.........._......,..,..,..,..,_....,..,................. 117

How To Register User Stamp . . . . .. ..__._._............................._.._.__..........._.__.... 128

,;I ,, ; ‘,,, iil ,i _‘, ,,,; 111 II ,,,-,>>> I*,ii.l.::.riiilr,i

INDEX ... . ... .. . ... .. . .... . . .... . .. .1.:... .. .. ... . ... .. . .... . . .... . .. ... . .. ... .. .:.::..I:.:: .. . ... .. . ... .. . ... .. . 134
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

WHERE IS IT &
WHAT IS IT
SYSTEM OVERVIEW (For Copy Mode).................................................................................. 3
COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR ............................................................................................... 4
OPERATION PANEL ................................................................................................................. 6
Hard Keys............................................................................................................................................... 6
Touch Panel Display ............................................................................................................................. 8

1
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

2
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

SYSTEM OVERVIEW (For Copy Mode)

SYSTEM OVERVIEW (For Copy Mode)

1

5
6
1. Document feeder Insert a stack of originals here. They will be fed
(Option) automatically.
2. Copy tray Completed copies are delivered here.
(Option)
3. 3-Bin Sorter Sorts, stacks copies.
(Option)
4. Finisher Sorts, stacks, and staples copies.
(Option)
5. 1500-sheet tray unit Holds 1500 sheets of copy paper.
(Option)
6. 1000-sheet tray unit Holds 1000 sheets of copy paper.
(Option)

❐ Other options for Copy mode: platen cover, key counter, and copy tray
❐ Regarding other options for Printer/Scanner mode, ☛ see the "General Refer-
ence".

3
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR

4
3
2 5
1

7
8

10

13

11
12

14
15

4
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR

1. Copy tray (option) Completed copies are delivered here. Regarding

the capacity of the tray, ☛ see page 130.
2. Main switch Switches the copier between on and standby con-
ditions.
3. Auto response When someone comes close to the copier, it will
(human) sensor automatically switch from Low Power mode to
standby mode.
4. Platen cover (option) Lower this cover over originals for copying.
5. Exposure glass* Position originals here face down for copying.
*After turning off the main switch, the exposure glass might be hot
because of the anticondensation function. This is not a problem.

6. Front cover Open to access the inside of the copier.

7. Unit for two-sided Makes two-sided copies.
copies (Duplex unit)

8. Paper tray Holds 500 sheets of copy paper.

9. Bypass tray Use to copy onto OHP sheets, adhesive labels,
translucent paper, post cards, and non-standard
size paper.
10. Large capacity tray Holds 1,000 sheets of copy paper.
11. Right cover of Open to remove misfed paper.
the optional tray unit
12. Key counter holder Insert the optional key counter here.
13. Operation panel Operator controls and touch panel are located
here. ☛ See the next page.
14. Toner bottle Replace the toner bottle when " f
Add Toner"
is displayed on the display. ☛ See "ADDING
TONER" in the "General Reference".
15. Fusing unit Fuses the copy image to the paper. When ac-
cessing the inside of the copier, use caution.
This unit may be very hot.

5
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

OPERATION PANEL
Hard Keys

2 3
4

1
16
15
14
13

1. Contrast Dial 6. Job Recall key

Changes the brightness of the display. Use to recall your previous copy
settings. ☛ See page 51.
2. User Tools key
Changes the basic settings and 7. Clear Modes/Low Power Mode
copy features. key
☛ See page 114. Press to clear the previously en-
☛ See "CHANGING THE MA- tered copy job settings. Also use to
CHINE’S SETTINGS" in the "Gen- switch to and from Low Power
eral Reference". mode. ☛ See "STARTING THE MA-
CHINE" in the "General Reference".
3. Guidance key
Shows guidance for functions. 8. Interrupt key
☛ See page 26. Press to make interrupt copies dur-
ing a copy run.
4. Touch Panel Display ☛ See page 51.
☛ See pages 8 and 24.
9. Start key
5. Program key Press to start copying. Use to set
Press to select the program mode. the Auto Start. ☛ See page 36.
☛ See page 52.

6
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

5 6 7

1 2 3

4 5 6

4 5 6
9
0

12 11 10

10. Clear/Stop key 14. Printer/Scanner key

While entering numbers, press to Use to enter the Printer/Scanner
cancel a number you have entered. mode from the Copy mode.
While copying, press to stop copy- ☛ See "SWITCHING BETWEEN
ing. THE PRINTER, COPIER AND
SCANNER FUNCTIONS" in the
11. Enter key "General Reference".
Use to enter data in selected
modes. 15. Data in indicator
☛ See the "Printer Reference".
12. Number keys
Use to enter the desired number of 16. On line indicator
copies and data for selected ☛ See the "Printer Reference".
modes.

13. Copy key

Use to enter the Copy mode from
Printer/Scanner mode.
☛ See page 34.
☛ See "SWITCHING BETWEEN
THE PRINTER, COPIER AND
SCANNER FUNCTIONS" in the
"General Reference".

7
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

Touch Panel Display

with optional copy tray & with optional 3-bin sorter

Message area
Copier status and messages
Original Counter
Number of originals scanned so far.
Copy Set Total
Total number of copy
sets entered.

Copy Set Counter

Number of copy sets
made so far.

with optional finisher

Message area
Original Counter

Copy Set Total

Copy Set Counter

8
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

❐ Regarding detailed information about each key and its functions, ☛ see page
11.
❐ For how to use the touch panel display, ☛ see page 24.

9
 SP3 Copy Reference

eu-2

OPERATION PANEL

10
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

WHAT YOU CAN DO

WITH THIS COPIER

11
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

FUNCTIONS
with optional copy tray & with optional 3-bin sorter
☛ See page 36. ☛ See page 36. ☛ See page 37.

☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 42.

☛ See page 40.

☛ See page 37.

☛ See page 35.

☛ See page 46.

☛ See page 43.
☛ See page 102.
☛ See page 101.
☛ See page 83. ☛ See page 67. ☛ See page 53.
☛ See page 71. ☛ See page 58.
with optional finisher
☛ See page 36. ☛ See page 36. ☛ See page 37.

☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 42.

☛ See page 40.

☛ See page 37.

☛ See page 35.

☛ See page 96.

☛ See page 93.

☛ See page 83. ☛ See page 67. ☛ See page 53.

☛ See page 71. ☛ See page 58.

12
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Getting Help On The Display

☛ See page 26.

Adjusting Copy Image Density

☛ See page 36.

Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size

☛ See page 38.

Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction Ratios

☛ See page 40.

Selecting Original Type Setting

☛ See page 42.

Sorting Into Sets

☛ See page 43.

13
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page

☛ See page 46.

Copying From The Bypass Tray

☛ See page 48.

Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else

☛ See page 51.

Recalling Job Settings

☛ See page 51.

Storing Your Copy Settings In Memory

☛ See page 52.

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

☛ See page 53.

14
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps

☛ See page 54.
Using the [+] and [-] keys or Number keys

Stretching and squeezing the image

Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size

☛ See page 56.
Fitting the image in the copy area as it is

Stretching and squeezing the image into the copy area

15
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Making Two-sided Copies

☛ See page 58.
From one-sided originals

From two-sided originals

From book originals (Single) (Multi)

Making One-sided Copies

☛ See page 65.

16
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Combining Originals Into One Copy

☛ See page 67.

From 2 one-sided
originals

From 4 one-sided
originals

From 8 one-sided
originals

From 16 one-sided
originals

Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your Copies

☛ See page 71.

17
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies

☛ See page 72

Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies

☛ See page 76.

Printing Dates And Page Numbers

☛ See page 78.

18
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Copying The Image Twice On One Page

☛ See page 83.

Erasing The Centre And The Border (Erase Centre/Border)

☛ See page 85.

19
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Adjusting The Margin

☛ See page 86.

Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy

☛ See page 88.

Reversing Black And White

☛ See page 89.

Merging Images
☛ See page 90.

20
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

Optional Finishing

Sorting into sets with optional finisher (123, 123, 123) ☛ See page 93.

Stapling with optional finisher ☛ See page 96.

Sorting into sets with optional 3-bin sorter (123, 123, 123,)
☛ See page 101.

Stacking together all copies of a page with optional 3-bin sorter

(111, 222, 333) ☛ See page 102.

21
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-3

FUNCTIONS

22
 eu-3-2

BASICS
USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY....................................................................................... 24
GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY ............................................................................................ 26
RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS....................................................... 27
Recommended Originals .................................................................................................................... 27
Non-recommended Originals For The Optional Document Feeder ............................................. 27

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS................................................................... 28

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF).............. 28
SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF) ......... 30

23
 eu-3-2

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY

On the touch panel display, you can find keys, instructions and messages.
By touching keys on the display, you can select or deselect functions and
enter data for the selected modes. The display uses the following conven-
tions:

Keys that have the option of being selected.

Keys that have been selected.

Keys that have no option to select.

In this manual, we use the following convention:

Key on the display:

In the manual : [Auto Paper Select] key

$Caution: Do not press the touch panel display with any hard or sharp
object (pen, pencil, etc.). Always use your fingers or something
with a soft tip.

Initial display

Messages and instructions ap-

pears here.

tag sheets

24
 eu-3-2

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY

Display after selecting functions on the tag sheets

After selecting functions on tag sheets,

the clip appears on the tag.

[Check Modes] key

When you have selected functions on tag sheets, this key appears on the
upper right area on the touch panel display. Touch this key to see at a
glance all the modes you selected.

[Prev.] key

This key appears in the upper right corner of the display when you touch
the [Check Modes] key. Press to go back to the previous display.

[Change Modes] key

When you select functions on the tag sheets, this key appears on the dis-
play. Touch this key to change settings of the following modes:

image density, original type settings, copy paper size,

Auto Reduce\Enlarge, and finishing

25
 eu-3-2

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY

Press the Guidance key when you want to know detailed information about
functions you use.

1 P r e s s t he Clear Modes/Low
Power Mode key then the Guid-
ance key.
C

2 Touch the key you want to know

about on the touch panel display.

For example, if you want to know

about "How to operate the dis-
play", touch the [How to operate
the display ] key.
❐ To go to the next page, touch the
[Next] key. To return to the previous
page, touch the [Prev.] key.
❐ To go back to the display shown af-
ter pressing the Guidance key, touch
the [Menu] key.
❐ To exit from the guidance display,
touch the [Exit] key.

26
 95.2.14 eu-3-2

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED

ORIGINALS
Recommended Originals
❐ Regarding originals that the optional document feeder can handle, ☛ see
"DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)" in the "General Reference".

Non-recommended Originals For The Optional

Document Feeder

$CAUTION: The following types of originals are not recommended for use
with the document feeder. Place them directly on the expo-
sure glass.
❐ Originals thicker than 128 g/m2, 34 lb
❐ Originals thicker than 105 g/m2, 28 lb when using two-sided originals
❐ Originals thinner than 40 g/m2, 11 lb. But for originals between 40 and 52 g/m2
(11 and 14 lb), the document feeder must be set to Thin Paper mode. ☛ See
"USER TOOLS (ADF: Thin Paper Mode)" in the "General Reference".
❐ Originals larger than A3, 11" x 17"
❐ Originals smaller than A5, 51/2" x 81/2"
❐ Paper with any king of coating (such as carbon) on the back
❐ Folded, curled, creased, or damaged originals
❐ Mailing labels, or perforated originals
❐ OHP transparencies
❐ Translucent paper
❐ Pasted originals
❐ Damp originals
❐ Sticky originals
❐ Wavy originals
❐ Originals that are not made from paper
❐ Originals written in pencil on both sides, or two-sided carbon originals
❐ Thermal fax paper, CRO (camera ready original) or aluminum foil
❐ Originals with globs of ink from a ball-point pen

27
 eu-3-2

95.2.14

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE

GLASS
. the optional platen cover or
1 Lift
the optional document feeder.

.
2 exposure
Set the original face down on the
glass. The original
should be aligned to the rear left
corner.

. the optional platen cover

3 Lower
or the optional document feeder.

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE

OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)
You can insert a stack of originals (one-sided or two-sided) of the same size
into the document feeder. These originals are individually fed onto and
removed from the exposure glass.
❐ If you want to set originals of different sizes at the same time, use the user
tools. ☛ See page 127.

1 Correct any curl, fold, or crease

in the originals before setting.

28
 eu-3-2

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)

2 Confirm that the Insert Original

indicator is lit before setting the
originals.

3 Confirm that no previous originals

remain on the exposure glass.

4 Adjust the guide to the original

size.

5 Set the originals face up into the

document feeder until the Insert
Original indicator goes off.
❐ The last page should be on the bot-
tom.
❐ The guide must touch the front side
of the originals.

❐ Do not stack originals above the limit

mark.

29
 eu-3-2

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE

OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)
You can insert one original at a time into the document feeder. The original
is automatically fed onto and removed from the exposure glass.

1 Correct any curl, fold, or crease

in the originals before setting.

2 Confirm that the Insert Original

indicator is lit before setting the
originals.

3 Confirm that no previous originals

remain on the exposure glass.

4 Adjust the guide to the original

size.

5 Set the original face up into the

document feeder until the Insert
Original indicator goes off.
❐ If you are copying a stack of originals
one sheet at a time and you want to
keep them in order, start with the last
page of the originals.
❐ The original guide must touch the
front side of the original.

30
 eu-3-2

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

6 Press the Start key.

7 While the Auto Feed indicator is

lit after an original is fed, set the
next original. The original is auto-
matically fed and copied.
❐ If you have set more than two origi-
nals, the Auto Feed indicator is not
lit after the last original is fed. In this
case, press the Start key again after
setting an original.

31
 eu-3-2

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

32
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

COPYING
BASIC OPERATIONS................................................................................................................ 34
Entering The Copy Mode..................................................................................................................... 34
One-to-one Copying (Full Size Copying) .......................................................................................... 35
Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Period (Auto Start).......................................... 36
Adjusting Copy Image Density ........................................................................................................... 36
Selecting The Copy Paper Size (Manual Paper Select).................................................................. 37
Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size(Auto Paper Select) ................................................... 38
Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction Ratios (Auto Reduce/Enlarge)........................... 40
Selecting Original Type Setting (Letter, Letter/Photo, Photo, Generation Copy) ...................... 42
Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort, Rotate Sort)............................................................................. 43
Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page (111,222,333) (Rotate Stack) ...................................... 46
Copying From The Bypass Tray ........................................................................................................... 48
Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else (Interrupt) ............................................ 51
Recalling Job Settings (Job Recall) ................................................................................................... 51
Storing Your Copy Setting In Memory (Program)............................................................................. 52

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge) ............................................................... 53

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios (Preset R/E) .............................................................. 53
Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps................................................................................................. 54
Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size ........................................................................... 56

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)........ 58

Making Two-sided Copies (Duplex) ................................................................................................... 58
Making One-sided Copies (Series Copies) ....................................................................................... 65

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine) ..................................................... 67

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp) ................................. 71
Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your Copies (Background Numbering) .................... 71
Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies (Auto Stamping) - English Only.................................. 72
Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies (User Stamping)..................................................... 76
Printing Dates And Page Numbers (Date Stamping, Page Numbering) .................................... 78

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)......................................................................... 83

Copying The Image Twice On One Page (Double Copies) .......................................................... 83
Erasing The Centre And The Border (Erase Centre/Border) ........................................................... 85
Adjusting The Margin (Margin Adjustment) ...................................................................................... 86
Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy (Image Repeat) ....................................................... 88
Reversing Black and White (Positive/Negative)............................................................................... 89
Merging Images (Overlay/Merge) ..................................................................................................... 90

OPTIONAL FINISHING............................................................................................................. 93
Sorting Into Sets With Finisher (123,123,123) (Sort)............................................................................ 93
Stapling With Finisher (Staple)............................................................................................................. 96
Stapling Position And Original Setting ............................................................................................... 97
When Setting One Original At A Time ............................................................................................... 100
When Setting A Stack Of Originals In The Document Feeder ....................................................... 100
Sorting Into Sets With 3-bin Sorter (123, 123, 123) (Sort, Rotate Sort) ........................................... 101
Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page with 3-bin Sorter (111, 222, 333) (Rotate Stack) ....... 102

COMBINATION CHART .......................................................................................................... 103

33
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

BASIC OPERATIONS
Entering The Copy Mode
If your machine is set to Share or Printer Priority mode, the Copy mode is
default after turning on the main switch. If there are no current print or scan
jobs, the Copy screen is shown and you can use all copying functions. It is
not necessary for you to operate the machine to enter the Copy mode. If
your machine is in the Printer or Scanner mode, do the following procedure
to enter the Copy mode.
❐ If your machine is set to Printer Only or Scanner Only mode, you cannot use
the copying functions. Regarding detailed information, ☛ see "SWITCHING BE-
TWEEN THE PRINTER, COPIER AND SCANNER FUNCTIONS" of the "Gen-
eral Reference."

1 Press the Copy key to enter the

Copy mode.

34
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

One-to-one Copying (Full Size Copying)

You can make copies that are the same size as your originals.

1 Set your original on the exposure

glass or in the optional document
feeder. ☛ See pages 28 ~ 31.

2 Enter the number of copies re-

quired using the Number keys.
1 2 3

❐ To change the number entered, 4 5 6

press the Clear/Stop key, then enter
the new number. 7 8 9
C
0

3 Confirm that the [Auto Paper Se-

lect] key is dark. If not, touch the
[Auto Paper Select] key, or se-
lect the proper paper size using
keys on the display.
❐ Regarding Auto Paper Select, ☛ see
page 38.
❐ Regarding selecting paper size,
☛ see page 37.

4 Make sure that the [Full Size]

key is dark. If not, touch it.

35
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

5 Press the Start key.

❐ To stop the copier during the multi-

copy run, press the Clear/Stop key. C
❐ Press the Start key to resume copy-
ing, or press the Clear/Stop key to
clear the entered copy number.

Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up

Period (Auto Start)
During the warm-up period (within 140
seconds), the display is as shown. If
you enter your copy job settings and
press the Start key during the warm
up period, the copier will start copying
automatically when the copier reaches
the ready condition.
❐ To cancel Auto Start, press the
Clear/Stop key.

Adjusting Copy Image Density

Auto and manual image density

If the [Auto Image Density] key is
dark, Auto Image Density is selected.
If not, touch the [Auto Image Den-
sity] key.

If the [Auto Image Density] key is

light, Manual Image Density mode is
selected. To get a darker image,
touch the [Darker] key. To get a
lighter image, touch the [Lighter] key.

36
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Erasing Background (Erase Background)

Use this mode to mask out a dirty background (e.g. with a newspaper) and
get clear copies.

Confirm that the [Erase Background]

key is dark. If not, touch it.

Selecting The Copy Paper Size (Manual Paper

Select)
You can select the desired copy pa-
per size manually by touching one of
the tray keys in the display.
❐ Regarding setting copy paper in the
bypass tray, ☛ see page 48.

❐ The keys that have an * (asterisk)

cannot be used for Auto Paper Se-
lect.

37
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size(Auto

Paper Select)
The copier selects a suitable size of
copy paper based on the original size
and the reproduction ratio. Make sure
that the [Auto Paper Select] key is
dark. If not, touch the [Auto Paper
Select] key.

❐ If you use translucent or transparent originals or originals with tags, the original
size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When placing the original on the exposure glass directly, make sure that the
optional platen cover or optional document feeder is lowered before pressing
the Start key. Otherwise, the original size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When the original is set at a different direction from the copy paper in the paper
tray and the required paper size is A4, 81/2" x 11" or smaller, the copier auto-
matically rotates the original image by 90o to match the copy paper direction
and make copies.

❐ The tray keys that have an * (asterisk) cannot be used for the Auto Paper Select.
❐ Regarding the combination of the Auto Paper Select and Stapling, ☛ see page
97.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

38
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

❐ When you use Auto Paper Select, refer to the following table for possible copy
paper sizes
Metric version
Original Possible selected paper sizes for copy
A or B type* A or B type*
8" x 13" 8" x 13"***, A or B type*
81/4" x 13" 81/4" x 13"***, A or B type*
81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 13"***, A or B type*
LT type**, 8" x 10" LT type**, 8"x 10", A or B type*
* :A type (A3, A4, A5), B type (B4, B5, B6)
** :LT type: 11" x 17", 81/2" x 11"
*** :F/F4 size selected by user tools. ☛ See "USER TOOLS" in the"General Reference".

Inch version
Original Possible selected paper sizes for copy
LT type LT type
A4 A4, LT type
8" x 13" 8" x 13"**, LT type
81/4" x 13" 81/4" x 13"**, LT type
81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 13"**, LT type
11" x 15", 10" x 14", 8" x 10" 11" x 15", 10" x 14", 8" x 10", LT type
* :LT type: 11" x 17", 81/2" x 14", 81/2" x 11", 51/2" x 81/2"
** :F/F4 size selected by user tools. ☛ See "USER TOOLS" in the "General Reference".

39
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction

Ratios (Auto Reduce/Enlarge)
The copier can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the
paper and original sizes you select.
❐ If you use translucent or transparent originals or originals with tags, the original
size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When placing the original on the exposure glass directly, make sure that the
optional platen cover or optional document feeder is lowered before pressing
the Start key. Otherwise, the original size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When the original is set at the different direction from the selected copy paper,
the copier cannot rotate the image by 90o. Make sure to set the original in the
same direction as the copy paper.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

Example:
Metric version: Original: A3 ;, Copy paper: A4 ;
Inch version: Original: 11" x 17" ;, Copy paper: 81/2" x 11" ;

1 Touch the [Auto/Reduce En-

large] key.

40
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

2 Set your original on the exposure

glass or in the optional document
feeder. ☛ See pages 28 ~ 31.

3 Select the copy size you require:

Metric version:
Touch the [A4 ;] paper tray key.

Inch version:
Touch the [81/2" x 11" ;] paper
tray key.

4 Press the Start key. The original

image is reduced to fit the se-
lected copy paper.

41
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Selecting Original Type Setting

(Letter, Letter/Photo, Photo, Generation Copy)
There are four types of original type setting. Select the appropriate original
type to match the kind of originals you are copying from.
❐ Letter mode is the default. You can change this setting using the user tools.
☛ See page 117.
Letter
Select Letter mode when your originals contain only letters (no picture).
Letter/Photo
Select Letter/Photo when your originals contain photographs or pictures with
letters.
Photo
Delicate tones of photographs and pictures can be reproduced with this
mode.
Generation copy
If your originals are copies, so called generation copies, the copy image can
be reproduced sharply and clearly.

1 Letter mode is selected by de-

fault. Select the desired setting
by touching one of four keys.

42
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort, Rotate Sort)

The copier puts images of more than two originals into memory and copies
are collated into sets. In Sort mode, every copy set is delivered on the copy
tray. In Rotate Sort mode, every other copy set is rotated by 90 o and
delivered to the copy tray, so that each set can be easily separated.
Notes for above modes
❐ You can make up to 999 copy sets at a time. However, when the number of
copies exceeds the capacity of the copy tray, remove copies from the copy
tray. Regarding the capacity of the copy tray, ☛ see page 130.
❐ After starting copying, the only setting you may change is image density, The
change will apply from the next copy. ☛ See page 36.
❐ The maximum number of pages that can be stored is as follows:
A4, 81/2" x 11": Approximately 100 pages (images)
❐ You can change the settings of these modes with the user tools. ☛ See page
127.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

Notes for Rotate Sort mode

❐ Paper sizes that can be used in Rotate Sort mode are as follows:
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11"
❐ Two paper trays that are identical in size and different in direction are required.
You can change this setting using the user tools. ☛ See page 127.
❐ This mode does not support different size originals.

43
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Notes for Sort mode

❐ When you make two-sided copies in Sort mode, the maximum number of cop-
ies stacked in the unit for two-sided copies (duplex unit) is as follows:
A3, 11" x 17": 30 sheets
Other sizes: 50 sheets
❐ Different size originals can be used only when you make one-sided copies
from one-sided originals.

1 Touch the [Sort], or [Rotate Sort]

key.

2 Enter the number of copy sets with the Number keys.

3 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see page 28 or 30). Then press the Start key. The copier
starts memorizing the original image.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green, or the Auto Feed indicator on the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original in the same direction as step ➊.
❐ When the memory reaches 0%, the copier stops memorizing. Press the
Start key to finish copy jobs which are already into memory. After that,
follow the instructions on the display.

➌ Repeat step ➋ until all originals are scanned.

➍ After all originals are put into memory, press the Enter key.
❐ If you are making one-sided copies, the first set of copies will have completed.

➎ Press the Start key.

44
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

3 When setting a stack of originals in the

document feeder
➊ Set a stack of the originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 28),
then press the Start key.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.
❐ When memory runs out during copying, the machine can be programmed to
behave in two ways with the user tools.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [Yes]

→ After all images in memory are copied, the machine will re-start
scanning automatically.
You should re-order your copies after all copy jobs are finished.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [No]

→ The machine will wait for you to press the Start key. At this point you
should remove your copies from the copy tray. Press the Start key
and then follow the instructions on the display to continue copying.

If you want to change the setting with the user tools, ☛ see page 127.
❐ If you make one-sided copies, the first set of copies has been completed
when all original images are stored in the memory.

Stopping storing images and deleting stored images dur-

ing copying

1 Press the Clear/Stop key.

❐ The copying run of the 1st set and scanning will stop.

2
Press the Clear/Stop key again. If you want to delete stored images,
touch the [Yes] key following the instructions on the display.
❐ You cannot delete the stored images by press the Clear/Stop key, if copies
have been stacked in the unit for two-sided copies (duplex unit) when mak-
ing two-sided copies. In this case, after the step 1, press the Clear
Modes/Low Power Mode key. So that, all settings and stored images will
be cleared. Then remove copies in the duplex unit by opening the front
cover. For position of the duplex unit, ☛ see page 4.

45
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page

(111,222,333) (Rotate Stack)

Each original is copied together. Every other copies is delivered to the copy
tray, turned 90o.
❐ You can make up to 999 copy sets at a time. However, when the number of
copies exceeds the capacity of the copy tray, remove copies from the copy
tray. Regarding the capacity of the copy tray, ☛ see page 130.
❐ These modes do not support different size originals.
❐ After starting copying, the only setting you may change is image density, The
change will apply from the next copy. ☛ See page 36.
❐ Two paper trays that are identical in size and different in direction are required.
You can change this setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 127.
❐ The paper sizes that can be used in the Rotate Stack mode is as follows:
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11"
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

46
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

1 Touch the [Rotate Stack] key.

2 Enter the number of copies with the Number keys.

3 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see page 28 or 30). Then press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator on the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original in the same direction as step ➊.

➌ Repeat step ➋ until your copying is finished.

3 When setting a stack of originals in the

document feeder
➊ Set a stack of the originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 28),
then press the Start key.
❐ Last page should be on the bottom.

47
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Copying From The Bypass Tray

Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translu-
cent paper, post cards, and copy paper that cannot be set in the paper tray.
❐ Approximately 40 sheets of copy paper (64 g/m2, 17 lb) can be inserted at a time.
❐ Before making copies onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent
paper, and post cards, read the notes for them. ☛ See"USE AND STORAGE
OF SUPPLIES" in the "General Reference".
❐ When you make copies using the bypass tray, it is recommended to set paper
in the bypass tray lengthwise (;).
❐ When using the bypass tray, the large capacity tray cannot be used.
❐ The following sizes can be used as standard size copy paper. If you use other
paper sizes, you should input vertical and horizontal dimensions.

Metric version Inch version

A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;, B5 : ;, A5 : ;, 11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
B6 : ;, A6 : ;, 11" x 17" ; 51/2" x 81/2" : ;, 8" x 13" ;,
❐ Regarding the functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.
❐ If your machine is equipped with the optional 3-bin sorter, 51/2" x 81/2" : cannot
be used.

1 Set your original on the exposure

glass or in the optional document
feeder. ☛ See pages 28 ~ 31.

2 Open the bypass tray. The [By-

pass Tray] key appears on the
display.
❐ If the [Bypass Tray] key is not dark,
touch it.

48
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

3 When copying onto standard size copy paper

➊ Slide the paper guides to the
paper width and, if necessary,
swing out the extender to sup-
port large size copy paper.

➋ Insert the copy paper into the

bypass tray until the beeper
sounds.
❐ The beeper can be canceled with
the user tools. ☛ See "USER
TOOLS" in the "General Refer-
ence".

➌ Press the Start key.

3 When copying onto non-standard size paper

Acceptable non-standard paper sizes:
Metric version:
Vertical: 100 ~ 297 mm (in 1 mm steps)
Horizontal: 148 ~ 432 mm (in 1 mm steps)
Inch version:
Vertical: 4.0" ~ 11.7" (in 0.1" steps)
Horizontal: 6.0" ~ 17.0" (in 0.1" steps)

➊ Press the Enter key.

➋ The display changes as shown.

49
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

➌ Enter the vertical size of the pa-

1 2 3
per using the Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered, 4 5 6
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key. 7 8 9
C
➍ Touch the [#] key in the display 0
or press the Enter key.

➎ Enter the horizontal size of the

paper using the Number keys.
Then, touch the [#] key in the
display or press the Enter key.
➏ Touch the [Exit] key to close
this menu.

➐ The [Bypass Tray] key changes

to [Special Paper Size] key.

➑ Adjust the guides to copy paper

size and insert the copy paper
until the beeper sounds.
❐ The beeper can be canceled with
user tools. ☛ See "USER
TOOLS" in the "General Refer-
ence".

➒ Press the Start key.

50
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy

Something Else (Interrupt)
You can make urgently needed copies
during a multicopy run by pressing the
Interrupt key. The interrupted copy job
settings are stored in the machine’s
memory. After interrupt copying is com-
pleted, press this key again to recall the
previous copy job settings.
❐ In Interrupt mode, & is displayed on the display.
❐ If you use this function with the optional document feeder, you might have to reset
originals not to be copied after interrupt copying is finished. Follow the instructions
on the display.
❐ If the optional 3-bin sorter is equipped with your machine, copies will be deliv-
ered to 3rd bin.
❐ Regarding the functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

Recalling Job Settings (Job Recall)

The previous copy job settings before
auto reset or Low Power mode can
be recalled by pressing the Job Re-
call key. When the previous copy job
setting is saved, the Job Recall indi-
cator is lit. C

51
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu-4

BASIC OPERATIONS

Storing Your Copy Setting In Memory (Program)

Your ten frequent copying jobs can be stored in the machine’s memory.
❐ The stored program cannot be deleted. If you want to change the stored pro-
gram, overwrite the stored program.

Storing your settings

1 Set the copy settings you want to

put into memory.

2 Press the Program key.

❐ If you want to cancel storing, touch the [Cancel] key.

3 Touch the [Store] key.

4 Touch one of the [1] ~ [10] keys

that you want to store your set-
tings in.
❐ A key with  has already settings in


it. If you want to overwrite settings,
touch the key with and follow the
instructions on the display.

Recalling a program

1 Press the Program key.

2 Make sure that the [Recall] key is dark. If not, touch it.

3 Touch one of the [1] ~ [10] keys that has  on it.

52
 eu-5

SP3 Copy Reference

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

REDUCING AND ENLARGING

(Reduce/Enlarge)
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

(Preset R/E)
You can select one of 12 preset ratios
(5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduction ra-
tios).

❐ You can add 2 fixed preset ratios using the user tools. ☛ See page 118.

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Confirm that the [Preset R/E] key
is dark. If not, touch the [Preset
R/E] key.

3
Touch the desired reproduction
ratio.
❐ Refer to the copy and paper sizes on
keys to select the appropriate ratio to
match your originals and copy paper.

53
 eu-5

SP3 Copy Reference

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps

Using the [+] and [-] keys or Number keys (Zoom)

The reproduction ratio can be
changed from 25% to 400% in 1%
steps. There are two ways to change
ratios.

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Touch the [Zoom] key.

3 When using the [+] and [-] keys

➊ Enter the desired reproduction
ratios touching the [+] and [-]
keys on the display.

3 When using number keys

➊ Touch the [Number Keys] key.

54
 eu-5

SP3 Copy Reference

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

➋ Enter the desired ratio using the

Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key, then enter the
new number.

➌ Touch [#] key on the display or

press the Enter key.

Stretching and squeezing the image

(Directional Magnification)
Copies can be reduced or enlarged at
different reproduction ratios horizon-
tally and vertically. There are two
ways to change ratios.

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Touch the [D. Mag. (%)] key.

3 When using number keys

➊ Touch the [Horizontal] or [Ver-
tical] key that you want to
change the ratio.
➋ Enter the desired ratio using the
Number keys.
❐ To change the entered ratios,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key. Then, enter the
new ratios.

➌ Touch the [#] key or press the

Enter key.

55
 eu-5

SP3 Copy Reference

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

3 When using [+] and [-] keys

➊ Touch the [+- Keys] key.

➋ Touch the [Horizontal] or [Verti-

cal] key that you want to change
the ratio. Select the desired ratios
using [+] and [-] keys.

Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size

Fitting the image in the copy area as it is

(Size Magnification)
The suitable reproduction ratio will be
automatically selected when you enter
the lengths of the original and copy
image you want.

Original Copy size Copy

you want

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Touch the [Size Magnification]
key.

56
 eu-5

SP3 Copy Reference

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

3
Enter the original size with the
Number keys.
❐ To change the entered size, touch
the [C] key or press the Clear/Stop
key. Then, enter the new size.

4
Touch the [#] key or press the
Enter key.

5
Enter the copy size by the Num-
ber keys. Touch the [#] key or
press the Enter key.

Stretching and squeezing the image into the copy area

(Directional Size Magnification)
Copies can be reduced or enlarged to
match independent horizontal and
vertical size settings.

Original Copy size Copy

you want

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Touch the [D. Size Mag. (mm)]
key.

57
 eu-5

SP3 Copy Reference

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

3
Enter the original horizontal size
by the Number keys.
❐ To change the entered size, touch
the [C] key or press the Clear/Stop
key. Then, enter the new size.

4
Touch the [#] key or press the Enter key.

5 3 and 4 to enter the other sizes, following the display

Repeat steps
instructions.

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS

AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)
Making Two-sided Copies (Duplex)

From one-sided originals From two-sided originals

(1 Sided ➝ 2 Sided) (2 Sided ➝ 2 Sided)

From book originals (Single) From book originals (Multi)

This mode makes two-sided copies This mode makes the copies face
from two facing pages of a bound each other exactly as the bound
(book) original. (book) originals do.

58
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

❐ When you make two-sided copies from one-sided originals, a right margin of 5
mm (0.2") is automatically set on the back side. You can change this setting
with the user tools. ☛ See pages 118 and 119.
❐ You can change a setting of this mode with the user tools. ☛ See page 126.
❐ Single and Multi modes do not support different size originals.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.
❐ The following paper limitations apply:
Metric version: Maximum size: A3 ;
Minimum size: A5 :
Weight: 64 ~ 105 g/m2
Inch version: Maximum size: 11" x 17" ;
Minimum size: 51/2" x 81/2" :
Weight: 17 ~ 24 lb
❐ Maximum number of copies (not in Sort, Rotate Sort, or Staple mode):
Metric version: 50 sheets
30 sheets (A3, 81 ~ 105 g/m2)
Inch version: 50 sheets
30 sheets (11" x 17", 22 ~ 24 lb)

59
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

❐ If you select Stapling ([Top]) and Page Numbering ([P1, P2...] or [1/5, 2/5...])
together when making two-sided copies, it is recommended to set Duplex and
Page Numbering modes as described below to avoid page numbers and staple
position overlap on the reverse side of copies.

1 At first, set the Duplex mode as you want.

2 Touch the [Stamp] key.
3 Touch the [Page Numbering] key and select [P1,P2...] or [1/5,2/5...].
☛ See pages 78 ~ 82.
4 If you select [Top to Top] in step 1, it is recommended that the [Shift
Position] key is selected (dark). If you select [Top to Bottom] in step 1,
it is recommended that the [Shift Position] key is not selected.

[Top to Top]

[Top to Bottom]

60
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

Originals and copies directions when making two-sided copies from one-
sided originals

When making two-sided copies from one-sided originals, you can select the
orientation ([Top to Top], [Top to Bottom]). Referring to the illustration
below, select one of them.
Original setting
Stapling
in the document Copies
position on the exposure glass
feeder

:
direction

[Top to ;
Top] direction

;
direction*

:
direction

[Top to ;
Bottom] direction*

;
direction*

❐ * recommended when your original is larger than B4, 81/2" x 14" or larger.

61
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

1
Touch the [Duplex/Series Cop-
ies] key.

2
Confirm that the [Duplex] key is
dark. If not, touch the [Duplex] key.

3 When you want to make two-sided copies from

one-sided originals
➊ Touch the [1 Sided ➝ 2 Sided]
key.

➋ Select [Even] or [Odd] for the

number of originals.
➌ Select [Top to Top] or [Top to
Bottom] for the orientation re-
ferring to the table on page 57.
➍ Touch the [Exit] key.

➎ Set your originals (☛ see pages 28 ~ 31) and make your copies.
❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be
on the bottom.
❐ If you set one original in the optional document feeder at a time, start with
the last page to be copied. Follow the procedures on pages 30 ~ 31.
❐ If you place originals on the exposure glass, start with the last page to be
copied. After setting your original, press the Enter or Start key following the
instructions on the display.

62
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

3 When you make two-sided copies from two-sided

originals
➊ Touch the [2 Sided ➝ 2 Sided]
key.

➋ Set your originals (☛ see pages 28 ~ 31) and make your copies.
❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be
on the bottom.
❐ If you set one original in the optional document feeder at a time, start with
the last page to be copied. Follow the procedures on pages 30 ~ 31.
❐ If you place originals on the exposure glass, start with the last page to be
copied. After setting your original, press the Enter or Start key following the
instructions on the display.

3 When you make two-sided copies from book originals

(Single, Multi)
➊ Touch the [Single] or [Multi] key.

➋ Touch the [Change Modes]

key and select the copy paper
size, because Auto Paper Se-
lect is canceled.

63
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

➌ Confirm that the reproduction ratio is appropriate. If not, select the

proper ratio by touching the [Reduce/Enlarge] key referring to the fol-
lowing table.
Book original size Copy paper Ratio
A3 ; A4 : 100%
A4 ; A4 : 141%
11" x 17" ; 81/2" x 11" : 100%
81/2" x 11" ; 81/2" x 11" : 129%
➍ Set your originals. Start with the last page of your book original and
work your way to the beginning.

Place the original face down on

the exposure glass and align
the last page with the left scale.

Or, set the facing original in the

optional document feeder as
shown in the illustration.
1 2
3 4

❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be
on the bottom.
❐ If you place your original on the exposure glass, or set one original at a time
in the document feeder, start with the last page to be copied.

➎ Make your copies by pressing the Start key.

❐ If you select the [Multi] in step ➊ and set your original on the exposure
glass, repeat steps ➍ and ➎ until all originals are finished. To finish your
job, press the Enter key following the instructions on the display.
❐ If you select the [Multi] in step ➊ and set one original at a time in the
document feeder in step ➍, press the Enter key to finish your job following
the instructions on the display.

64
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

Making One-sided Copies (Series Copies)

You can make one-sided copies from
two facing pages of bound (book)
originals and from two-sided originals.

Note: The optional document feeder is required when you select one-sided
copies from two-sided originals.
❐ When making one-sided copies from book originals, the maximum paper size
(: only) that can be used is as follows:
Metric version: A4 :
Inch version: 81/2" x 11" :
❐ Book ➝ 1 Sided mode does not support different size originals.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

1
Touch the [Duplex/Series Cop-
ies] key.

2
Touch the [Series Copies] key.

3
Select the desired mode by
touching a key.

65
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

If you select the [Book ➝ 1 Sided] key in step 3, touch the [Change
4 Modes] key and select the copy paper size because Auto Paper Select
is canceled. Confirm that the reproduction ratio is appropriate. If not,
select the proper ratio by touching the [Reduce/Enlarge] key. ☛ See
the table on page 64.

Set your originals (☛ see pages 28 ~ 31) and make your copies.
5
❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be on
the bottom. ☛ See the second illustration on page 64.
❐ When you set a book original on the exposure glass, start with the last page to
be copied aligning it with the left scale. ☛ See the top illustration on page 64.

6
Press the Start key.

66
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY

(Combine)
From 2 One-sided Originals To 1 One-sided Copy

From 4 One-sided Originals

From 8 One-sided Originals To 1 Two-sided Copy

From 16 One-sided Originals To Booklet

67
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

❐ If you want to make a booklet from

16 originals, fold copies as shown in
the illustration.
❐ If you want to make a booklet that
reads from right to left, change the
default setting with the user tools.
☛ See page 120.

❐ Even if the number of originals in the

optional document feeder is less than
the number required in the selected
mode, copies can be made as shown
in the illustration. You can change
this setting with the user tools.
☛ See page 126.

❐ If you add a blank sheet to the bot-

tom of the stack of your originals, the
copies can be made as shown in the
illustration.

❐ Auto Stamping, Date Stamping and

Page Numbering will be copied one
per copy paper as shown in the illus-
tration. This doesn’t apply to Booklet
mode.

❐ Auto Stamping, Date Stamping and

Page Numbering will be copied one
per original when you make a booklet
from 4 or 16 originals as shown in
the illustration.

68
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

❐ When you make a booklet from 4 or 16 originals, the maximum paper size that
can be used is as follows:
Metric version: A4
Inch version: 81/2" x 11"
❐ In this mode, the copier selects the reproduction ratio automatically. This repro-
duction ratio depends on the original and copy paper sizes as follows:
Metric version: original: A4, copy paper: A4
Inch version: original: 81/2" x 11", copy paper: 81/2" x 11"
❐ Even if the direction of originals is different from that of copy paper, the copier
will automatically rotate the image by 90o to make copies properly.
❐ The original size is decided when the first original is stored in the memory. So,
you cannot use originals containing different sizes and directions together.
❐ Separation line between originals can be printed using the user tools. ☛ See
page 120.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

1
Touch the [Combine] key.

2
Select one of the desired com-
bine modes.
❐ The suitable reproduction ratio is se-
lected automatically.

3
Touch the [Change Modes] key.

69
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

4
Select the same size copy paper
as the original.

5 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set the original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder
(☛ see page 28 or 30). Then press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator on the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
➌ Repeat step ➋ until all originals are scanned.
❐ If the number of scanned originals is the required number in the selected
mode, copying will start automatically.

➍ To finish your copying job, press the Enter and Start keys following the
instructions on the display.

5 When setting a stack of originals in

the document feeder
➊ Set a stack of originals (☛ see page 28) in the document feeder and
press the Start key.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.

70
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS,

AND MESSAGES (Stamp)
Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your
Copies (Background Numbering)
You can number your copies by print-
ing a number on the background of
the copy. This function can help you
to keep track of confidential docu-
ments.

❐ Background Numbering cannot be ro-

tated. For example, if you select Ro-
tate Sort with the Background Num-
bering, the copies will be as shown in
the illustration.

❐ You can change some settings (size, density) of the numbers with the user
tools. ☛ See page 126.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

1
Touch the [Stamp] key.

71
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

2
Touch the [Background Num-
bering] key.

3
Enter the number you want to
print on the first set using the
Number keys.
❐ To change the entered number,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key. Then, enter the new
number.

4
Touch the [Exit] key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

5 28 ~ 31) and press the Start key.

Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies

(Auto Stamping) - English Only
NOTE: If your machine is the metric version, this function cannot be used
as a default setting. If you want to use this function, contact your
sales or service representative.
One of the following seven messages
can be stamped on copies.

URGENT, COPY, PRIORITY

PRELIMINARY, CONFIDENTIAL,
For Your Information,
For Internal Use Only
*A frame is printed around the message.
❐ You can change some settings of Auto Stamping (stamping position, size, den-
sity) using the user tools. ☛ See pages 122 ~ 123.
❐ One message can be stamped at a time.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

72
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Original setting, stamping position and direction

Key on Display
Stamping Position ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈

Direction: Horizontal
Original Setting
COPY COPY COPY

➀ ➁ ➂

COPY COPY COPY

➃ ➄ ➅

: direction COPY COPY COPY

➆ ➇ ➈ ➀ ➁ ➂
COPY COPY COPY
COPY COPY COPY
➃ ➄ ➅

➆ ➇ ➈
COPY COPY COPY
; direction

Direction: Vertical
COPY

COPY

COPY

Original Setting

➀ ➁ ➂
COPY

COPY

COPY

➃ ➄ ➅
➆ ➇ ➈
COPY

COPY

COPY

: direction ➀ ➁ ➂
COPY

COPY

COPY

COPY

COPY

COPY

➃ ➄ ➅
COPY

COPY

COPY

➆ ➇ ➈
; direction

73
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

1
Touch the [Stamp] key.

2
Touch the [Auto Stamping] key.

3
Select the desired message by
touching a key.

4 If changing the stamping position and direction

➊ Touch the [Change] key.

➋ Select the desired position and

direction by touching keys. For
position and direction, refer to
the previous page. Touch the
[Exit] key.

74
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

4 If stamping on the front page only

➊ Touch the [Front Page Only]
key.

➋ Enter the total number of pages

of your originals using the
Number keys.
❐ Example:
If you have 2 two-sided originals,
the number of pages is 4.
❐ When you want to change the en-
tered number, touch the [C] key
or press the Clear/Stop key.
Then, enter the new number.

➌ Touch the [Exit] key.

5
Touch the [Exit] key. Set your
originals (☛ see pages 28 ~ 31)
and press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

75
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies

(User Stamping)
Up to four messages which you use frequently can be stored in the
machine’s memory. You can make copies with your message stamped.
❐ Before using this function, you have to store your messages using the user
tools. ☛ See page 128.
❐ You can change some settings of User Stamping using the user tools. ☛ See
page 124.
❐ Regarding original setting, stamping position and stamping direction, ☛ see page
73.
❐ One message can be stamped at one time.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

1
Touch the [Stamp] key.

2
Touch the [User Stamping] key.

3
Select the desired number where
your message is stored by touch-
ing a key.
❐ Keys with no stored message cannot
be selected. In the illustration, user
stamps 1 and 2 have been stored.

76
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

4 If changing the stamping position and direction

➊ Touch the [Change] key.

➋ Select the desired position and

direction by touching keys. For
position and direction, ☛ see
page 73.
➌ Touch the [Exit] key.

4 If stamping on the front page only

➊ Touch the [Front Page Only]
key.

➋ Enter the number of your origi-

nals using the Number keys.
❐ When you want to change the
number entered, touch the [C]
key or press the Clear/Stop key.
Then, enter the new number.

➌ Touch the [Exit] key.

5
Touch the [Exit] key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

6 28 ~ 31) and press the Start key.

77
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Printing Dates And Page Numbers

(Date Stamping, Page Numbering)

Date Stamping

❐ You can change the settings of Date Stamping with the user tools. ☛ See
page 124 ~ 125.
❐ If you select Date Stamping and Page Numbering together, the last stamping
direction selected takes priority.
❐ Regarding copies in Date Stamping and Combine mode, ☛ see page 68.
❐ The size and fonts of Date Stamping cannot be changed.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

Original setting, stamping position and direction

Direction: Horizontal Top Left Bottom Right

Direction: Vertical Top Left Bottom Right

78
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

1
Touch the [Stamp] key.

2
Touch the [Date Stamping] key.

3
Select the desired direction and
position of Date Stamping using
the keys on the display. Regard-
ing position and direction, ☛ see
previous page.

4
Touch the [Exit] key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

5 28 ~ 31) and press the Start key.

Page Numbering
You can print page numbers on your
copy. There are three types of page
numbering (P1, P2..., 1/5, 2/5..., or
-1-, -2-...)

79
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

❐ You can change the settings of page numbering with the user tools. ☛ See
pages 120 ~ 121.
❐ If you select Date Stamping and Page Numbering together, the last stamping
direction selected takes priority.
❐ Regarding copies in Page Numbering and Combine mode, ☛ see page 64.
❐ If you select Stapling ([Top]) and Page Numbering ([P1, P2...] or [1/5, 2/5...])
together when making two-sided copies, page numbers and staple position
might overlap. To avoid this, do the procedure described on page 60.
❐ The size and font of Page Numbering cannot be changed.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

Original setting, stamping position and direction

Original setting Horizontal

Vertical

1
Touch the [Stamp] key.

2
Touch the [Page Numbering]
key.

80
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

3
Select the desired format and ori-
entation by touching the keys on
display. Then, touch the [Exit]
key.
❐ Regarding the [Shift Position] key,
☛ see page 60.

If you selected [P1, P2...] or [-1-,-2-...] in step 3

4
➊ Enter the total page number of
originals using the Number
keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key, and then enter a
new number.

➋ Touch the [Exit] key.

☛ Go to step 5

If you selected [1/5,2/5...] in step 3

4
➊ Confirm that the [Total pages]
key is dark. If not, touch it. En-
ter the total number of originals
using the Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key, and then enter a
new number.

➋ Touch the [Exit] key.

❐ Regarding [Last page] key, ☛

see page 82.
☛ Go to step 5

81
 eu-6

SP3 Copy Reference

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

[Last page] key

In most cases, it is not necessary to input the data for this key. Use this key
for the following conditions:
❐ Example 1: If you want to make an insertion into a completed copy set (in this
case 2/3)

➊ Enter "3" for the [Total pages]

key.
➋ Enter "2" for the [Last page]
key.
➌ Using the original for 2/3 page,
make your copy.

❐ Example 2: If you have 80 originals, and want to make copies using 40 origi-
nals at a time.

➊ Set 80 ~ 41 pages of originals. First copy set Second copy set

Enter "80" for the [Total pages]
key, and make your copies.
➋ Set 40 ~ 1 pages of originals. En-
ter "80" for the [Total pages] key.
Enter "40" for the [Last page]
key, and make your copies.

5 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see pages 28 or 30). Then, press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator of the docu-
ment feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original on
the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
➌ Repeat step ➋ until your copying is finished.

5 When setting a stack of originals in

the document feeder
➊ Set a stack of originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 28), then
press the Start key.
❐ Last page should be on the bottom.

82
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Copying The Image Twice On One Page
(Double Copies)
The one original image is copied
twice on one copy as shown in the
illustration. The separation line is cop-
ied in broken line.

❐ You can change the type of separation line or delete it with the user tools.
☛ See page 119.
❐ Please refer to the following table when you select original and copy paper
sizes with 100% ratio:
Metric version:
Original Copy paper
A5 ; A4 :
B6 ; B5 :

Inch version:
Original Copy paper
51/2" x 81/2" ; 81/2" x 11" :

❐ It is impossible to turn lengthwise (;) original images 90° on lengthwise (;)

copy paper. In this case, select : copy paper referring to the above table.
❐ A5 ;, B6 ; and 51/2" x 81/2" ; originals cannot be detected properly on the
exposure glass. Make sure to select the copy paper manually or set the origi-
nals in the optional document feeder. This setting can be changed by your
service representative. ☛ See "SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS" IN
the "General Reference".
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

83
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

1
Confirm that the [Auto Paper Se-
lect] and [Full Size] keys are
dark.

2
Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

3
Touch the [Double Copies] key.

4
Set your originals in the optional
document feeder (☛ see page
25).
❐ If your original is A5 ;, B6 ; or
51/2" x 81/2" ; and you do not set
your originals in the document feeder,
select the copy paper manually before
making copies by touching the
[Change Modes] key.

5
Press the Start key.

84
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Erasing The Centre And The Border

(Erase Centre/Border)
This function erases the centre and/or
all four sides of the original image,
such as book originals.

❐ The default setting of the erased margin is as follows. You can change this set-
ting using the user tools. ☛ See page 119.
Metric version: 10 mm
Inch version: 0.4"
❐ The position of the margin to be erased is determined according to the original
size and reproduction ratio. If your original is non-standard size, undesired ar-
eas might be erased.

: original copy ; original copy

❐ If you select copy paper manually, make sure to select the same direction as
that of your original.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

85
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

1
Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2
Touch the [Erase Centre/Border]
key.

3
Select keys.

4
Touch [Exit] key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

5 28 ~ 31) and press the Start key.

Adjusting The Margin (Margin Adjustment)

You can shift the image either left or
right to make a binding margin.

Original

❐ The margin width default is as follows. You can change this setting using the
user tools. ☛ See page 114.
Metric version: 5 mm
Inch version: 0.2"
❐ Margin for two-sided copies (orientation: Top to Top):
For copies that read from left to right, set the front left and back right margins.
For copies that read from right to left, set the front right and back left margins.

86
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

❐ When you make two-sided copies from one sided originals, a right margin 5
mm (0.2") is set on the back side automatically as a default setting. You can
change this setting using the user tools. ☛ See page 119.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

1
Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2
Touch the [Margin Adjustment]
key.

3
Set the margin width by touching
the right or left arrow key.
❐ To clear the width entered, touch the
[Clear] key.

4
Touch the [Exit] key.

Set your original (☛ see pages

5 28 ~ 31) and press the Start key.

87
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy

(Image Repeat)
The original image is copied repeat-
edly.

❐ The number of repeated images depends on the original size, copy paper size,
and reproduction ratio. Refer to the following table.
Metric version:
Original size Copy Paper Size Reproduction ratio and number of repeat image
A5 : A4 : 71% ➝ 4 images
A5 ; A4 ; 35% ➝ 16 images
A5 : A4 ; 100% ➝ 2 images
50% ➝ 8 images
A5 ; A4 : 25% ➝ 32 images
Inch version:
Original size Copy Paper Size Reproduction ratio and number of repeat image
51/2" x 81/2 " : 81/2" x 11" : 65% ➝ 4 images
51/2" x 81/2" ; 81/2" x 11" ; 32% ➝ 16 images
51/2" x 81/2" : 81/2" x 11" ; 100% ➝ 2 images
50% ➝ 8 images
51/2" x 81/2" ; 81/2" x 11" : 25% ➝ 32 images

❐ Separate lines between repeated images can be printed using the user tools.
☛ See page 120.
❐ Part of a repeated image might not be copied depending on copy paper size,
copy paper direction, or reproduction ratio.
❐ If your original is non-standard size, the copier might not detect the original size
correctly. It is recommended to use originals of standard size.
❐ The copying speed might be slower in this mode.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

88
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

1
Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2
Touch the [Image Repeat] key.

3
Touch the [Change Modes] key.

4
Select the copy paper size by touching a key referring to the table on
the previous page.

5
Select the reproduction ratio by touching the [Reduce/Enlarge] key
referring to the table on the previous page.

6
Set your originals (☛ see pages 28 ~ 31) and press the Start key.

Reversing Black and White (Positive/Negative)

Black and white images of the original
are reversed.

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

89
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

1
Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2
To u c h th e [Positive/Negative]
key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages 28 ~ 31) and press the Start key.
3
Merging Images (Overlay/Merge)

Making 1 image from 2 (Overlay)

Two different originals can be merged
onto the same copy paper.

Merging a template into several copies (Copy Merge)

The image of the original which is
copied first will be a background image
(master) on all copies. Then, the re-
maining originals which follow the first
one will be copied with the background.

90
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

❐ The copying speed might be slower in this mode.

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see page
103.

1
Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2
Touch the [Overlay/Merge] key.

3
Select the [Overlay] or [Copy
Merge] key.

4
Touch the [Exit] key.

91
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

5 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see page 28 or 30). Then, press the Start key.
❐ When you select the [Copy Merge] in step 3, the original for the template
(master) should be read first.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator of the docu-
ment feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original on
the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
➌ Repeat step ➋ until your copying is finished.
❐ To clear the template (master), or finish your copying, press the Enter key.

5 When setting a stack of originals in the

document feeder
➊ Set a stack of originals (☛ see page 28) in the document feeder and
press the Start key.
❐ When you select the [Copy Merge] in step 3, the original for the template
(master) should be on the bottom.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.
❐ To clear the template (master) or finish your copying, press the Enter key.

92
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

OPTIONAL FINISHING
Sorting Into Sets With Finisher (123,123,123) (Sort)
Copies can be assembled as sets in
sequential order by sliding the shift
tray from side to side.

Note: This function can be used only when your machine is equipped with
the optional finisher.

Notes for Sort mode

❐ You can make up to 999 copy sets at a time. However, when the number of
copies exceeds the capacity of the shift tray, remove copies from the copy tray.
Regarding the capacity of finisher, ☛ see the table on page 94.
❐ Different size originals can be used only when you make one-sided copies from
one-sided originals.
❐ After starting copying, the only setting you may change is image density, The
change will apply from the next copy. ☛ See page 36.
❐ The maximum number of pages that can be stored is as follows:
A4, 81/2" x 11": Approximately 100 pages (images)
❐ You can change settings of this mode using the user tools. ☛ See page 127.
❐ When you make two-sided copies, the maximum number of copies stacked in
the duplex unit at a time is limited. For details, ☛ see page 44.

93
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

❐ For this finisher, the following limitations apply:

Metric version
Paper size Paper weight Maximum capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum A4 or smaller: 1,500 sheets
A3 A5 157 g/m 2 52 g/m2 B4 or larger: 1,000 sheets

Inch version
Paper size Paper weight Maximum capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum 81/2" x 11" or smaller: 1,500 sheets
11" x 17" 51/2" x 81/2" 42 lb 14 lb 81/2" x 14" or larger: 1,000 sheets

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

1
To select Sort mode, touch the
[Sort] key.

2
Enter the number of copies required using the Number keys.

3 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see pages 28 or 30). Then press the Start key. The copier
starts memorizing the original image.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green, or the Auto Feed indicator of the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original in the same direction as step ➊.

94
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

❐ When the memory capacity reaches 0%, the copier stops memorizing.
Press the Start key to finish copy jobs which are already in memory. After
that, follow the instructions on the display.

➌ Repeat step ➋ until all originals are scanned.

➍ After all originals are put into memory, press the Enter key.
➎ Press the Start key.
❐ If you want to stop storing images or to delete stored images, ☛ see page
45.
❐ If you make one-sided copies, the first set of copies has been completed
when all originals are stored in memory.

3 When setting a stack of originals in the

document feeder
➊ Set a stack of the originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 28),
then press the Start key.
❐ Last page should be on the bottom.
❐ When memory runs out during copying, the machine can be programmed to
behave in two ways with the user tools.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [Yes]

→ After all images in memory are copied, the machine will re-start
scanning automatically.
You should re-order your copies after all copy jobs are finished.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [No]

→ The machine will wait for you to press the Start key. At this point you
should remove your copies from the copy tray. Press the Start key
and then follow the instructions on the display to continue copying.

If you want to change the user tools setting, ☛ see page 127.
❐ If you want to stop storing images or to delete stored images, ☛ see page
45.

95
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stapling With Finisher (Staple)

Note: This function can be used only when your machine is equipped with
the optional finisher.
❐ For this mode, the following limitations apply:
Metric version:
Paper size Paper weight Stapler capacity Shift tray capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum A4 or smaller:
A4: 1,500 sheets
from 2 to 50 sheets
(30 sets of 50 sheets)
A3 B5 80 g/m2 64 g/m2 B4 or larger: A3: 1,000 sheets
from 2 to 30 sheets
Inch version
Paper size Paper weight Stapler capacity Shift tray capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum 81/2"x11" or smaller:
81/2"x11": 1,500 sheets
from 2 to 50 sheets
(30 sets of 50 sheets)
11" x 17" 81/2" x 11" 21 lb 17 lb 81/2"x14" or larger: 11"x17": 1,000 sheets
from 2 to 30 sheets

❐ Post cards, tracing paper, OHP sheets, and adhesive labels, and paper that is
curled or has low stiffness cannot be used.
❐ If the number of copies is over the stapler capacity, the copies will be delivered
to the shift tray without stapling.
❐ If memory reaches 0% during copying, the copies will be delivered to the shift
tray without stapling.
❐
If " Add Staples" is displayed during copying, copies might be delivered to
the shift tray without stapling.
❐ Copy paper with different sizes and directions cannot be stapled.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 103.

96
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stapling Position And Original Setting

Single staple in the top left corner in Auto Paper Select

If you select Stapling with the Auto Paper Select and there is no paper that
matches the direction of originals, the copier automatically rotates the copy
image. As a result, you can get copies stapled in the left upper corner.
❐ The maximum original image size that can be rotated is as follows:
Metric version: A4
Inch version: 81/2" x 11"
❐ The copy image cannot be rotated if you select [2 Staples].
If your original is A4, 81/2" x 11", set originals and select the [Top] key to
get copies stapled at the left upper corner.
Stapling
Original Original setting Stapled copies
position
on the exposure glass When the image is not rotated.

: direction in the document feeder When the image is rotated.

[Top]
on the exposure glass When the image is not rotated.

; direction in the document feeder When the image is rotated.

97
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

❐ If your original is larger than A4, 81/2" x 11", (ex. or 11" x 17"), the original
image cannot be rotated. In this case, set original and select the [Top] or [Bot-
tom] keys as shown to get copies stapled at the left upper corner.

Stapling
Original setting Stapled copies
position
on the exposure glass

If your
original is
[Bottom] portrait in the document feeder
direction.

on the exposure glass

If your
original is
[Top]
landscape in the document feeder
direction.

98
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stapling positions when there is copy paper that is identical

in size and direction as your original
Stapling Original setting
Copies
position on the exposure glass in the document feeder

:
direction

[Top]

;
direction

:
direction

[Bottom]

;
direction*

:
direction

[2 Staples]

;
direction*

❐ * recommend when your original is larger than B4, 81/2" x 14" or larger.

99
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

When Setting One Original At A Time

1
Select one of three stapling by
touching a key.

2
Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder. (☛ See pages 28 or 30.) Then, press the Start key. The copier
starts memorizing the original images.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

3
When the Start key turns green, or the Auto Feed indicator of the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step 2, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original at the same direction in step 2.

3 until all originals are scanned.

4
Repeat step

5
After all originals are put into memory, press the Enter key.

6
Follow the instructions on the display. In some cases, you must press
the Start key.

When Setting A Stack Of Originals In The

Document Feeder

1
Select one of three stapling by touching a key.

2
Set a stack of originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 28) , then
press the Start key.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.

100
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Sorting Into Sets With 3-bin Sorter (123, 123, 123)

(Sort, Rotate Sort)
Note: This function can be used only when your machine is equipped with
the optional 3-bin sorter.
❐ For this mode, the following limitations apply:
Metric version (when copies exits face up)
Paper size Paper weight
Bin Maximum capacity*
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum

A6 ;
A4 : 500 sheets
1st A3 157 g/m2 52 g/m2
A3 : 250 sheets
2nd, 3rd A3 A6 ; 105 g/m2 52 g/m2 250 sheets
(* paper weight: 64 ~ 80 g/m2)

Inch version (when copies exits face up)

Paper size Paper weight
Bin Maximum capacity*
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum

51/2" x 81/2" ;
81/2" x 11" : 500 sheets
1st 11" x 17" 42 lb 14 lb
11" x 17" : 250 sheets
2nd, 3rd 11" x 17" 51/2" x 81/2" ; 28 lb 14 lb 250 sheets
(* paper weight: 17 ~ 20 lb)

The operation in this mode is the same as one in Sort or Rotate Sort mode.
For details, ☛ see page 43.
❐ Copies will be delivered to the 1st bin. You can change this setting using the
user tools. ☛ See "USER TOOLS" in the "General Reference".

101
 eu-8

SP3 Copy Reference

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page with

3-bin Sorter (111, 222, 333) (Rotate Stack)
Note: This function can be used only when your machine is equipped with
the optional 3-bin sorter.
For this mode, the following limitations apply:

Metric version (when copies exits face up)

Paper size Paper weight
Bin Maximum capacity*
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum

A6 ;
A4 : 500 sheets
1st A3 157 g/m2 52 g/m2
A3 : 250 sheets
2nd, 3rd A3 A6 ; 105 g/m2 52 g/m2 250 sheets
(* paper weight: 64 ~ 80 g/m2)

Inch version (when copies exits face up)

Paper size Paper weight
Bin Maximum capacity*
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum

51/2" x 81/2" ;
81/2" x 11" : 500 sheets
1st 11" x 17" 42 lb 14 lb
11" x 17" : 250 sheets
2nd, 3rd 11" x 17" 51/2" x 81/2" ; 28 lb 14 lb 250 sheets
(* paper weight: 17 ~ 20 lb)

The operation in this mode is the same as one in Rotate Stack mode. For
details, ☛ see page 46.
❐ Copies will be delivered to the 1st bin. You can change this setting using the
user tools. ☛ See page "USER TOOLS" in the "General Reference".

102
 SP3 Copy Reference eu-9

COMBINATION CHART

COMBINATION CHART
❐ The combination chart on pages 104 and 105 shows which modes can be
used together. When you read the chart, please refer to the following tables.

BLANK CELL means that these modes can be used together.

➙ means that the mode after you select will be the mode you’re working in.
✗ means that these modes cannot be used together.

A Setting originals
B Finishing
C Selecting copy paper
D Image Rotation
E [Duplex]
F [Series Copies]
G [Combine]
H [Overlay/Merge]
I [Reduce/Enlarge]
J [Adjust Image]
K Adjusting image density
L Selecting original setting
M [Stamp]

103
 SP3 Copy Reference eu-9

COMBINATION CHART

Mode after you select A B C D

Mode before you select 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 Setting original on the exposure glass ➙ ➙
A 2 Setting an original in the DF (SADF) ➙ ➙
3 Setting a stack of originals in the DF (ADF) ➙ ✗
4 Sort ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗
5 Rotate Sort(with& without optional 3-bin sorter) ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗
B 6 Rotate Stack(with& without optional 3-bin sorter) ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗
7 Sort with optional finisher ➙ ✗ ✗
8 Staple with optional finisher ➙ ✗ ✗
9 Using the bypass tray (standard size) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗
✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗
C 10 Using the bypass tray (non-standard size)
11 Selecting paper size manually ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙
12 Auto Paper Select ➙ ➙ ➙
13 Image Rotation in Auto Paper Select ➙ ➙ ➙
D
14 Image Rotation in Duplex ✗ ✗
15 one-sided → two-sided ✗ ✗
E 16 two-sided → two-sided ✗ ✗ ➙
17 Single (from book original) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙
18 Multi (from book original) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙
19 two-sided → one-sided ➙
F
20 Book → one-sided ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙
21 2 one-sided → 1 one-sided (2 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
22 4 one-sided → 1 one-sided (4 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
G 23 4 one-sided → 1 two-sided (4 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
24 8 one-sided → 1 two-sided (8 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
25 4 one-sided → booklet (4 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
26 16 one-sided → booklet (16 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
H 27 Overlay/Merge ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
28 Reducing/Enlarging
I
29 Auto Reduce/Enlarge ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙
30 Double Copies ✗ ✗ ✗
31 Image Repeat ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
32 Erase Centre
J 33 Erase Border
34 Margin Adjustment for front side ✗ ✗
35 Margin Adjustment for back side ✗ ✗
36 Positive/Negative
37 Erase Background
K 38 Auto Image Density
39 Manual Image Density
40 Letter mode
L 41 Letter/Photo mode
42 Photo mode
43 Generation Copy mode
44 Auto Stamping ✗ ✗
45 User Stamping ✗ ✗
M 46 Date Stamping ✗ ✗
47 Page Numbering ✗ ✗
48 Background Numbering
49 Interrupt Copying ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗

104
 SP3 Copy Reference eu-9

COMBINATION CHART

E F G H I J K L M
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1
A 2
3
4 ✗ ✗
5 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
B 6 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
7 ✗ ✗
8 ✗ ✗
9 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
10 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
C
11
12 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙
13 ➙ ✗
D
14 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
15 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
16 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
E
17 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
18 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
19 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
F
20 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
21 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
22 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
G 23 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
24 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
25 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
26 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
H 27 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
28 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙
I
29 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙
30 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
31 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
32
J 33
34
35
36
37 ➙
K 38 ➙
39 ➙
40 ➙ ➙ ➙
41 ➙ ➙ ➙
L
42 ➙ ➙ ➙
43 ➙ ➙ ➙
44
45
M 46
47
48
49 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗

105
 SP3 Copy Reference eu-9

COMBINATION CHART

106
 eu10

SP3 Copy Reference

WHAT TO DO IF
SOMETHING GOES
WRONG
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES ............................................................................... 108
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT .................................................................. 109

107
 eu10

SP3 Copy Reference

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES

Problem Cause Action
Adjust the image density.
The image density is too dark.
☛ See page 36.
Confirm that the [Erase
Erase Background is not
Copies appear dirty. Background] key is dark. If not,
selected.
touch it.
The platen cover, exposure Clean them. ☛ See
glass, or document feeder belt is "MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE"
dirty. in the "General Reference".
Adjust the image density.
The image density is too dark.
☛ See page 36.
The reverse side of an
original image is copied. Confirm that the [Erase
Erase Background is not
Background] key is dark. If not,
selected.
touch it.
The original has a low contrast
image. Adjust the image density.
☛ See page 36.
The image density is too light.
Copies are too light.
Damp or rough grain paper is Use dry paper without rough
used. grain.
Add toner. ☛ See "ADDING
Toner bottle is almost empty.
TONER" in the "General Reference".
The same copy area is The platen cover, exposure Clean them. ☛ See
dirty whenever making cop- glass, or document feeder belt is "MAINTAINING YOUR MACHINE"
ies. dirty. in the "General Reference".
Set originals correctly.
The original is not set correctly.
Parts of the image are not ☛ See pages 28 ~ 31.
copied. An improper paper size is
Select the proper paper size.
selected.
Set originals correctly.
Copies are blank. The original is not set correctly.
☛ See pages 28 ~ 31.
A moire pattern is pro-
duced on copies as shown
in the illustration.
Your original has dot pattern Place the original on the
image or many lines. exposure glass at a slight angle.

❐ If you cannot correct the problem by taking the above actions, please contact
your service representative.

108
 eu10

SP3 Copy Reference

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU

WANT
Finishing
Problem Cause Action
After loading a new staple cartridge, staples might not be ejected the
first few times you try to use the stapler.
A few sheets might not be stapled. To correct this, try turning over
the paper stack in the tray unit. If there is no improvement, change to
copy paper with less curl.
Copies are not stapled.
Remove jammed staples. ☛ See
There are jammed staples in the "REMOVING JAMMED
stapler. STAPLES" in the "General
Reference".
The number of copies exceeds Check the stapler capacity.
the capacity of the stapler. ☛ See page 96.
Staples are wrongly posi- Set originals correctly.
Originals are not set correctly.
tioned. ☛ See page 99.

Adjust Image
Problem Cause Action
In Double Copies mode, Select the proper original and
Combination of original and copy
parts of the original image copy paper.
paper is not correct.
are not copied. ☛ See the table on page 83.
In Centre/Border mode, You set the wide erased margin. Set the narrower margin using
parts of the original image Your original has narrow margins the user tools.
are not copied. on four sides. ☛ See page 119.

109
 eu10

SP3 Copy Reference

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

Adjust Image (continued)

Problem Cause Action
In Margin Adjustment Set the narrower margin using
mode, parts of the original You set the wide margin. the user tools.
image are not copied. ☛ See page 118.
Select copy paper larger than
You selected the same size copy originals.
In Image Repeat mode, the ☛ See page 88.
paper as originals, and did not
original image is not copied
select the proper reproduction Select the proper reproduction
repeatedly.
ratio. ratio.
☛ See page 88.

Stamp
Problem Cause Action
Auto Stamping does not ap- Set originals correctly.
The original is not set correctly.
pear on copies. ☛ See page 73.
Change the density of Auto
Original image and Auto You selected the solid density. Stamping using the user tools.
Stamping overlap on cop- ☛ See page 122.
ies and original image can-
not be read. Your original has narrow margins Change the stamping position.
on four sides. ☛ See page 73.
Register User Stamping again
User Stamping is not registered
using the user tools.
correctly.
☛ See page 128.
User Stamping does not ap- Register User Stamping again
pear on copies. The low density image is with the high density original
registered. using the user tools.
☛ See page 128.
Set originals correctly.
The original is not set correctly.
☛ See page 73.

110
 eu10

SP3 Copy Reference

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

Stamp (continued)
Problem Cause Action
Date Stamping does not ap-
pear in the desired direc- The stamping position decided
tion. You have selected Date
afterwards takes priority. Select
Stamping and Page Numbering
Page Numbering does not together. the same directions for both
appear in the desired modes.
direction.
Set originals as follows:

Background Numbering cannot

Directions of Background
be rotated. If you set originals
Numbering and original im-
incorrectly, the Background
ages on copies do not
Numbering does not appear
match.
copies in correct direction.

Date Stamping does not ap- Set originals correctly.

The original is not set correctly.
pear on copies. ☛ See page 78.

Duplex
Problem Cause Action
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder, the last
Order of copies is not cor- You set originals in the incorrect page should be on the bottom.
rect. order. If you set a original on the
exposure glass, start with the
last page to be copied.
Orientation of copies (Top You set originals in an incorrect Select the correct orientation, or
to Top, or Top to Bottom) direction or the orientation setting set originals correctly.
is not correct. is incorrect. ☛ See page 61.

111
 eu10

SP3 Copy Reference

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

Combine
Problem Cause Action
You cannot make a booklet Change setting using the user
Combine Original Booklet Format
from 16 originals by folding tools.
is not correct.
copies. ☛ See page 120.
The maximum original size that
Your original is larger than A4 or
can be used is A4, 81/2" x 11".
81/2" x 11".
Use the correct original.
Copy paper must be the same
Parts of the image are not size as your original. Select the
copied. You selected a different size correct paper size.
copy paper from your originals.
Select the correct reproduction
ratio before using Combine mode.
Your originals are not identical in Use originals that are identical in
size and direction. size and direction.
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder, the last
Order of copies is not cor- You set originals in the incorrect page should be on the bottom.
rect. order. If you set an original on the
exposure glass, start with the
last page to be copied.

112
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

CHANGING THE
COPIER’S SETTINGS
USER TOOLS ............................................................................................................................ 114
User Tools Menu .................................................................................................................................... 114
How To Change The Copy Features .................................................................................................. 116
Copy Features....................................................................................................................................... 117
How To Register User Stamp ............................................................................................................... 128

113
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

USER TOOLS
This section is for the key operators in charge of this copier. You can
change or set the copier’s default settings using the following user tools.

User Tools Menu

Basic Settings
❐ Regarding the "Basic Settings," ☛ see "CHANGING THE MACHINE’S SET-
TINGS" in the "General Reference".

Copy Features
Menu ☛ See
Copy Auto Paper Select Priority
Modes Auto Image Density Priority
Original Mode Priority page 119
Full Main Menu Display
Duplex Mode Priority
User Reproduction Ratio 1, 2
Maximum copy quantity page 118
Original beeper
Adjust Margin Adjust Front
page 118
Image Margin Adjust Back
Erase Border
Erase Centre page 119
1 → 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust
Double Copies Separation Line page 119
Combine Originals Booklet Format
page 120
Image Repeat/Combine Separation Line

114
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

Menu ☛ See
Stamp Page Numbering Format page 120
P1,P2 1/5,2/5... Format Position
page 121
-1-,-2- Format Position
Auto Stamping
Size page 122
Stamp Layout Density
Position page 123
User Stamp
Size
User Stamp Layout Density page 124
Position
Number of Stamps Per Page
Date Format
Orientation
Date Position/Format Position
Position Top Left page 125
Position Bottom Right
Background Numbering Size
page 126
Background Numbering Density
Input/ Duplex Remaining Copy Exit
page 126
Output Combine Remaining Copy Exit
SADF Auto Reset Time
Mixed Original Sizes page 127
Auto Sort Mode
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart
page 127
Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue

115
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

How To Change The Copy Features

1
Confirm that the copier is in the in-
itial condition. If not, press the Clear
Modes/Low Power Mode key.

2
Press the User Tools key.

3
Touch the [Copy Features] key.

4
Select the desired settings following the instruction on the display.

❐ [▼Next] : Use to go to the next page.

[▲Prev.] : Use to go back to the previous page.
[Exit] : Touch this key after entering the new data.
In the "User Tools Main Menu", touch to exit the User Tools condition.
[Cancel] : Touch to return to the previous menu without changing any data.
[Menu] : Use to go back to the previous menu.

5
To return to the initial condition, press the User Tools key.

116
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

Copy Features

Copy Modes
MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Paper Select As a default setting, Auto Paper select is selected. You can
Priority cancel this setting.
❐ Default: Yes
Auto Image Density As a default setting, Auto Image Density is selected. You can
Priority cancel this setting.
❐ Default: Yes
Original Mode As a default setting, Letter is selected. You can change it to
Priority Letter/Photo, Photo, or Generation Copy.
❐ Default: Letter
Full Main Menu As a default setting, the tray keys are displayed only when
Display Auto Paper Select is canceled, original type setting keys are
displayed only when Letter mode is canceled, and the manual
image density keys are shown only when the Auto Image
Density is canceled. You can cancel this setting and have all
keys displayed always.
❐ Default: Hide
Duplex Mode Priority As a default setting, from one-sided originals to one-sided
copies mode is selected. You can cancel this setting, and can
select one of the following modes.

♦ [1 Sided → 2 Sided]
(from even number of one-sided originals to a two-sided
copy (orientation: Top to Top))
♦ [2 Sided → 2 Sided]
(from two-sided originals to two-sided copies)
❐ Default: [1 Sided → 1 Sided]
[▼ Next]

117
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Copy Modes in Copy Features)

[▼ Next]
User Reproduction Up to 2 reproduction ratios (from 25 ~ 400%) which you
Ratio 1, 2 frequently use can be registered.
Maximum copy The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.
quantity ❐ Default: 999
Original beeper The beeper sounds and a message is displayed, when an
operator forgets to remove originals after copying.
❐ Default: On
❐ If the Operation panel beeper setting is set to Off (☛ see "USER
TOOLS" in the "General Reference"), the beeper does not sound
and only the message is displayed.
❐ If the Auto Response (Human) Sensor is set to No (☛ see
"USER TOOLS" in the "General Reference"), this function does not
work.
[▲ Prev.]

Adjust Image
MENU DESCRIPTION
Margin Adjust Front The default setting of the margin widths on the front and back
Margin Adjust Back page in the Margin Adjustment mode can be changed as
follows:
Metric version: 0 ~ 30 mm in 1 mm steps*
Inch version: 0" ~ 1.0" in 0.1" steps*
*both left and right
❐ Default: Metric version: front 5 mm on left
back 5 mm on right
Inch version: front 0.2" on left
back 0.2" on right
❐ Margin Adjust Back takes effect only when making two sided
copies.
❐ The margin set in the Margin Adjust Back is added on the back
side of copies automatically when making two-sided copies from
one-sided originals if you select [Yes] in the "1 → 2 Duplex Auto
Margin Adjust" menu.

118
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Adjust Image in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Erase Border The default setting of the width of the erased margins in the
Erase Centre Erase Centre/Border mode can be changed as follows:
Metric version: 3 ~ 50 mm in 1 mm steps
Inch version: 0.1" ~ 2.0" in 0.1" steps
❐ Default: Metric version: 10 mm
Inch version: 0.4"
1 → 2 Duplex Auto As a default setting, the image on the back side of copies is
Margin Adjust shifted automatically to create the binding margin when
making two-sided copies from one-sided originals. This margin
is decided in the Margin Adjust Back. You can cancel this
setting.
❐ Default: Yes
❐ If you use the Margin Adjustment function, this setting does not
come effect.
[▼ Next]
Double Copies You can select a separation line in the Double Copies mode
Separation Line from broken line, solid line, crop marks, or no line.
❐ Default: Broken

None Solid Broken Crop Marks

119
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Adjust Image in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Combine Originals When making a booklet from 16 originals in the Combine mode,
Booklet Format you can select a booklet that reads from left to right or from
right to left.
❐ Default: L to R
R to L L to R

front front
side side

back back
side side

Image Repeat/Combine As a default setting, no separation line is printed on copies in

Separation Line the Image Repeat and Combine modes. You can cancel this
setting and print a solid separation line.
❐ Default: No
[▲ Prev.]

Stamp
MENU DESCRIPTION
Page Numbering As a default setting, [P1, P2...] is selected when entering in
Format the Page Numbering mode. You can cancel this setting and
select other formats ([1/5,2/5...] or [-1-,-2-...]).
❐ Default: P1, P2 ⋅⋅⋅

120
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
P1, P2 The printing position of Page Numbering (P1, P2 and 1/5, 2/5)
1/5, 2/5... can be shifted up/down from the top edge and left/right from the
Format Position right edge as follows:
Metric version: 4 ~ 40 mm in 4 mm steps
Inch version: 0.16" ~ 1.60" in 0.16" steps
❐ P1, P2 and 1/5, 2/5 formats can be printed on the right top corner.
❐ Default: Metric version: 8 mm (from the top edge)
12 mm (from the right edge)
Inch version: 0.32" (from the top edge)
0.48" (from the right edge)

4 ~ 40 mm or
0.16" ~ 1.60"
40 ~ 4 mm or
1.60" ~ 0.16"

-1-, -2- The printing position of Page Numbering (-1-, -2-) can be shifted
Format Position up down from the bottom edge and left/right from the centre of
paper as follows:
Metric version: up/down: 4 ~ 40 mm in 4 mm steps
left/right: 0 (centre) ~ 20 mm in 2 mm steps
Inch version: up/down: 0.16" ~ 1.60" in 0.16" steps
left/right: 0" (centre) ~ 0.80" in 0.08" steps
❐ Only -1-, -2- format can be printed on the centre of the bottom.
❐ Default: Metric version: 8 mm (from the bottom edge)
0 mm (centre)
Inch version: 0.32" (from the bottom edge)
0" (centre)

centre ~ 20 mm or centre ~ 20 mm or
centre ~ 0.80" centre ~ 0.80"

40 ~ 4 mm or 1.60" ~ 0.16"

121
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Stamping As a default setting, "URGENT" is selected when entering in the
Auto Stamping mode. You can cancel this setting and select
other messages (CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, PRIORITY,
PRELIMINARY, For Your Information, or Internal Use Only).
❐ If your machine is the metric version, the Auto Stamping cannot be
used as a default setting. If you want to use this function, contact
your sales or service representative.
❐ Default: URGENT
Stamp Layout
You can change the size, density, and position of each message of Auto Stamping (UR-
GENT, COPY, PRIORITY, PRELIMINARY, CONFIDENTIAL, For Your Information, and
For Internal Use Only)
❐ If your machine is the metric version, the Auto Stamping cannot be used as a default setting. If
you want to use this function, contact your sales/service representative.

Size There are four sizes of Auto Stamping message:

1 X, 2 X, 4 X, 8 X.
❐ Default: 1 X (32 mm x 64 mm, 1.28" x 2.56")

Density There are three density levels (Solid, Fine Screen, and Coarse
Screen).
❐ Default: Solid
❐ If the copy image overlaps the Auto Stamping in
Solid, the copy image cannot be seen.
Fine Screen, the copy image can be seen.
Coarse Screen, the copy image can be seen more.

122
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Stamp Layout (continued)
Position The default printing position of Auto Stamping can be selected
from one of nine positions. Also, the default printing position can
be adjusted as follows:
❐ Default: Top Right
Metric version: 24 mm from top and right edge
Inch version: 0.96" from top and right edge

Top left Top right

Top Centre

Centre
Centre Centre
left right

Bottom
Bottom left Centre Bottom right

Metric version Inch version

➀ from the left edge 4 ~ 104 mm 0.16" ~ 4.16"
➁ from the top edge 4 ~ 144 mm 0.16" ~ 5.76"
➂ from the right edge 4 ~ 104 mm 0.16" ~ 4.16"
➃ from the bottom
4 ~ 144 mm 0.16" ~ 5.76"
edge
➄ from the horizontal
above 72 mm ~ below 72 mm above 2.88" ~ below 2.88"
centre line of paper
➅ from the vertical
left 52 mm ~ right 52 mm left 2.08" ~ right 2.08"
centre line of paper
❐ Metric version: in 4 mm steps
Inch version: in 0.16" steps
[▼ Next]

123
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
[▼ Next]
User Stamp Using the [Register] key, you can register your own messages
as user stamps. Up to four stamp can be registered. Also, you
can delete registered user stamps using the [Delete] key.
To perform this function, ☛ see page 128.
❐ A key with  has a registered stamp in it.
User Stamp Layout
You can set the size, density, and position for each user stamp. The procedure is the
same as the "Stamp Layout" on pages 122 and 123.
Size ☛ See page 122.
Density ☛ See page 122.
Position ☛ See page 123.
Number of As a default setting, one user stamp is printed on a copy. You
Stamps Per Page can cancel this setting, and print a user stamp repeatedly on a
overall copy.
❐ Default: Single
Date Position/Format
Date Format You can select the date stamping format from one of three
(mm/dd/yyyy, dd.mm.yyyy, or dd/mm/yyyy).
❐ Default: Metric version: dd.mm.yyyy
Inch version: mm/dd/yyyy

Orientation The orientation can be selected horizontal or vertical.

❐ Default: Horizontal
<Horizontal> <Vertical>
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

124
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Date Position/Format (continued)
Position The date can be printed at Top Left or Bottom Right.
❐ Default: Top Left
<Top Left> <Top Left>

<Bottom Right> <Bottom Right>

Position Top Left The stamping position can be shifted as follows.

Position Top Right Metric version: 4 ~ 40 mm in 4 mm steps
Inch version: 0.16" ~ 1.60" in 0.16" steps
❐ Top Left Default
Metric version: 8 mm from the top edge
32 mm from the left edge
Inch version: 0.32" from the top edge
1.28" from the left edge
4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~1.60"
(from the top edge)
4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~ 1.60"
(from the left edge)

❐ Bottom Right Default

Metric version: 8 mm from the bottom edge
12 mm from the right edge
Inch version: 0.32" from the bottom edge
0.48" from the right edge

4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~ 1.60"
(from the right edge)
4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~ 1.60"
(from the bottom edge)

125
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Background There are three sizes of the Background Numbering.
Numbering Size The size of one letter can be changed as follows:
Large (approximately 64 x 32 mm or 2.56" x 1.28")
Medium (approximately 32 x 16 mm or 1.28" x 0.64")
Small (approximately 8 x 4 mm or 0.32" x 0.16")
❐ Default: Medium
Background There are four density levels: Very Light, Light, Medium, or Dark.
Numbering Density ❐ Default: Light
[▼ Next]

Input/Output
MENU DESCRIPTION
Duplex Remaining As a default setting, when making two-sided copies from one-
Copy Exit sided, or using Multi mode with the optional document feeder,
the last copy paper can exit automatically with the back side
blank under the following conditions. You can cancel this setting.
♦ When you select [Even], although the number of originals
are odd.
♦ When you select [Odd], although the number of originals
are even.
♦ When your originals are finished in the Multi mode.

❐ Default: Yes
❐ This function does not come effect, when you set one original at a
time in the document feeder or set an original on the exposure glass.
Combine As a default setting, even if the number of originals in the
Remaining Copy optional document feeder is less than the number required in the
Exit selected Combine mode, copies can be made. You can cancel
this setting.
❐ Default: Yes
❐ This function does not come effect, when you set one original at a
time in the document feeder or set an original on the exposure glass.

126
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

(Input/Output in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
SADF Auto Reset When you set one original at a time in the optional document
Time feeder, the Auto Feed indicator lights for a selected time after an
original is fed to show that the document feeder is ready for
another original. You can adjust this time from 3 seconds to 60
seconds in 1 second steps.
❐ Default: 10 seconds
Mixed Original As a default setting, you cannot use originals of different sizes
Sizes and directions when you set originals in the optional document
feeder. You can cancel this setting.
❐ Default: No
❐ If you set the copier in this mode, the copying speed becomes slower
in some modes.
Auto Sort Mode As a default setting, Sort mode is not selected. You can cancel
this setting and can select Sort mode as a default setting.
❐ Default: No
[▼ Next]
Memory Full Auto When memory runs out during copying, the machine can be
Scan Restart programmed to behave in two ways with the user tools.
[Yes]: After all images in memory are copied, the machine will re-
start scanning automatically. You should re-order your copies
after all copy jobs are finished.
[No]: The machine will wait for you to press the Start key. At
this point you should remove your copies from the copy tray.
Press the Start key and then follow the instructions on the
display to continue copying.
❐ Default: No
Rotate Sort Auto As a default, two paper trays identical in size but different in
Paper Continue direction must be available in the Rotate Sort or Rotate Stack
mode. If there are not two paper trays identical in size but
different in direction, the copier stops copying. Also, the copier
stops if one of the selected paper trays in use runs out of paper.
You can change this setting, so that the copier continues
copying using paper trays identical in size and direction.
❐ Default: No
[▲ Prev.]

127
 eu-11
SP3 Copy Reference

USER TOOLS

How To Register User Stamp

1
Confirm that the copier is in the ready condition.

2
Press the User Tools key.

3
Touch the keys in the following order.
[Copy Features] key
[Stamp] key
[Next] key
[Register] key of the User Stamp menu

4
Select the user stamp number by
touching a key.
❐ A key with  has a registered stamp
in it. If you want to overwrite it, follow


the instructions on the display after
touching the key with .

5
Place your message on the expo-
sure glass face down as shown 0.5 mm
in the illustration. Then, touch the (0.02")
topscale
[Scan] key.
32 mm
❐ The area that can be registered is 64 (1.28")
mm x 32 mm (2.56" x 1.28") as
leftscale
shown in the illustration.
64 mm (2.56")
❐ Margins from the top and left scale
1 mm (0.04")
cannot be registered as shown in the
illustration.

6
Press the User Tools key to re-
turn to the ready condition.

128
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu12

SPECIFICATIONS
COPIER .................................................................................................................................... 130

129
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu12

COPIER

COPIER
Configuration: Desktop
Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Memory capacity: approximately 1GB hard disk
Scanning method: Flatbed solid state scanner
Resolution: 400 x 400 dpi
Gray scale: 256 levels
Originals: Sheet, book
Original thickness: less than 30 mm, 1.18"
Original size: Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Copy paper size: ☛ See pages "CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE"
of the "General Reference".
Copy paper weight: 1st paper tray:
60 ~ 105 g/m2 (16 ~ 28 lb)
bypass tray:
60 ~ 157 g/m2 (16 ~ 42 lb)
large capacity tray:
60 ~ 128 g/m2 (16 ~ 34 lb)
when making two-sided copies:
64 ~ 105 g/m2 (17 ~ 28 lb)
Copy paper capacity: 1st paper tray:
500 sheets or less than 53 mm, 2.08"
bypass tray:
40 sheets or less than 4 mm, 0.15"
large capacity tray:
1000 sheets or less than 120 mm, 4.72"
Optional copy tray A3, 11" x 17": 200 sheets
capacity: B5 or smaller: 200 sheets
B4 or smaller: 500 sheets
Copying speed: 40 copies/minute
(A4 :, 81/2" x 11" :, in Full Size mode)
First copy time: less than 5.2 seconds
(A4 :, 81/2" x 11" :, feeding from the large capac-
ity tray)
Warm-up time: less than 140 seconds (20°C, 68°F)

130
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu12

COPIER

Toner replacement: Bottle exchange (700 g)

Power source: 120V , 60Hz, more than 12A
Preset reproduction 5 enlargement and 7 reduction
ratios:
Metric version Inch version
400% 400%
200% 200%
Enlargement 141% 155%
122% 129%
115% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
93% 93%
87% 85%
82% 77%
Reduction 71% 74%
65% 65%
50% 50%
25% 25%

Power consumption:
Copier only Full system*
Warm-up less than 0.88 kW less than 0.90 kW
Stand-by less than 0.20 kW less than 0.22 kW
Copying less than 1.20 kW less than 1.20 kW
Maximum less than 1.50 kW less than 1.50 kW
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit

Noise emission:
Sound pressure level (The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at the
operator position)
Copier only Full system
Stand-by 25 dB (A) 25 dB (A)
Copying 54 dB (A) 59 dB (A)
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit

Sound power level (The measurements are made according to ISO 7779.)
Copier only Full system
Stand-by 40 dB (A) 40 dB (A)
Copying 66 dB (A) 69 dB (A)
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit

131
 SP3 Copy Reference
eu12

COPIER

Dimensions:

Width Depth Height

Copier with platen cover, copy tray, and pa- 1,150 mm 655 mm 1,024 mm
per tray unit 45.3" 25.8" 40.4"
Copier with document feeder, finisher, and 1,551 mm 655 mm 1,110 mm
paper tray unit 61.1" 25.8" 43.8"
Copier with document feeder, 3-bin sorter, 1,300 mm 655 mm 1,110 mm
and paper tray unit 51.2" 25.8" 43.8"

Weight:
Copier with platen cover, copy tray, and 1500- 137.5 kg
sheet paper tray unit 303.2 lb
Copier with document feeder, finisher, and 178.5 kg
1500-sheet paper tray unit 393.6 lb
Copier with document feeder, 3-bin sorter, and 161.0 kg
1500-sheet paper tray unit 355.0 lb

Optional equipment: Document feeder

Finisher
Copy tray
Platen cover
1500-sheet tray unit
1000-sheet tray unit
3-bin sorter
❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

132
SP3 Copy Reference

INDEX

133
 SP3 Copy Reference

INDEX

INDEX
Copy Features, 117
A Adjust Image, 118
Copy Modes, 117
ADF, 28 - 29 Input/Output, 126
Adjust Image, 83 - 92, 118 Stamp, 120
1 -- 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust, 119 Copy key, 34
Combine Originals Booklet Format, 120 Copy Modes, 117
Double Copies, 83 Auto Image Density Priority, 117
Double Copies Separation Line, 119 Auto Paper Select Priority, 117
Erase Border/Erase Center, 119 Duplex Mode Priority, 117
Erase Center/Border, 85 Full Main Menu Display, 117
Erase Center\Border, 86 Maximum copy quantity, 118
Image Repeat, 88 Original beeper, 118
Image Repeat/Combine Separation Line, Original Mode Priority, 117
120 User Reproduction Ratio 1, 2 , 118
Margin Adjust Front/Back, 118 Copy Set Counter, 8
Overlay/Merge, 90 Copy Set Total, 8
Positive/Negative, 89 copy tray, 3, 5
Auto Image Density, 36
Auto Image Density Priority, 117 D
Auto Paper Select, 38
Auto Paper Select Priority, 117 Date Position/Format, 124
Auto Reduce/Enlarge, 40 Date Stamping, 78
auto response sensor, 5 Directional Magnification, 55
Auto Sort Mode, 127 Directional Size Magnification, 57
Auto Stamping, 72, 122 document feeder, 3
Auto Start, 36 Double Copies, 83
Double Copies Separation Line, 119
B Duplex, 58
Duplex Mode Priority, 117
Background Numbering, 71 Duplex Remaining Copy Exit, 126
Background Numbering Density, 126 duplex unit, 5
Background Numbering Size, 126 Duplex/Series Copies, 57 - 66
Basic Settings, 117 Duplex, 58
book originals, 63, 65 Series Copies, 65
bypass tray, 5, 48
non-standard size paper, 49 E
standard size copy paper, 49
Enter key, 7
C Erase Background, 37
Erase Border/Erase Center, 119
Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key, 6 Erase Center/Border, 85
Clear/Stop key, 7 exposure glass, 5
COMBINATION CHART, 103 - 106
Combine, 67 - 70 F
Combine Originals Booklet Format, 120
Combine Remaining Copy Exit, 126 finisher, 3
Contrast Dial, 6 finishing, 93 - 102
copier, 130 - 132 front cover, 5
COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR, 4 - 5 Full Main Menu Display, 117

134
 SP3 Copy Reference

INDEX

Full Size Copying, 35 message area, 8

fusing unit, 5 Mixed Original Sizes, 127

G N
Generation Copy mode, 42 Number keys, 7
GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY, 26
Guidance key, 26 O
H one-sided originals, 62
operation panel, 5 - 10
hard keys, 6 hard keys, 6
options, 3
I Original beeper, 118
Original Counter, 8
image density, adjusting, 36 Original Mode Priority, 117
Image Repeat, 88 original setting
Image Repeat/Combine Separation Line, Date Stamping, 78
120 Duplex, 61
Input/Output, 126 Erase Center/Border, 85
Auto Sort Mode, 127 Page Numbering, 80
Combine Remaining Copy Exit, 126 Stamp, 73
Duplex Remaining Copy Exit, 126 Staple, 99
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 127 Staple & Auto Paper Select, 97
Mixed Original Sizes, 127 original type, setting, 42
Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue, 127 originals, 27
SADF Auto Reset Time, 127 originals, setting, 27
Interrupt Copying mode, 51 Overlay/Merge, 90
Interrupt key, 6
P
J
P1, P2, 1/5, 2/5...Format Position, 121
Job Recall key, 6 Page Numbering, 79
Job Recall mode, 51 Page Numbering Format, 120
paper tray, 5
K paper tray unit, 3
paper, selecting, 37
key counter holder, 5 Photo mode, 42
platen cover, 5
L Positive/Negative, 89
Preset R/E, 53
large capacity tray, 5
Program key, 6
Letter mode, 42
Program mode, 52
Letter/Photo mode, 42

M R
Reduce/Enlarge, 53 - 57
main switch, 5
Directional Magnification, 55
Manual Image Density, 36
Directional Size Magnification, 57
Margin Adjust Front/Back, 118
Preset R/E, 53
Margin Adjustment, 86
Size Magnification, 56
Maximum copy quantity, 118
Zoom, 54
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 127
Rotate Sort, 43

135
 SP3 Copy Reference

INDEX

Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue, 127

Rotate Stack, 46 U
S User Reproduction Ratio 1, 2 , 118
User Stamp, 124
SADF, 30 - 32 User Stamp Layout, 124
SADF Auto Reset Time, 127 User Stamp, registering, 128
Series Copies, 65 User Stamping, 76
Size Magnification, 56 User Tools, 114 - 128
Sort, 43 Copy Features, 117
Sort, optional, 93 User Tools key, 6
Sorting Into Sets, 43, 93
specifications Z
copier, 130 - 132
Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page, Zoom, 54
46
Stamp, 71 - 82, 120 ETC
-1-, -2- Format Position, 121
Auto Stamping, 72, 122 -1-, -2- Format Position, 121
Background Numbering, 71 1 -- 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust, 119
Background Numbering Density, 126 16 in 1, 67 - 70
Background Numbering Size, 126 2 in 1, 67
Date Position/Format, 124 4 in 1, 67 - 70
Date Stamping, 78 8 in 1, 67 - 70
P1, P2, 1/5, 2/5...Format Position, 121 [Cancel] key, 116
Page Numbering, 79 [Change Modes] key, 25
Page Numbering Format, 120 [Check Modes] key, 25
Stamp Layout, 122 [Exit] key, 116
User Stamp, 124 [Last Page] key, 82
User Stamp Layout, 124 [Menu] key, 116
User Stamping, 76 [Next] key, 116
Stamp Layout, 122 [Prev.] key, 25, 116
Staple, optional, 96 [Shift Position] key, 60
Start key, 6
SYSTEM OVERVIEW, 3

T
toner bottle, 5
Touch Panel Display, 8, 24 - 25
troubleshooting
copies, 108
copies, Adjust Image, 109
copies, Combine, 112
copies, Duplex, 111
copies, finishing, 109 - 112
copies, Stamp, 110
two-sided copies, 58
two-sided originals, 63, 65

136
 RICOH COMPANY, LTD.
15-1, 1 chome, Minami-Aoyama, Minato-ku, Tokyo
Printed in Japan
Telephone: Tokyo 3479-3111
UE @j% A1958607
PixView,.
User’s Guide

Cornerstone Imaging, Inc.

1710 Fortune Drive
San Jose, California 95131

Telephone (408) 3253800

Fax (408) 232-9292
Pix Vie w User !s Guide

Cornerstone Imaging, Inc. makes no warranties, either expressed or implied,

regarding the enclosed computer software package, its merchantability, or its
fitness for any particular purpose, except as explicitly stated in any enclosed
product warranty. The exclusion of implied warranties is not permitted by
some states. The above exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty
provides you with specific legal rights. There may be other rights that you
may have which vary from state to state.
PixViewTM is a trademark of Cornerstone Imaging, Inc.
All product names mentioned in this book are trademarked or copyrighted by
their respective owners.
0 1994 Pixel Translations Inc. 0 1997 Cornerstone Imaging, Inc. All Rights
Reserved. All information contained in this document is proprietary to
Cornerstone Imaging, Inc. No part of this document may be copied,
photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or
machine-readable form without prior consent, in writing, from Cornerstone
Imaging, Inc. The software described in this document is furnished under a
license agreement.
This manual describes the installation and use of copyrighted software. Said
software is licensed to the End User for use only in strict accordance with the
End User License Agreement. Licensee is advised to read this End User
License Agreement carefully before commencing use of this product.

Important Notice
The product described in this manual is designed to store and process almost
any document or drawing available in printed form. Most printed materials
are copyrighted under the laws of the United States and other countries. It is
illegal to copy or reproduce on disk or paper, by use of this software or any
other means, materials for which you or your company do not have
permission, unless your activity is within some of the limited exceptions to the
copyright laws. Copyright infringement carries with it serious civil and
criminal penalties under the law. Do NOT use this product to copy materials
illegally.
Many scientific and professional journals give blanket permission to copy and
reproduce portions of their contents by transmitting a fee per page copied,
usually specified in the journal, to the Copyright Clearance Center, 27
Congress Street, Salem, MA 01970 USA, or to the publisher. Consult your
attorney or the copyright owner for specific information.
 LICENSE AGREEMENT
This Software License Agreement (the “Agreement”) grants you a
nonexclusive license to use the software supplied to you by Cornerstone
Imaging, Inc. (“Licenser”), including the software supplied to you on disks,
diskettes and/or as part of the equipment supplied by Licenser (the
“Software”). It also imposes certain restrictions on your use of the Software.
Licenser, and/or its licensers, retains ownership of the Software and no rights
are granted to you other than a license to use the Software on the terms
expressly set forth in this Agreement.
For backup purposes, you may make a copy of the Software supplied on disks
and/or diskettes, but you may not use the backup copy other than as an
archive for the replacement of the primary copy. You must include on the
backup copy all copyright and other notices included on the Software as
supplied by Licenser. You may not otherwise make any copy of any of the
Software, and you may not make any copy of any of the written materials
accompanying the Software and/or the equipment supplied by Licenser.
You acknowledge that the underlying structure, sequence, organization and
source code of the Software is a valuable trade secret of Licenser and/or its
licensers, and you agree not to decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer, or
modify in any way, any of the Software.
You may not transfer or assign your rights to use the Software, unless
Licenser receives the written agreement of the transferee to be bound by all of
the terms of this Agreement.
Upon violation of any of the provisions of this Agreement, your rights to use
the Software shall automatically terminate and you shall be obligated to
return the Software to Licenser, or destroy all copies of the Software. This
Agreement shall be governed by California law, other than its provisions
concerning the applicability of laws of other jurisdictions.
You acknowledge that the export of the Software is governed by the export
control laws of the United States of America and other countries. You agree to
comply with all such export control laws.
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

If you are a unit of the Department of Defense, you acknowledge that the
Software is provided as “commercial computer software” under the terms and
conditions of this Agreement, as Licenser’s standard software license
agreement, in accordance with clause 252.211 of the Federal Acquisition
Regulations and its successors. If you are a civilian agency, you acknowledge
that the Software is “restricted computer software”, is licensed only with
“restricted rights” and use, reproduction or disclosure is subject to restrictions
set forth in subparagraphs (a) through (d) of clause 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations and its successors, and for purposes of subparagraph
(d) thereof, you further acknowledge that the Software is unpublished and all
rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

iv
Contents

1 INTRODUCTION 1
About PixView 1

System Requirements 3
Ordering Additional Scanner Drivers 4

2 QUICK START 5
Installing a Scanner 5
Installing PixView 5
Starting PixView 6
Selecting a Scanner 7
Scanning Pages and Documents 7
Viewing Pages 8
Printing Pages 9
Saving Pages and Documents 10

Shortcut Keys 11

3 INSTALLING PIXVIEW 15
Scanner Installation 15
Types of Scanners 16
Scanner Interfacing 16
Scanner Settings 17
PixView Installation 17
Making a Backup Copy 17
Installing PixView 18
Installing Scanner Drivers 20
Deleting Unneeded Scanner Drivers 22
Selecting a Scanner 24
Adding a Scanner Driver 25
PixTools/View Control Panel 26

V
PixView User's Guide

window (for instantaneous positioning of the image in the view

window). In addition, PixView fully supports imaging display
hardware accelerators from Cornerstone Imaging and Sigma
Designs. Color images can be displayed either in color or
grayscale, and color balance can be adjusted while viewing.

Printing PixView prints images using any standard Windows-supported

printer. Options for convenient image printing include Fit Page,
Actual Pixels, Actual Size, and Thumbnails. In addition, PixView
supports accelerated printing hardware from Fujitsu (Print
Partner lOi), Sigma (AIM), and Xionics (XIPPrint). Faxing of
images can be accomplished with any Windows-compatible fax
modem and software.

Saving PixView saves acquired images in a variety of popular image file

formats and compression schemes. By using TIFF Group 4, you
can achieve compression ratios of 35:l to 50:1, depending on the
type of image and the quality of the scan. Color capabilities vary
according to your scanner and the image file format in use.
PixView supports color file storage, scanning, viewing, and
printing. For a complete list of file formats and compression
schemes, see page 54.
 Chapter I-Introduction

System Requirements
Following are the minimum system requirements for PixView:
Computer: 386SX or higher PC-compatible.
Memory: 4 Mbytes, minimum; 8 Mbytes recommended.
Diskette drive: 3.5” high density.
Mouse: Windows-compatible pointing device is required to
operate PixView.
Hard disk: The process of image acquisition and storage requires
large amounts of disk space, with the actual
requirement depending on the number of images you
want to store, their type (monochrome, gray scale,
color), and compression. PixView itself requires less
than 5 Mbytes of disk space.
Display: VGA (minimum).
Operating system: DOS 5.0 or higher; Microsoft Windows 3.1 or higher.
Scanner (optional): A supported image scanner and suitable interface card.

Network: PixView runs in network environments as a single-user

application. It is recommended that PixView be
installed on a local drive. Users should be aware that
saving large images to a network drive may result in
reduced network performance and unacceptable
application performance.

Important
If your computer uses a SCSI hard disk drive and you are using
a SCSI scanner, we recommend that you connect the scanner to
a separate SCSI host adapter from the hard disk. The reasons
for this are: 1) there have been cases reported of hard disk
crashes apparently related to scanner operation on the same
SCSI host adapter, and 2) high-performance scanners will
almost certainly degrade system performance when sharing the
SCSI host adapter with a hard disk.

3
Pix Vie w User k Guide

Ordering Additional Scanner Drivers

PixView is supplied with the complete set of ISIS scanner drivers, but has permission to
use only a specific subset of the available drivers. The drivers that will work with your
copy of PixView depends on the level of PixView that you purchased. Also, drivers are
constantly being developed for new scanners. To obtain information on upgrading
PixView to work with additional scanners and information on the availability of other
drivers, contact the PixTools Sales department using the contact information listed in
Appendix D.
2 Quick Start

This chapter is for computer users who are familiar with their computers and
want to start using PixView as quickly as possible. Chapter 3, “Installing
PixView,” contains complete installation and setup instructions for users who
need detailed information.

Before installing PixView, check for a file named README.TXT on the PixView
diskette. If this file exists, then it contains new information that became
available after this manual was printed. You should display or print this file
and read it carefully.

Installing a Scanner
Before installing PixView, you should install your scanner hardware and
make sure it is functioning properly. Be sure that the scanner interface card
uses settings that do not conflict with other devices in your system.

A SCSI driver is usually required for proper use of a SCSI host adapter card.
Make sure you have the appropriate drivers loaded, as instructed by the
manufacturer of your SCSI host adapter.

Installing PixView
PixView is supplied on two diskettes. each with its own setup program. To
install PixView, follow these steps:

1. Launch Windows and insert the PixView diskette into your diskette drive.
2. From Program Manager or File Manager, choose Run from the File menu.
3. Type a : \ setup and click OK.
4. When prompted, specify an installation directory for PixView (for example,
C:\PIXVIEW). Click OK.
5. When PixView Setup completes, remove the PixView diskette and insert
the Scanners diskette into your diskette drive.
6. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 above.

5
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

7. When Scanners Setup completes, remove the Scanners diskette.

Starting PixView
Start PixView by double-clicking its icon in the PixView Program Group.
The PixView window now appears. It looks similar to the following, depending
on its size and the Application Settings:

6
 Chapter Z-Quick Start

Selecting a Scanner
Before you can scan pages, you must select your scanner:

1. Choose Select Scanner from the File menu.

2. In the Scanner Selection dialog box, scroll through the list of scanners
until you find your scanner, then click to highlight it.

Note
If a message appears stating that you do not have permission
to use a particular scanner, you have not purchased the correct
level of PixView for your scanner. For information about
enabling other scanners, contact the PixTools Sales
department using the contact information listed in
Appendix D. For information about obtaining and adding
support for scanners not listed in the Scanner Selection dialog
box, see page 25.
Tip: For users of Kofax scanner interface cards, use the KFXSIMPLX
driver for simplex (single-sided) scanners; use the KOFAXBIC driver for
duplex (double-sided) scanners.

3. Click OK. You are now ready to scan pages.

All supplied ISIS scanner drivers have been copied to the windows\pixtran
directory of your hard disk. For information about removing drivers to
conserve disk space, see page 22.

Scanning Pages and Documents

To scan pages:

1. Place one or more pages in your scanner.

2. Choose Scan page from the File menu. In a moment, your scanner will
scan and the image of the first page will appear in the PixView window.

Choose Scan batch to file from the File menu. A dialog box appears
prompting you to supply document naming information. Complete this
information and then click OK. In a moment, your scanner will begin
scanning and continue scanning at its full rated speed until all pages in
the feeder have been scanned.
Pix Vie w User k Guide

Note
Some scanners do not report when pages are loaded in their
automatic document feeders. If your scanner falls into this
category, then you will see a dialog box after choosing Scan
page in which you can specify whether a page is on the flatbed
or in the feeder.

3. To use other scanning features, see Chapter 4 “Using PixView” on page 27.

Viewing Pages
After you have scanned one or more pages, PixView offers many viewing
possibilities. To see a few of these, click the various buttons in the toolbar:
Enlarges or reduces the page until it fits the width of the PixView
43
I F&W* window.

Enlarges or reduces the page until it fits the width or height of the
I-IRW#h PixView window, whichever is smaller, to ensure that you can see
the entire page image.

18 Displays one pixel on the screen for every pixel in the image.
%#lcm
El
Zooms in a user-defined amount.
9
I iGcQ!xnJn

Zooms out a user-defined amount.

9
I zmw

““ir Rotates the image 90” clockwise.

I t&t&a
Displays the previous page of a set of pages. Inactive when the first
page is currently being displayed.

Displays the next page of a set of pages. Inactive when the last
page is currently being displayed.

If you scale an image so that it is larger than the PixView window, you can
use any of three methods to move other parts of the image into view:

8
 Chapter 2-Quick Start

Scroll bars These are the Windows standard for moving around a document,
but are not very efficient when dealing with highly magnified
image views.
Keyboard Use the cursor arrow keys as well as the HOME, END, PAGE UP,
and PAGE DOWN keys to move the image. This is also not very
efficient.
Pan Use the pan window to quickly and efficiently bring the desired
window portion of the image into view. If the pan window is not visible,
choose Pan window from the Options menu to enable it.
In addition to the toolbar buttons, you can change the appearance of the
image in the PixView window by using the Page Settings command in the
Options menu. You can experiment with these settings now. For more
information, see “Changing Page Setting” on page 69.

Printing Pages
To print your pages, make sure your printer is configured and selected in the
Windows Control Panel, and that it is on-line and ready to print. Then choose
one of the following commands from the File menu:

Print (Fit Page) Prints pages so that they fill the page. For full page
images, this may result in a reduction or enlargement to
ensure that the entire area is within the printable
region of the printed page.

Print (Actual Prints pages such that one pixel in the scanned image
Pixels) corresponds to one pixel on the printed page.

Print (Actual Size) Prints pages actual size, with no scaling. Most printers
have a margin around the page where they cannot print.
Image data in this region is clipped. To ensure printing
the entire image, choose Print (Fit Page) instead.

Print (Thumbnails) Prompts for number of images per page and then prints
multiple tiny page images on each page.

In each case, you can specify the number of copies to print, the print quality,
and the range of pages to print. Optionally, you can print just a section of a
page. To print a section, you must drag a selection rectangle over the desired
portion of the page image before choosing the Print command, as explained on
page 50.

9
PixView User’s Guide

Saving Pages and Documents

With the exception of single-page scans, PixView saves your pages as you
scan. Normally, there is no need to perform a separate save operation. You
will need to save individual images scanned using the Scan page command.
You will need to save your document in cases where you have opened a
document and want to change its attributes, orientation, or file
type/compression.

You can save either individual pages or documents (sets of pages). Sets of
pages can be saved in a single file (if you are using an image file format that
supports multiple pages) or in multiple files (using any of several supplied or
user-defined naming schema). In addition, you can save a selected area of a
page or a selected area of every page of a document.

To save the page currently displayed, choose Save page as from the File
menu, choose a drive and directory, file type, and compression, then type a
name in the File Name box and click OK.

To save a document (all pages), choose Save document as from the File menu,
chose a drive and directory, file type, and compression, then type a name in
the File Name box. Next, choose Multi-page file and/or Use Naming Schema
and click OK. For detailed information on naming schema, see “Naming
Schemas” on page 60.
To save a selection, first select an area of a page by using the mouse. Drag the
mouse to create a rectangle around the area you are interested in. Then
choose either Save page as or Save document as from the File menu. Note
that ‘Selected area” is checked. Specify the usual parameters and save the
file-only the selected area of the page or the selected area applied to every
page of the entire document is saved.

10
 Chapter 2-Quick Start

Shortcut Keys
Key Button Menu Command Effect

+ Zooms in an amount specified

9
in the Zoom Factor setting
I zoom
In

I9
Zooms out an amount specified
z0~naut in the Zoom Factor setting

B Changes Horizontal Preserve

toward Black. (black and white).

Increases the Brightness

(grayscale).
Rotate to portrait orientation
(0”).

Rotate to landscape orientation

(90”).

Rotate to upside-down portrait

orientation (180”).

Rotate to upside-down landscape

orientation (270”).
CTRL+A Options + Displays the Application
Application Settings dialog box.
Settings

CTRL+B Changes Vertical Preserve

toward Black. (black and white).
Increases the Contrast
(grayscale).

CTRL+C Edit + Copy Copies the image or the selected

area to the Clipboard.

CTRL+E Options l Scanner Displays the Scanner Settings

&i
Settings
SeanSebiQ dialog box.
El

11
Pixview User's Guide

Key Button Menu Command Effect

CTRL+G Page + Goto Page Displays the Goto Page dialog

box.

CTRL+I Help + About Displays the About Image

Image dialog box, which gives you
information about the image on
the current page.

C Cancels scanning. Note that

the scanner may continue to
scan one or more pages before
it receives and processes the
cancel command.

CTRL+M Options l Page Displays the Page Settings

or S Settings dialog box.

CTRL+L Loop to next image. Unlike

Next Page and Prev Page, goes
to first page after displaying
last page of document.

Page + Next Page Displays the next page of the

document.

CTRL+O File + Open Displays the Open Document

document dialog box.

Displays the previous page of

the document.

Loops through up to eight

images as fast as possible, then
shows flip times when stopped.
(Demo version only.)

CTRL+S Demo + Stop Demo Stops loop demo and shows image
flip times. (Demo version only.)

12
 Chapter 2-Quick Start

Key Button Menu Command Effect.

CTRL+T Page + Show Displays the Thumbnail viewer,

Thumbnails allowing you to select the page
you want to view.

CTRL+U Loop only once through images.

(Demo version only.) Allows
display of image read,
decompress, and display times.
After looping once, images may
be cached; demo will then show
only display times.

CTRL+W Changes Vertical Preserve

toward White (black and white).
Decreases the Contrast
(grayscale).

CTRL+Z Options l Pan Toggles Pan window display on

or P Window and off.

Fl Help + Index Displays the main index of the

on-line help system.

F2 Image is sized to fit the width

and height of the window

F3 Image is sized to fit the width

of the window.

F4 One pixel of the image is

displayed for each pixel in the
display.

F5 or Demo + Load Load the five demo images

CTRL + D Images (demo version only).

G Toggles between normal and

scale to gray display.

13
fixwew User’s Guide

Key Button Menu Command Effect

I Toggles display between positive

and negative image display.

M Toggles between normal and

mirror image display.

0 Toggles the overscan

(background window) color
between black and white.

PAGEUr Scrolls up the page height of

the window.

PAGE Scrolls down the page the

DOWN height of the window.

HOME Scrolls to top of current page.

END Scrolls to bottom of current

page.
N Returns to default image
settings after changing
orientation, scaling, brightness,
contrast, etc.

W Changes Horizontal Preserve

toward White (black and white).

Decreases the Brightness

(grayscale).

14
3 Installing PixView

This chapter provides complete installation and configuration instructions for

PixView. If you are experienced with Windows software installation, you may
prefer to follow the quick start instructions in Chapter 2.

Scanner Installation
The first step in installing PixView is to install your scanner. PixView can
open images created by virtually any popular scanner on the market;
however, PixView is much more convenient to use with a supported scanner. A
supported scanner is one which can be operated by PixView’s scanning
controls. For a list of scanners supported by PixView, contact PixTools Sales
department using the contact information in Appendix D. This list can be
downloaded from our BBS or accessed from the Internet.
Install your scanner by following the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure to
remove all packing material and shipping locks. Be sure that your scanner
interface settings do not conflict with other devices in your system. In
particular, pay attention to the I/O add ress, memory address, DMA channel,
and/or SCSI ID, as needed by your particular scanner interface. If possible,
test your scanner using software provided by the manufacturer to be sure it is
working properly and communicating with your computer.

15
Pix We w User’s Guide

Types of Scanners
There are many categories of scanners. Some of the types that are supported
by PixView include:

l Flatbed scanners
l Feeder scanners
l Flatbed scanners with document feeders
l Duplex (double-sided) scanners
l Full page scanners

l Monochrome scanners
l Gray scale scanners
l Color scanners

Scanner Interfacing
Different scanners connect to computers by different methods:

Dedicated Must be installed in your computer and connect using a cable

interface provided with the scanner.
card

SCSI host In some cases, you can use a commercially-available SCSI host
adapter adapter. In other cases, you must use a dedicated SCSI host
adapter provided by the scanner manufacturer. In either case,
we recommend that you do not use the same SCSI host adapter
for your scanner and SCSI hard disk.

Video A few scanners use a special interface card that receives video
interface data from the scanner for high-speed image transfer. These
special interface cards are generally manufactured by a third
party (Kofax and Xionics, for example) and are connected to the
scanner via a coaxial cable (similar to the cable used for cable
television).

Parallel or A few scanners connect directly to your computer’s built-in

serial parallel (or even serial) interface. Acquiring images from a
interface scanner connected to the serial port will be a very slow process.

16
 Chapter 3-Instal’ling PixVie w

Scanner Settings
Various scanners have different capabilities, and therefore different settings.
PixView supports whatever settings are available on your scanner. Typical
settings include:
. Brightness (and automatic brightness)
. Contrast (and automatic contrast)
. Mode (black and white, gray scale, color)
. Dither (simulated halftoning)
. Dots per inch (scan resolution)
. Page size
. Outline extraction
. Gamma correction
. Thresholding
. White level
. Noise removal
. Scanning area

For information about changing these settings, see “Changing Scanner

Setting” on page 68. During installation, your scanner’s default settings
should be adequate.

PixView Installation
This section provides step-by-step instructions for installing the PixView
software.

Making a Backup Copy

It is a good idea to make a backup copy of the PixView software. Follow these
steps:

1. Obtain two blank diskettes.

2. Put the PixView diskette into your diskette drive.
3. Open the Windows File Manager. Choose Copy Disk from the Disk menu
and follow the instructions on the screen to copy the diskette. When
prompted, remove the PixView (source) diskette and replace it with the
blank (destination) diskette.
4. When the disk copy operation completes, label your backup copy and put
the original PixView diskette away in a safe place.
5. Repeat these steps for the Scanners diskette.

17
F’ixfiew User’s Guide

Installing PixView
Follow these steps to install PixView on your hard disk:
1. Insert the PixView diskette into your diskette drive.
2. From the Windows Program Manager or File Manager, choose Run from
the File menu. The following dialog box appears:

3. In the Run dialog’s text box, type a: \setup. (If your diskette is in drive B:,
type b:\setup.)

1. Click OK. In a moment, the following window appears:

18
 Chapter 3-InstallingPixView

5. Click Continue. The following dialog box now appears.

6. If you want to install PixView in a directory other than C:\PIXVIEW,

change the information in the Path text box. When you have specified the
drive and directory in which to install PixView, click Continue. The
following dialog box appears:

I
I
Source Fife
A.\PIXDLG DLL
Deshndlon Flk
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM\PIXDLG.DLL

30%
I- pzq
7. Wait while setup copies all the necessary files. When finished, the
following dialog box appears:

8. Click OK.

19
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

Installing Scanner Drivers

Scanner drivers are provided on a separate disk. If you intend to use a
scanner with PixView, you must install the scanner drivers. To install scanner
drivers, follow these steps:

1. Insert the Scanners diskette into your diskette drive.

2. From the Windows Program Manager or File Manager, choose Run from
the File menu. The following dialog box appears:

3. In the Run dialog’s text box, type a: \setug. (If your diskette is in drive B:,
type b: \setup.)

20
 Chapter 3-Instal’ling Pix Vie w

4. Click OK. In a moment, the following window appears:

5. Click Continue. The following dialog box appears while the scanner drivers
are installed:

6. Wait while the scanner drivers are installed. When all drivers have been
installed, the following dialog box appears:

Setup Succeeded!

We hope you en,oy the product

7. Put the PixView and Scanner diskettes away in a safe place.

21
PixView User’s Guide

Deleting Unneeded Scanner Drivers

The Scanner setup program installs all available scanner drivers onto your
hard disk. It puts them in the windows\pixtran directory. If you want to
conserve disk space, you can delete those scanner drivers that you don’t need.
The following table lists the scanner driver filenames and the scanners they
support as of the print date of this manual.

Driver Filename Scanner(s) Supported Level

ABATON.PXW Abaton 3OOS, GS, Color, Transcribe (ADF) I

ABATON2.PXW Abaton 3OOS, GS, Color, Transcribe (no ADF) I
AGFA.PXW AGFA Scanners w/Adaptec I
APPLE.PXW Apple OneScanner I
ARTISCAN.PXW Artiscan and Tamarack SCSI Scanners I
AVR2.PXW AVR (HP Emulation) I
BELLHOWL.PXW Bell & Howell RSC (SCSI) III
CAIX12FD.PXW Canon IX-12 Feeder I
CAIX12FT.PXW Canon IX-12 Flatbed (ADF Optional) I
CAIX30.PXW Canon IX-30F I
CANON.PXW Canon 1X-4015, IX-3010 w/ASP1 I
CANONSI.PXW Canon 1X-4015, IX-3010 w/S14 I
CANONSIX.PXW Canon 1X-4015, IX-3010 (full res) w/S14 I
CANONX.PXW Canon 1X-4015, IX-3010 (full res) w/ASP1 I
CHINON.PXW Chinon DS-3000 I
CPC.PXW Complete PC Scanner I
CPCF.PXW Complete PC Scanner (no detect) I
DEST3.PXW DEST PC Scan 3000 I
(ARTISCAN.PXW)

ENVISION.PXW Envision ENV 6100, 8100, 24 Pro I

EPSON.PXW Epson GT-4000..GT-8000 & ES-300C..ES-800C I

22
 Chapter 3-Instding PixVie w

Driver Filename Scanner(s) Supported Level

EPSONT.PXW Epson GT-6500, -8000 & ES-GOOC, -800C I

w/Transparency
FJSP.PXW Fujitsu SPlO / SPJr I
FUJIGINE.PXW Fujitsu M3096Gm / M3097Gm II
FUJIGINX.PXW Fujitsu/X M3096Gm / M3097Gm II
IBM-3119.PXW IBM PageScanner, Adapter 3119/A I
KFSIMPLX.PXW KOFAX Kipp 2.0 (BIC) Driver (Simplex Only) II
KOFAXBIC.PXW KOFAX Kipp 2.0 (BIG) Driver (Simplex/Duplex) III
MKTK-AT.PXW Microtek Scanner I
MSII.PXW Microtek MS-II w/Page Detect I
PANA.PXW Panasonic FX-RS 505, 506, and 307 I
PENT.PXW Pentax IQ Scan (HP Emulation) I
RICOHISl.PXW Ricoh Aficio IS01 II
RICOH420.PXW Ricoh IS420 II
RICOH430.PXW Ricoh IS430 II
RICOHMF3.PXW Ricoh Aficio 401 II
RICOH410.PXW Ricoh IS-410 and IBM 2456 II
RICOH41W.PXW Ricoh IS-410 and IBM 2456 w/WINASPI II
RICOH520.PXW Ricoh IS-510 and IS-520 III
RICOH560.PXW Ricoh IS-50 and IS-60 I
RICOH56X.PXW Ricoh-X IS-50 and IS-60 I
RICOHFS2.PXW Ricoh FS-2 I
SCANJET.PXW HP ScanJet, Plus, IIc, IIp, or IIcx I
SCANJETX.PXW HP ScanJet, Plus, IIc, IIp, or IIcx (x) I
SCNMKRII.PXW Microtek ScanMaker II I
SHARP.PXW Sharp JX-300, JX-320, JX-325, JX-450, JX-610 I
UMAXGSII.PXW UMAX Scanners w/GSII-PC Card I

23
PixView User’s Guide

Selecting a Scanner
The final step in installing PixView is to select your scanner. Follow these steps:

1. Turn on your scanner.

2. Launch PixView by double-clicking the PixView icon.

3. Choose Select Scanner from the File menu. The following dialog box appears:

HP Scar&t. Plus. Ilc, Ilp. or llcx

Microtek MS-II w/Page Detect
Microtek ScanMaker II

4. Choose your scanner from the list.

Important
PixView is sold with various levels of scanner support. If you
select a scanner that is not supported by your version of
PixView, the following message will appear:

If you see this message, click OK. Contact PixTools Sales

department using the contact information in Appendix D for
information about upgrading your copy of PixView to support
the scanner you want to use.

24
 Chapter 3-InstalZing Pix Vie w

5. Click Setup to see your scanner’s setup parameters. These parameters

vary depending on your scanner. In some cases, there are no setup
parameters, or setup parameters are made in the DOS driver that loads in
your CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT file. In these cases, the message
“This scanner’s configuration is set using the system-level driver” appears.
Consult your scanner’s documentation for proper setup.

6. Click OK when you have made the desired settings.

Adding a Scanner Driver

If your scanner is not in the Scanner Selection list, you can contact PixTools
Sales department using the contact information in Error! Reference source
not found. for information about obtaining other drivers. Once you have
obtained the appropriate driver for your scanner, follow these steps to add the
new driver:

1. Choose Select Scanner from the File menu.

2. In the Scanner Selection dialog box, click Add. The Add Scanner dialog box
appears.

3. Place your scanner driver diskette into the diskette drive.

4. If necessary, change the drive letter in the Add Scanner dialog box.
5. Click OK. A list of scanners found on the diskette appears.
6. Select the desired scanner from the list, then click OK.
Tip: For users of Kofax scanner interface cards, use the KFXSIMPLX
driver for simplex (single-sided) scanners; use the KOFAXBIC driver for
duplex (double-sided) scanners.

25
PixView User’s Guide

7. Click Setup to see your scanner’s setup parameters. These parameters will
vary depending on your scanner. In some cases, there are no setup
parameters, or setup parameters are made in a DOS scanner driver that
loads in your CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT file. In these cases, the
message “This scanner’s configuration is set using the system-level driver”
appears. Consult your scanner’s documentation for proper setup. Here is a
typical Setup dialog box for a popular SCSI scanner:

Note that the specific information displayed in this dialog box depends
both on your scanner and on the way it is configured.

8. Click OK when you have made the desired settings.

PixTooldView Control Panel

PixView is supplied with the PixToolsNiew control panel to display
accelerated printing and display. Information on installing and using this
control panel can be found in Appendix A.
4 Using PixView

This chapter explains how to perform all types of scanning, viewing, printing,
and saving operations in PixView.

Starting PixView
To start PixView, follow these steps:

1. Start Microsoft Windows.

2. Turn on your scanner. Wait for your scanner to indicate that it is ready.
3. Launch PixView by opening the PixView Program Group and double-
clicking the PixView icon.

Plxvlew

27
 Pix Vie w User’s Guide

PixView Visual Index

Here is the PixView window after scanning a few pages, with page numbers
showing where in this manual you can find more information on each major
feature:

Scanner
settings
(page 17)

Pan window
(page 46)

Opening
documents
(page 41)

Selecting a
scanner
(page 24)

Scroll bars
(page 46)
Scanning Pages
PixView can acquire images either from a scanner or by opening existing
image files. This section explains how to scan. For information on opening
existing image files, see “Opening Documents” on page 41.

28
 Chapter 4-Using Pix View

Scanning Batches
PixView is designed to scan batches of pages as quickly and efficiently as
possible. When scanning a batch of pages, you tell PixView in advance how to
save the resulting file(s). PixView saves each page to the specified file as it
scans. Then, in the event of a power failure, system crash, or other unexpected
event, the pages you have already scanned are saved and you can continue
scanning where you left off.

To scan a batch of pages, follow these steps:

I. Choose Scan batch to file from the File menu.

Important
When you choose Scan batch to file, any open pages or
documents are closed. If you had previously acquired an image
by using the Scan page command and have not saved it, the
page image will be lost.

The following dialog box appears after you choose Scan Batch to File:

29
Pix Vie w User !s Guide

II. Choose:
A. An image file format from the List Files of Type list box (see page 54).
B. A color format from the Color Format list box (see page 56).
C. A compression option from the Compression list box (see page 54).
D. An orientation in the Save Orientation list box (see page 60).

III. Decide whether to:

A. Have PixView warn you if you specify an existing file name, or
overwrite the existing file with no warning. (Check the Warn on file
overwrite check box.)
B. Save the scanned images as a multi-page file. (Check the Multi-page
file check box.) (See page 60.)
C. Save the scanned images using a naming schema. A naming schema
automatically names each page’s image file with an automatically-
generated name that can include file name, batch number, page
number, side, and other information. (Check the Use Naming Schema
check box and optionally edit the naming schema.) (See page 60.)
IV. Specify a file name in the File Name text box. You can specify any valid
DOS name, but note the following:
A. The file name may be truncated by the naming schema.
B. The file name extension is automatically supplied according to the
image file type. However, if you specify an extension, or if your naming
schema specifies an extension, PixView will use that extension
instead.
V. Click OK. If you have already loaded pages in your scanner’s document
feeder, and your scanner has a stack sensor, PixView starts scanning
immediately. If you have not loaded pages into your scanner, or if your
scanner does not have a stack sensor, the following dialog box appears:

30
 Chapter 4- Using Pix Vie w

VI. Assuming you want to scan from your scanner’s document feeder, place a
stack of pages in the feeder, then click Start Scanning. In a moment, your
scanner will start scanning pages and continue until the feeder is empty.
When the feeder is empty, the above dialog box again appears.

VII. At this point, you can choose to:

A. Stop scanning. To do this, click Stop Scanning. Go to “Viewing Pages”
on page 43.
B. Continue scanning. To do this, load more pages in your scanner’s
document feeder and click Start Scanning.
C. Turn the document over to scan the backs of the pages. To do this,
select the Back of sheet m, batch n option button, then click Start
Scanning. If you chose a double-sided naming schema, your pages will
be automatically numbered (or named a/b, etc.) for easy identification.
For more information on double-sided scanning, see page 35.

31
Pixl/iew User’s Guide

Scanning a Rotated Batch

To use this feature with sbndard letter-sized paper, your scanner must be able
to scan a document as wide as the length of your page, typical/y 11’.
If desired, you can have PixView scan and rotate pages from landscape to
portrait orientation in a single operation. This ability is designed to increase
throughput on large format (11” wide) scanners by allowing you to scan 8%” x
11” pages sideways, Since the scanner moves 8X” rather than 11” of paper
through its feeder, throughput may be increased by almost 25%.

To scan a rotated batch, follow these steps:

1. Choose Scan rotated batch to file from the File menu. The document
naming dialog box appears, just as when choosing Scan batch to file, but
without the Save Orientation option.
2. Select the desired options as when performing a normal scan batch
operation.
3. Load pages in your scanner’s document feeder in landscape orientation.
You may need to experiment to obtain the correct final orientation. Start
by rotating the pages 90” counter-clockwise, feeding the left margin first.
4. Click OK to scan the pages. If you inserted the pages correctly, you will see
your pages in normal orientation in the PixView window. If your pages are
upside-down, start over. This time rotate the pages 90” clockwise.

Continuing a Batch Scan

Whenever you scan a batch of pages, each page is saved as you scan. You can
stop scanning at any time without concern for saving your document file(s).
PixView also lets you continue scanning to a batch that has previously been
stopped.

Important
When you Continue Scan batch, the pages are always added
to the last document you scanned, which is not necessarily the
last document you opened. Also, performing Scan page
commands between a Scan batch to file command and a
Continue Scan batch command has no effect on what
happens-the pages scanned using the Continue Scan batch
command are always added to the document that was created
when you performed the previous Scan batch to file command.

32
 Chapter 4-Using PixView

To continue a batch scan, follow these steps:

I. Choose Continue Scan batch from the File menu. If you have already
loaded pages in your scanner’s document feeder, and your scanner has a
stack sensor, PixView starts scanning immediately. If you have not loaded
pages into your scanner, or if your scanner does not have a stack sensor,
the following dialog box appears:

II. Assuming you want to scan from your scanner’s document feeder, load a
stack of pages into the feeder and click Start Scanning. If you are
continuing a batch that was saved to a multi-page file type, the new pages
will automatically be appended to the file. If you are continuing a batch
scan to a file set using a naming schema, the schema will be applied to
the newly scanned pages. Your scanner will start scanning pages and
continue until the feeder is empty.
When the feeder is empty, the Start/Stop Scanning dialog box again appears.
III. At this point, you can choose to:
A. Stop scanning. To do this, click Stop Scanning. Go to “Viewing Pages”
on page 43.
B. Continue scanning. To do this, load more pages in your scanner’s
document feeder and click Start Scanning.
C. Turn the document over to scan the backs of the pages. To do this,
select the Back of sheet n option button, then click Start Scanning. If
you have chosen a double-sided naming schema, your pages will be
automatically numbered for easy identification. For more information
on double-sided scanning, see page 35.

33
PixView User’s Guide

Scanning Single Pages

Single page scanning is useful if you want to scan and view, scan and print, or
scan and save a single page. You can scan a single page many times while you
adjust scanning parameters such as brightness and contrast, until you
achieve optimum settings, and then start scanning batches.
To scan a single page, choose Scan page from the File menu.

Note
When you scan a single page by using the Scan page
command, PixView assumes that you either have a page in
your scanner’s document feeder or on the flatbed. If there is no
page in the feeder, PixView scans from the flatbed without
further prompting.

Important
When you choose Scan page, any open pages or documents are
closed. If you are in the middle of a Scan batch to file
operation or are viewing an open document, this is not a
problem. However, if you had previously acquired an image by
using the Scan page command and have not saved it, the page
image will be lost. If you are scanning to adjust scanner
settings, this will not be a problem. However, if you are
scanning pages for viewing, printing, and/or saving, you must
be sure to perform these operations before choosing Scan page
again.
As soon as the page is scanned, PixView displays it. Go to “‘Viewing Pages” on
page 43.

34
 Chapter 4-Using Pix Vie w

Rescanning Pages
Rescanning lets you replace an existing page in your document with another.
You may need to rescan because of a scanner misfeed, upside down page in the
stack, or other problem. To rescan a page, follow these steps:

1. Go to the page that you want to replace. See “Going to Other Pages” on
page 45.
2. Place the page to rescan in your scanner.
3. Choose Rescan from the File menu.

Note
When you rescan by using the Rescan command, PixView
assumes that you either have a page in your scanner’s
document feeder or on the flatbed. If there is no page in the
feeder, PixView scans from the flatbed without further
prompting.

The page that you scan replaces the current page in the PixView window
and in your document (if any).

Canceling Scanning
Once you have started scanning, you can cancel scanning at any time. To
cancel scanning, either:

l Choose Cancel scan from the File menu, or

. Press C

Scanning stops as soon as PixView is able to regain control of the scanner

(which may not be until the current page’s scan completes).

35
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

Double-Sided Scanning
To use this feature, your scanner must have an automatic document feeder.
To scan double-sided pages on a flatbed scanner, simply scan each side of
the page in the correct order.

PixView supports double-sided scanning in one of two ways. depending on the

capabilities of your scanner:

1. One pass: If you have a duplex scanner, PixView scans both sides of the
page at one time, keeping the pages in the correct order.
2. Two pass: If you have a simplex scanner, PixView scans all of the front
sides of all pages, then gives you the opportunity to turn the stack over and
scan the back sides. The pages are placed into the correct order as they are
scanned.

PixView supports one-pass double-sided scanning on supported duplex

scanners. Duplex scanning is enabled and disabled from the Options of the
Start/Stop Scanning dialog box that appears when you start scanning with no
pages in the document feeder.

If you have a traditional single-sided scanner, PixView lets you scan both
sides of a stack of pages, one side at a time. To do this, follow these steps:

I. Place your document (or a portion of your document) in the scanner’s

document feeder, so that the front sides of the pages will be scanned. You
can place as many pages as will fit in the feeder at one time. (Check your
scanner’s documentation for feeder capacity.)
II. Choose Scan batch to from the File menu, supply the appropriate settings
(see page 29), and scan all of the fronts of the stack.
III. After scanning the last front page of the stack, PixView displays the
following dialog box:

36
 Chapter 4-Using PixView

IV. Turn the whole stack over and reinsert in your scanner’s document feeder,
so that the back sides of each page will be scanned, from last through
first.
V. Choose the Back of sheet n option button.
VI. Click Start Scanning.
Note
If the number of back pages scanned does not match the
number of front pages, you will see an error message with
options for either rescanning the stack or ignoring the
discrepancy.

VII. When all pages in the stack have been scanned, the Start/Stop scanning
dialog box again appears. Note that if you have scanned the correct
number of back sides, the Back of sheet n option button is dimmed
(unavailable). At this point, you can either:

A. Click Stop Scanning to stop scanning and perform other operations.

B. Place the front sides of the next stack of pages into your scanner’s
document feeder and click Start Scanning. Continue scanning fronts
and backs of each stack until you are done with your entire document.

37
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

Using Job Separators

To use this feature, your scanner must provide some mechanism for job
separator detection. This is typically accomplished by using special
separator sheets, a console button, or a foot pedal connected to the
scanner..

Job separators let you automatically separate stacks of pages into separate
jobs. Jobs are separated by choosing or creating a naming schema that
includes a job identifier. The job identifier may be a variation of a file name or
it may be differentiation by directory.

To use job separators, follow these steps:

1. If your scanner uses separator sheets, place a separator sheet in the stack
at the end of each job. Do not load the pages into the scanner’s document
feeder. If your scanner has a different method of batch detection, arrange
the first batch of sheets to be scanned.
2. Choose Scan batch to file from the File menu. The document naming
dialog box appears, as shown on page 29. Make the appropriate selections
and type a base file name for the batch. Choose a naming schema that
includes a job identifier. For information on using a naming schema, see
page 60.
3. Click OK. The Start/Stop scanning dialog box appears:
1=1
hepamSmner:

38
 Chapter 4-Using Pix View

4. Click the Options button. Another section is added to the dialog box, so it
now looks like this:

5. Choose the desired batch mode from the Batch Detection list. The choices
available depend on which scanner you are using, and mayinclude some or
all of the following:

None The separator sheet is not detected, but is

scanned as an ordinary page.
Detect and Scan The separator sheet is detected and scanned;
Separator, Continue any information on the separator is saved as the
Scanning last sheet of the current job. Scanning continues
with the next job.
Detect and Scan The separator sheet is detected a&scanned, so
Separator, Stop Scanning any information on the separator is saved as the
last sheet of the current job. Scanning stops and
the prepare scanner dialog reappears.
Detect and Skip The separator sheet is detected but not scanned.
Separator, Continue Scanning continues with the next job.
Scanning
Detect and Skip The separator sheet is detected but not scanned.
Separator, Stop Scanning Scanning stops and the prepare scanner dialog
reappears.

39
PixView User’s Guide

Important
If you are scanning double-sided pages with job, you should
always choose “Skip Separator.” Otherwise, the separator will
be scanned as the last sheet of the job on the fronts, and the
first sheet of the next job on the backs, because scanning backs
proceeds from last through first. If separators are scanned as
part of a double-sided job, the entire job’s naming schema will
be confused.

7. Load your stack in the scanner’s document feeder, then click Start
Scanning.

ScanAhead
ScanAhead is a feature that keeps your scanner running at its maximum
speed, even if your application program temporarily cannot keep up.

Important
Not all scanners support ScanAhead. If your scanner does not
support ScanAhead, then the ScanAhead check box will not
appear in the Start/Stop Scanning expanded dialog box as
described below.

By default, ScanAhead is enabled. To disable or re-enable ScanAhead, follow

these steps:

1. Display the Start/Stop Scanning dialog box by starting a Scan Batch to

File operation with no page in the scanner’s ADF.
2. Click the Options button to display an expanded version of the Start/Stop
Scanning dialog box.
3. Click the ScanAhead check box. When there is a check in the box,
ScanAhead is enabled. When there is no check in the box, ScanAhead is
disabled. If there is no Scar&head check box, your scanner does not
support Scar&head.

40
 Chapter 4-Using PixVie w

Opening Documents
PixView can open any supported image file type. Since a document can consist
of many pages, and often each page image is a separate file, PixView lets you
specify multiple files when opening a document.

Note
A document can consist of any number of pages; however, the
PixView viewer can handle a maximum of 500 files at one
time.

Reasons for Opening Documents

There are several not-so-obvious reasons to open documents with PixView:

Viewing and printing images. (See page 43 for viewing pages, page 50 for
printing pages.)
Faxing images (if your computer has a Windows fax modem driver
configured as a printer).
Rotating pages and saving the new orientation. (See pages 60 and 66 for
two different methods of changing saved page orientation.)
Converting images files from one file format/compression/color format to
another file format/compression/color format. (See page 52 for information
about saving documents with the settings you want.)
Collecting individual image files into a multi-page file format (See page 52
for information about saving documents with the settings you want.)
Organizing individual image files into a naming schema/directory
structure. (See page 60 for information about naming schemas.)

41
PixView User’s Guide

To open a document, follow these steps:

I. Choose Open document from the File menu. The following dialog box
appears:

= k prxel,date usr,gary

k \mproces\pixvier\peges\PlXOOOZ.TIF

k.\mproces\pcwiew\pages\FlXOOO5 TIF
k \inproces\pixvler\peg~~\~XOOfl6 TIF
k \inproces\plxvlew\pages\PIXOOO?.TlF

II. Select the drive and directory which contains the files you want to open.
If necessary, change the setting in the List Files of Type list box to see the
files of interest.
III. Select the files you want to open by one or more of the following methods:
A. Click to highlight a file, then click Select to put it in the Selected Files
list.
B. Double-click a file to put it in the Selected Files list.

C. Click the first file of the document, then hold down the SHIFTkey while
clicking the last file in a contiguous list. This will highlight the entire
range of files between the first and last. Click Select to put the entire
group in the Selected Files list.
D. Click the first file of the document, then hold down the CTRL key while
clicking other files. Each time you click, the file you are pointing to is
highlighted. When you have selected all the files for your document,
click Select. to put them in the Selected Files list.
E. Click the first file of the document, then hold down the mouse button
and drag through the list to select a range of files. Click Select to put
the highlighted files in the Selected file list.

42
 Chapter 4-Using PixView

F. Click Select AI1 to select all of the files in the File Name list and put
them in the Selected Files list in a single operation.

IV. After you have selected all of the files you want to open, click OK to open
the document. The first file in the document now appears in the PixView
window.

Viewing Pages
The PixView viewer lets you see your images in many useful ways. You can
zoom, rotate, and move from one image to another. You can use the Pan window
for moving quickly around the image, and you can use the Thumbnail viewer to
quickly select a page from any number of pages in your document. Also, you can
change page settings to make your pages as clear and readable as possible.

Zooming
Zoom in and out using the toolbar. There are several different zooming tools:
Tool Page Shortcut Result
command Key

Fit to F2 Scales the image to fit the width of the

I-I FitWidth width PixView window. If you change the size of the
window, the image size changes automatically
to maintain fit-to-width.

4b
LJ
Fit Wedew
Fit to
window
F3 Scales the image to fit within the window.
This setting ensures that you always see the
entire image. If you change the size of the
window, the image size changes automatically
to maintain fit-to-window.

ml 1:l F4 Displays one pixel of the image for each pixel

l-l
vk!41aox in the display. If you change the size of the
window, the image size does not change.

Zoom in + Zooms in an amount specified in the Zoom

Q+
Zoom In Factor setting of Application Settings,
El
described on page 72.

Zoom out - Zooms out an amount specified in the Zoom

9
tm Out Factor setting of Application Settings,
I
described on page 72.

43
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

Zooming With the Mouse

You also can zoom in and out by using the mouse. To do this, point to the
image, click and hold the left mouse button, and drag a selection rectangle
that defines the area you want to magnify. Release the left mouse button, then
click the right mouse button. When you click the right mouse button, the area
defined by the selection rectangle instantly fills the PixView window.

Rotating
PixView can rotate your images in 90” increments:

Tool Page Shortcut Result

command Key

Rotate CTRL+~ Rotates the current page 90” clockwise each

ait-
Rotata CTRL+2 time it is clicked. The shortcut keys
I CTRL+3 represent O”, 90”, 180” and 270” rotation,
CTRL+d respectively.
Note that the image is rotated around the current window view point, so if you
are zoomed in, you will not lose your point of reference when you rotate the view.
Tip: Rotating an image affects the view of the image only, not the actual file.
To save a file once you have change the image rotation, you must check the
Use Current Orientation check box. (See page 60).
Using the Clipboard
PixView can copy either the entire image or a selected portion to the Windows
Clipboard.
To copy the entire image to the Clipboard, choose the Copy command from the
Edit menu, or press CTRL+C.
To copy a selected area of an image to the Clipboard, first select an area by
dragging a selection rectangle with the mouse. Point to the upper left corner
of the area you want to select, then press and hold down the left mouse
button. Move the mouse to define a rectangle around the area you want to
select, then release the mouse button. Next, choose the Copy command from
the Edit menu, or press CTRL+C. The following dialog box appears:

44
Click Yes to copy just the selection to the Clipboard. Click No to copy the
entire image to the Clipboard.
Once you have copied an image to the Clipboard, you can paste it into another
application. (Consult the documentation for your other applications to
determine whether or not they support pasting of images from the Windows
Clipboard.)

Going to Other Pages

There are several ways to go from one page to another:
Tool Page Shortcut Result
command Key

Previous CTRL+P Displays the previous page of your

I-1
- I
1 PimPage
Page

Next Page CTRL+

document.
first page.
Dimmed if you are viewing the

Displays the next page of your document.

N Dimmed if you are viewing the last page.

Goto Page CTRL+ Goes directly to the page number you enter
G in the Goto dialog box.
Show T Displays the Thumbnail window from which
Thumbnails you can jump to any page by clicking on it.
See page 46.
Looping Images
Looping images is a PixView demonstration feature:
Tool Page Shortcut Result
command Key

Loop CTRL+ Displays all document pages in succession as

Images G rapidly as possible. Click again to stop and
CTRL+L display the image display times. (CTRL+L
loops through the images one page at a
time.)

45
PixView User’s Guide

Using Scroll Bars

Scroll bars are the traditional Windows method of navigating around pages.
In PixView, scroll bars are always enabled, and work just as you would expect.

Using the Pan Window

Scroll bars are tedious to use when navigating around large or highly-
magnified images. The Pan window is a much more efficient tool. To use the
Pan window, follow these steps:

1. If you do not see the Pan window, it is disabled, To enable the Pan window,
either choose Pan window from the Options menu, or press P while on the
main PixView window. The Pan window looks like this:

The reversed (black) area in the Pan window represents the area
displayed in the main PixView window. If your entire Pan window is
reversed, then the entire image is visible in the main window. You must
then zoom in before you can use the Pan window.

2. Point to the reversed area of the Pan window, then click and hold down the
left mouse button.
3. Drag the mouse and watch the image in the main window change.
-1. If desired, you can change the size of the Pan window by dragging its
corner borders. Generally, the Pan window’s default size is adequate.
0. The Pan window always stays on top of the PixView window. If the Pan
window is in your way, you can move it by pointing to its title bar and
dragging. You can place the Pan window anywhere on your screen-it does
not have to be within the PixView window.
6. To close the Pan window, double-click the control-menu box or P.

The Pan window has some additional settings that are explained on page 71.

46
 Chapter 4-UsingPixView

Displaying Thumbnails
Thumbnails are miniature representations of each page of your document.
Displaying thumbnails is a convenient way to see an overview of your entire
document and to quickly go to a particular page.

Note
The Thumbnail Viewer is included with PixView as an
example of the kinds of features that can be implemented by
using PixTools products. It is not intended to be used in a
production environment and may give less-than-satisfactory
results.

To display thumbnails, follow these steps:

Scan or open a document consisting of at least two pages.

Choose Show Thumbnails from the Page menu. (Shortcut: Press T in the
main PixView window.) The following dialog box appears:

Select the desired number of thumbnails to display at one time, then click
OK. The Thumbnail window then appears. A typical window looks like
this:

47
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

4. To get a better view of the individual pages, you can enlarge the
Thumbnail window by dragging its corner borders. The Thumbnail window
can be made as big as your screen allows. The Thumbnail window always
stays on top of the PixView window. If the Thumbnail window is in your
way, you can move it by pointing to its title bar and dragging. You can
place the Thumbnail window anywhere on your screen-it does not have to
be within the PixView window.
<5, To go to a particular page, simply point to it and click.
6. To close the Thumbnail window, double-click the Control-menu icon in the
upper left corner of the window.

48
 Chapter 4--UsingPixView

Displaying with Scale-to-Gray

When an image is viewed at sizes smaller than l:l, PixView must decide
which pixels to show and which pixels to hide. For example, when an image is
viewed at 25% of its actual size, only one pixel out of four is visible. The
remaining pixels are disregarded. The resulting image can be unreadable.

PixView solves this problem with binary (black and white) images by using
scale to gray. Scale to gray represents the average density of missing pixels
with a shade of gray, making reduced images much more readable. To see the
improvement, toggle scale to gray off and on by pressing G from the main
PixView window.

Scale to Gray Off Scale to Gray On

49
pix Vie w User !s Guide

Printing Pages
By using the various printing commands in PixView, you can print your pages
in a number of useful ways. Each print command (except Print Thumbnail)
lets you optionally print a selection. A selection is an area of a page that you
determine by drawing a rectangle on the page image prior to choosing one of
the print commands, as shown:

To print. follow these steps:

1. If you want to print a selection, use the mouse to select an area of a page
by drawing a rectangle around the desired area. To change the size of the
selection once you have made it, hold down the Shift key, click the left
mouse button and continue stretching the selection rectangle. To start a
new selection, simply click anywhere on the image and drag.
2. Choose one of the print commands from the File menu:
Print (Fit Page) Prints each page image (or selection) scaled so
that it fits the printer’s page size.
Print (Actual Pixels) Prints each page image (or selection) with one
printer pixel for each pixel in the image.

50
 Chapter 4--UsingPixView

Print (Actual Size) Prints each page image (or selection) in its
original size. If the image is bigger than the
printer page size, only a portion of the image will
print. PixView does not tile images when
printing. For normal 8%” x 11” pages and
printers, this will amount to cropping about %”
along each edge.
Print Thumbnails Prints a specified number of page images on
each page.

If you chose Print Thumbnails, the following dialog box appears:

Choose the number of images to print on each page and, if desired, enable
printing of borders and/or filenames for each image. Click OK.

I. After choosing a print command (and, if printing Thumbnails, choosing a

Thumbnail layout), the following dialog box appears:

II. Choose the desired printing options:

A. If necessary, click Setup to choose the printer you want to use and set
its options. Click OK when done.

51
PixView User’s Guide

B. Choose a print range. All prints all pages in your document. Selection
prints only a previously-defined selection on a single page. If no
selection exists, PixView prints the current page only. Pages prints the
range of pages you specify in the From and To text boxes.
C. Choose a print quality. This setting varies according to your printer’s
capabilities.
D. Specify the number of copies to print and whether or not to collate.
For multipage documents, collating is more convenient. For making
several copies of each page, not collating may result in faster printing.
III. Click OK to start printing.

Saving Pages and Documents

In almost all cases, your pages are automatically saved as you scan them,
according to the instructions you specify in the Scan batch to file dialog box.
You only need to save pages or documents in the following cases:

1. You scanned a single page using the Scan page command. (The resulting
image is not automatically saved.)
2. You want to make a change to the file format, compression, or color format.
3. You want to change the orientation of the image in the file.
4. You want to change the naming schema.
5. You want to change from individual files to a multi-page file format or vice-
versa.

52
 Chapter 4-Using Pix Vie w

Saving a page is exactly the same as saving a document; the only difference is
the save range, explained below. To save a page or a document, follow these
steps:

I. Choose Save page as or Save document as from the File menu. The
following dialog box appears:

II. Choose:
A. An image file format from the List Files of Type list box (see page 54).
B. A color format from the Color Format list box (see page 56).
C. A compression option from the Compression list box (see page 54).

III. Decide whether to:

A. Have PixView warn you if you specify an existing file name, or
overwrite the existing file with no warning. (Check the Warn on file
overwrite check box.)
B. Save the document as a multi-page file. (Check the Multi-page file
check box.) (See page 60.)

53
Pix Vie w User !s Guide

C. Save the document using a naming schema. A naming schema names

each page’s image file with an automatically-generated name that can
include file name, batch number, page number, side, and other
information. (Check the Use Naming Schema check box and optionally
edit the schema. (See page 60.)
D. Save the document using the original orientation or the current
orientation. Normally, the document is saved in the original
orientation. If you have rotated pages and you want to save them in
their current orientation, you must check the Use Current Orientation
check box.
IV. Specify a starting page number and starting batch number for the
document. If you are using a naming schema, these settings will affect the
resulting file names.
V. Choose a range of pages to save. If you chose the Save page as command,
the Current Page box is checked by default. If you chose the Save
document as command, the All Pages check box is checked by default. If
you want to save a range of pages, check the Page Range check box and
enter a page number in the From and To text boxes.
VI. Select a drive and directory in which to save your page or document, and
type a file name in the File Name text box. You can specify any valid DOS
name, but note the following:
A. The file name may be truncated by the naming schema, if one is being
used.
B. The file name extension is automatically supplied according to the image
file type. However, if you specify an extension, or if your naming schema
specifies an extension, PixView will use that extension instead.

VII. Click OK to save the document. While PixView is saving the document,
you will see a progress monitor similar to the following:

54
 Chapter 4-Using Pix Vie w

Selecting File Formats and Compression Options

PixView supports a number of popular image file formats. You can choose
from among the following according to the requirement of other applications.
If possible (for binary images), you should choose TIFF Group 4, which can
achieve a 35:l to 5O:l compression ratio, depending on the characteristics of
t,he image.

Format Multi-page Color/gray Compression

Extension File Format Support? support? Options’

TIF Tagged Image File Yes Yes CCITT Group 4

Format (TIFF) CCITT Group 3
Modified Group 3
LZW
JPEG
Packbits
None

PCX ZSoft PC No Yes RLE

Paintbrush

DCX ZSoft PC Yes No RLE

Paintbrush FAX
extension

BMP Microsoft Windows No Yes None

Bitmap RLE for some
color formats

GIF CompuServe Yes Yes LZW

Graphics
Interchange
Format
JPG JPEG JFIF No Yes JPEG’

PDA Calera Processed No No CCITT Group 4

Document CCITT Group 3
Architecture None

‘Available compression options may vary according to selected Color Format.

‘PixView currently will open JPG files, but not save them.

55
PzxVYew User’s Guide

How to Choose a File Format

Different file formats produce files with different characteristics and sizes.
Often, your choice of file format will depend on the requirement of other image
applications that must use the images captured in PixView. However, if you
have more than one choice of file format, you may want to determine the best
format for your application. There are three settings that affect the file format:

1. File Type (TIFF, PCX, BMP, etc.)

2. Color Format (Binary, Gray scale, 8-bit Palette, 24-bit color, etc.)
3. Compression (None, Packbits, LZW, etc.)

When saving documents, keep in mind their intended use. If you do not need
color or gray scale, you should probably save using the binary setting because
the resulting files will take up much less disk space. Each pixel of a binary
image requires one bit of disk space (uncompressed). Each pixel of a 24-bit
color image (which provides 16 million color possibilities) requires 24 times as
much disk space. Generally, binary images compress significantly better than
color or grayscale images.

The available color format settings vary according to the file type selected.
The compression settings vary according to both the file type and color format
settings. In the following brief descriptions, compression is the compression
options available in PixView listed from best (most compression) to worst
(least compression).

TIFF Aldus/Microsoft Tagged Image File Format

Advantages: Handles black-and-white, gray scale, and color images well.
Supports multiple images per file in PixView’s
implementation. Works across multiple platforms. Available in
most commercial imaging applications. TIFF with Group 4
compression generally provides the best binary file
compression. TIFF with Packbits compression provides
reasonably good color file compression.

Disadvantages:So flexible that many implementations are not complete;

therefore, TIFF files from one application may not be
compatible with another application’s implementation. Format
also allows for private, undisclosed data field formats making
certain implementations closed to other applications.

56
 Chapter 4- Using Pix Vie w

Binary: CCITT Group 4, CCITT Modified Group 3,

CCITT Group 3, LZW, Packbits, None.

Gray/Palette Color: LZW, Packbits, None

24-bit Color Packbits, None

PCX ZSoft PC Paintbrush Image File Format

Ad van tages: Widely supported on PC platforms. Supports black-and-white,

gray scale, palette color and 24-bit color images. Reasonably
efficient storage of images with large areas of constant tone.
Images are always compressed using run-length encoding (no
user choice).

Disadvantages:Run-length encoding is inefficient for storing typical scanned

images. Produces files twice the size of TIFF Packbits.
Generally not supported on non-PC platforms.

Compression: Binary: RLE

Gray/Palette Color: RLE
24-bit Color: RLE

DCX Fax Extension of PCX

Advantages: Same as PCX, but black-and-white only. Supports multiple

images per file.
Disadvantages:Same as PCX.
Compression: Binary: RLE

BMP Windows (and OS/2) Bitmap

Advantages: Wide support under Microsoft Windows. Handles black-and-

white, gray scale, palette color and 24-bit color images.
Disadvantages:Poor support outside of Windows (0592). Poor support for
compressed files. Does not support multiple images per file.
Compression: Binary: None
Gray/Palette Color: RLE, None
24-bit Color: None

57
PixView User’s Guide

GIF CompuServe Graphics Interchange Format,

Advantages: Wide support on most personal computers and workstations.

Support for black-and-white, gray scale, and palette color.
Images are always compressed using LZW compression (no
user choice), which gives results comparable to RLE
compression.

Disadvantages:No support for 24-bit, color. Color compression less than other
formats. Compression is slower than RLE compression used in
PCX and BMP images.

Compression: Binary: LZW

Gray/Palette Color: LZW

JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group Compressed Bitmap

Advantages: By far the best compression for phot,ographic images.

Disadvantagcw:PixView support reading JPG files only; writing support does
not yet exist. Many incompatible implementations. Lossy:
meaning that color and image data is discarded to save
storage space at the expense of image qualities that typically
are below the threshold of human vision.
Compression. JPEG is a compression scheme. which can be used in other file
types. The correct name for a stand-alone JPEG file is JFIF.
On the PC, these files typically have the extension JPG.

PDA Calera Recognition Systems Processed Document Architecture

Advantages: Single file format can contain bitmap image data or text. Very
good compression is possible.
Disadvantages:Very little support other than Calera applications (WordScan,
M/Series Professional). No color support. (Developed for OCR
applications.)
Compression: Binary: CCITT Group 4, CCITT Group 3, None.

58
 Chapter 4-Using PixView

Summary: Group 4 compression provides the best compression for black

& white images. Modified Group 3 provides half the
compression but is more widely supported. JPEG is lossy,
meaning that it discards some of the original image’s
information in order to attain a higher compression. PCX and
GIF are more widely supported and are not lossy.

Choose a compatible format as close to the top of the following

lists as possible:

Binary images:

1. TIFF Group 4
2. TIFF Group 3 Modified
3. TIFF Group 3
4. TIFF Packbits
5. PCX
6. TIFF Uncompressed
Color/gray scale images.

1. JPEG (not yet implemented for saving images)

2. TIFF Packbits
3. PCX
4. GIF or BMP

59
Pix Vie w User k Guide

Note
Dithered images generally compress very poorly, due to the
large number of transitions in pixel values. Sometimes
compressed dithered images can be larger than their
uncompressed counterparts.

Changing Page Orientation

PixView maintains the orientation of the images in the files you save unless
you specifically instruct it to change the orientation. If you want t,o save the
orientation of each image in the file after rotating some or all of the images,
check the Use Current Orientation check box. (See page 60.)

Multipage Options
A multi-page file is a single file that can contain multiple images. The formats
that support multi-page files are listed in the table on page 54. Note that the
application in which you intend’to view, manipulate, or print the images must
also support multi-page files; otherwise, you may see just the first page of a
multi-page file, or the program may display an error message or crash.

Naming Schemas
Naming schemas are a PixView feature that lets you automatically name
large batches of scanned pages in such a way that they are easily identifiable.
You can choose from a list of common naming schema or you can create your
own to meet the requirements of your job. Schemas can be thought of as
“pictures” of how you want your documents’ file names to look, including
automatically-generated batch number, page numbers, and side identifiers.

To use naming schemas. check the Use Naming Schema check box in the Save
Document As, Save Page As, or Scan Batch to File dialog box. The currently-
selected naming schema appears just below this check box:

60
 Chapter 4-Using Pix View

Selecting a Naming Schema

To select a different naming schema, click Edit Schema. The following dialog
box appears:

Note that the file name specified prior to clicking Edit Schema was pix.
Choose the desired naming schema from the Schema drop-down list box. To
see hypothetical results of each schema, refer to the list of Sample Files
Generated. Note that in the example shown above, a double-sided document
could not be saved, because the naming schema results in an illegal path
name for the backs of pages. Other supplied schemas make provisions for the
backs of double-sided documents as well as for batch identifiers. Some of the
naming schemas even divide large jobs into directories each containing no
more than a predetermined number of files. This can be important in large
jobs, because the performance of the DOS file system slows down considerably
as more and more files are added to a given directory.

Selecting a Predefined Naming Schema

PixView has several predefined naming schemas. You can choose the desired
predefined schema from the Schema drop-down list box. Rather than describe
all of the schema in this manual, you can choose each one in turn and note the
results under Sample Files Generated. You also can read a description of how
the schema works under the Description heading in the dialog box.

Defining a Custom Naming Schema

If none of the predefined naming schemas meet your needs, you can define
your own. To define a custom naming schema, follow these steps:

61
PixT4ew User's Guide

1. Select the text in the Schema drop-down list box. It doesn’t matter which
schema is currently selected-this operation does not overwrite the
predefined schemas.
2. ?‘ype a new naming schema, replacing the text you selected in Step 1.
Follow the rules for naming schemas described in the following section.
Note that as you type, the information under Sample Files Generated
changes to show the hypothetical results of your schema. If you type a
schema that results in an illegal DOS file name, the words illegal path
appear under Sample Files Generated.
3. If you want to permanently save the schema, click Add Schema. Your new
naming schema is added to a position in the list determined by ASCII
character sort order of the characters in your schema.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and return to the Document Name dialog
box.

Naming Schema Formats and Rules

Naming schemas can be entered in one of two different formats:

l PixName format
l Printf format

The PixName format is easy to use, while the Printf format provides more
functionality. The PixName format should be able to represent naming
schema for most of your needs. The general schema format for both naming
schemas is:
fozmat[,varlist][;fozmat[,varlist]]
fozmat can be either a PixName format string or a Printf format string. If
format is a PixName format, then you do not need to enter a varlist. If the
naming schema needs to be different for the front and back sides of sheets,
use a semicolon (;) to separate the front side format from the back side format
The string can contain any legal file name characters. The characters “$,”
‘+##,”and “%” have special meanings described in the following section, and
must be preceded by “%” if they are to be treated as literal characters in the
file name.
varlist is an optional list of expressions that is evaluated for every file
name generated and substituted into the format string. Each expression in a
varlist is separated from the next expression by a comma (,). Up to four
expressions can be entered within a single varlist. An expression is either a
text expression or a numeric expression. Text expressions are limited to the

62
 Chapter 4-Using PixView

variable ‘Y’ that represents the root file name. Numeric expressions can
contain multiple occurrences of the variables “b” and “p” that represent the
current batch number and the current page number, respectively. Numeric
expressions also can contain numbers and mathematical operators. The
operators “+,” ‘I-,” “/,” and “*” (addition, subtraction, division, and
multiplication) are supported. All numerical expressions are evaluated left to
right without regard to operator precedence.

PixName Format Strings

The PixName format uses two special characters, “$” and “#,” to represent place
holders for the root file name, batch number, and page number, as follows:
“ 9,
$ Place holder for the root file name. The number of consecutive dollar
signs has no bearing on the size of the field the root, file name will fill.
PixName automatically truncates the root file name as needed to fit the
other requirements of the naming schema. (Internally, a sequence of
dollar signs is translated into the Printf format “%s” with the variable
expression ‘I, r.“)

“#” Place holder for one digit in either the batch number or the page number.
A sequence of three number signs means that a zero-padded number,
three characters (or more) long, is plugged into the file name in place of
the number signs. For example, if the format string "pix####,p" is
entered, and the page number is 17, then the file name generated would
be “pixoo17."

The first sequence of number signs is always a place holder for a page
number expression involving the variable “p” unless a second sequence is
entered. If a second sequence of number signs is detected, then the first
sequence becomes a place holder for the batch number (variable “b”) and
the second sequence becomes the page number expression.

If you enter only one PixName format string that is not followed by :
varlist, then PixView assumes that a double-sided document is beinl
created. This implies that the front sides of sheets have odd pag’
numbers and the back sides of sheets have even page numbers. Th
Printf expression that creates this series for input page numbers “1, 2
3,...” is “,p *2-l” for front side page numbers and “, p*2” for back sid
page numbers. If you enter different front and back side format string:
PixView assumes simple page numbering using the simple Prin
expression “,p” for both the front and back sides.

6:
Pix Vie w User !s Guide

Saving a Selection
In the same manner as printing a selection (described on page 50), you can
save a selected area of a single page or a selected area on each page of an
entire document. To save a selection, follow these steps:

Use the mouse to select the area of the page you want to save, or the area
you want to save on each page of an entire document. (When saving a
document, the same selection is saved on every page of the document.) To
select an area, use the mouse to draw a rectangle. To change the size of the
selection once you have made it, hold down the SHIFT key, click the mouse
button, and continue stretching the selection rectangle. To start a new
selection, simply click anywhere on the image and drag.
Choose Save page as or Save document as from the File menu. The Save
dialog box appears, but with an additional check box, as shown:

3. Note that the “Selected area” check box is checked by default. If you have
defined an area but don’t want to save an area, clear the check box.
4. Complete all other information in the Save dialog normally, then click OK.
If you are saving a document, the entire document will be saved by
applying the selection to each page, and only saving the portion that falls
within the selected area.

66
 Chapter 4-Using PixView

Replacing a Page with a New Orientation

You can change the orientation of individual pages in your document, and
then save that orientation in either of two ways. This section describes a way
of changing the current page’s orientation. The method of saving the current
orientation of all pages in a document is described on page 60.
When you choose Replace page w/ new orientation from the File menu, the
result depends on the image format you are using to save the page or
document. If you are using TIFF, the current page’s orientation tag in the
image header is changed. The orientation of the image itself is not changed.
The orientation of the image you will see in another image application
depends upon the other application’s support of the orientation tag. Image
formats other than TIFF do the following:

1. If saving in a single-page file, the original file is deleted and replaced with
a new file containing the rotated image.
2. If saving a multi-page file, the current page in the file is deleted and
replaced with the new page. Generally, any extra space in the file that is
freed by this operation is not recovered.

67
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

Changing settings
Changing Scanner Settings
To change scanner settings, click the Scan Setup button or choose
Scanner Settings from the Options menu. A dialog box similar to the
following appears:

The dialog box for your scanner may be slightly different, so as to provide
controls for all of your scanner’s features.

Choose settings as desired, and then click OK.

Additional settings also are available from this dialog box:
Click To set

Default Return scanner settings to their default values.

Area To set the scanning area. Scanning area is set by specifying
measurement unit, and then specifying the upper left X and Y positio
and the width and height of the area.

More When enabled, the scanner has additional settings that are scanm
specific. These additional settings may include separator pa
detection, gamma curve correction, binarization matrix selection, pir
patching, and so forth. Consult your scanner’s documentation f
information about these additional settings.

Filters When enabled, the scanner or system has image enhancement filter
such as deskewing and noise removal. These filters may be available
the scanner hardware or may be added via software modules.

68
 Chapter d-Using Pix View

Changing Page Settings

To change page settings, press s in the main PixView window or choose Page
Settings from the Options menu. The following dialog box appears:

Page settings only affect the view of the image on your screen. They do not
change the contents of your image files whatsoever. You can change the
following settings:

Setting Effect

Rotation Changes the page orientation in 90” steps.

Mirror Displays a mirror image of the page.

Invert Inverts the image display from positive to negative or negative to

positive.

Scaling Changes the scaling of the image to one of several predefined

sizes. In addition, you can type any value between 4 and 200
(percent) in this box.

Scale to For black and white images that are being viewed at sizes
Gray smaller than l:l, changes pixels to shades of gray based on the
relative brightness of the reduced area. This improves clarity of
the image.

Brightness Changes the relative brightness of a color, gray scale, or scaled-

Contrast to-gray image view.

69
Pixview User's Guide

Setting Effect

Horz Pres With binary images only, changes the threshold at which a black
Vert Pi-es pixel is converted to white when displaying the image at scale
factors less than 1:l.This can improve readability in some case:
without using Scale to Gray (which may reduce display speed
slightly). Note: These settings are available only when viewing s
black and white image with Scale to Gray disabled.

All Pages Makes changes applicable to all pages in a document. Wher

disabled, only the current page is affected.

Instant Makes changes instantly visible in the PixView view window a!

Update you make them. When disabled, changes take effect when yet
click OK.

Save As Saves all current settings as the default values that will be usec
Defaults whenever a new document is opened.

Factory Returns all settings to their factory default values.

Defaults

Color Enables color settings by extending the Settings dialog box, a:

shown in the following illustration:
 Chapter 4-Using Pix Vie w

The following color settings can be changed:

Setting Effect

Brightness Change the relative brightness and contrast of each of the

Contrast primary colors (Red, Green, and Blue).

Move As Causes all Brightness or Contrast scroll bars to move in

Group unison, when any individual slider is moved, thereby keeping
the relationship and color balance the same as the overall
brightness or contrast is changed.

Color Allows selection of the desired color model. At this time, only
Model RGB (Red/Green/Blue) is supported.

Dither Using dithering to approximate tonal ranges inherent in the

image but not possible to display, either due to the display
adapter’s color capabilities or the scale factor of the image.

View as Displays color images as gray scale.

Gray

Changing Application Settings

To change application settings, press A in the main PixView window or choose
Application from the Options menu. The following dialog box appears:

71
Pix Vie w User Is Guide

Changing Printer Settings

To change printer settings, choose Print Setup from the File menu. A dialog
box similar to the following appears:

You can change the following settings:

Setting Effect

Printer

Default Printer Selects the printer that is specified in Windows as

being the default printer.

Specific Printer Allows selection of any printer defined in your

Windows setup.

Orientation

Portrait Prints with the top of the image across the narrow
dimension of the paper.

Landscape Prints with the top of the image across the wide
dimension of the paper.

Paper

Size Allows selection of the size of paper on which to

print.

Source Allows selection of paper tray to use.

Options Displays a dialog box of printer-specific settings.

74
Appendix A PixToolsNiew Control Panel

The PixView diskette includes the PixToolsnTiew control panel, which enables
you to control hardware-accelerated printing and display. PixTools
applications and libraries support accelerated printing for the following
printer accelerators:

l Xionics XIPPrint
l Fujitsu PrintPartner 1Oi
l Sigma AIM

Pixel&eel applications and libraries also support accelerated image display

for Cornerstone’s ImageAcceZ display system, and for hardware-accelerated
displays from several other manufact,urers.

Accelerated printing and display work by sending run-length encoded

compressed image data from memory or disk directly t,o the printer or display
card. A special card in your printer or a special display adapter card then
decompresses this data using very fast hardware decompression. Compressed
data moves faster over the comput.er’s bus and the printer/network cables,
and can be read more quickly from a disk drive or from memory, drastically
reducingthe amountof time it takes to print or display an image. In addition,
image display acceleration is further increased by attempting to send device-
dependent bitmaps to the display adapter. Accelerated printing and display
are enabled and disabled by using the PixToolsNiew control panel.

By default, accelerated printing is disabled and accelerated display is enabled

(assuming you have installed a display adapter with supported accelerator
hardware). To change the settings associated with accelerated display and
printing, use the PixToolsMew control panel.

The PixToolsNiew control panel is installed automatically when PixView is

installed.

75
PixView User’s Guide

Using the Control Panel

To use the PixToolsNiew Control Panel, follow these steps:
1. Open the Microsoft Windows Main program group and double-click the
Control Panel icon:

Control
Panel

The Windows Control Panel appears:

~1386 Enhanced Drivers Irn

2. Double-click the PixToolsIView icon:

PixToolsNiew
The PixTooldView control panel appears:
 Appendix A-PixToolsNie w Control Panel

Controlling Accelerated Printing

The upper portion of the PixToolsNiew control panel controls accelerated
printing. To enable accelerated printing, you first must have a printer
accelerator card installed in your printer. Then, choose the printer for which
you want to enable accelerated printing, and click Set Accelerator. The
following dialog box appears:

Choose the printer accelerator from the list, and click OK.

Important
Printer acceleration varies according to the type of data sent
to the printer and the capabilities of the printer accelerator.
Consult the documentation supplied with your printer
accelerator for specific information. If you experience problems
with images printing incorrectly, you should disable
accelerated printing. Please contact PixTools Support
department using the contact information in Appendix D,
supplying as much information about the problem as possible

77
Pix Vie w User !s Guide

Controlling Accelerated Image Display

The lower portion of the PixToolsNiew control panel controls accelerated
image display. If you have an image display system capable of accelerated
image display, the settings default to enabled.
Normally, the enabled settings should work fine. However, if you experience
problems with image display quality, first try disabling “Use device-dependent
bitmaps (DDB).” This setting, when enabled, sends bitmap data to the display
adapter using a bitmap format that the display should understand. Disabling
this setting sends device-independent bitmaps to the display adapter. This
may result in slower display performance.
If the display problem persists, disable “Use display accelerator.” Images are
then sent to the display adapter with no compression.

Important
If you experience any image quality problems when using
accelerated image display, please contact PixTools Support
department using the contact information in Appendix D,
supplying as much information about the problem as possible.

The “Number of pages to cache” lets you specify how many pages to store in
memory. For systems with 8 to 16 MB of memory, the default of 5 should
provide good performance without using too much memory.

78
Appendix B PixView DDE Specification

PixView supports Microsoft Windows Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE),

allowing programmers and systems integrators to operate PixView from
another DDE-enabled application. This appendix provides details of each
PixView DDE command and is primarily of interest to persons who want to
develop programs that work together with PixView. Ordinary users of
PixView need not read or understand this appendix.
PixView acts as a server to other applications that initiate DDE conversations
and accepts commands via the execute and request functions. DDE is
implemented using DDEML.
To initiate a DDE conversation, you need an application or server name and a
topic. The application is either “PIXVIEW” or “MPVIEW” and the only topic is
“SERVER.” (“MPVIEW” is used as an application name for historical
compatibility reasons.)
The following DDE execute commands are provided:
Open, close, scan, and print a document.
Append files to a document.
Scan a page.
Set the position and size of the pan window, main window, and settings
dialog window.
Open and close the pan window.
Open and close the PIXM Setting dialog window.
Quit the application.
Show the scanner settings and scanner selection dialogs.
Set miscellaneous settings.
The following DDE items may be requested:
l Last error number and string.
l Number of pages in the current document.
l Current page number.
DDE application, topic, command names, and data items are all case
insensitive.

79
 pixl/‘iew User’s Guide

DDE Execute commands - Functional Grouping

Document Functions Demo Functions

docopen democlose
docclose demoload
docinsert demoloop
docprint demostop
docscan
fileflush
Settings Dialog Functions
pagescan setdlgopen
pagenext setdlgclose
pageprev setdlgpos
pageset Settings Functions
Scan/Print Functions tagscansetascii
scanselect tagscansetlong
scansettings tagscansetrational
scancancel tagpixmset
printsetup tagpixmallpages

Pan Window Functions Program Functions

quit
panopen
wndpos
panclose wndtitle
panpos
Image Display Functions
dispfitwidth
dispfitwindow
displtol
disprotate
dispzoomin
dispzoomout

80
 Appendix B-Pix Vie w DE Specification

DDE Request Data Items

All requested data items are returned as ASCII strings.

LastError Error status number from last DDE execute

command. 0 for success.

LastErrorStr Error string describing status of last DDE

execute command. Null string for success.

PageCount Number of pages in current document.

PageNo Current display page number within

document. First page is page 0.

DemoTimel Image flip times for first five pages of a

DemoTime document, in hundredths of a second.
DemoTime
DemoTime
DemoTime

81
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

DDE Execute commands

All DDE execute commands return error codes that are determined by the
client application. If you are using a Windows API client application, DDE
execute commands will return DDE-FACK logically ORed with any error code.
The value of DDE-FACK is 0x8 00 0 (327 68 decimal). After checking for and
removing the 0x8000 bit (or subtracting 32768), if the remainder of the
return value is non-zero then an error occurred. If the return value is 0x8000
(327 68 decimal) then the command was successful. To get more information
about what the error is, the data item LastErrorStr should be requested.

Other possible return values from a DDE execute is DDE-FNOTPROCESSED

(0x0000) and DDE-FBUSY (0~4000). DDE-FNOTPROCESSED will only be
returned by PixView if the command is not recognized or a required
parameter is not supplied. DDE-FBUSY is not returned. The header file
windows. h defines these return values for client applications using the
Windows API. For error information on other client applications, refer to the
associated programmers reference documentation for that application.

Following is an alphabetical list of the DDE execute commands:

DemoClose Close demo dialog box that displays demo timing

information.

Transaction: Execute
Data: democlose

This command is only available in pvdemo2.exe (the

PixView demo version).
DemoLoad Load 5 demo pages. Display first page.

Transaction: Execute
Data: demoload

This command is only available in pvdemo2.exe (the

PixView demo version).

82
 Appendix B-Pix Vie w DDE Specification

DemoLoop Execute loop demo, loop over all pages in current document.

Transaction: Execute
Data: demoloop

This command is only available in pvdemo2.exe (the

PixView demo version).

DemoStop Stop loop demo, show display timing dialog for first 5 pages
in document.

Transaction: Execute
Data: demostop

This command is only available in pvdemo2.exe (the

PixView demo version).
Displtol Change the scaling of the current page that is displayed to
full scale (l-to-l). Same as 1:l button on toolbar.

Transaction: Execute
Data: displtol

DispFitWidth Change the scaling of the current page that is displayed to

Fit-to-Width of the window. Same as Fit-To-Width button on
toolbar.
Transaction: Execute
Data: dispfitwidth

DisRFitWindow Change the scaling of the current page that is displayed to

Fit-to-Window. Same as Fit-To-Window button on toolbar.

Transaction: Execute
Data: dispfitwindow

DispRotate Change the rotation of the current page that is displayed by

90 degrees clockwise. Same as Rotate button on toolbar.

Transaction: Execute
Data: disprotate

83
PixView User’s Guide

DisgZoomIn Increase scaling of the current page that is displayed so

that more detail may be seen. The upper left coordinate of
the image display will remain unchanged. Same as ZoomIn
button on toolbar.

Transaction: Execute
Data: dispzoomin
DisgZoomOut Decrease scaling of the current page that is displayed so
that more of the image may be seen. The upper left
coordinate of the image display will remain unchanged if
possible Same as ZoomOut button on toolbar.

Transaction: Execute
Data: dispzoomout
DocClose Close current document.

Transaction: Execute
Data: docclose(bFlush)

If bF1ush is TRUE (l), then any cached pages of the

document are flushed before the document is closed.

84
 Appendix B-Pix Vie w DDE Specification

DocInsert Add images in a list of files to a document. The pages are

added before file number iFi e . The page iDispPage will
be the page displayed after the new images are inserted
into the document.

Transaction: Execute
Data: docinsert (iFile,iDispPage,
@filename)
or
docinsert (iFile,iDispPage,
imgl.ext, img2. ext,
. . .imgN.ext)
The arguments are:

iFile New pages are added before file number

iFi le. To add the pages to the beginning
of the document i File should be zero. To
add pages to the end of the document
iFile should be (-1).

Note that the file number, not the page

number, is specified here. File number and
page number will be the same if all files in
the document contain only one image. This
will be the normalcase.

iDispPage Page number within document to display

when insert is complete.

@filename A file containing a list of image file names,

one filename per line, which should be
inserted into the document. All filenames
must be full path names.

imgl.ext,img2.ext,...imgN.ext

A list of image file names, comma

separated, to be inserted into the
document. All filenames must be full path
names.

85
PixView User’s Guide

DocOgen Open a list of files which comprise the document. A

document may have any number of pages. The first page of
the document is displayed. The document is displayed using
the default PixView settings. Use the Settings dialog to
change the default settings.
The current document is closed before the new document is
opened.
The data is either the filename of a file containing a list of
image file names (@filename), one file per line, or a list of
comma separated file names. All filenames must be full
path names.
Transaction: Execute
Data: docopen( @filename)
or
docopen (imgl.ext,img2. ext,
img3.ext...imgN.ext)
DocPrint Print pages of current open document. All arguments are
optional.
Transaction: Execute
Data:
docprint(iStartPage, iEndPage,
iCopies,iPagesPerRow)
If iStartPage and iEndPage are specified and valid then
those pages of the document are printed. If iEndPage is -1
then all pages of the document are printed. If istartpage
and iEndPage are not specified then the standard print
dialog to select which pages to print and number of copies
comes up. If i Copi es is not specified then one copy is printed.
iPagesPerRow is the number of images to print per row
and column on each printed page (i.e. print thumbnails). If
not specified then one image is printed on each page
(normal printing).
The pages are printed in Fit-to-Page scaling.
Note: This command can only print to the default printer.
The default printer can be changed by using the Windows
Control Panel.

86
 Appen dk B-Pix View DDE Specification

DocScan Scan a set of pages into a document. The hard-coded

naming schema described below (under Root) can handle up
to 999 pages in one document. One file is created for each
page scanned.

Transaction: Execute
Data: docscan (Dir,Root,Packaging,
bDlgControl,bRotated)

The current document is closed before the new document is

scanned.

Note: the DDE timeout must be set to longer than the scan
batch takes. The command does not send the acknowledge
until the scan is complete.

The arguments are:

Dir directory where the scanned files should be

saved.

Root Root file name, must be 4 or fewer

characters. File names are automatically
generated in the form rootddd. ext,
where ddd is a zero padded number
between 001 and 999.

Packaging Typ e of image file and compression that

will be used for scanned images: If zero or
nothing is specified, then
TAG-PACKAGING-TIFFG4 is used. For
other packagings, use the decimal value
listed below:

Packaging Tag Decimal Value

TAG-PACKAGING-PCXPCXCOMP 115536
TAG-PACKAGING-PDARAW 131073

TAG-PACKAGING-PDAG3 131075

TAGpPACKAGINGpPDAG4 131076

87
F!zxVie w User k Guide

TAG-PACKAGINGpTIFFG3 196611

TAG-PACKAGING-TIFFG3M 196610

TAG-PACKAGING-TIFFG4 196612
or 0 or blank

TAG-PACKAGING-TIFFPACK 229381

TAG-PACKAGING-TIFFLZW 196613

bDlgContro1 If this argument is set to FALSE then

only the batch of pages currently in the
scanner’s automatic document feeder
(ADF) are scanned. This assumes that
the scanner being used has an ADF and
the pages to be scanned are in the ADF
and the user desires to only scan the
fronts of single sided documents. No
dialogs will come up which require user
intervention. Only errors are returned.
If this argument is set to TRUE, then the
PIXSL scanner dialog will appear
allowing the user to put additional pages
in the ADF when it is empty, select flat
bed, duplex scanning, back side scanning,
and other scanner features.
bRotated Optional parameter. The default value is
zero which means that pages are scanned
in the “normal” orientation.
If bRotated is set to 1, the pages are
placed into the scanner rotated so that
the wide edge of the page enters the
scanner (scanner must scan wider than
the pages are long; i.e., more than 11
inches). Scanning pages rotated can
speed up scanning nearly 25%.
FileFlush Flush any cached pages in the named file (img. ext)
Transaction: Execute
Data: fileflush(img.ext)

88
 Appendix B--Pix View DDE Specification

PageNext Display the next page of the document. If there are no more
pages in the document, beep.
Transaction: Execute
Data: pagenext
PagePrev Display the previous page of the document. If at the
beginning of the document, beep.
Transaction: Execute
Data: pageprev
PageScan Scan a single page from ADF, if present and loaded;
otherwise, scan from flatbed without user prompting. If
ADF is not loaded and the scanner has no flatbed, return an
error.
Transaction: Execute
Data: pagescan (iFile,iDispPage,
filename. ext,
Packaging)
If there is no current document, a new document is created.
Pages are added before file number iFi 1 e.
iFile Scanned pages is added before file
number iFi e. To add the page to the
beginning of the document, set iFi e to
0. To add the page to the end of the
document, set iFile to -1.
Note: The file number, not the page
number, is specified here. File number
and page number are the same if all files
in the document contain only one image.
This will be the normalcase.
iDispPage Page number within the document to
display when the scan is complete.
filename.ext File name for storing the scanned page. A
full path name should be used.
Packaging Type of image file and compression that
will be used for scanned images: If zero
or nothing is specified, then
TAG-PACKAGING-TIFFG4 is used. For
other packagings, use the decimal value
listed under the DocScan command
above.

89
Pix Vie w User !s Guide

PageSet Display iPageNo page of the document. The first page is 0.

Transaction: Execute
Data: pageset (iPageN0)

PanClose Close the Pan window.

Transaction: Execute
Data: panclose

PanOpen Show the Pan window.

Transaction: Execute
Data: panopen

PanPos Set the position and size of the Pan window. ixpos, iYpos,
i Width, and iHeigh t are screen pixel coordinates. i Width
and i Hei gh t are optional.

Transaction: Execute
Data: panpos (ixpos, iYpos,iWidth,
iHeight)

PrintSetup Display the standard printer setup dialog box allowing

selection of printer and printer options.
Transaction: Execute
Data: printsetup

Quit Close the server application.

Transaction: Execute
Data: quit
ScanCancel Abort the current scan. ScanCancel must be used rather
than Quit if scanning is in progress. Files may be left in an
incomplete state.
Transaction: Execute
Data: scancancel

ScanSelect Display the Scanner Selection dialog box. This dialog allows
the user to specify which scanner to use.
Transaction: Execute
Data: scanselect-

90
 AppendjxB--pixViewDDESpea%ation

ScanSettings Display the Scanner Settings dialog box. This dialog allows
the user to set scanning parameters.
Transaction: Execute
Data: scansettings

SetDlgClose Close the Page Settings dialog box. This dialog allows the
user to set image characteristics after scanning.
Transaction: Execute
Data: setdlgclose

SetDlgOgen Display the Page Settings dialog box. This dialog allows the
user to set image characteristics after scanning.
Transaction: Execute
Data: setdlgopen

SetDlgPos Set the position of the Page Settings dialog box. The
coordinates ixpos and i ypos are in screen pixels.
Transaction: Execute
Data: setdlgpos(iXpos, iYpos)

TagPixmSet Set the value of a PIXM Settings tag. These tags affect how
the image is displayed. They correspond to the individual
settings in the Page Settings dialog box.
Transaction: Execute
Data: tagpixmset(iTag, IValue)
i Tag must be one of the following decimal values:

Tag Description Decimal

Value
TAG-BRIGHTNEssO=normal;l =dark;255=ligh 1282

TAG-CONTRAST O=normal;l =dark;255=ligh 1281

TAG-INVERT Boolean value 1507

91
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

TAG-ORIENTATI 1=pOttrait 274

ON 2=landscape
3=180”
4=270”
5=pottrait mirrored
6=landscape mirrored
7=180” mirrored
8=270” mirrored

TAG-OVERSCAN O=black; l=white 4099

TAG-PHOTOMETR 0 = WHITEO; 1 = WHITE1 262

IC 2 = RGB; 3 = PALETTE

TAG-SCALE-X Max value = 32768132768 4096

TAG-SCALE-Y Max value = 32768132768 4097

TAG-SCALING 1 = binary 4098

2 = color
4 = gray4
8 = gray8

TAG-THRESH-X 0= neutral 4128

- 64 = whiten
64 = blacken
- 128 = minimum value
128 = maximum value

TAG-THRESH-Y O=neutral 4129

- 1 = whiten
1 = blacken
- 1 = minimum value
1 = maximum value

TAG-XPOSITION - 8096 thru 8096 times 286

SCALE-X

TAG-YPOSITION - 8096 thru 8096 times 287

SCALE-Y

92
 Appendix B-Pix Vie w DDE Specifica tion

For a complete description of these tags, refer to

PixTooMEie w Programmer’s Guide and Function
Reference.
TagPixmAllPages Cause TagPixmSet to affect all pages in the
document.
Transaction: Execute
Data:
tagpixmallpages(bAllPages)
If bAllPages is TRUE, then all TagPixmSet
commands affect all pages in the document. If
bAllPages isFALSE, thenall TagPixmSet commands
affect only the current page. The default value is TRUE.
TagScanSetASCII Set the value of a scanner tag. These tags control how
an image is scanned. Note that the tags must be
passed as decimalvalues when using DDE.
Transaction: Execute
Data:
tagscansetascii(iTag,str)
Some of the most often used tags are listed on page 95.
TagScanSetLong Set the value of a scanner tag. Note that the tags must
be passed as decimalvalues when using DDE.
Transaction: Execute
Data:
tagscansetlong( iTag,lValue)

Some of the most often used tags are listed on page 95.
TagScanSetRational Set the value of a scanner tag. Note that the tags must
be passed as decimalvalues when using DDE.
Transaction: Execute
Data: tagscansetrational( iTag,
ratValue_numerator,
ratValue_denom)
Some of the most often used tags are listed on page 95.

93
PixView User's Guide

WndPos Set position of the PixView window. All position variable

are in screen pixel coordinates.
Transaction: Execute
Data: wndpos( iXpos, iYpos ,iWidth,
iHeight)

WndTitle Replaces the title of the PixView window with a specific

title.
Transaction: Execute
Data: wndtitle(strTitle)

94
 Appendix B-Pix Vie w DDE Specification

Scanner Tags
The following is an abbreviated list of the most common scanner tags. If you
need more detailed information, you are a more serious developer and should
consider obtaining the PixToolsBcan (ISIS) toolkit. These products contain
complete developer’s information on using PixTools library functions.
Tag Description Decimal
Value
TAG-IMAGEWIDTH width in pixels 256
TAG-IMAGELENGTH length in pixels 257
TAG-SAMPLESPERPIXEL l=b/worgray;3=color 277
TAG-BITSPERSAMPLE 1=b/w; 4 or 8=gray/color 258
TAG-COMPRESSION l=none; 3=G4 (if scanner supports it) 259
TAG-XRESOLUTION Rational value 282
TAG-YRESOLUTION Rational value 283
TAG-PAGESIZE ASCII value (see below) 1294
Some scanners do not support TAG-PAGESIZE; use
TAG-IMAGEWIDTH and TAG-IMAGELENGTH in those
cases. Scanners that support TAG-PAGESIZE support
some or all of the following values:
Letter - 8.5 x 11 in
Legal - 8.5 x 14 in
Double Letter - 11 x 17 in
A3 - 297 x 429 mm
A4 - 210 x 297 mm
A5 - 148 x 210 mm
B4 - 250 x 353 mm
B5 - 176 x 250 mm
Scanner's Maximum
Scanner Default

95
Pix Vie w User’s Guide

96
Appendix C Other PixelAcce/ Products

The PixeLlccel family of products offers several toolkit products related to

image acquisition and management. These products are designed to allow
programmers to easily integrate image scanning, viewing, printing, and
storage into their applications. PixView is an example of the type of
application that can be developed using these toolkits.

PixToolsJScan Universalscannerinterface anddriver tooIkit

PixTools/Scan is a set of libraries that allow an application program to work

with more than 90 different scanners from over 25 manufacturers. These
libraries shield the application developer from concerns about scanner type
and capabilities, while providing scanning at the full rated speed of the
scanner.

PixToolsNiew Highperformanceimage viewingandprintingtoolkit

PixToolsNiew is an image management library that allows applications to
easily provide popular and important image viewing and printing capabilities
such as zoom, pan, and rotate. In addition, PixTools Niew provides a variety
of anti-aliasing techniques, including scale-to-gray. Cornerstone and Sigma
Designs display accelerators are supported transparently. Accelerated
printing is supported with the Fujitsu PrintPartner lOi, Xionics XIPPrint, and
Sigma AIM. PixTools / View also supports full 24-bit color and 8-bit gray scale.

PixToolsNiew provides file import, export, and conversion libraries for

standard image files types (including TIFF, PCX/DCX, PICT, GIF, BMP, CALS
Type 1, and PDA) and compression types (uncompressed, Group 3, modified
Group 3, Group 4, PackBits, LZW, JPEG, and RLE).

97
PixView User’s Guide

PixTools/EZ 4GL ActiveXTM Control for Scanning Wewing and File I/O

PixTools/EZ is an ActiveX control that can be easily integrated into various

fourth-generation (4GL) programming environments, such as Microsoft Visual
Basic, Borland Delphi, PowerBuilder, and others. You can easily build a fully-
functional image-enabled application using drag-and-drop controls. All top-
level functionality of PixTools/Scan and PixToolsNiew is maintained, while an
easy migration path is provided for developers who need the low-level control
provided only by PixToolslScan and PixToolsNiew.

98
Appendix D Contacting Pixel

Use the following information to contact the PixTools division of Cornerstone

Imaging, Inc:

Cornerstone Imaging, Inc.

PixTools Division
1710 Fortune Drive
San Jose, CA 95131 USA
Telephone: (408) 3253800
Fax: (408) 232-9292
Bulletin Board:(408) 232-9286

Internet: www.pixtran.com

99
Pix Vie w User k Guide

100
Index

buttons, toolbar, 8
1
C
1:l button, 43
1:l command, 43 Cancel scan command, 35
cancel scanning, 35
Clipboard, copying to, 44
A Color, 70
Add Scanner dialog box, 26 color format, 56
All Pages, 70 Color Model (color), 71
All Pages check box, 54 color support, 55
anti-aliasing (convert to gray scale), 49 command
Application settings command, 71 l:l, 43
Application Settings dialog box, 71 Application settings, 71
auto resume scan, 73 Cancel scan, 35
Continue Scan batch, 33
Fit to width, 43
B Fit to window, 43
backup copy, 17 Goto Page, 45
Batch Detection list box, 39 Loop Images, 45
batch separators, 38 Next Page, 45
BMP, 55 Open document, 42
Brightness, 69, 71 Page settings, 69
Brightness (color), 71 Pan window, 46
button Previous Page, 45
l:l, 43 Print (Actual Pixels), 50
Fit Width, 43 Print (Actual Size), 51
Fit Window, 43 Print (Fit Page), 51
Loop Demo, 45 Print Thumbnails, 51
Next Page, 45 Replace page WI new orientation, 67
Prev Page, 45 Rescan, 35
Rotate, 44 Rotate, 44
Zoom In, 43 Save document as, 53
Zoom Out. 43 Save page as, 53

101
 pix VYew User !s Guide

Scan batch to file, 29, 36, 38 LastError, 81

Scan page, 34 LastErrorStr, 81
Scan rotated batch to file, 32 packaging tags, 87
Show Thumbnails, 45, 47 PageCount, 81
Zoom in, 43 PageNext command, 89
Zoom out, 43 PageNo, 81
compression options, 55 PagePrev command, 89
compression ratios, 55 PageScan command, 89
Continue Scan batch command, 33 PageSet command, 90
continuing a batch scan, 33 PageSetup command, 90
Contrast, 69 PanClose command, 90
Contrast (color), 71 PanOpen command, 90
control panel, accelerated printing and PanPos command, 90
display, 76 Quit command, 90
control panel, PixToolsNiew, 76 ScanCancel command, 90
controlling accelerated display, 78 ScanSelect command, 90
controlling accelerated printing, 77 ScanSettings command, 91
convert to gray scale (anti-aliasing), 49 SetDlgClose command, 91
copy to Clipboard, 44 SetDlgOpen command, 91
SetDlgPos command, 91
standard page sizes, 95
D
TagPixmAIlPages command, 93
DCX, 55 TagPixmSet command, 91
DDE, 79 TagScanSetLong, 93
alphabetical list of Execute TagScanSetRational, 93
commands, 82 WndPos command, 94
DemoClose command, 82 WndTitle command, 94
DemoLoad command, 82 DDE Execute commands - Functional
DemoLoop command, 83 Grouping, 80
DemoStop command, 83 DDE Request Data Items, 81
DemoTimel-5, 81 defining a custom naming schema, 62
Displtol command, 83 DemoClose command, 82
DispFitWidth command, 83 DemoLoad command, 82
DispFitWindow command, 83 DemoLoop command, 83
DispRotate command, 83 DemoStop command, 84
DispZoomIn command, 84 DemoTimel, 81
DispZoomOut command, 84 DemoTime2, 81
DocClose command, 84 DemoTime3,81
DocInsert command, 85 DemoTime4,81
DocOpen command, 86 DemoTimeS, 81
DocPrint command, 86 Detect and Scan Separator, Continue
DocScan command: 87 Scanning, 39
FileFlush command, 88

102
 Index

Detect and Scan Separator, Stop File Naming Schema dialog box, 61
Scanning, 39 FileFlush command, 88
Detect and Skip Separator, Continue finding pages, 45
Scanning, 39 Fit to width command, 43
Detect and Skip Separator, Stop Fit to window command, 43
Scanning, 39 Fit Width button, 43
disable accelerator, 72 Fit Window button. 43
disk space, 56
disk space required, 3
G
Displtol command, 83
DispFitWidth command, 83 getting started quickly, 5
DispFitWindow command, 83 GIF, 55
display go to, 45
accelerated, control panel, 77 Goto Page command, 45
controlling acceleration, 78
display while scan, 72
H
DispRotate command, 83
DispZoomIn command, 84 Horz Pres, 70
DispZoomOut command, 84
Dither (color), 71
I
DocClose command, 84
DocInsert command, 85 illustration
DocOpen command, 86 PixView window, 6
DocPrint command, 86 Add Scanner dialog box, 25
DocScan command, 87 Application Settings dialog box, 71
document File Naming Schema dialog box, 61
opening, 41 making a selection, 50
saving, 52 Name of Scanner dialog box, 27
double-sided scanning, 36 Open document dialog box, 42
double-sided scanning, and job Page Settings dialog box, 69
separators, 40 Page Settings expanded dialog box,
duplex scanning, 36 70
Pan window, 46
E PixView icon, 27
PixView window, 28
editing naming schemas, 61 Prepare Scanner dialog box, 30, 33
enable exact scaling, 73 Prepare Scanner Options dialog box,
40

F
Print dialog box, 51
Print Setup dialog box, 74
Factory Defaults, 70 Print Thumbnail Setup dialog box,
file formats, 55 47,51
file name extensions, 55 Save As dialog box, 53

103
Rx T4ew User’s Guide

Save Document Progress dialog box, Mirror, 69

55 mouse. and zooming, 44
Scale-to-Gray off versus on, 49 Move As Group (color), 71
Scanned Document Name dialog moving around an image, 9
box, 29 keyboard, 9
Scanner Selection dialog box, 24 Pan window, 9
Scanner Settings dialog box, 68 scroll bars, 9
Thumbnail window, 47 multi-page support, 55
image file formats, 55
improving readability (anti-aliasing),
N
49
initiating a DDE conversation, 79 Name of Scanner dialog box, 26
installation, quick, 5 naming schema
installing PixView, 15 selecting, 61
making a backup copy, 17 naming schemas, 60
scanner installation. 15 Next Page button, 45
selecting a scanner, 24 Next Page command, 45
Instant Update, 70
Invert, 69
0

J Open document command, 42

Open document dialog box, 42
job separators, 38 opening documents, 41
job separators, and double-sided ordering additional scanner drivers, 4
scanning, 40 orientation, 32, 67
other applications, using the Clipboard
K to copy images. 44

keyboard shortcuts, 43, 44, 45

P

L
saving, 52
LastError, 81 page orientation, 32
LastErrorStr, 81 Page Range check box, 53
launching PixView, 27 page settings, 69
Loop Demo button, 45 Page settings command, 69
Loop Images command, 45 Page Settings dialog box, 69
looping pages (demo feature), 45 Page Settings expanded dialog box, 70
PageCount, 81
PageNext command, 89
M
PageNo, 81
making a selection, 50 PagePrev command, 89
max 256 colors, 73 PageScan command. 89

104
 Index

PageSet command, 90
PageSetup command, 90
Q
Pan window, 46 quick start instructions, 5
Pan window command, 46 Quit command, 90
PanClose command, 90
PanOpen command, 90
R
PanPos command, 90
PCX, 55 reasons to open documents, 41
PDA, 55 Replace page WI new orientation
PixName format in naming schemas, command, 67
62 Rescan command, 35
PixName format strings, 63 rescanning a page, 35
PixToolslEZ, 98 rotate, 44
PixToolslScan, 97 Rotate button, 44
PixTooMView, 97 Rotate command, 44
PixToolsNiew control panel, 76 Rotation, 69
PixView rules for schema entry, 65
icon, 27
launching, 27
S
starting. 27
PixView visual index, 28 Save As Defaults, 70
PixView window, 6, 28 Save As dialog box, 53
Prepare Scanner dialog box, 31, 33 Save document as command, 53
Prepare Scanner Options dialog box, Save Document Progress dialog box, 54
39 Save page as command, 53
Prev Page button, 45 saving pages and documents, 52
Previous Page command, 45 Scale to Gray, 69
Print (Actual Pixels) command, 50 Scale-to-Gray off versus on, 49
Print (Actual Size) command, 51 scaling, 43, 69
Print (Fit Page) command. 50 Scan batch to file command, 29, 36, 38
Print dialog box, 51 Scan page command, 34
Print Setup dialog box. 74 Scan rotated batch to file command, 32
Print Thumbnail Setup dialog box, 48, ScanCancel command, 90
51 Scanned Document Name dialog box,
Print Thumbnails command, 51 29
printer settings, 74 scanner
Printf format in naming schemas, 62 drivers, obtaining, 4
Printf format strings, 64 installation, 15
printing, 50 interface methods, 16
accelerated, control panel, 76 selecting, 24
controlling acceleration, 78 settings, 68
Scanner Selection dialog box, 24
Scanner Settings dialog box, 68

105
Part No. G4058590 Printed in Japan
SCANNER KIT TYPE 401

Scanner Reference

Operating Instructions
 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and
maintenance for the scanning capabilities of the machine. To obtain
maximum versatility from this scanner, all users should carefully read and
follow the instructions contained in this manual.

Make sure to read the “Safety Information” section of this manual before
using the machine as a scanner. It contains important information related
to user safety and to preventing equipment problems.

Overview
The multifunctional machine, in addition to providing you with outstanding
copying capabilities, allows you to print data received from a host computer
and to perform Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) scanning. The
scanning capability allows you to scan data through a SCSI connection to
your host computer.

The machine provides numerous scanning features and includes an Auto

Reverse Document Feeder (ARDF) that allows you to scan multiple pages
and double-sided originals.

Using This Manual

This manual explains how to configure and use the machine as a scanner.
This section contains a list of the contents of this manual, the conventions
used throughout the manual, and various publications that may be of further
use to you when using the machine as a scanner. ☛ Refer to the General
Reference Guide and the Copier Reference Guide for basic information on
the machine and for information on using the machine as a copier. . ☛
Refer to the Printer Reference Guide for information on using the machine
as a printer.

ix
INTRDUCTION

Contents

This guide contains the following chapters and appendices:

❐ Chapter 1: Setting up the scanner - provides information on

preparing to use the machine as a scanner.

❐ Chapter 2: Control panel - describes how you use the main buttons to
control the scanner functions.

❐ Chapter 3: Troubleshooting - contains a list of the error messages

that may display and the actions you take to eliminate errors.

❐ Chapter 4: Specifications - contains hardware specifications for the

scanner and SCSI interface specifications.

A glossary is provided at the end of this manual.

Conventions

The following conventions are used throughout this manual:

Square brackets - the names of the hard and soft keys and the buttons
available on the machine and on the your host computer are shown in
square brackets. For example, the [Interrupt] button.

Italics - names of documents are shown in italics. For example, Scanner

Reference Guide.

☛ indicates that the following text refers to additional sections and chapters
that contain further information about the topic.

x
 INTRODUCTION

Keys that can be selected on the current menu display on

the Control Panel in this manner.

Keys that have been selected on the current menu display

on the Control Panel in this manner.

Keys that cannot be selected on the current menu display

on the Control Panel in this manner.

Note: In general, “Notes” provide general information to help you complete

a task or further understand the text.

R CAUTION: In general, “Cautions” provide information important in

preventing damage to your equipment, or to avoiding a
situation that may cause minor injury to you.

R WARNING: In general, “Warnings” provide information important in

alerting you to a situation that may cause serious injury to
you and major damage to your equipment and property if
instructions are not followed correctly.

n This symbol displays to notify you that the component may be very
hot and should not be touched

u In accordance with the ISO Standard 7001, this main switch symbol
means “Stand By” or “Please Wait.”

s In accordance with the ISO Standard 7001, this main switch symbol
means “Power On.”

t Inmeans
accordance with the ISO Standard 7001, this main switch symbol
“Power Off.”

v This display symbol means “Ready.”

xi
INTRDUCTION

Related Documents

General Reference Guide

Copier Reference Guide

Printer Reference Guide

Network documentations

User Guide for Printer Servers

General Information

The following information is provided for your general knowledge:

❐ Some of the illustrations contained in this manual may differ slightly

from your machine.

❐ Some of the options described in this manual may not be available in

your country. Contact your local dealer for details on the options
available to you.

❐ ☛ Refer to the Copier Reference Guide for basic information on the

machine and for information on using the machine as a copier.

xii
1. SETTING UP THE SCANNER

1-1
SETTING UP THE SCANNER

REQUIREMENTS
Before you can use the machine as a scanner you must make sure that you have met
all of the environmental and electrical requirements. You must also connect the
machine to your host computer using the Small Computer Systems Interface II (SCSI
II) connection and attach the SCSI II terminator to the top port on the machine. Make
sure that you have all of the cables, connectors, and electrical outlets necessary to
attach the machine to your host. ☛ Refer to the “Connecting the Scanner to the Host”
section in this chapter for further information.

SCSI II Requirements
You connect the machine to your host computer using a high density 50-pin SCSI II
cable connected to a SCSI II port available on your host computer. It is your
responsibility to make sure that you have a SCSI II port available on the host computer
and to provide the SCSI II cable. In addition, you must provide and connect a SCSI II
terminator to the remaining SCSI II port on the machine. When a SCSI II terminator is
not connected when the scanner is installed, the scanner will not initialize when the
machine is turned on.
The SCSI II cable is not provided with the machine. However, two ferrite cores,
designed to screen electromagnetic interference, are provided with the machine. You
must attach a ferrite core around each end of the SCSI II cable. The SCSI II
terminator is provided with the scanner option package. ☛ Refer to the
“Specifications” chapter in this manual for further information.
The SCSI II connection is a SCSI II interface and requires
a high density 50-pin SCSI II cable and a SCSI II port
available on the host computer.

1-2
 SETTING UP THE SCANNER
The terminator is a standard SCSI II Terminator. You must
connect the terminator when the scanner option is installed
or the scanner will not function.

R CAUTION: When you use the machine as a scanner, you should always turn on
the machine before you turn on the host computer.

☛ Refer to the “Specifications” chapter in this manual for the cable specifications.

1-3
SETTING UP THE SCANNER

CONNECTING THE SCANNER TO THE HOST

When you have obtained the necessary SCSI II cable, connector and terminator plug,
you can connect the machine to the SCSI II port available on your host computer.
Note: You must have a SCSI II port available on your host computer.

☛ Refer to the “Using the Control Panel” chapter in this manual for information on
setting the SCSI ID.

1-4
 SETTING UP THE SCANNER

Connecting the SCSI II Cable and Terminator

Follow these steps to connect the machine to your host:

1 Make sure you have the SCSI II cable necessary for the connection.

2 Make sure that both the machine

and the host computer are turned
off.

3 Connect one end of the high density

50-pin SCSI II cable to a SCSI II
port on the back of the machine.

4 Press the connector until it snaps in place. This is to make sure that
the cable remains in position.

5 Connect the other end of the high density 50-

pin SCSI II cable to the SCSI II port on the
back of the host computer or other SCSI
peripheral.

1-5
SETTING UP THE SCANNER

6 Press the connector until it snaps in place. This is to make sure that
the cable remains in position.

7 Connect the high density SCSI II

Terminator to the remaining SCSI II
port on the back of the machine.
When a SCSI II terminator is not
connected when the scanner is
installed, the scanner will not
initialize when the machine is turned
on.

8 Plug in the power cords and turn on

the power to the machine.

9 Plug in the power cords and turn on the host computer.

1-6
 SETTING UP THE SCANNER

INSTALLING THE DRIVERS

You must install the scanner driver software on the host computer before you can use
the scanner.
☛ Refer to the “On-line help files of drives” for further information on operating the
scanner.

Installing the CFM TWAIN Scanner Driver

This section contains the procedure you follow to install the TWAIN scanner driver on
your Windows 3.1, Windows 95 or Windows NT system.

Installing the TWAIN Scanner Driver on Windows

Follow these steps to install the TWAIN scanner driver on your Windows system:

1 Close any applications that are currently running.

2 Insert the “CFM TWAIN Scanner Drivers for Windows” diskette into the
3.5 inch disk drive on your host computer.

3 Run the setup.exe program on the diskette.

4 Follow the installation instructions that display on the screen.

Installing the ISIS Scanner Driver

Please refer to the “Installing Scanner Drivers” section in the PixView User’s Guide.

1-7
SETTING UP THE SCANNER

TESTING
When you have attached the machine to the host computer you can test the
connection and the scanning functions using the scanner driver.
Note: You may have to first configure the machine for scanning. You do so using the
scanner driver screens.

1-8
2. USING THE CONTROL PANEL

2-1
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes how you use the main buttons and menus to use the
scanner.

You use the main buttons on the left side of the Control Panel and the
menu selections that display on the Control Panel screen to access the
Scanner mode. You use the scanner driver on the host computer to specify
how you want the scanner to function.

Control Panel (U.S. Version)

User Toois Guidance Program Job Recall Clear modes/Low Power Mode
Interrupt

On line

Data in 1 2 3

Printer/Scanner 4 5 6
Start

Copy 4 5 6 Clear/Stop

Enter

Control Panel (European Version)

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

The Control Panel display is shared by all functions of the machine and
displays the current status of the copy, print jobs, as well as when the
machine is in scan mode. When you are in scan mode, the Control Panel
displays the “The machine is now in Scanner mode. If you wish to use the
printer, press [Exit] to leave Scanner mode.” message. When the scanner
is idle, the Control Panel displays the status for the copier. The “Status”
area is blank when the status of the machine is off-line.
2-2
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Using the Buttons and Screens

U.S. Europe The machine has two light emitting diode (LED)
indicators and two main buttons located on the left side
of the Control Panel and a display area that specifies
when you are in Scanner mode.

The top of the Printer mode menu displays the current mode of operation.
These modes are as follows:
❐ Share Mode - indicates that you want
to share the machine between copy,
print, and scan modes with no specific
priority.

❐ Printer Only Mode - indicates that

you currently want to use the machine
as a printer only.

❐ Scanner Only Mode - indicates

that you currently want to use the
machine as a scanner only.

2-3
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

❐ Printer Priority Mode - this

indicates that you want all print
jobs to take priority. In this
mode normal copying, printing,
and scanning is enabled, and
copy interrupt is disabled.

2-4
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Setting the SCSI ID

You must specify the SCSI ID from the machine before you can use your
scanner. Follow these steps to specify the SCSI ID for your scanner:

1 Access the Setup menu, by pressing the [Setup Menu] button from
the Printer mode menu.

2 Access the Configuration menu by pressing the [Configuration

Menu] button from the Setup menu.

3 Access the SCSI ID Setting screen by pressing the [Change] button

located next to the SCSI ID option on the Configuration menu.
The options are as follows:
❐ 0 ❐ 3 ❐ 6
❐ 1 ❐ 4 ❐ 7
❐ 2 ❐ 5
The default is 3.

4 Select the number that specifies the correct SCSI ID for your
scanner and press the [Exit] button to save the setting and return to
the Configuration menu.

5 Press the [Exit] button as many times as necessary to return to the

Printer mode menu.

2-5
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Entering Scanner Mode

When you first turn on the machine, the Copy Menu displays on the Control
Panel. To access the Scanner mode, you must press the
[Printer/Scanner] button located on the left side of the display panel and
press the [Scanner] button on the Printer mode menu screen. The
scanner is now ready to use.

Note: You can not use the scanner function when the machine is set to
Printer only mode.

2-6
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Exiting Scanner Mode

From the Scanner mode screen, press the [Exit] button.

2-7
3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3-1
TROUBLESHOOTING

OVERVIEW
This chapter provides information that may be helpful when clearing
problems and information on the error messages that may display while you
are using the machine as a scanner.

SCANNER PROBLEMS
This section contains information on the problems that may occur while
using the scanner, as well as the actions you can take to solve the
problems.

Table 3-1 lists the basic problems that may occur with your scanner and the
actions you can take to correct the problems.

Table 3-1 Basic problem resolution

Condition Action
The machine does not Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged in to an
activate when the main appropriate power outlet.
switch is turned on.

The machine has turned Turn on the main switch.

off.

Scanner is sending Verify that you have the correct interface cable.
fragments or confusing Verify that you have the SCSI Terminator attached correctly.
data to the host computer

M displays. Close the indicated door or cover.

L displays. Turn off the main switch, wait a few seconds and turn the machine
on again. If this symbol displays again, contact your service
representative.

3-2
Table 3-2 lists the scanner conditions that may occur, and the action you
can take to correct the conditions.

Table 3-2 Scanner condition resolution

Condition Action
Frequent misfeeds Verify that the size and weight of the paper you are using meets the
paper specifications for the Auto Reverse Document Feeder (ARDF).

Verify whether the paper is folded, wrinkled, damp, or curled.

Verify that the paper is correctly placed in the ARDF tray.

Check for any pieces of misfed paper or other foreign objects in the
machine.

Verify that the page size setting is correct for the paper contained in
the feeder tray.

When you encounter a scanner problem and none of the information

available in this section solves the problem, contact your Service
Representative. Attempting to repair the machine yourself is not covered by
the warranty and may cause further damage to the machine. When you
contact your Service Representative, make sure to have the following
information available:

❐ A record of the problem that occurred and the steps you took to
eliminate the problem

❐ The name and number of the machine

❐ Configuration information for the scanner

❐ Information on the scanner driver you are using.

3-3
TROUBLESHOOTING

ERROR MESSAGES
The ONLINE operation screen of the machine contains three fields and two
buttons. The current operation mode displays in the top field. The operating
status (which contains the READY status) displays in the next field. The
third field contains system messages and is blank during normal operation.
When a unique condition occurs, this field displays the error messages.

Table 3-3 lists the messages that display in this field and provides an
indication of what occurred to cause the message, and the action you can
take to eliminate the error.

Table 3-3 Error messages

Message Description Action

Controller error. A problem has occurred with the Contact your service representative.
Please call for controller causing a diagnostic error Although the scanning function is
Service. during power on. not available, you can use the copy
function of the machine by pressing
the [COPY] button.

SCSI communication A SCSI port communication error Check the SCSI port. When the
error. Please set up occurred during scanning. SCSI port problem is fixed, press
communication [Continue] to resume scanning or
parameters again. press [Reset] to cancel the scan
job.

3-4
4. SPECIFICATIONS

4-1
SPECIFICATIONS

SCANNER
This section contains the electrical and hardware specifications for your
scanner as well as information on the paper feed capabilities provided by
the Auto Reverse Document Feeder (ARDF).

Electrical and Hardware Specifications

This section contains the electrical and hardware specifications for your
scanner. Table 4-1 lists the basic scanner information and specifications.

Note: All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Table 4-1. Basic scanner information

Component Specification
Resolution: 400 dpi (100 to 1600 dpi internal conversion)
Gray scale: 256 levels
Power source: 120V, 60Hz, more than 12.0A (15 or 20 AMP circuit) (U.S.)
220 to 240V, 50 to 60Hz, more than 6.5A (15 or 20 AMP circuit)
(Europe)
Power consumption: Warm-up - less than 0.90 kW
Stand-by - less than 0.22 kW
Maximum - less than 1.440 kW (U.S.)
less than 1.495 KW (Europe)
Noise emission: Sound Stand-by - 25 dB (A)
pressure level Scanning - 59 dB (A)
* The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at the operator position)
Noise emission: Sound Stand-by - 40 dB (A)
power level Scanning - 69 dB (A)
* The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at the operator position)
Standard SCSI High density 50-pin SCSI cable and SCSI Terminator plug. SCSI
interface: port must be available on the host computer.

4-2
 SPECIFICATIONS

INTERFACE
This section provides information on the high density 50-pin SCSI cable you
use to connect your scanner to your host computer and on the SCSI
Terminator plug you use on the machine. It is your responsibility to make
sure that you have a SCSI port available on the host computer and to
provide the SCSI cable. In addition, you must provide and connect a SCSI
terminator plug to the top SCSI port on the machine. The SCSI cable and
SCSI Terminator are not provided with the machine.

Refer to the “Setting up the Scanner” chapter in this manual for information
on how to connect the scanner to your host computer.

SCSI Interface
The SCSI connection is a standard SCSI interface and requires a high
density 50-pin SCSI bus and tag cable with an A Connector and a SCSI
port available on the host computer. The terminator is a standard SCSI
Terminator.

Table 4-2 lists the high density 50-pin designations and associated signals
for SCSI communications.

Table 4-2. high density 50-pin SCSI pin designations

Code Signal Pin

GND Signal Ground 1
GND Signal Ground 2
GND Signal Ground 3
GND Signal Ground 4
GND Signal Ground 5
GND Signal Ground 6
GND Signal Ground 7
GND Signal Ground 8
GND Signal Ground 9
GND Signal Ground 10
GND Signal Ground 11
RESERVED Reserved 12
(N/C) (Not Connected) 13

4-3
SPECIFICATIONS

Code Signal Pin

RESERVED Reserved 14
GND Signal Ground 15
GND Signal Ground 16
GND Signal Ground 17
GND Signal Ground 18
GND Signal Ground 19
GND Signal Ground 20
GND Signal Ground 21
GND Signal Ground 22
GND Signal Ground 23
GND Signal Ground 24
GND Signal Ground 25
DB<0> Data 26
DB<1> Data 27
DB<2> Data 28
DB<3> Data 29
DB<4> Data 30
DB<5> Data 31
DB<6> Data 32
DB<7> Data 33
DB<P> Data 34
GND Signal Ground 35
GND Signal Ground 36
RESERVED Reserved 37
TERMPWR Term Power 38
RESERVED Reserved 39
GND Signal Ground 40
-ATN Attention 41
GND Signal Ground 42
-BSY Busy 43
-ACK Acknowledge 44
-RST Reset 45
-MSG Message 46
-SEL Select Out 47
-C/D Control/Data 48
-REQ Request 49
-I/O Input/Output 50

4-4
 SPECIFICATIONS

Table 4-3 lists the SCSI Terminator specifications.

Table 4-3. SCSI Terminator specifications

Component Specification
A Cable Single-Ended Active high density 50- SCSI-2, low profile, high density narrow
pin Scanner Terminator terminator with internal shield and all plastic
cover.

4-5
GLOSSARY

G-1
GLOSSARY

ACRONYMS
This section contains a list of the acronyms you may use while working with
the scanner and the scanner documentation.

ARDF Auto Reverse Document Feeder

bpi bits per inch

bps bits per second

cpi characters per inch

dpi dots per inch

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

EBDCIC Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code

EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory

IBM International Business Machines

I/O Input/Output

LED Light Emitting Diode

lpi lines per inch

MB Megabyte

PC Personal Computer

ppm pages per minute

G-2
 GLOSSARY

RAM Random Access Memory

RIP Raster Image Processor

ROM Read Only Memory

SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface

SIMM Single Inline Memory Module

spi spots per inch

TERMS
This section contains a list of the terms you may use while working with the
scanner and the scanner documentation.

application Software program, or programs used to process

information.

asynchronous Data communication transmissions that are controlled by

start and stop characters, causing the time intervals
between the transmission of data blocks to be unequal in
length.

baud rate Establishes the transmission speed of data for a serial

connection between the machine and a host computer.

bit Abbreviation for a binary digit. This is the smallest unit of

information recognized by a computer.

bps Bits per second. The rate at which data is transferred

during serial communication.

buffer Area of memory used for storage during the transfer of

data between two devices.

G-3
GLOSSARY

byte Number of bits (usually fixed at 8) that are processed as a

single binary value.

configuration Settings required to allow your computer to communicate

properly with the machine. Also describes the process of
specifying the required settings.

cpi Characters per inch. Expression of the fixed-pitch font size

that allows the font to be set in increments of one
horizontal inch. See also pitch.

default Value retained in memory for use when input is not

specified by the user for a required variable.

dot Scanned element (in pixels). The number of dots scanned

per inch is used to measure the total resolution (300 dots
per inch).

dpi Dots per inch. The number of dots that scan in an inch.
These are used to form a character or graphic on the
scanned page.

drivers Software used to provide scanner characteristics.

duplex Scanning both sides of a single sheet of paper.

image area Area of the scanned page that can contain graphics or
text.

initialize Setting all computer system information to the starting or

default values.

landscape Orientation in which graphics and text are scanned parallel

to the long edge of the page.

long-edge Moving the paper through the scanner in the direction of

feed the paper length.

MB Megabyte. Unit made up of one million bytes.

G-4
 GLOSSARY

orientation Specifies whether the lines on the scanned output are

parallel to the long edge of the paper (landscape) or the
short edge of the paper (portrait).

origin Upper left corner of a page.

physical page Actual page size.

pica 1. Unit of measurement equal to twelve points or

approximately 1/6 of an inch. 2. 10-pitch typeface with ten
characters per inch each 12 points in height. See also
point.

pitch Width of a fixed-pitch font specified in characters per

horizontal inch.

pixel Acronym for a single element of a picture. This is the

smallest addressable point on a bitmapped screen to
which color and intensity can be assigned independently.

point Unit of measure that is equal to 0.0139 of an inch. Used

to express type, size, and leading spaces. There are 12
points to a pica and approximately 72 points to an inch.
See also pica.

RAM Random Access Memory. Portion of memory where data,

macros, and downloaded fonts are stored.

raster Graphic created using a pattern of dots.

graphics

Raster image Processor board (RIP) that builds a raster image that is
processor passed to the scanner.

rasterization Transformation of an image onto a page using bitmap

dots.

G-5
GLOSSARY

resolution Number of dots per inch (dpi) or spots per inch (spi). The
greater the number of dots or spots per inch, the higher
the resolution and the clearer the image. The terms dots,
spots, and pixels are synonymous.

scale Adjusting font or image size according to specified

proportions.

Scanner Software that allows a host computer to communicate with

driver a scanner.

short-edge Moving the paper through the scanner in the direction of

feed the paper width (the short side of the paper).

simplex Scanning one side of a single sheet of paper.

spot Single element of a picture imaged by the scanner (also

called a dot or a pixel).

throughput Measure of the number of pages scanned during a specific

unit of time, usually expressed as pages per minute.

truncated Cut off before completion, as when data transfer from a

scanner to a host is canceled before all data is
transmitted.

typeface Features that give the font type a uniform appearance.

weight Perceived blackness of a character affected by varying

the width of the stroke. Weight is expressed in general
terms as either bold or roman.

G-6
Printed in USA
A6518607
A195
Printer Reference

Operating Instructions
 SAFETY INFORMATION

SAFETY INFORMATION
This section contains important safety information regarding the machine.
Please review all of the information contained in this section before using
the machine. Doing so will help ensure user safety and prevent equipment
problems or failure. When you use the machine, the following safety precau-
tions should always be followed.

Warning:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frquency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interfer-
ence at his own expense.

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled "Digital Apparatus", ICES-003 of the Depart-
ment of Communications.

Cet appareil numerique respecte les limites de bruits radioelectriques appli-

cables aux appareils numeriques de Class A prescrites dans la norme sur le
materiel brouilleur:

"Appareils Numeriques", NMB-003 edictee par le ministre des Communica-

tions.

i
SAFETY INFORMATION

Declaration of Conformity
"The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive
89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC."

Konformitäserklärung
"Das Produkt entspricht den Anforderungen der EMV-Richtlinie
89/336/EWG und der Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23/EWG."

Déclaration de conformité
"Le produit remplit toutes les conditions requises par la directive EMC
89/336/CEE ainsi que la directive faible voltage 73/23/CEE."

Dichiarazione di conformità
"Il prodotto è conforme ai requisiti della direttiva CEE 89/336 EMC e
della direttiva CEE sulla bassa tensione 73/23."

Declaración de conformidad
"Este producto cumple con los requisitos de la Directiva sobre
Compatibilidad Electromagnetica 89/336/EEC y con la Directiva
sobre Baja Tension 73/23/EEC."

Försäkran om överensstämmelse
"Denna produkt uppfyller kraven enligt EMC-direktiv 89/336/EEC och
lågspänningsdirektiv 73/23/EEC."

Verklaring van conformiteit

"Dit product voldoet aan de vereisten van de EMC-richtlijn 89/336/EEC
en de laagspanningsrichtlijn 73/23/EEC."

Erklaring om overensstemmelse
"Produktet imøtekommer kravene í EMC-direktivet 89/336/EEC og i
lavspenningsdirektivet 73/23/EEC."

Erklæring om overensstemmelse
"Dette produkt overholder kravene í EMC direktiver 89/336/EEC og
lavstrømsdirektivet 73/23/EEC."

ii
 SAFETY INFORMATION

Declaração de conformidade
"O produto está em conformidade com os requistos de Directiva EMC
89/336/EEC e a Directiva sobre baixa-voltagem 73/23/EEC."

Samræmisyfirlÿsing
"Tæki petta er framleitt í samræmi vid kröfur í Tilskipun nr.
89/336/EBE um rafsegulsvidssamhæfi og Tilskipun nr. 72/23/EBE um
rafföng sem nutud eru innan ákvedinna spennumarka.."

Yhdenmukaisuusilmoitus
"Tuote on EMC direktiivin 89/336/EEC ja heikkovirtadirektiivin
72/23/EEC mukainen."

EMC: CISPR-22:1985/EN 55022:1988 class B*

*Note:
This product contains Network Interface Card (NIC) options. When using the
NIC option, the product meets the requirements of EN55022 class A.

Operator Safety:
This copier is considered a CDRH class I laser device, safe for office/EDP
use. The Copier contains a 15-milliwat, 760-800 nanometer wavelength,
GaAIAs laser diode. Direct (or indirect reflected) eye contact with the laser
beam may cause serious eye damage. Safety precautions and interlock
mechanisms have been designed to prevent any possible laser beam
exposure to the operator.

Laser Safety:
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair
of laser-based optical unit in the field. The optical housing unit can only be
repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser
subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The
laser chassis is not repairable in the filed. Customer engineers are there-
fore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the facotry or
service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.

iii
SAFETY INFORMATION

Warning:
Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Notice:
Product names used herein are for idetification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. The manufucture disclaims any
and all rights in those marks.

When using your machine, the following safety precautions should always
be followed.

Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:

$WARNING: Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or

even death.

$CAUTION: Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to

property.

Examples Of Indications
$ Symbols $ means a situation that requires you take care.
G Symbols G means "Hot surface"

B Do NOT carry out the operation represented by the symbol B

This example means "Do not take apart."

C Symbols C
means you MUST perform this operation. This example
means "You must remove the wall plug."

iv
 SAFETY INFORMATION

$ WARNINGS:
• Only connect the machine to the power source described on the
> inside front cover of this manual.
• Avoid multi-wiring
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power
cord. Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or
fire.
• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet. Other-
wise, an electric shock might occur.

@
• Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessi-
ble so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily.

B
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in
this manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and
could give you an electric shock. Also, if the machine has laser
systems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye contact with the laser
beam may cause serious eye damage. When the machine needs
to be checked, adjusted, or repaired, contact your service repre-
sentative.
• Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine.
There is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss of sight. If
the machine has laser systems, there is a risk of serious eye
damage.
• If the machine looks damaged or breaks down, smoke is coming

C out, there is a strange smell or anything looks unusual, immedi-

ately turn off the main and AC switches then unplug the power
cord from the wall. Do not continue using the machine in this
condition. Contact your service representative.
• If metal, liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine, turn off the
main and AC switches, and unplug the main power cord. Contact
your service representive. Do not keep using the machine with a
fault or defect.

>
• Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water
(e.g.vases, flowerpots, glasses) on the machine. If the contents
fall inside the machine, a fire or electric shock could occur.

D
• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might
ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the used toner
containers according to local regulations for plastics.

D
• Do not incinerate the photoconductor unit. Toner dust might ignite
when exposed to open flame. Dispose of the used photoconduc-
tor unit according to local regulations for plastics.

v
SAFETY INFORMATION

$ CAUTIONS:

>
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an elec-
tric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it
topples over, it could cause injury.

@
• After you move the machine, fix it with the caster fixture.
Othewise, the machine might move or come down to cause a
personal injury.

C
• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet to avoid fire or electric shock.
• When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the
power cord.
• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid
E damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock.

• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a

@ continuous air turnover.

• Do not reuse stapled paper. Do not use aluminum foil, carbon-

> containing paper or other conductive paper. Otherwise, a fire
might occur.
• When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section be-
? cause it could be very hot.

$
• This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier’s parts
and consumables. We recommend you only use these specified
supplies.

$ • Do not eat or swallow toner.

• Keep toner or toner containers out of reach of children.

vi
 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and mainte-
nance for the printing capabilities of this machine. To obtain maximum
versatility from this machine, all users should carefully read and follow the
instructions contained in this manual.

Make sure to read the "Safety Information" section of this manual before
using the machine as a printer. It contains important information related to
user safety and to preventing equipment problems.

Overview
This multifunctional machine, in addition to providing you with outstanding
copying capabilities, allows you to print data received from a host computer.
The printer capability supports the Printer Control Language Version 5e
(PCL 5e) printer language and, optionally, PostScript printing.

The data can be received on a standard parallel or serial port from the host
computer or using the optional network configuration. The IDE hard disk
drive provided with the machine performs numerous functions, including
support for font storage, print input data spooling, and the temporary
storage of print data as required for page sorting, and duplex printing. The
machine prints at 300, 400 or 600 dots per inch (dpi). The engine supports
a maximum speed of 40 pages per minute (ppm) when printing at 300 or
400 dpi, long edge feed of letter size paper.

The machine contains 46 PCL 5e fonts, (35 Intellifonts, 10 True Type fonts,
and 1 bitmapped font) and 39 optional PostScript fonts. ☛ Refer to Appen-
dix A for further information on the PCL 5e fonts and to Appendix B for
further information on the PostScript fonts. ☛ Refer to Appendix B for
further information on the memory provided with, and available for, the
machine.

An optional network slot is provided for network connectivity. This slot

supports an Ethernet or Token Ring card.

xiii
INTRODUCTION

The machine provides numerous printer features, including the following:

❐ 11 by 17 inch maximum image size.
❐ High quality laser print output at 300, or 600 dpi. (400 dpi is available
with PostScript.)
❐ Support for PCL 5e and PostScript Level II printer languages.
❐ Ports for parallel, serial, and optional network communications with Win-
dows 3.1, Windows 95 and Macintosh systems.
❐ 46 PCL 5e fonts that include 35 Intellifonts, 10 True Type fonts and 1
bitmapped font, as well as 39 optional PostScript fonts.
❐ Speeds of up to 40 pages per minute (ppm) at 300 or 400 dpi, long
edge feed of letter size paper.
❐ Standard input trays that include a 500 sheet upper input tray, a 1,000
sheet large capacity input tray and a 40 sheet manual feed tray.
❐ Optional output trays that include a 500 sheet output bin, a 3-bin sorter,
and a finishing bin which provides finishing capabilities such as stapling.
❐ Optional input trays that include a 1,000 sheet tray, and a 1,500 sheet
tray.
❐ Numerous page output features, including duplexing, sorting, and job
separation.

The machine operates in one of the following modes:

❐ Share mode
❐ Printer Priority mode
❐ Printer Only mode
❐ Scanner Only mode.

xiv
 INTRODUCTION

Share Mode
The factory default is Share mode, and the Copier screen displays when the
machine is powered up. The Share mode screen shifts when the following
occurs:
❐ A user sends a print job through any of the external Input/Output (I/O)
ports (parallel, serial, or the optional network interface).
❐ A user presses the [Printer/Scanner] button on the Control Panel.
You can use the machine as a copier when the Copier screen displays.
When the Share mode screen displays, you can change to the Copier
screen by pressing the [Copy] button on the Control Panel. When jobs are
printing, and you press the [Copy] button, the Copier screen displays after
the current print job is completed. Any remaining print jobs are interrupted
and will continue printing after you complete your copy job.

When the machine is in Share mode, all print jobs are received as they are
sent, regardless of whether the machine is printing or copying.

You can access the various modes (for example, Printer Priority mode,
Printer Only mode, or Scanner Only mode) from the Share mode screen.
To perform this task, you must set the status of the machine to offline,
access the Setup menu, access the Configuration menu, and specify the
mode setting you want using the "Mode" selection.

When you are in Share mode, each time you request a mode change, the
change is made on the job boundary (this means that the current job
completes before the machine changes to the requested mode). When you
are in Printer Priority mode, the machine operates in the same manner as in
Share mode, except that the machine does not interrupt the currently
queued print jobs to access the Copier screen.

Printer Priority Mode

When set to Printer Priority mode, the machine functions the same as when
set to Share mode, except that you cannot interrupt a copier job (the
[Interrupt] button is disabled).

xv
INTRODUCTION

Printer Only Mode

When the machine is set to Printer Only mode, only printing is allowed.
When the [Interrupt] button is pressed, the copier interrupt request is
ignored. When the [Copy] or [Scanner] button is pressed, the machine
beeps to notify the user that these functions are not available.

Scanner Only Mode

When the machine is set to Scanner Only mode, only scanning is allowed.
When the [Interrupt] button is pressed, the copier interrupt request is
ignored. When a [Copy] button is pressed, the machine beeps to notify the
user that the copy function is not available. The machine is in an offline
status for print jobs.

Options
The following are available to you as options that you can add to the basic
components provided with the machine:
❐ PostScript option - The PostScript option allows the machine to sup-
port Adobe PostScript Level II. When you add the PostScript option to
the machine, downloading of PostScript Type 1 fonts is supported. The
PostScript option includes a rasterizer for TrueType fonts that allows
you to download TrueType fonts as soft fonts. No resident TrueType
fonts are supported. You use the PostScript ROM expansion slot for
this PostScript ROM Single Inline Memory Module (SIMM) option.
❐ Network Interface Card (NIC) option - The machine is equipped with
an expansion Input/Output (I/O) slot that you can use to connect the
machine to your network. Either an Ethernet or a Token Ring card can
be installed in this expansion I/O slot.
❐ Memory option - The machine is configured with 8 megabytes (M) of
Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM). A service technician can
add DRAM SIMM modules in the two available DRAM SIMM sockets.
The DRAM SIMM sockets accept modules of 8 M, 16 M, or 32 M. You
can add up to 64 M of additional DRAM for a maximum total of 72 M of
DRAM.

xvi
 INTRODUCTION

❐ Input tray options - The optional input trays include a 1,000 sheet tray
and a 1,500 sheet tray.
❐ Output options - The output options include a finisher bin, which pro-
vides finishing capabilities such as stapling, a 500-sheet tray, and a
3-bin sorter.
❐ Scanner option - The scanner interface option consists of a SCSI con-
nector that permits scanner data output (the interface is a SCSI II and
is ISIS and Twain compliant). When you have the scanner option
board installed, and have initiated the SCSI transfer program on the
host computer, SCSI scanning is available and can be initiated from the
Control Panel.

Using this Manual

This manual explains how to configure and use the machine as a printer.
This section contains a list of the contents of this manual, the conventions
used throughout the manual, and various publications that may be of further
use to you when using the machine as a printer.

Contents
This guide contains the following chapters and appendices:
❐ Chapter 1:Setting up the Printer - provides information on preparing
to use the machine as a printer.
❐ Chapter 2:Control Panel - describes how you use the main buttons,
numeric keypad, and Control Panel menus to configure and use the
printer functions.
❐ Chapter 3:Using the Printer Drivers - contains information on install-
ing, configuring and using the printer drivers.
❐ Chapter 4:Troubleshooting - contains a list of the error messages that
may display and the action you take to eliminate the error. Also con-
tains information on how to handle print quality problems and paper
jams.

xvii
INTRODUCTION

❐ Chapter 5:Specifications - contains hardware specifications for the

printer, interface specifications, and information on the media (paper)
you can use to perform various print jobs.
❐ AppendixA: Fonts - contains information on the PCL 5e fonts you can
use when printing.
❐ Appendix B: Memory and Options - contains information on the mem-
ory, provided with, and available for the machine and describes the
options available for the machine, including the PostScript and Network
Interface Card (NIC) options.
❐ Appendix C: Tray Specifications - contains tables that illustrates the
North American and European input tray and duplex tray specifications
for the machine.
A glossary and an index are provided at the end of this manual.

Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:

Square brackets - the names of the hard and soft keys and the buttons
available on the machine and on the Control Panel are shown in square
brackets. For example, the [Interrupt] button.

Italics - names of documents are shown in italics. For example, Printer

Reference Guide.

☛indicates that the following text refers to additional sections and chapters
that contain further information about the topic.

Keys that can be selected on the current menu display on

the Control Panel in this manner.

Keys that have been selected on the current menu display

on the Control Panel in this manner.
Keys that cannot be selected on the current menu display on
the Control Panel in this manner.

xviii
 INTRODUCTION

Note: In general, "Notes" provide additional information to help you com-

plete a task or further understand the text.
$ CAUTION: In general, "Cautions" provide information important in pre-
venting damage to your equipment, or to avoiding a situ-
ation that may cause injury to you.
$ WARNING: In general, "Warnings" provide information important in
alerting you to a situation that may cause injury to you and
damage to your equipment and property if instructions are
not followed correctly.

? This symbol displays to notify you that the component may be very hot
and should not be touched.

 In accordance with the ISO Standard 7001, this main switch symbol
means "Stand By" or "Please Wait."

 In accordance with the ISO Standard 7001, this main switch symbol
means "Power On."

 In accordance with the ISO Standard 7001, this main switch symbol
means "Power Off."

 This display symbol means "Ready."

Related Documents
General Reference Guide

Copier Reference Guide

Scanner Reference Guide

Network Interface documentation

PostScript Language Reference Manual, Adobe Systems Inc.

xix
INTRODUCTION

PostScript Language Reference Manual Supplement for Version 2015,

Adobe Systems, Inc.

PCL 5 Comparison Guide, Hewlett Packard Company

PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual, Manual Part No.,

33459-90903, Hewlett Packard Company

Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual, Hewlett Packard Com-

pany

Plug and Play Parallel Port Devices, Microsoft Corporation

General Information
The following information is provided for your general knowledge:
❐ For good copy quality, it is recommended that you use only the speci-
fied printer engine toner and developer.
❐ Some of the illustrations contained in this manual may differ slightly
from your machine.
❐ Some of the options described in this manual may not be available in
your country. Contact your local dealer for details on option availability.

❐ ☛Refer to the Copier Reference Guide for basic information on the

machine and for information on using the machine as a copier.

xx
1. SETTING UP THE PRINTER

1-1
SETTING UP THE PRINTER

REQUIREMENTS
Before you can use the machine as a printer you must make sure that you
have met all of the environmental and electrical requirements. You must
also connect the machine to your host computer using the parallel, serial, or
optional Ethernet or Token Ring connection. Make sure that you have all of
the cables, connectors, and electrical outlets necessary to attach the ma-
chine to your host computer or network. ☛Refer to the "Connecting the
Printer to the Host" section in this chapter for further information.

Environmental Requirements
The location of the machine is important as environmental conditions can
greatly affect the printer performance. Keep the following in mind when
setting up the machine:
❐ Set up the machine in an easily accessible area with temperatures be-
tween 50 and 86 degrees Fahrenheit (10 to 30 degrees Centigrade)
with a relative humidity of 15 to 90 percent, not higher than 6600 feet
(2000 meters) above sea level.
❐ Place the printer in a large well ventilated room with an air turnover of
more than 30 cubic meters, per hour, per person.
❐ Make sure that the machine is level in an area with little or no vibration
and with a minimum clearance of 720 mm above, 20 mm on each side,
130 mm to the rear, and a comfortable working area in the front.
❐ Place the machine in an area with the least amount of dust, and keep
the machine out of direct sunlight.
❐ Attempt to keep users from placing any items on top of the printer.
$ CAUTION: Do not place the machine directly below an air condition-
ing or heating vent, sudden temperature changes can
cause condensation within the machine.

1-2
 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

Electrical Requirements
Keep the following in mind when connecting your printer to an electrical
outlet:
❐ The machine requires a dedicated power source of 120 V, 60 Hz, more
than 12A (15 or 20 AMP circuit). In Europe, power requirements are
220~240V, 50Hz to 60Hz, more than 6.5A (15 or 20 AMP circuit).
❐ Make sure that your wall outlet is close to the machine and is easily
accessible. In addition, make sure the outlet supports a three-prong
plug (grounded). If a three-prong outlet is not available, purchase an
adapter or replace the outlet with one that supports a three-prong plug.
When you plug the machine into the outlet, make sure the plug is in-
serted firmly.
❐ Make sure that the voltage does not fluctuate more than 10 percent at
any time.
❐ Do not place anything on top of the power cord.
❐ Always turn the machine off when you are finished for the day, but
leave the power cord plugged in.

Parallel and Serial Cable Requirements

You can connect the machine to your host computer using either a parallel
or a serial port. It is your responsibility to provide the cables necessary for
the interface you want to use. However, four ferrite cores, designed to
screen electromagnetic interference, are provided with the machine. You
must attach a ferrite core around each end of the Centronics or RS-232-C
cable.

1-3
SETTING UP THE PRINTER

The parallel connection provided with the

machine is a standard bi-directional Cen-
tronics-compatible interface and requires a
standard 36-pin parallel cable and a parallel
port available on the host computer. Do not
use a parallel cable that is longer than ten
feet (three meters).

The serial connection is a standard RS-

232-C interface and requires a standard 25-
pin serial cable and a serial port available
on the host computer. You can use a serial
cable length of 10 feet to 50 feet (3 to 15
meters).

When you have decided on the type of con-

nection you want to use, purchase the correct cables, in the length neces-
sary, to attach the machine to your host computer.
$ CAUTION: When you have the machine connected to a host com-
puter, you should always turn on the host computer before
you turn on the machine.
☛Refer to the "Specifications" chapter in this manual for the cable specifica-
tions.

Network Connections
With its high-speed output, multiple ports, support for various printer lan-
guages, and other available options, the machine is highly effective as a
network printer.

When you have decided to add the Network Interface option to the machine
and you have the required Ethernet or Token Ring card installed in the
expansion Input/Output (I/O) slot provided for this option, you can connect
the machine to your Ethernet or Token Ring network.
$ CAUTION: The Ethernet or Token Ring card is installed in the expan-
sion I/O slot by your service representative.

1-4
 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

To use the machine with a PC network, you can connect to the network in
one of the following ways:
❐ Connect the machine to a computer that is connected to a local area
network (LAN). If the printing software for the network resides on the
computer to which you connect the machine, this computer can act as
a print server, spooling and managing print jobs for the users on the
network.
❐ Directly connect the machine to an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN by
providing the appropriate physical connection. When you connect to the
network in this manner, you do not have to dedicate a specific com-
puter as the print server.
Regardless of how you connect the machine to the network, refer to the
Network interface documentation provided with this option for further infor-
mation.

Note: Make sure to consult with your Network Administrator before deciding
how you want to connect the machine to the network.

☛Refer to Chapter 7, "Specifications," for the cable specifications.

1-5
SETTING UP THE PRINTER

CONNECTING THE PRINTER TO THE HOST

When you have decided whether you want a parallel or a serial connection,
and you have obtained the cables necessary to perform the task, you can
connect the machine to your host computer.

Connecting the Parallel Cable

Follow these steps to connect the machine to your host computer using a
parallel interface:

1
Make sure you have the cables necessary
for the connection.

2
Make sure that both the machine and the
host computer are turned off.

3
Plug the 36-pin end of the parallel cable
into the parallel port on the side of the
machine.

1-6
 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

4
Press the wire clips on each side of the
connector until the clips snap into place.
This is to make sure that the cable remains
in position.

5
Plug the 25-pin end of the parallel cable
into the parallel port on the back of the
host computer.

1-7
SETTING UP THE PRINTER

6
Tighten the screws on each side of the
connector to make sure the cable remains
in position.

7
Turn on the host computer.

8
Turn on the machine.

Stan
d by

When you have completed this procedure, ☛refer to the "Testing" section in
this chapter.

1-8
 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

Connecting the Serial Cable

Follow these steps to connect the machine to your host computer using a
serial interface:

1
Make sure you have the cables necessary for the connection.

2
Make sure that both the machine and the
host computer are turned off.

3
Plug the male end of the 25-pin serial ca-
ble into the serial port on the side of the
machine.

4
Tighten the screws on each side of the
connector to make sure the cable remains
in position.

1-9
SETTING UP THE PRINTER

5
Plug the other end of the 25-pin or 9-pin
serial cable into the serial port on the back
of the host computer.

6
Tighten the screws on each side of the
connector to make sure the cable remains
in position.

7
Turn on the host computer.

1-10
 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

8
Turn on the machine.

Stan
d by

When you have completed this procedure, ☛refer to the "Testing" section in
this chapter.

INSTALLING THE DRIVERS

When you have connected the machine to your host computer, you must
install the appropriate printer drivers to enable your applications to commu-
nicate with the printer.

Your printer is provided with diskettes that contain PCL printer driver and
screen font software for Windows 3.1, Windows 95 or Macintosh systems.
In addition, when you have the PostScript option installed on the machine,
the PostScript printer driver software is provided for your Windows 3.1,
Windows 95 or Macintosh system.

This section contains the procedures you follow to install your printer driver
software and to install your screen fonts, when necessary.

1-11
SETTING UP THE PRINTER

Installing the Windows Font Management and

Printer Screen Fonts
The PCL printer driver and screen fonts are each provided on a 3.5 inch
diskette. The procedure you use to install the PCL 5e printer driver and
screen fonts varies depending on your host computer operating system and
is provided for Windows 3.1 and Windows 95.

Note: To use the printer with a Macintosh computer, you must install the
PostScript driver. ☛Refer to "Installing the Macintosh PostScript
Driver" section of this chapter for more information.

Installing the PCL 5e Printer Driver on Windows 3.1

Follow these steps to install the PCL 5e printer driver on your Windows 3.1
system:

1
Insert the "PCL Printer Driver for Windows 3.1" diskette in the 3.5 inch
disk drive on the host computer.

2
Close any applications that are currently running.

3
From the Program Manager, double-click on the Main icon and then
double-click on the Control Panel icon.

4
From the Control Panel window, double-click on the Printers icon. The
List of Printers window displays.

5
Click the [Add>>] button.

6
In the List of Printers window, scroll to the top of the list and select
Install Unlisted or Updated Printers.

7
Click the [Install] button. The Install Driver window displays.

8
From the Install Driver window, select the drive in which the installation
diskette is located and click [OK]. The Add Unlisted or Updated Printer
window displays listing "your printer name."

9
Click [OK] to complete the installation.

1-12
 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

Installing the Screen Fonts on Windows 3.1

Follow these steps to install the screen fonts on your Windows 3.1 system:

1
Insert the "PCL Screen Font" diskette in the 3.5 inch disk drive on the
host computer.

2
Close any applications that are currently running.

3
From the Program Manager, select Run from the File menu. The Run
window displays.

4
From the Run window type "a:\ (or the letter that represents the drive in
which you placed the installation diskette) install.exe".

5
Click [OK] and follow the installation instructions that display on the
screen.

Installing the PCL 5e Printer Driver on Windows 95

Follow these steps to install the PCL 5e printer driver on your Windows 95
system:

1
Insert the "PCL Printer Driver for Windows 95" diskette into the 3.5 inch
disk drive on the host computer.

2
Close any applications that are currently running.

3
Click the Start button and select Printers from the Settings submenu.
The Printer window displays.

4
From the Printers window, double-click on the Add Printer icon. The
Add Printer Wizard window displays.

5
From the Add Printer Wizard window, click [NEXT>]. The list of printers
displays.

6
Click [Have Disk]. The Install From Disk window displays.

1-13
SETTING UP THE PRINTER

7
In the Install From Disk window, type the letter for the drive that
containing the installation diskette and click [OK]. "Your Printer Name"
displays.

8
Click [Next] and follow the instructions that display on the screen to
complete the installation.

Installing the Screen Fonts on Windows 95

Follow these steps to install the screen fonts on your Windows 95 system:

1
Insert the "PCL Screen Font" diskette into the 3.5 inch disk drive on
your host computer.

2
Close any applications that are currently running.

3
Click the Start button and select Run. The Run window displays.

4
From the Run window type "a:\ (or the letter that represents the drive in
which you placed the installation diskette) install.exe.".

5
Click [OK] and follow the installation instructions that display on the
screen.

Installing the Windows PostScript Printer Driver

You must install the PostScript printer driver to utilize the functionality
provided by the PostScript printing option. You only need this printer driver
when you have the PostScript option installed on the machine. The proce-
dure you use to install the PostScript printer driver varies depending on your
host computer operating system and is provided for Windows 3.1 and
Windows 95.

Note: To use the printer with a Macintosh computer, you must install the
PostScript driver. ☛Refer to "Installing the Macintosh PostScript
Driver" section of this chapter for more information.

1-14
 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

Installing the PostScript Printer Driver on Windows 3.1

Follow these steps to install the PostScript printer driver on your Windows
3.1 system:

1
Insert the "PostScript 2 Printer Driver for Windows 3.1" diskette into the
3.5 inch disk drive on your host computer.

2
Close any applications that are currently running.

3
From the Program Manager, select Run from the File menu. The Run
window displays.

4
From the Run window type "a:\ (or the letter that represents the drive in
which you placed the installation diskette) setup.exe".

5
Click [OK] and follow the installation instructions that display on the
screen.

Installing the PostScript Printer Driver on Windows 95

Follow these steps to install the PostScript printer driver on your Windows
95 system:

1
Insert the "PostScript 2 Printer Driver for Windows 95" diskette into the
3.5 inch disk drive on your host computer.

2
Close any applications that are currently running.

3
Click the Start button and select Run. The Run window displays.

4
From the Run window type "a:\ (or the letter that represents the drive in
which you placed the installation diskette) setup.exe".

5
Click [OK] and follow the installation instructions that display on the
screen.

1-15
SETTING UP THE PRINTER

Installing the Macintosh PostScript Printer Driver

The Macintosh PostScript printer driver allows your Macintosh computer to
recognize the machine. You must have the PostScript option installed on
the machine to use the PostScript printer driver.

Note: To use the printer with a Macintosh computer, you must have the
PostScript printing option and the PostScript printer driver installed
on the machine.

Installing the PostScript Printer Driver on Macintosh

Follow these steps to install the PostScript printer driver on your Macintosh
system:

1
Insert the "PostScript 2 Printer Driver for Macintosh" diskette in the disk
drive.

2
Double-click on the diskette icon.

3
Double-click on the "PS Printer Install" icon.

4
Follow the instructions that display on the screen.

1-16
 SETTING UP THE PRINTER

TESTING
When you have attached the machine to the host computer you can test the
connection and the printing functions using the Control Panel. The following
test pages are available using the [Test Menu] selection from the Setup
Menu selection on the Control Panel:

❐ Print PS Fonts - prints a PS Fonts test page.

❐ Print PCL Fonts - prints a PCL Fonts test page.
❐ Print PS Demo - prints a PS Demo test page.
❐ Print PCL Demo - prints a PCL Demo test page.
❐ Print Self Test - prints a Self Test page.
Note: You may have to first configure the machine for the interface you
have selected. You can do so using either the [Parallel Menu] or the
[Serial Menu] selection from the Setup Menu.

☛Refer to Chapter 2 "Using the Control Panel," for further information on

testing the printing capabilities of the machine and on configuring the
machine for printing.

1-17
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

2. USING THE CONTROL PANEL

2-1
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes how you use the main buttons, numeric keypad, and
Control Panel menus to configure and use the printer functions.

Note: In general, you can provide most of the printer configuration specifi-
cations using the software applications (the word processing, spread-
sheet software, and so forth) from which you are printing.

You use the main buttons on the left side of the Control Panel, the numeric
keypad on the right side of the Control Panel, and menu selections that
display on the Control Panel screen to access the printer modes and to
specify how you want the printer to function.

Control Panel (U.S. Version)

Control Panel (European Version)

The display panel indicates the current status of the machine (for example,
Printer Priority Mode).

You can use the Control Panel to specify information such as which printer
port you want to use and the how you want the printed output to look.

2-2
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Using the Buttons and Keys

U.S. Europe The machine has two light emitting
diodes (LEDs) and two main buttons
On line
located on the left side of the Control
Panel and a numeric keypad located
Data in on the right side of the Control Panel.
You use these tools to configure the
machine and to print.
Printer/Scanner

Copy

U.S. Europe You use these buttons, Nu-

meric Keypad keys, and the
selections that display on the
Control Panel menu screen to
access the printer modes and
to specify how you want the
printer to function.

The Control Panel displays the mes-

sages that indicate the current status
of the printer, as well as error mes-
sages that indicate any problems that
occur with the machine.

The Control Panel display is shared by all functions of the machine and
displays the current status of the copy, print and scan jobs. After the printer
has started a print job, the Control Panel contains the status for the printer.
The "Status" area is blank when the machine is in Printer mode and the
machine is offline.

The Control Panel also displays menus from which you can make printer
configuration and print job selections.

2-3
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

When you first turn on the machine, the Copy Menu displays on the Control
Panel. To access the Printer Mode menus, you must press the
[Printer/Scanner] button located on the left side of the display panel.
When you enter printer mode, you can use the various printer Configuration
and Job Control menus to specify how you want the printer to function.

You will want to set your printer configuration default values when you first
set up your printer. However, you should not have to change the printer
configuration on a regular basis. ☛Refer to the "Configuration Menu" sec-
tion in this chapter for information on how to use the Configuration Menu to
configure the machine for printing.

There are numerous selections you can make for each print job. For
example, you can select a different paper tray, set the printer to Printer
Control Language (PCL), specify the image orientation (SEF or LEF),
change the default font, specify the number of lines per page, and so forth.

Note: Most applications allow you to make choices so that your document
is correctly formatted for printing. You can also use the printer driver
software to perform this task. Therefore, in general, you do not have
to use the Control Panel to make these types of selections.

When you send a document to the printer, the printed format and output of
the document depends on the selections you have made using the menus
available from the Control Panel, as well as the print commands that you
send to the printer.

Frequently, the print commands associated with a document that you send
to the printer are managed by the software application and the printer driver.
When you send a formatted document to the printer, the appropriate print
commands are sent to the printer so that your text and graphics are printed
using the formatting choices you have made.

Most of the time, you can use your software to format your document and
specify how it should print. These print commands override any Control
Panel settings.

2-4
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

The two LED indicators and the two buttons located on the left side of the
Control Panel work as follows:
❐ This LED indicates the online status of the machine.
When the status of the machine is online, the title bar
on the screen displays the current operation mode.
The operation modes are Share Mode, Printer Only
Mode, or Printer Priority Mode.
Note: When using the machine as a scanner, this
LED is always lit.
❐ This LED indicator blinks when data is received from
the host, and is on while the machine is operating or
data is processed. Otherwise, this LED is off.
Note: During duplex and reverse order printing the
LED is always off.
❐ When you press this button, the machine is ready to
print and the Control Panel displays the Printer screen
for the current operation mode (for example, Printer
Priority mode). You can access the Scanner mode
from the screen that displays.

❐ When you press this button, the machine is set to

Copier mode when the current print job is complete,
and the Copy Mode screen displays. An alert mes-
sage displays until the current job is complete.

When the machine is set to Printer Only or Scanner

Only mode, this button is ignored and a beep sounds
to indicate that the operation cannot be performed.
You must use the "Mode" selection from the Configu-
ration Menu to set the machine to Share mode or
Printer Priority mode before you can use this button to
access Copier mode.

In addition, you cannot use this button to change to

Copier mode when the status is offline. When you do
so, a beep sounds to indicate that the operation can-
not be performed. You must change the machine
status to online before you can perform this task.

2-5
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

When you are using the machine as a printer,

you can use the numeric keypad, the [Interrupt]
button located on the upper right side of the
Control Panel, and the [Clear] button located on
the lower right side of the Control Panel as fol-
lows:

❐ Use these number keys as an alternate for entering

values into the fields on the menu screens that dis-
play. Using these keys is the same as using the keys
that display on the menu screens.
❐ Use this as the decimal when entering values into the
fields on the menu screens that display. Using this
decimal point is the same as using the decimal point
that displays on the menu screen.
❐ Use this key to accept the data you have entered on
the menu screens that display. Using this key is the
same as using the [Exit] key that displays on the
menu screens.
❐ When you set the machine to the Share Mode, you
press this button to issue an interrupt command to the
controller. When this occurs, the current print job is
suspended after the current page prints and the ma-
chine switches to Interrupt Copy Mode. The alert
message displays until printing of the current page is
complete.

When you press this button while the machine is in Inter-

rupt Copy mode, or if no copy operation occurs after this
button is pressed, an Interrupt Restart Command is
automatically issued and the machine returns to online
status. You cannot use this button when the status of
the machine is offline. When you attempt to do so, a
beep sounds to indicate that the operation cannot be
performed. You must change the status of the machine
to online before you can perform this task.

2-6
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

❐ [C/! (Clear)] - When you press this button it clears all

values entered in Copier mode and resets the copy
data to its default values.

When you are using the machine as a printer, several keys display on the
menu screens. These keys provide the same functionality when they are
available on a menu. You use these keys as follows:
❐ [Prev. Menu] - press this key to access the previous
menu screen.
❐ [Prev.] - press this key to access the previous page of
the current menu. When this key does not display, or
is ghosted, no previous page is available. When there
is more than one page to the menu, the page number
displays in the top right corner (for example, 1/2 to
denote that you are currently on page one of two
pages).
❐ [Next] - press this key to access the next page of the
current menu. When this key does not display, or is
ghosted, no next page is available. When there is
more than one page to the menu, the page number
displays in the top right corner (for example, 2/2 to
denote that you are currently on page two of two
pages).
❐ [Cancel] - press this key to cancel any changes you
have made to the menu fields and return to the pre-
vious menu screen.
❐ [Exit] - press this key to save the changes you have
made to the menu fields and return to the previous
menu screen. This is the same as pressing the [Enter]
key available on the Numeric Keypad located on the
right side of the menu display.

2-7
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

❐ [Clear] - press this key to delete the value contained

in the field on the menu. This key only displays on
menus that require the use of numbers (using the nu-
meric keypad on the screen or using the Numeric Key-
pad located to the right of the menu screen) to enter
1 the field value.
❐ [numbers] - use the numeric keypad that displays on
the screen to specify the value for the field on the
. menu. This is the same as using the Numeric Keypad
keys located on the right side of the menu screen.
❐ [decimal point] - use this decimal point key to enter
the decimal point in the value you are entering on the
menu. When the decimal point does not display, you
cannot use a decimal point in the field value. This is
the same as using the decimal point key available on
the Numeric Keypad located on the right side of the
menu screen.

❐ [Exit] - when you have entered an

incorrect value, or performed an in-
correct action, an error message
screen displays describing the er-
ror that occurred. You must press
the [Exit] button to acknowledge
the error and return to the menu,
where you can respecify the value
for the field.

❐ [Reset] - press this key when you want to cancel the

job. The suspended job is canceled, and the machine
returns to online status.
❐ [Continue] - press this key when you have removed
the error condition or recognized the information that
displays. The machine returns to online status and
continues the job.

2-8
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Performing Execute Operations

When you access a menu that allows
you to execute a process, such as
Reset, Flash, or Format, the Execute
screen displays, requesting that you
confirm that you want to execute the
request.

You must press the [Yes] button from the Confirmation screen to continue
the operation. The Execute progress screen displays until the operation is
complete, at which time the Printer Priority Mode screen displays. If the
execution fails a Failure screen displays. Press the [Exit] button on the
Failure screen to return to the Printer Priority Mode screen. When you
press the [No] button on the Confirmation screen, the operation is canceled
and the previous screen displays.

2-9
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

ACCESSING MODES
When you first turn on the machine, the Copy menu displays on the Control
Panel.

You cannot change from Copy mode to Printer mode in any of the following
instances:
❐ A copy operation is in progress.
❐ The system is in Interrupt Copy mode.
❐ The system is in Program Setting mode within Copy mode.
❐ A printer error has occurred (for example, a paper jam).
❐ The system is set to User Tools mode.

2-10
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Accessing Printer Mode

Follow these steps to access Printer mode from Copy mode:

1
From the Copy menu, press the [Printer/Scanner] button located on
the left side of the display panel. The Printer mode menu displays.

Note: The Scanner button displays only if the scanner option is installed.
Paper Trays 2, 3, and 4 display only when these optional trays are
installed. The Bypass Tray displays only when the Bypass Tray door
is open.

2
Make sure the printer status is set to online.

3
If the Printer status is set to offline, press the [Online/Offline] button.

2-11
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Follow these steps to access Copy mode from Printer mode:

1
From the Printer menu, press the [Copy] button located on the left side
of the display panel.

2
Make sure the copier status is set to Ready.

USING THE PRINTER MODE MENU

You use the buttons available on the Printer mode menu to select, access,
or change any of the following:
❐ Paper Tray options
❐ Online/Offline status
❐ Form Feed request
❐ Setup Menu
❐ SCSI Scanner mode.

2-12
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

The top of the Printer mode menu displays the current mode of operation.
These modes are as follows:
❐ Share Mode - indicates that you
want to share the machine be-
tween copy, print, and scan
modes with no specific priority.

❐ Printer Only Mode - indicates

that you currently want to use the
machine as a printer only.

❐ Scanner Only Mode - indicates

that you currently want to use the
machine as a scanner only.

❐ Printer Priority Mode - this indi-

cates that you want all print jobs
to take priority. In this mode nor-
mal copying, printing, and scan-
ning is enabled, and copy inter-
rupt is disabled.

2-13
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Note: When Printer Only mode is specified, the Printer mode menu screen
displays when you turn on the machine (rather than the Copy mode
menu).

The following information displays on the Printer mode menu:

❐ Status Area - displays the opera-
tion status of the printer.
The operation status can be one
of the following:
◆ Warming up. Please wait. - indi-
cates that the machine is warming
up after having been turned on.
◆ Ready - indicates that the printer
function is ready for use.
◆ Online - indicates that the printer
function is online.
◆ Offline - indicates that the printer
function is offline.
◆ Errors - indicates an error condi-
tion.
❐ Message Area - displays any er-
ror or indication messages neces-
sary to notify you of the printer
status. ☛Refer to the "Error mes-
sages" section of the Trou-
bleshooting chapter in this Guide
for further information on the vari-
ous error and indication mes-
sages.

❐ Paper Tray options - displays in-

formation on the paper contained
in each paper tray. This informa-
tion includes text and icons that
indicate the existence of paper,
paper size, and paper orientation.
When appropriate, recycled paper
or special paper icons display.

2-14
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Machine Status is indicated by an icon displayed in the Status Area of the

Printer mode menu. The error conditions that they indicate are as follows:

 The cover is open

 The machine requires repair.
Tray Status is indicated by an icon displayed in the Paper Tray options area
of the Printer mode menu. The Tray Status icons and the conditions they
indicate are as follows:

 The paper tray is closed and empty.

" The paper tray is closed and paper is present.

No Icon No paper tray present.

Paper Status is indicated by an icon displayed in the Paper Tray options

area of the Printer mode menu. The Paper Status icons and the conditions
they indicate are as follows:

812 x 11 The paper size (U.S.). Varies according to paper used.

A4 The paper size (Europe). Varies according to paper used.

 The paper is Long Edge Feed (LEF).

 The paper is Short Edge Feed (SEF).

# Special paper.

Recycled Paper.

No Icon Normal paper.

The following buttons are available on the Printer mode menu:

2-15
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

❐ [Online/Offline] - allows you to set the printer

status. The printer must be set to online to ac-
cept print and copy jobs. When the printer is set
to online status and you press this button, the
printer is set to offline status and the current job
is suspended.

The Alert message screen displays to notify you

that the job was suspended, and the offline
status displays in the Status area at the top of
the screen. When this occurs during printing, the
printing process is suspended after the current
page is printed.

When the printer status is online, you can send

print jobs to the machine, and you can use the
Print mode menu to change the online/offline
status, or to access Scanner mode. When the
printer status is offline, you can perform a Form
Feed operation (in normal order printing only) and
access the Setup menus you use to configure the
machine for printing.
❐ [Form Feed] - allows you to request a form feed,
which prints the page currently stored in memory
(in normal order printing only). The form feed re-
quest is available only for PCL print jobs. You
cannot use the form feed function for a Post-
Script print job.

2-16
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

❐ [Setup Menu] - allows you to access the menus

you use to configure the printer and to specify the
print selections you want to use for your print
jobs. You can only use this button when the
Printer mode status is offline.
❐ [Scanner] - allows you to access the Scanner
mode. This button displays only when you have
the scanner option available on the machine.

You can only use this button when the Printer

mode status is online. When you press the but-
ton while a print job is in progress, an Alert mes-
sage screen displays until the current job is com-
plete, at which time the Scanner mode screen
displays. When the Printer mode is set to Printer
Only, this button is ghosted on the screen and
does not function. When this occurs, you must
use the "Mode" selection from the Configuration
Menu to set the machine to Share Mode, Printer
Priority Mode, or Scanner Only mode before you
can access Scanner mode.

2-17
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

USING THE SETUP MENU

To access the Setup menu, press the [Setup Menu] button from the Printer
mode menu.

The Setup menu contains the following options:

❐ [PCL Menu] - accesses the PCL Menu, allowing you to specify the
options you want to use for PCL printing.
❐ [PostScript Menu] - accesses the PostScript Menu, allowing you to
specify whether you want to obtain a printout of any PostScript errors
that occur. This selection displays only when you have the PostScript
option available on the machine.
❐ [Feeder Menu] - accesses the Feeder Menu, allowing you to specify
the feeder and finishing options you want to use (in normal order print-
ing only).
❐ [Parallel Menu] - accesses the Parallel Menu, allowing you to specify
the parallel connection options you want to use.

2-18
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

❐ [Serial Menu] - accesses the Serial Menu, allowing you to specify the
serial connection options you want to use.
❐ [Network Menu] - accesses the Network Menu, allowing you to specify
the network timeout setting you want to use. This selection displays
only when you have the PostScript option available on the machine.
❐ [Configuration Menu] - accesses the Configuration Menu, allowing you
to specify the printer configuration options you want to use.
❐ [Test Menu] - accesses the Test Menu, allowing you to request the
tests you want to perform to verify the functionality of the printer.
❐ [Maintenance Menu] - accesses the Maintenance Menu, allowing your
service representative to perform maintenance operations, such as for-
matting the system, and to add or change password codes. This menu
is password protected and is used only by your service representative.
❐ [Reset Menu] - accesses the Reset Menu, allowing you to reset the
configuration values specified for the printer.
Note Some of the menus listed above may not be available on the Setup
menu depending on the options installed on your machine. For exam-
ple, when you do not have the PostScript option available on your
machine, the [PostScript Menu] button does not display.

Accessing and Using Menus

To access a menu from the Setup Menu, press the button that corresponds
to the menu you want to access. There are two types of Setting screens
that display, one contains selections for the option you choose, the other
allows you to use a numeric keypad to specify values for the field.

The current value for each option displays in the box located to the right of
the option on the menu screen. To change the value for an option, press
the [Change] button located beside the option you want to change. The
Setting screen for that option displays.

2-19
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

When the screen contains selections, press the button for the selection you
want to specify and press the [Exit] button to save the change and return to
the previous menu screen.

When the screen contains numbers for use in entering a value, press the
appropriate numbers that display on the Setting screen, or use the Numeric
Keypad located to the right of the screen to enter the new value you want to
use.

After you enter Setup changes, an alert screen is displayed. From this
screen you specify when you want your changes to go into effect. The
selections are as follows:
❐ [Printer Reset] - terminates the current print job and places your new
settings into effect immediately.
❐ [Continue] - places your new settings into effect beginning at the next
print job boundary and sets the machine to Online.

Using the PCL Menu

When you press the [PCL Menu] button from the Setup menu, the PCL
menu displays. You use the PCL menu to set the PCL emulation configura-
tion parameters. Although most software applications override these pa-
rameters, when an application does not, the values that display on this
screen are used.

The options available on this screen are as follows:

❐ Orientation ❐ Point Size

❐ Form Length ❐ Pitch
❐ Font Source ❐ Symbol Set
❐ Font Number

2-20
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Orientation Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Orientation option, the Orienta-
tion Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the page orientation you want to use. The
options are as follows:
❐ Portrait - specifies that you want to print across the width of the page.
❐ Landscape - specifies that you want to print across the length of the
page.
The default setting is Portrait.

Form Length Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Form Length option, the Form
Length Setting screen displays.

You use the numerical keys to change the number of lines per page you
want to use. The valid range is 5 to 128, entered in increments of 1. The
default value is 60. The Form Length value changes automatically when the
Paper Size is changed.

2-21
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Font Source Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Font Source option, the Font
Source Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the location of the default font. The options
are as follows:
❐ Internal - specifies that you want to use the resident font as the default
font.
❐ Soft - specifies that you want to use the font downloaded from the host
machine as the default font. The default is Internal.

Font Number Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Font Number option, the Font
Number Setting screen displays.

You use the numerical keys to change the value for the default font you
want to use. The valid range is 0 to 50, entered in increments of 1. The
default value is zero (0).

Note: You can obtain the value for the font you want to use from the PCL
Font List.

2-22
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Point Size Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Point Size option, the Point
Size Setting screen displays.

You use the numerical keys to change the value for the point size you want
to use for the selected font. The valid range is 4.00 to 999.75, entered in
increments of 0.25.

You can access this Setting screen only when the specified font is a
scaleable, proportional font. The default value is 12.

Pitch Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Pitch option, the Pitch Setting
screen displays.

You use the numerical keys to change the value for the number of charac-
ters per inch you want to use for the selected font. The valid range is 0.44
to 99.99, entered in increments of 0.01. You can access this Setting screen
only when the specified font is a scaleable, fixed pitch font. The default
value is 10.

2-23
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Symbol Set Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Symbol Set option, the Symbol
Set Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the collection of print characters you want to
use for the selected font. The options are as follows:

❐ ROMAN-8 ❐ PC-8 TK ❐ MS PUBL ❐ ISO 15

❐ ISO L1 ❐ WIN L1 ❐ MATH-8 ❐ ISO 17
❐ ISO L2 ❐ WIN L2 ❐ VN MATH ❐ ISO 21
❐ ISO L5 ❐ WIN L5 ❐ PI FONT ❐ ISO 60
❐ PC-8 ❐ DESKTOP ❐ LEGAL ❐ ISO 69
❐ PC-8 D/N ❐ PS TEXT ❐ ISO 4 ❐ WIN 3.0
❐ PC-850 ❐ VN INTL ❐ ISO 6
❐ PC-852 ❐ VN US ❐ ISO 11

The default is ROMAN-8.

PostScript Menu
When you press the [PostScript Menu] button from the Setup menu, the
PostScript menu displays. You use the PostScript menu to specify whether
you want to obtain a printout of any PostScript errors that occur.

The current value for the option displays in the box to the right of the option
on the screen. To change the value for the option, press the [Change]
button located beside the option. The Setting screen for that option displays.
Print Errors is the only option available on this screen.

2-24
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Print Errors Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Print Errors option, the Print
Errors Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify whether you want to print the PostScript
Error Report. The options are as follows:
❐ Off - specifies that you do not want the PostScript Error Report to print.
❐ On - specifies that you do want the PostScript Error Report to print.
The default is Off.

Feeder Menu
When you press the [Feeder Menu] button from the Setup menu, the
Feeder menu displays. You use the Feeder menu to set the paper feed and
finishing configuration parameters. Although most software applications
override these parameters, when an application does not, the values that
display on this screen are used.

The options available on this screen are as follows:

❐ Page Size ❐ Output

❐ Paper Tray ❐ Stapling
❐ Auto Tray Switching ❐ Separation
❐ Bypass Tray Timeout ❐ Binding

Note: When the finisher is not installed, the Stapling option is not available
and does not display on this screen. The Binding option is available
only when duplex is selected.

2-25
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Page Size Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Page Size option, the Page
Size Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the paper size you want to use when paper
size is not specified by your application. The options are as follows:

❐ 812 x 11 ❐ B4
❐ A4 ❐ 11 x 17
❐ 812 x 14 ❐ 812 x 13
❐ 712 x 1012 ❐ 8 x 13
❐ B5 ❐ 812 x 13
❐ A5 ❐ 512 x 812
❐ A3 ❐ A6

The default for North America is 812 x 11. The default for Europe is A4.

Note: • When the specified paper size is not available in the machine when
a print job is processed, the print job is suspended and the Error
Suspend screen displays requesting operator interaction.

• 8 x 10, 11 x 15, 10 x 14, and 8 x 10 1/2 can not be used with the
printer function although they can be used with the copier function.

2-26
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Paper Tray Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Paper Tray option, the Paper
Tray Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the paper feed tray you want to use when
the paper tray is not specified by your application. Only the installed Trays
will display. The options are as follows:

❐ Auto ❐ Tray 2
❐ Bypass Tray ❐ Tray 3
❐ LCT ❐ Tray 4
❐ Tray 1

The default is LCT.

The selection you make for this option goes into effect before the selection
you made for the Page Size option. Therefore, when you want the Page
Size option to take precedence, you must set this Paper tray option to Auto.

2-27
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Auto Tray Switching Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Auto Tray Switching option,
the Auto Tray Switching Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify whether you want the machine to automat-
ically change the paper tray when the current paper tray becomes empty
during a print job. When this feature is enabled and a tray runs out of
paper, the machine searches for another paper tray that contains the same
paper size and orientation, based on the specified tray search order.

When a paper tray runs out of paper during printing, the "No paper. Add xx
Paper to xx Tray. Reset/Continue" message displays on the Control Panel.

When Auto Tray change is enabled, the following process occurs:

❐ When the correct paper size and orientation is available in another pa-
per tray, the paper is fed automatically.
❐ The Reset key is canceled by the current print job.
❐ When a user presses the Continue key without adding paper, the paper
is fed from the paper tray that most closely matches the specified paper
size.
❐ When a user presses the Continue key after adding different paper, the
newly added paper is used.
When Auto Tray change is disabled, the following process occurs:
❐ When the correct paper size and orientation is loaded, the paper is fed.
❐ The Reset key is canceled by the current print job.
❐ When a user presses the Continue key without adding paper, the "No
paper. Add xx Paper to xx Tray. Reset/Continue" message displays
again.
❐ When a user presses the Continue key after adding different paper, the
newly added paper is used.

2-28
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

The options are as follows:

❐ Off - specifies that you do not want the machine to automatically
change paper trays when the current tray becomes empty during the
print job.
❐ On - specifies that you want the machine to automatically change paper
trays when the current tray becomes empty during the print job and
another tray contains paper of the same size and orientation.
The default is On.

Bypass Tray Timeout Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Bypass Tray Timeout option,
the Bypass Tray Timeout Setting screen displays.

You use the numerical keys to change the number of seconds after which a
message displays to request that the user open the Bypass Tray for use
with the print job. The timer stops when the Bypass Tray is closed. The
valid range is 5 to 300, entered in increments of 1. The default is 300
seconds.

When a print job specifies a Bypass Tray paper feed and the Bypass Tray
door is closed, the "Please open the Bypass Tray" message displays.
When the Bypass Tray is open but not paper is loaded, the "No Paper.
Please add xx paper to Bypass Tray." message displays. When paper is
loaded in the Bypass Tray, the paper feeds automatically until the job is
complete. When a Large Capacity Tray (LCT) feed is specified in the
following print job and the Bypass Tray has not been closed, the "Please
close the Bypass Tray" message displays.

When either the "Please open the Bypass Tray" or the "No Paper. Please
add xx paper to Bypass Tray." message displays and the user does not
respond within the timeout period specified on this screen, the Bypass Tray
print job is canceled and the next print job begins printing.

2-29
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Output Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Output option, the Output
Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the output operation you want to use. For
the 500 sheet tray or the finisher, the options are as follows:
❐ Reverse - specifies that the output is face-up and in ascending page
order. When you select this option, the host input data is rasterized
and stored in the order received. The data is then retrieved from the
HDD and printed in reverse order so that the output is delivered face-up
in the correct page sequence from page one to the end. When multiple
originals are requested, the output consists of sets of originals in the
correct page sequence (for example, three sets each in 1,2,3,4,5 page
order).
❐ Normal - specifies that the data is printed immediately in the order
received by the printer. You use the Normal option to obtain high
speed printer performance. When you select this option, the host input
data is rasterized and printed immediately, so that the output is in the
sequence received by the printer. When multiple originals are re-
quested, the output consists of sets of originals of each page (for exam-
ple, three sets each in 1,1,1; 2,2,2; 3,3,3 page order).
❐ Duplex - specifies that the data is printed on both sides of each page,
face-up, and in ascending page order. When you select this option, the
host input data is rasterized. The odd numbered pages are stored in
the HDD and the even numbered pages are printed and stacked in the
duplex tray. When this process is complete, the odd numbered pages
are retrieved from the HDD and printed on the reverse side of the
stacked even numbered pages in reverse order, so that the output is
delivered face-up in the correct page sequence from page 1 to the end.
You can not print more than 50 originals at one time in this mode.
The default is Reverse.

2-30
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

For the 3-bin sorter, the options are as follows:

❐ Reverse - specifies that the output is face-up and in ascending page
order. When you select this option, the host input data is rasterized
and stored in the order received. The data is then retrieved from the
HDD and printed so that the output is delivered face-down in the cor-
rect page sequence from page one to the end. When multiple originals
are requested, the output consists of sets of originals in the correct
page sequence (for example, three sets each in 1,2,3,4,5 page order).
❐ Normal - specifies that the data is printed immediately in the order
received by the printer and delivered face-down. You use the Normal
option to obtain high speed printer performance. When you select this
option, the host input data is rasterized and printed immediately, so that
the output is in the sequence received by the printer and delivered face-
down. When multiple copies are requested, the output consists of a set
of copies of each page (for example, three sets each in 1,1,1; 2,2,2;
3,3,3 page order).
❐ Duplex - specifies that the data is printed on both sides of each page,
face-up, in the order received by the printer. When you select this op-
tion, the host input data is rasterized. The odd numbered pages are
stored in the HDD and the even numbered pages are printed and
stacked in the duplex tray. When this process is complete, the odd
numbered pages are retrieved from the HDD and printed on the reverse
side of the stacked even numbered pages in reverse order, so that the
output is delivered face-up in the order received by the printer. You
can not print more than 50 originals at one time in this mode.
The default is Reverse.

2-31
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Stapling Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Stapling option, the Stapling
Setting screen displays.

Note: This Setting screen is available only when the finisher is installed.

You use this screen to specify whether you want stapling, and if so, where
you want the staple on the printed copy. The options are as follows:
❐ None - specifies that you do not want stapling.
❐ One Portrait - specifies that you want one staple placed at the top left
corner of the portrait page.
❐ One Landscape - specifies that you want one staple placed at the top
left corner of the landscape page.
❐ Two Portrait - specifies that you want two staples on the portrait page.
The staples are placed along the left side of the page when long edge
feed is used. The staples are placed along the top of the page when
short edge feed is used.
❐ Two Landscape - specifies that you want two staples on the landscape
page. The staples are placed along the top of the page when long edge
feed is used. The staples are placed along the left side of the page
when short edge feed is used.
The default is None.

Note: After adding the new staples, several pages will be printed without
stapling.

2-32
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

The following illustrates the one staple and two staple options for simplex
and duplex printing. The X in the two staple illustration indicates output
configurations that are not compatible because the binding edge and feed-
ing egde do not match. Although the machine will perform these stapling
configurations, they should be avoided.

2 Staples
Staples
Portrait Landscape
Simplex Duplex Duplex Simplex Duplex Duplex
Long Edge Edge Edge
Short Edge Long Edge Edge Short Edge
Edge

R R R F F
R
Long Edge
Edge R
R

R
R

Feed
R R R
F R F R
R

R
R
F R R
R R

Short Edge
Edge
R
R

R
R

Feed
F F R R R F R

2-33
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Separation Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Separation option, the Separa-
tion Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify whether you want the machine to automat-
ically separate the print jobs. The separation is implemented either as a
mechanical offset, or with a sheet of paper, and depends on the type of
trays installed on your machine. Table 2-1 lists the separation used accord-
ing to the installed tray types.

Note: When using the Bypass tray, this function is not available.

Table 2-1 Job Separation

Installed Tray Type Offset Sheet

1 Bin Tray 
1 Bin Finisher 
3 Bin Sorter (1st Tray) 
3 Bin Sorter (2nd and 3rd Tray) 
The separation setting options are as follows:
❐ Off - specifies that you do not want the machine to separate the print
jobs.
❐ On - specifies that you want the machine to automatically separate the
print jobs.
The default is Off.

2-34
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Binding Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Binding option, the Binding
Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the setting you want to use to print a book or
tablet print job in duplex mode. The options are as follows:
❐ Long - specifies that you want long edge binding, like a book.
❐ Short - specifies that you want short edge binding, like a calendar or
tablet.
The default is Long.

Note: This option is available only when the Output option is set to Duplex.

Parallel Menu
When you press the [Parallel Menu] button from the Setup menu, the
Parallel menu displays. You use the Parallel menu to set the parallel
interface configuration parameters. Although most software applications
override these parameters, when an application does not, the values that
display on this screen are used.

The options available on this screen are as follows:

❐ Personality
❐ Bidirectionality
❐ I/O Timeout

2-35
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Personality Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Personality option, the Person-
ality Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to set the page description language you want to use
for the print jobs received through the parallel port. The options are as
follows:
❐ Auto - specifies that you want the page description language used for
the print jobs to switch automatically based on the data received by the
parallel port.
❐ PCL - specifies that you want to use the PCL page description lan-
guage for the print jobs received by the parallel port.
❐ PostScript - specifies that you want to use the PostScript page de-
scription language for the print jobs received by the parallel port.
The default is Auto.

Bidirectionality Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Bidirectionality option, the
Bidirectionality Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the bi-directional operation on the parallel
port. The options are as follows:
❐ Off - specifies that you do not want to allow two-way communication
between the controller and the host.
❐ On - specifies that you want to allow two-way communication between
the controller and the host.
The default is Off.

Note: You can set the Bidirectionality option to On only when the software
application located on the host supports a bi-directional parallel port.

2-36
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

I/O Timeout Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the I/O Timeout option, the I/O
Timeout Setting screen displays.

You use the numerical keys to change the value for the number of seconds
after which an incomplete print job should end and the next port in the
polling sequence should be set. The valid range is 5 to 300, entered in
increments of 1. The default is 30 seconds.

Serial Menu
When you press the [Serial Menu] button from the Setup menu, the Serial
menu displays. You use the Serial menu to set the serial interface configu-
ration parameters. Although most software applications override these pa-
rameters, when an application does not, the values that display on this
screen are used.

The options available on this screen are as follows:

❐ Personality ❐ DTR Polarity

❐ Baud Rate ❐ Stop Bits
❐ Parity ❐ Data Bits
❐ Handshake ❐ I/O Timeout

2-37
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Personality Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Personality option, the Person-
ality Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to set the page description language you want to use
for the print jobs received through the serial port. The options are as
follows:
❐ Auto - specifies that you want the page description language used for
the print jobs to switch automatically based on the data received by the
serial port.
❐ PCL - specifies that you want to use the PCL page description lan-
guage for the print jobs received by the serial port.
❐ PostScript - specifies that you want to use the PostScript page de-
scription language for the print jobs received by the serial port.
The default is Auto.

Baud Rate Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Baud Rate option, the Baud
Rate Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to set the baud rate for the serial port in bits per
second (bps). The baud rate is a unit used to measure the data transmis-
sion speed. The options are as follows:

❐ 1200 ❐ 9600
❐ 2400 ❐ 19200
❐ 4800 ❐ 38400

The default is 9600 bps.

Note: You must set the baud rate for the serial port to the same baud rate
set at the host.

2-38
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Parity Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Parity option, the Parity Setting
screen displays.

You use this screen to specify how the parity bit is used during error
checking. The options are as follows:
❐ None
❐ Odd
❐ Even
The default is None.

Note: You must set the parity for the serial port to the same parity setting
as the host.

Handshake Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Handshake option, the Hand-
shake Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the type of handshake that occurs between
the serial port and the host. The options are as follows:
❐ XON/XOFF
❐ DTR/DSR
❐ Robust XON
The default is XON/XOFF.

2-39
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

DTR Polarity Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the DTR Polarity option, the DTR
Polarity Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the polarity of the DTR for the serial port
from the host. The options are as follows:
❐ High
❐ Low
The default is High.

Stop Bits Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Stop Bits option, the Stop Bits
Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the number of stop bits in each character.
The options are as follows:
❐ 1
❐ 2
The default is 1.

Note: You must set the stop bits for the serial port to the same stop bit
setting as the host.

2-40
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Data Bits Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Data Bits option, the Data Bits
Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the number of data bits in each character.
The options are as follows:
❐ 8
❐ 7
The default is 8.

Note: You must set the stop bits for the serial port to the same stop bit
setting as the host.

Network Menu
When you press the [Network Menu] button from the Setup menu, the
Network menu displays. You use the Network menu to specify the network
timeout setting you want to use.

The current value for the option displays in the box to the right of the option
on the screen. To change the value for the option, press the [Change]
button located beside the option. The Setting screen for that option displays.
I/O Timeout is the only option available on this screen.

I/O Timeout Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the I/O Timeout option, the I/O
Timeout Setting screen displays.

You use the numerical keys to change the value for the number of seconds
after which an incomplete print job should end and the next port in the
polling sequence should be set. The valid range is 5 to 300, entered in
increments of 1. The default is 30 seconds.

2-41
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Configuration Menu
When you press the [Configuration Menu] button from the Setup menu,
the Configuration menu displays. You use the Configuration menu to specify
the printer configuration options you want to use. Although most software
applications override these parameters, when an application does not, the
values that display on this screen are used.

The options available on this screen are as follows:

❐ Resolution ❐ Spooling
❐ Copies ❐ Smoothing
❐ Jam Recovery ❐ Mode
❐ Auto Continue ❐ SCSI ID

Resolution Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Resolution option, the Resolu-
tion Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the print resolution in dots per inch (dpi).
The options are as follows:
❐ 300
❐ 400
❐ 600
The default is 400 dpi.

Copies Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Copies option, the Copies
Setting screen displays.

You use the numerical keys to change the value for the number of copies of
each page that will print for each print job. The valid range is 1 to 999,
entered in increments of 1. The default is 1 copy. The value you enter in the
field is limited by the paper output tray specifications.

2-42
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Jam Recovery Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Jam Recovery option, the Jam
Recovery Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify whether you want the jam recovery feature
on or off. When a printing paper jam occurs while the jam recovery feature
is on, all pages affected by the paper jam are reprinted. The options are as
follows:
❐ Off - specifies that you do not want the jam recovery.
❐ On - specifies that you do want jam recovery.
The default is On.

Note: When the Jam Recovery feature is set to On, the data for a page is
until the page exits the printer. Therefore, printer performance may
be lower than when the Jam Recovery feature is set to Off.

Auto Continue Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Auto Continue option, the Auto
Continue Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify whether you want the printer to control the
continuation of printing after a system error occurs. The options are as
follows:
❐ Off - specifies that you do not want printing to continue automatically.
❐ On - specifies that you do want printing to continue automatically.
Note: When a error occurs stating the system cannot be recovered, these
options are not valid and you must reset the machine.

The default is On.

2-43
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Spooling Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Spooling option, the Spooling
Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify whether you want to use the hard disk to
spool the print jobs. The options are as follows:
❐ Off - specifies that you do not want to use the hard disk to spool the
print jobs.
❐ On - specifies that you do want to use the hard disk to spool the print
jobs.
The default is Off.

Note: The spooling function is enabled only when the Parallel Port Bidirec-
tionality setting is Off.

Smoothing Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Smoothing option, the Smooth-
ing Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify whether you want to use the paper edge
smoothing feature. The options are as follows:
❐ Off - specifies that you do not want to use the paper edge smoothing
feature.
❐ On - specifies that you do want to use the paper edge smoothing fea-
ture.
The default is On.

2-44
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Mode Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the Mode option, the Mode Setting
screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the operation mode for the machine. The
options are as follows:
❐ Share - indicates that you want to share the machine between copy,
print, and scan modes with no specific priority.
❐ Printer Only - indicates that you currently want to use the machine as
a printer only.
❐ Scanner Only - indicates that you currently want to use the machine as
a scanner only.
❐ Printer Priority - indicates that you want all print jobs to take priority.
The default is Share.
Note: When Printer Only Mode is specified, the Printer mode menu screen
displays when you turn on the machine (rather than the Copy mode
menu).

SCSI ID Setting Screen

When you press the [Change] button for the SCSI ID option, the SCSI ID
Setting screen displays.

You use this screen to specify the SCSI ID. The options are as follows:

❐ 0 ❐ 4
❐ 1 ❐ 5
❐ 2 ❐ 6
❐ 3 ❐ 7

The default is 3.

2-45
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

Test Menu
When you press the [Test Menu] button from the Setup menu, the Test
menu displays. You use the Test menu to request the test pages you want
to print to verify the functionality of the printer.

To print a test page, press the [Print] button located beside the test you
want to perform. The machine prints the test page you selected.

The tests available on this screen are as follows:

❐ Print PS Fonts - prints a PS Fonts test page.
❐ Print PCL Fonts - prints a PCL Fonts test page.
❐ Print PS Demo - prints a PS Demo test page.
❐ Print PCL Demo - prints a PCL Demo test page.
❐ Print Self Test - prints a Self Test page.

Reset Menu
When you press the [Reset Menu] button from the Setup menu, the Reset
menu displays. You use the Reset menu to reset the configuration values
specified for the printer.

To perform a reset function, press the [Execute] button located beside the
function you want to perform.

The reset functions available on this screen are as follows:

❐ Printer Reset - cancels the print jobs currently being processed and
clears the temporary soft fonts, temporary macros, and stored page
data from memory. This function clears all page images intended for
reverse printing from the disk and ejects any duplex printing pages con-
tained in the duplex bin. This function does not change any of the menu
settings.

2-46
 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

❐ Menu Reset - performs a Printer Reset function and restores some of

the menu settings to their system default values. You use the Reset
Menu function to restore to the default settings those values that have
been changed by users, while retaining those values set based on the
physical printer setup. The parameters that are not restored to the de-
fault values are as follows:
◆ Bypass Tray Size ◆ DTR Polarity
◆ Bidirectionality ◆ Stop Bits
◆ Baud Rate ◆ Data Bits
◆ Parity ◆ SCSI ID
◆ Handshake ◆ Passwords

❐ System Reset - performs a System Reset function and restores all of

the menu settings, except for Page Count, to the system default values.
Note: You should perform a System Reset when you first activate your
machine to make sure that all of the NVRAM system defaults are
initialized and set correctly.

When you press the [Execute] button for any of the reset functions, the
Confirmation screen displays.

Press the [Yes] button on the Confirmation screen to continue with the reset
function. The In Progress screen displays, notifying you that the reset
function is being performed.

When the reset function is complete, the Printer Priority Mode screen
displays and the machine status is set to Online and Ready.

If you performed a reset from the Reset Menu or from a System Reset, the
mode setting is set to Share.

2-47
USING THE CONTROL PANEL

SWITCHING BETWEEN EMULATIONS

The printer automatically switches the print input between the PCL 5e and
PostScript languages. You use the Parallel menu or the Serial menu to
specify the personality settings you want to use for the parallel and serial
ports. You can specify PCL, PostScript, or Automatic Switching.

The network port is always set to Automatic Switching.

2-48
3. USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

3-1
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

OVERVIEW
This chapter provides information on using the PCL 5e and PostScript
printer driver software provided with the machine.

Note: • If you are using Stapling or Job Separation, do not turn on Colla-
tion from your software application - use the machine Control
Panel instead. If you select Collation from an application (e.g. MS
Word), it will only apply to the first batch of a job.

• You must use the printer driver designed for this machine for best
results.

PCL 5E PRINTER DRIVER

The machine is provided with software containing PCL 5e printer language
for Windows 3.1 and Windows 95.

You use the standard Windows 3.1 or Windows 95 PCL printer driver
software to print documents from your applications. You can also use the
PCL driver to change printer settings independently of your applications.

Note: You can use the printer Control Panel to change many of the printer
settings. However, the selections you make using the printer driver
software overrides your Control Panel selections.

Windows 3.1
This sections contains information on the PCL 5e print parameters and
options available for your Windows 3.1 system.

3-2
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Setup Window
In general, you access the Setup window by selecting "Print" or "Print
Setup" from the File menu available from your application. You can also
access the Setup window by accessing the Control Panel and double-click-
ing on "Printers." A list of the currently available printers displays. Select
the printer you want to use and click the [Setup] button to access the Setup
window.

The [Options] button available on this window accesses the Options win-
dow. The [Fonts] button access the Font Installer window, which you use
to install fonts when necessary. The [Configuration] button accesses the
Configuration window, which you use to specify the input and output paper
devices.

The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Setup window.

Field Parameter Description

Paper Size 8.5 x 11 in Allows you to specify the output
8.5 x 14 in paper size you want to use.
11 x 17 in When you are formatting your job,
7.25 x 10.5 in you can select any paper size,
5.5 x 8.5 in regardless of the limitations of the
A3 (297 x 420 mm) currently selected input tray. This
A4 (210 x 297 mm) allows you to format your job for any
A5 (148 x 210 mm) paper size and select the correct
A6 (105 x 148 mm) paper tray when you want to print the
B4 (257 x 364 mm) job.
B5 (182 x 257 mm) The Measurement setting for the host
8 x 13 in PC is verified when the driver is
8.5 x 13 in installed. The default paper size is
8.25 x 13 in A4 when the Measurement setting is
Metric and is 8.5 x 11 when the
Measurement setting is not metric.
The default value for North America
is 8.5 x 11 in.
The default value for Europe is A4.

3-3
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Paper Source Auto Tray Select Allows you to specify the input paper
Large Capacity Tray tray you want to use.
Tray 1 The default value is Auto Tray Select.
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Bypass Tray
Copies 1 to 999 Allows you to specify the number of
copies you want to print. You can
enter this parameter using your
keyboard or using the incremental
spin buttons.
The default value is 1.
Orientation Portrait Allows you to specify the orientation
Landscape of the printed output.
The default value is Portrait.

Options Window
To access the Options window, click the [Options] button available on the
Setup window. The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the
fields contained on the Options window.

Field Parameter Description

Halftone Text Allows you to specify the Halftone resolution you
Photographic want to use.
The default value is Text.
Graphics HP-GL/2 Allows you to specify the graphic print quality.
Mode Raster The default value is HP-GL/2.
Graphics High Allows you to specify the print quality you want to
Quality Medium use.
Low The default value is High.

3-4
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Print On Allows you to specify whether you want to print
TrueType Off TrueType fonts as graphics. This field is only active
as Graphics when you specify Raster as the Graphics Mode and
High as the Graphics Quality.
The default value is Off.
Reverse On Allows you to specify whether you want to use the
Print Order Off Reverse Print Order feature, which delivers the
printed output face-up in the correct order.
When you enable this feature, the host input data is
rasterized and stored in the order received. The
data is then retrieved from the HDD and printed in
reverse order so that the output is delivered face-up
in the correct page sequence from page 1 to the
end.
When you request multiple copies, the output
consists of sets of copies in the correct page
sequence (for example, three sets each in 1,2,3,4,5
page order).
The default value is On.
Job On Allows you to specify whether you want to use Job
Separation Off Separation, indicating that you want the machine to
automatically separate the print jobs.
The separation is implemented either as a
mechanical offset, or with a sheet of paper,
depending on the type of trays installed on the
machine.
When a mechanical offset is used, the finisher
activates a jogger mechanism that moves the shift
tray slightly to the right or to the left for each job.
This makes it easy to determine where the end of a
set or job occurs. Job separation is especially
useful for separating collated jobs.
The default value is Off.

3-5
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Duplex Off Allows you to specify that you want the output
Long Edge printed in duplex format.
Binding Off specifies that you do not want to use duplex
Short Edge printing.
Binding Long Edge Binding specifies that, when printing in
Portrait mode, you want to bind your output along
the left edge of the paper, like a book. In
Landscape mode, this setting produces output that
you can bind along the top edge of the paper, like
a calendar.
Short Edge Binding specifies that, when printing in
Portrait mode, you want to bind your output along
the top edge of the paper, like a calendar. In
Landscape mode, this setting produces output that
you can bind along the left edge of the paper, like a
book.
The default value is Off.
Edge On Allows you to specify that you want to use the
Smoothing Off Edge Smoothing feature, thus enhancing print
quality. When Edge Smoothing is enabled, the
printer reduces ragged edges, providing printed
output with smooth curved and diagonal lines.
The default value is On.
Printer 1st Output Allows you to specify that you want to use the
Output Tray Bin printer output tray and to select the output tray you
2nd Output want to use.
Bin The default value is 2nd Output Bin.
3rd Output Bin
Staple Off Allows you to specify whether you want to use the
1 Staple stapling option, and if so, how many staples you
2 Staples want to use to staple the printed output. This
feature is available only when the optional stapler is
installed
Off species that you do not want stapling.
The default value is Off.
Resolution 600 dpi Allows you to specify the output resolution for the
300 dpi printer.
The default value is 300 dpi.

3-6
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Font Installer Window

To access the Font Installer window, click the [Fonts] button available on
the Setup window. You use the Font Installer window to install fonts when
necessary.

The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Font Installer window. The Font Installer window contains the
[Move] button you use to move the selected font, the [Copy] button you
use to copy the selected font, the [Delete] button you use to delete the
selected font and the [Edit] button you use to make changes to the selected
font. The Font Installer window also contains the [Add Fonts] button you
use to install new fonts and the [Copy Fonts to a New Port] button you
use to copy the selected fonts to the port you specify.

Field Parameter Description

Select a Font List box Allows you to select the Font you want to
containing the use, modify, delete edit, or copy.
fonts currently The font you select displays in the area
installed located on the right of the screen.
Status Permanent Allows you to specify whether the changes to
Temporary the selected font are permanent or
temporary.

3-7
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Configuration Window
To access the Configuration window, click the [Configuration] button avail-
able on the Setup window. You use the Configuration window to specify the
input and output paper devices. The following lists the descriptions and
parameters for the fields contained on the Configuration window.

Field Parameter Description

Input Paper None Allows you to specify that you want to use an
Device 1000-sheet optional input tray when one is installed. You
Tray Unit select the optional tray you want to use from that
1500-sheet list that displays. The list that displays is based on
Tray Unit the optional input trays that are available on the
machine.
The default value is None.
Output Copy Tray Allows you to specify that you want to use an
Paper Device 3-bin Sorter optional output device when one is installed. You
Finisher select the optional device you want to use from
that list that displays. The list that displays is
based on the optional output devices that are
available on the machine.
The default value is Copy Tray.

3-8
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Windows 95
This sections contains information on the PCL 5e print parameters and
options available for your Windows 95 system.

Properties Window
In general, you access the Properties window by selecting Print from the
File menu and clicking the [Properties] button, or by selecting Print Setup
from the File menu when available from your application. You can also
access the Properties window by clicking the [Start] button and selecting
Printers from the Settings submenu. A list of icons representing the printers
available to you displays. Double-click on the icon that represents the
printer you want to use. The Printers window displays with a list of the
currently queued print jobs displays. Select Properties from the Printer
menu available on the Printers window. The Properties window displays.

Depending on the manner in which you access it, the Properties window
contains from four to six tabs. You use these tabs to specify the parame-
ters and options you want to use for your print jobs.

General Tab
The General tab displays only when you access the Properties window
using the "Printers" selection from the Settings submenu. This tab contains
general description information about the printer and allows you to print a
test page. Refer to the documentation provided with your operating system
for further information on this tab.

Details Tab
The Details tab displays only when you access the Properties window using
the "Printers" selection from the Setting. This tab contains setup information
about the printer driver and the printer ports. Refer to the documentation
provided with your operating system for further information on this tab.

3-9
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Paper Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Paper tab.

Field Parameter Description

Paper Size 8.5 x 11 in Allows you to specify the output paper size
8.5 x 14 in you want to use.
11 x 17 in When you are formatting your job, you can
7.5 x 10.5 in select any paper size, regardless of the
5.5 x 8.5 in limitations of the currently selected input
A3 (297 x 420 mm) tray. This allows you to format your job for
A4 (210 x 297 mm) any paper size and select the correct paper
A5 (148 x 210 mm) tray when you want to print the job.
A6 (105 x 148 mm) The Measurement setting for the host PC is
B4 (257 x 364 mm) verified when the driver is installed. The
B5 (182 x 257 mm) default paper size is A4 when the
8 x 13 in Measurement setting is Metric and is 8.5 x
8.5 x 13 in 11 when the Measurement setting is not
8.25 x 13 in metric.
The default value for North America is 8.5
x 11 in.
The default value for Europe is A4.
Paper Auto Tray Select Allows you to specify the input paper tray
Source Large Capacity Tray you want to use.
Tray 1 The default value is Auto Tray Select.
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Bypass Tray
Copies 1 to 999 Allows you to specify the number of copies
you want to print. You can enter this
parameter using your keyboard or using
the incremental spin buttons.
The default value is 1.
Orientation Portrait Landscape Allows you to specify the orientation of the
printed output.
The default value is Portrait.

3-10
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Graphics Tab
The Graphics tab includes a [Font] button you use to access the Font
Installer window. You use the Font Installer window to install fonts when
necessary (refer to the Font Installer Window" section in this chapter for
further information on the Font Installer window).

The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Graphics tab.

Field Parameter Description

Halftone Text Allows you to specify the Halftone resolution you
Photographic want to use. Selecting Text provides lower
resolution and faster printing speeds.
The default value is Text.
Graphics HP-GL/2 Allows you to specify the graphic print quality.
Mode Raster Selecting HP-GL/2 provides faster printing speeds
with slightly diminished print quality. Selecting
Raster incorporates raster and bitmap formats and
produces high print quality.
The default value is HP-GL/2.
Print On Allows you to specify whether you want to print
TrueType Off TrueType fonts as graphics. This field is only active
as Graphics when you specify Raster as the Graphics Mode.
The default value is Off.
Resolution 600 dpi Allows you to specify the output resolution for the
300 dpi printer.
The default value is 300 dpi.
Edge On Allows you to specify that you want to use the Edge
Smoothing Off Smoothing feature, thus enhancing print quality.
When Edge Smoothing is enabled, the printer reduces
ragged edges, providing printed output with smooth
curved and diagonal lines. Edge smoothing results in
reduced printing speeds.
The default value is On.
Graphics High Allows you to specify the print quality you want to
Quality Medium use. The value is automatically set to High when
Low you select HP-GL/2 as the Graphics Mode,
regardless of what you specify in this field.
The default value is High.

3-11
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Device Options Tab

The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Device Options tab.

Field Parameter Description

Reverse On Allows you to specify whether you want to use the
Print Order Off Reverse Print Order feature, which delivers the output
face-up in the bin in ascending order.
When you enable this feature, the host input data is
rasterized and stored in the order received. The data
is then retrieved from the HDD and printed in reverse
order so that the output is delivered face-up in the
correct page sequence from page 1 to the end.
When you request multiple copies, the output consists
of sets of copies in the correct page sequence (for
example, three sets each in 1,2,3,4,5 page order).
When you select Long Edge Binding or Short Edge
Binding as the Duplex option, do not send the
OUTPUT PJL command. When you select 1 Staple
or 2 Staples as the Staple option, make to send the
OUTPUT PJL command with the REVERSE setting
specified. When you select Bypass Tray as the
Paper Source options, make sure to send the
OUTPUT PJL command with the NORMAL setting
specified.
The default value is On.
Job On Allows you to specify whether you want to use Job
Separation Off Separation, indicating that you want the machine to
automatically separate the print jobs.
The separation is implemented either as a mechanical
offset, or with a sheet of paper, depending on the type of
trays installed on the machine.
When a mechanical offset is used, the finisher
activates a jogger mechanism that moves the shift
tray slightly to the right or to the left for each job.This
makes it easy to determine where the end of a set or
job occurs. Job separation is especially useful for
separating collated jobs.
This option is available only when the optional finisher
is installed.
The default value is Off.

3-12
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Duplex Off Allows you to specify that you want the output printed
Long Edge in duplex format.
Binding Off specifies that you do not want to use duplex
Short Edge printing.
Binding Long Edge Binding specifies that, when printing in
Portrait mode, you want to bind your output along the
left edge of the paper, like a book. In Landscape
mode, this setting produces output that you can bind
along the top edge of the paper, like a calendar.
Short Edge Binding specifies that, when printing in
Portrait mode, you want to bind your output along the
top edge of the paper, like a calendar. In Landscape
mode, this setting produces output that you can bind
along the left edge of the paper, like a book.
The default value is Off.
Staple Off Allows you to specify whether you want to use the
1 Staple stapling option, and if so, how many staples you want
2 Staples and where you want to staple the printed output. This
feature is available only when the optional stapler is
installed.
Off species that you do not want stapling.
The default value is Off.
Printer 1st Output Allows you to specify that you want to use the printer
Output Tray Bin output tray and the output you want to use.
2nd Output The default value is 2nd Output Bin.
Bin
3rd Output
Bin

3-13
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Configuration Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Configuration tab.

Field Parameter Description

Input Paper None Allows you to specify that you want to use an optional
Device 1000-sheet input tray when one is installed. You select the
Tray Unit optional tray you want to use from that list that
1500-sheet displays. The list is based on the optional input trays
Tray Unit that are available on the machine.
The default value is None.
Output Copy Tray Allows you to specify that you want to use an optional
Paper 3-bin Sorter output device when one is installed. You select the
Device Finisher optional device you want to use from that list that
displays. The list is based on the optional output
devices that are available on the machine.
The default value is Copy Tray.

POSTSCRIPT PRINTER DRIVER

A Windows 3.1 or Windows 95 PostScript printer driver is available as an
option for the machine. The optional PostScript printer driver allows the
machine to support Adobe PostScript Level II. The PostScript option also
allows you to download PostScript Type I fonts and includes a rasterizer
that allows you to download TrueType fonts as soft fonts.

Note: You can use the printer Control Panel to change many of the printer
settings. However, the selections you make using the printer driver
software overrides your Control Panel selections.

3-14
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Windows 3.1
This section contains information on the PostScript print parameters and
options available for your Windows 3.1 system.

Properties Window
In general, you access the Properties window by selecting "Print" or "Print
Setup" from the File menu available from your application. You can also
access the Properties window by accessing the Control Panel and double-
clicking on "Printers." A list of the currently available printers displays.
Double-click on the printer you want to use. The Printer window displays,
providing a list of the current print jobs. Double-click on [Properties] to
access the Properties window.

The Properties window contains six tabs. You use these tabs to specify the
parameters and options you want to use for your print jobs.

Paper Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Paper tab.

Field Parameter Description

Output PostScript Allows you to select the PostScript
Format Encapsulated PostScript output you want to use.
PostScript enables normal printing.
Encapsulated PostScript creates a
single page image file that you can use
with applications that accept this file
format.
The default value is PostScript.

3-15
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Paper Auto Tray Select Allows you to specify the input paper
Source Tray 1 tray you want to use.
Tray 2 The default value is Auto Tray Select.
Tray 3
Tray 4
Bypass Tray
Large Capacity Tray
Paper Size 8.5 x 11 in Allows you to specify the output paper
8.5 x 14 in size you want to use. A window
11 x 17 in displays an image of the selected paper
7.5 x 10.5 in size. The default value for North
5.5 x 8.5 in America is 8.5 by 11 in.
A3 (297 x 420 mm) The default value for Europe is A4.
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
A6 (105 x 148 mm)
B4 (257 x 364 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
8.25 x 13 in
8.5 x 13 in
8 x 13 in
Orientation Portrait Allows you to specify the orientation of
Landscape the printed output.
Rotated Landscape The default value is Portrait.
Scaling 25 to 400 percent Allows you to specify the percent of
scaling to enlarge or reduce the printed
image.
The default value is 100%.

3-16
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Copies 1 to 999 Allows you to specify the number of
copies you want to print. You can enter
this parameter using your keyboard or
using the incremental spin buttons.
The default value is 1.
Watermarks (None) Allows you to print a simulated
CONFIDENTIAL watermark on each page of your printed
COPY document.
DRAFT When you choose a watermark, you
can limit the watermark to print only on
the first page by checking the First
Page Only checkbox.
The default value is (None).
Layout 1 page up/sheet Allows you to specify the number of
2 pages up multiple pages you want to print on a
4 pages up single sheet of paper.
6 pages up When you want to print multiple pages,
9 pages up you can specify that you want to print a
16 pages up border around the page by checking the
Print Page Border checkbox.
The default value is 1 up.

3-17
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Features Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Features tab. To specify the printer parameters you want, use the
drop-down list boxes to select the option you want to use for each available
feature. The items that display depend on the options you have available on
the machine.

Field Parameter Description

Duplex Off Allows you to specify that you want the
Long Edge Binding output printed in duplex format.
Short Edge Binding Off specifies that you do not want to
use duplex printing.
Long Edge Binding specifies that, when
printing in Portrait mode, you want to
bind your output along the left edge of
the paper, like a book. In Landscape
mode, this setting produces output that
you can bind along the top edge of the
paper, like a calendar.
Short Edge Binding specifies that, when
printing in Portrait mode, you want to
bind your output along the top edge of
the paper, like a calendar. In
Landscape mode, this setting produces
output that you can bind along the left
edge of the paper, like a book.
The default value is Off.
Total Printer 8, 16, 24, 32 or 40 MB or Allows you to specify how much of the
Memory more printer memory is available. The
default value is 8 MB.

3-18
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Separation True Allows you to specify whether you want
False to use the job separation feature
provided by the optional finisher.
The separation is implemented either
as a mechanical offset, or with a sheet
of paper, depending on the type of trays
installed on the machine.
When a mechanical offset is used, the
finisher activates a jogger mechanism
that moves the shift tray slightly to the
right or to the left for each job. This
makes it easy to determine where the
end of a set or job occurs. Job
separation is especially useful for
separating collated jobs.
This option is available only when the
optional finisher is installed.
The default value is False.
Output Copy Tray Allows you to specify which output bin
Paper 3-bin Sorter you want to use when an optional
Device Finisher output device is installed. The options
contained in the list are based on the
optional output devices that are
available on the machine.
The default value is Copy Tray.
Resolution 600 dpi Allows you to specify the output
400 dpi resolution for the printer.
300 dpi The default value is 400 dpi.
Staple Off Allows you to specify whether you want
1Portrait to use the stapling option, and if so,
1Landscape how many staples you want and where
2 Portrait you want to staple the printed output.
2 Landscape Off species that you do not want
stapling.
One Portrait specifies that you want one
staple placed at the top left corner of
the portrait page.
One Landscape specifies that you want
one staple placed at the top left corner
of the landscape page.

3-19
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Staple Two Portrait specifies that you want two
(cont.) staples on the portrait page. The
staples are placed along the left side of
the page when long edge feed is used.
The staples are placed along the top of
the page when short edge feed is used.
Two Landscape specifies that you want
two staples on the landscape page.
The staples are placed along the top of
the page when long edge feed is used.
The staples are placed along the left
side of the page when short edge feed
is used. This feature is available only
when the optional stapler is installed.
The default value is Off.
Auto Tray On Allows you to specify whether you want
Switching Off to use Auto Tray Switching. When you
enable Tray Switching, the printer
switches to an alternate paper tray
when the current tray is empty.
The default value is On.
Printer 1st Output Bin Allows you to specify which bin you
Output Tray 2nd Output Bin want to use.
3rd Output Bin The default value is 2nd output Bin.
Edge On Allows you to specify whether you want
Smoothing Off to use Edge Smoothing. The default
value is On.
Input Paper None Allows you to specify that you want to
Device 1000-sheet Tray Unit use an optional input tray when one is
1500-sheet Tray Unit installed.
The default value is None.

3-20
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Fonts Tab
The Fonts tab contains the [Font Downloader] button you use to access
the Font Installer window, which you use to install fonts when necessary.

The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Fonts tab.

Field Parameter Description

Send TrueType Type 1 Allows you to specify how your printer
Fonts to This Type 3 uses TrueType fonts. You can override
Printer as: Type 42 this setting individually for each font
Don’t Send using the "TrueType Substitutions for
All Printers" list.
Type 1 sends the TrueType fonts to the
printer as outline PostScript fonts.
Type 3 sends the TrueType fonts to the
printer as bitmapped PostScript fonts.
Type 42 packages the TrueType fonts
for the printer.
Don’t Send uses the TrueType fonts
that are resident or supplied. The
default value is Type 1.
Substitute On Allows you to specify whether you want
PostScript Fonts Off to substitute PostScript fonts for
for TrueType TrueType fonts. When you enable this
Fonts on This option, your documents print faster.
Printer. However, some printed fonts may be
slightly different than the screen fonts.
The default value is On.
TrueType List of TrueType Allows you to specify the Post Script
Substitutions for fonts and the font you want to use in place of each
All Printers available TrueType font included in the list.
substitutions

3-21
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

PostScript Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the PostScript tab.

Field Parameter Description

Performance Use PostScript Allows you to specify the manner in
Options Level 2 Features which your system sends document
Send Data in data to your printer.
Binary Use the Enabling the Use PostScript
Level 2 Features option to use the
available PostScript Level I features
when sending the print data.
Use the Send Data in Binary option to
send binary data to your printer. To
use this option, your printer must be set
up to receive binary data.
The default value is Use PostScript
Level 2 Features.
PostScript Timeout Job Timeout - Allows you to specify the timeout
Values Seconds Wait information in seconds. When you
Timeout - Seconds specify zero, the job is not canceled.
Job Timeout indicates how long a print
job can run before it is canceled.
Wait Timeout indicates how long the
printer will wait for the print data before
the print job is canceled
The default values are
Job timeout - 0
Wait timeout -120
Note: Do not specify zero when you are
using a networked printer.
Margins Default Allows you to add or remove margins
None from your PostScript output.
The default value is Default.

3-22
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Protocol Options Default - Allows you to specify your PostScript
Serial/Parallel communications setting.
None (Apple Talk) When Default - Serial/ Parallel is
enabled, you can end your print jobs
using the Ctrl+D command.
The default value is Default -
Serial/Parallel.
PostScript Optimize for Allows you to specify the printer
Performance Speed performance level that you want to use.
Optimize for When you enable Optimize for Speed,
Portability your print jobs complete in a faster time
period, but many not print successfully
when your printer has a limited amount
of memory.
Enable Optimize for Portability creates
print jobs that will print on a variety of
printers.
The default value is Optimize for
Speed.

Job Control Tab

The Job Control tab also contains the [Download] button, which you use to
send the PostScript header to the printer. When you perform this task, the
PostScript header resides on the printer until the printer is restarted and the
Already Downloaded option is automatically enabled.

The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Job Control tab.
Field Parameter Description
Printer ASCII Mode Allows you to specify the data format you want to
Mode Binary Mode use to communicate with the printer.
The default value is ASCII Mode.
PostScript Download Each Allows you to control the manner in which
Header Job PostScript headers are downloaded.
Already Download Each Job sends a PostScript header
Downloaded with each print job. Already Downloaded indicates
that the header is already resident on the printer.
When you click the [Download] button, this option
is automatically selected.
The default value is Download Each Job.

3-23
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Send Error On Allows you to specify whether you want to
Handler Off enable PostScript error printing.
With Each This option is not available when you enable
Job Optimize for Portability on the PostScript tab.
The default value is Off.
Do Not On Allows you to specify that you do not want soft
Download Off fonts downloaded to the printer. Enable this
Fonts option only when the soft fonts are already
available to your printer.
The default value is Off.
Note: This does not affect TrueType fonts.

Watermark Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Watermark tab. The Watermark tab also contains the [Edit] button
you use to make changes to the selected watermark, the [Add] button you
use to add a watermark to your list, and the [Delete] button you use to
delete the selected watermark.

Field Parameter Description

Select a List box containing Allows you to select the Watermark you want
Watermark the currently to use, delete, or edit.
available The watermark you select displays in the area
Watermarks located on the right of the screen.

3-24
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Watermark Window
You access the Watermark window when you select a watermark from the
Watermark tab and click the [Edit] button, or when you click the [Add]
button from the Watermark tab. You use this window to specify the informa-
tion for the watermark you are creating or modifying. The following lists the
descriptions and parameters for the fields contained on the Watermark
window.

Field Parameter Description

Watermark Text Text Font Size Style Allows you to create or edit the
Print In Foreground watermark text, font, size, and style.
Print Outline Only Also allows you to specify the mode
you want to use when printing a
watermark.
Angle -90 to 90 degrees Allows you to rotate the Watermark
from -90 to +90 degrees.
Position Automatically Center Allows you to adjust the position of a
Watermark Position watermark. on the page.
Relative to Center
(x, y)

3-25
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

WINDOWS 95
This section contains information on the PostScript print parameters and
options available for your Windows 95 system.

Properties Window
In general, you access the Properties window by selecting Print from the
File menu and clicking the [Properties] button, or by selecting Print Setup
from the File menu when available from your application. You can also
access the Properties window by clicking the [Start] button and selecting
Printers from the Settings submenu. A list of icons representing the printers
available to you displays. Double-click on the icon that represents the printer
you want to use. The Printers window displays with a list of the currently
queued print jobs displays. Select Properties from the Printer menu avail-
able on the Printers window. The Properties window displays.

Depending on the manner in which you access it, the Properties window
contains from five to eight tabs. You use these tabs to specify the parame-
ters and options you want to use for your print jobs.

General Tab
The General tab displays only when you access the Properties window
using the "Printers" selection from the Settings submenu. This tab contains
general description information about the printer and allows you to print a
test page. Refer to the documentation provided with your operating system
for further information on this tab.

Details Tab
The Details tab displays only when you access the Properties window using
the "Printers" selection from the Setting. This tab contains setup information
about the printer driver and the printer ports. Refer to the documentation
provided with your operating system for further information on this tab.

3-26
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Paper Tab
The Paper tab contains the [More Options] button you use to access the
More Paper Options window, which allows you to specify additional paper
parameters. The Paper tab also contains the [Unprintable Area] button you
use to access the Unprintable Area window, which allows you to specify
page margin parameters.

The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Paper tab.

Field Parameter Description

Paper Size 8.5 x 11 in Allows you to specify the output paper size you
8.5 x 14 in want to use.
11 x 17 in The default value for North America is 8.5 x 11
7.5 x 10.5 in in.
5.5 x 8.5 in The default value for Europe is A4.
A3 (297 x 420 mm)
A4 (210 x 297 mm)
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
A6 (105 x 148 mm)
B4 (257 x 364 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
8.25 x 13 in
8.5 x 13 in
8 x 13 in
Layout 1 up Allows you to specify the number of multiple
2 up pages you want to print on a single sheet of
4 up paper.
6 up When you want to print multiple pages, you
9 up can specify that you want to print a border
16 up around the page by checking the Print Page
Border checkbox.
The default value is 1 up.

3-27
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Orientation Portrait Landscape Allows you to specify the orientation of the
Lotate Landscape printed output.
The default value is Portrait.
Paper Auto Tray Select Allows you to specify the input paper tray you
Source Tray 1 want to use.
Tray 2 The default value is Auto Tray Select.
Tray 3
Tray 4
Bypass Tray
Large Capacity Tray
Copies 1 to 999 Allows you to specify the number of copies you
want to print. You can enter this parameter
using your keyboard or using the incremental
spin buttons.
The default value is 1.

3-28
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

More Paper Options Window

To access the More Paper Options window, click on the [More Options]
button available on the Paper tab. The following lists the descriptions and
parameters for the fields contained on the More Paper Options window.

Field Parameter Description

Printing on None Allows you to specify that you want the output
both sides Flip on long side printed in duplex format.
(duplex Flip on short edge Off specifies that you do not want to use
printing) duplex printing.
Flip on long side specifies that, when printing
in Portrait mode, you want to bind your output
along the left edge of the paper, like a book.
In Landscape mode, this setting produces
output that you can bind along the top edge of
the paper, like a calendar.
Flip on short edge specifies that, when printing
in Portrait mode, you want to bind your output
along the top edge of the paper, like a
calendar. In Landscape mode, this setting
produces output that you can bind along the
left edge of the paper, like a book.
The default value is None.
Printer 1st Output Bin Allows you to specify which output bin you
Output Tray 2nd Output Bin want to use when an optional output device is
3rd Output Bin installed.
The options contained in the list are based on
the optional output devices that are available
on the machine.
The default value is 1st Ouput Bin.

3-29
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Unprintable Area Window

To access the Unprintable Area window, click on the [Unprintable Area]
button available on the Paper tab. The following lists the descriptions and
parameters for the fields contained on the Unprintable Area window.

Field Parameter Description

Units Inches Allows you to specify the units of measure you
Millimeters want to use for the margin settings.
The default value is Inches (U.S.).
Top 0.28 to 5.50 inches Allows you to specify the top margin for the
7.1 to 139.7 mm printed image.
The default value is 0.28 inches (7.1 mm).
Bottom 0.18 to 5.50 inches Allows you to specify the bottom margin for the
4.6 to 139.7 mm printed image.
The default value is 0.18 inches (4.6 mm).
Left 0.18 to 4.250 inches Allows you to specify the left margin for the
4.6 to 108 mm printed image.
The default value is 0.18 inches (4.6 mm).
Right 0.28 to 5.50 inches Allows you to specify the right margin for the
4.6 to 108 mm printed image.
The default value is 0.18 inches (4.6 mm).

3-30
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Graphics Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Graphics tab.

Field Parameter Description

Resolution 600 dpi Allows you to specify the output resolution for
400 dpi the printer.
300 dpi The default value is 400 dpi.
Halftoning Use printer settings Allows you to select the Halftone setting you
Use settings below want to use. When you select Use settings
Screen frequency below, you enter the screen frequency and
Screen angle angle settings you want to use to override the
default halftone settings for the printer.
The default value is Use printer settings.
Special Print as a negative Allows you to manipulate the printed image.
image
Print as a mirror Print as a negative image allows you to specify
image whether you want to print the job as a
negative. Areas that appear black on the
screen print as white, and areas that appear
white on the screen print as black.
Print as a mirror image allows you to specify
whether you want to print the document as a
mirror image of the screen.
Scaling 25 to 400 percent Allows you to specify the percent of scaling to
enlarge or reduce the printed image.
The default value is 100%.

3-31
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Fonts Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Fonts tab. The Fonts tab contains the [Edit the Table] button you
use to access the Font Substitution Table window, which allows you to
specify font substitution criteria. The Fonts tab also contains the [Send
Fonts As] button you use to access the Send Fonts As window, which
allows you to further specify your font criteria.

Field Parameter Description

Send TrueType fonts to the printer On Allows you to specify
according to the font Substitution Off whether you want to replace
Table. TrueType fonts with built-in
printer fonts. You can specify
this information for each font
using the font substitution
table. You access the font
substitution table by clicking
the [Edit the Table] button.
The default value is On.
Always use built-in printer fonts On Allows you to specify
instead of TrueType fonts. Off whether you want to
substitute PostScript fonts for
TrueType fonts. When you
enable this option, your
documents print faster.
However, some printed fonts
may be slightly different than
the screen fonts.
The default value is Off.
Always use TrueType fonts. On Allows you to specify
Off whether you always want to
use TrueType fonts. When
you enable this option, your
documents print more slowly.
However, the printed fonts
look exactly the same as the
screen fonts.
The default value is Off.

3-32
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Font Substitution Table Window

To access the Font Substitution Table window, click on the [Edit the Table]
button available on the Fonts tab. The following lists the descriptions and
parameters for the fields contained on the Font Substitution Table window.

Field Parameter Description

For the Lists the available TrueType Allows you to select the
TrueType fonts you can replace with TrueType fonts you want to
font: PostScript fonts. replace.
Printer font Lists the PostScript fonts you Allows you to specify the
for: can use in place of the TrueType PostScript font you want to use
font you selected. for the substitution.

Send Fonts As Window

To access the Send Fonts As window, click on the [Send Font As] button
available on the Fonts tab. The following lists the descriptions and parame-
ters for the fields contained on the Send Fonts As window.

Field Parameter Description

Send TrueType fonts Outlines Allows you to specify how your printer uses
as: Bitmaps TrueType fonts. You can override this
Type 42 setting individually for each font using the
Don’t Send Font Substitution window.
Outlines sends the TrueType fonts to the
printer as outline PostScript fonts. Bitmaps
sends the TrueType fonts to the printer as
bitmapped PostScript fonts.
Type 42 packages the TrueType fonts for
the printer.
Don’t Send uses the TrueType fonts that
are resident or supplied.
The default value is Outlines.
Threshold to switch 1 to 99.99 Allows you to specify the font size, in
between downloading pixels, at which the PostScript driver will
bitmap or outline switch from a TrueType font to a bitmap
fonts, measured in fonts. The default value is 99.99.
pixels (at the current
resolution).

3-33
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Favor system On Allows you to specify which fonts have
TrueType fonts over Off priority. When you enable this option, your
printer fonts that have documents print faster. However, some
the same name. printed fonts may look slightly different than
the screen fonts.
The default value is Off.
PostScript fonts In Native Allows you to specify whether you want
Format soft fonts downloaded to the printer. Select
Don’t Send Don’t Send only when the soft fonts are
already available to your printer.
The default value is In Native Format.
Note: This does not affect your TrueType
fonts.

Device Options
Tab The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields
contained on the Device Options tab. To specify the printer feature parame-
ters you want, select the feature and select the option you want to use for
the feature from the Change Setting for list box. The items that display
depend on the options you have available on the machine.

Field Parameter Description

Available 0 to 25600 Allows you to specify how much of the printer
printer memory is available to spool print strings.
memory
(in KB)

3-34
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Auto Tray On Allows you to specify whether you want to use
Switching Off Auto Tray Switching. When you enable Tray
Switching, the printer switches to an alternate
paper tray when the current tray is empty.
The default value is On.
Job On Allows you to specify whether you want to use
Separation Off the job separation feature provided by the
optional finisher.
The separation is implemented either as a
mechanical offset, or with a sheet of paper,
depending on the type of trays installed on the
machine.
When a mechanical offset is used, the finisher
activates a jogger mechanism that moves the
shift tray slightly to the right or to the left for
each job. This makes it easy to determine
where the end of a set or job occurs. Job
separation is especially useful for separating
collated jobs.
This option is available only when the optional
finisher is installed.
The default value is Off.

3-35
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Staple Off Allows you to specify whether you want to use
1 Portrait the stapling option, and if so, how many
1 Landscape staples you want and where you want to staple
2 Portrait the printed output.
2 Landscape Off species that you do not want stapling.
One Portrait specifies that you want one staple
placed at the top left corner of the portrait
page.
One Landscape specifies that you want one
staple placed at the top left corner of the
landscape page.
Two Portrait specifies that you want two
staples on the portrait page. The staples are
placed along the left side of the page when
long edge feed is used. The staples are placed
along the top of the page when short edge
feed is used.
Two Landscape specifies that you want two
staples on the landscape page. The staples
are placed along the top of the page when
long edge feed is used. The staples are placed
along the left side of the page when short
edge feed is used.
This feature is available only when the optional
stapler is installed.
The default value is Off.
Output Copy Tray Allows you to specify which output bin you
Paper 3-bin Sorter want to use when an optional output device is
Device Finisher installed. The options contained in the list are
based on the optional output devices that are
available on the machine.
The default value is Copy Tray.
Edge On Allows you to specify whether you want to use
Smoothing Off Edge Smoothing. The default value is On.
Input Paper None Allows you to specify that you want to use an
Device 1000-sheet Tray optional input tray when one is installed.
Unit The default value is None.
1500-sheet Tray
Unit

3-36
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

PostScript Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the PostScript tab. The PostScript tab contains the [Send Header Now]
button, which you use to send the PostScript header to the printer. When
you perform this task, the PostScript header resides on the printer until the
printer is restarted and the Assume header is downloaded and retained
option is automatically enabled. The PostScript tab also contains [Ad-
vanced] button you use to access the Advanced PostScript Options win-
dow.

Field Parameter Description

PostScript PostScript (optimize Allows you to specify the PostScript
output format: for speed) output mode you want to use.
PostScript (optimize Depending on the mode you specify,
for portability - ADSC) you can increase speed, allow
Encapsulated portability, and enable compatibility with
PostScript (EPS) Encapsulated PostScript (EPS), Archive
Archive format PJL format, and PJL archive format.
archive format The default value is PostScript
(optimize for speed).
PostScript Download header with Allows you to control the manner in
header each print job Assume which PostScript headers are
header is downloaded downloaded.
and retained Download header with each print job
sends a PostScript header with each
print job.
Assume header is downloaded and
retained indicates that the header is
already resident on the printer. When
you click the [Send Header Now]
button, this option is automatically
selected.
The default value is Download header
with each print job.
Print PostScript On Allows you to specify whether you want
error Off to enable PostScript error printing. This
information option is not available when you enable
Encapsulated PostScript.
The default value is On.

3-37
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

PostScript Job timeout Allows you to specify the timeout
timeout values Wait timeout information in seconds. When you
specify zero, the job is not canceled.
Job Timeout indicates how long a print
job can run before it is canceled. Wait
Timeout indicates how long the printer
will wait for the print data before the
print job is canceled
The default values are
Job timeout - 0
Wait timeout -120
Note: Do not specify zero when you
are using a networked printer.

Advanced PostScript Options Window

To access the Advanced PostScript Options window, click on the [Ad-
vanced] button available on the PostScript tab. The parameter settings
contained on this window were specified for optimal printer performance.
You should not change these setting unless you have a specific reason for
the change.

The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Advanced PostScript Options window.

Field Parameter Description

PostScript Use PostScript Level Allows you to specify the PostScript
language level 1 features Use language level you want to use with
PostScript Level 2 your printer.
features The default value is Use PostScript
Level 2 features.
Bitmap Compress bitmap Allows you to specify the manner in
compression images which bitmap images are sent to the
No bitmap printer. Compressing the images uses
compression less printer memory and prints faster.
The default value is Compress bitmap
images.

3-38
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Data format ASCII data Tagged Allows you to specify the data format
binary communication you use to communicate with the
protocol printer. Also allows you to specify
Pure binary data Send when to send the Ctrl+D command to
CTRL+D before the printer.
job Send CTRL+D The default value is ASCII data and
after job Send CTRL+D after job.
Display alert On Allows you to specify whether you want
for applications Off to print an alert when an application is
incompatible unable to display printer alert
with driver information on the screen. The default
features. value is Off.

Watermark Tab
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Watermark tab. The Watermark tab also contains the [Edit] button
you use to make changes to the selected watermark, the [Add] button you
use to add a watermark to your list, and the [Delete] button you use to
delete the selected watermark.

Field Parameter Description

Select a List box containing the Allows you to select the Watermark you
Watermark currently available want to use, delete, or edit.
Watermarks The watermark you select displays in
the area located on the right of the
screen.

3-39
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Watermark Window
You access the Watermark window when you select a watermark from the
Watermark tab and click the [Edit] button, or when you click the [Add]
button from the Watermark tab. You use this window to specify the
information for the watermark you are creating or modifying. The following
lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained on the Water-
mark window.

Field Parameter Description

Watermark Text Allows you to create or edit the watermark text,
Text Font font, size, and style. Also allows you to specify
Size the mode you want to use when printing a
Style watermark.
Print In Foreground
Print Outline Only
Angle -90 to 90 degrees Allows you to rotate the Watermark from -90 to
+90 degrees.
Position Automatically Allows you to adjust the position of a
Center Watermark watermark. on the page.
Position Relative
to Center (x, y)

MACINTOSH POSTSCRIPT PRINTER DRIVER

The Macintosh PostScript printer driver allows the printer to support Adobe
PostScript Level II. The PostScript option allows you to download PostScript
Type 1 fonts, and includes a rasterizer that allows you to download True-
Type fonts as soft fonts. This section contains information using the Post-
Script printer driver for Apple Macintosh.

Note: The PCL 5e drivers are not available for the Macintosh. Using the
machine with a Macintosh requires the PostScript option

3-40
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Installable Options Window

To access the Installable Options window, select the printer from the list and
click the [Setup] button. A list of PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
displays. Make sure the correct PPD file is highlighted and verify that the
correct printer name displays at the bottom of the window. Click the
[Select] button to access the Installable Options window.

You use the Installable Options window to specify the availability of printer
accessories and memory. The following lists the descriptions and parame-
ters for the fields contained on the Installable Options window.

Field Parameter Description

Total 8, 16, 24, 32, 40 MB Allows you to specify how much of the
Printer or more printer memory is available.
Memory The default value is 8 MB.
Input Paper None Allows you to specify that you want to use
Device 1000-sheet Tray Unit an optional input tray when one is installed.
1500-sheet Tray Unit The default value is None.
Output Copy Tray Finisher Allows you to specify which output bin you
Paper 3-bin sorter want to use when an optional output device
Device is installed. The options contained in the list
are based on the optional output devices
that are available on the machine.
The default value is Copy Tray.

3-41
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Page Setup Window

To access the Page Setup window, select Page Setup from the File menu.
You use the Page Setup window to specify printing features for the current
print job.

The [Options] button available on this window accesses the Printer Options
window. The [Print] button access the Print Options window. The [Margins]
button accesses the Margins window, which you use to set the page
margins for the print job.

The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Page Setup window.

Field Parameter Description

Paper 8.5 x 11 in Allows you to select a paper size for the
8.5 x 14 in current print job. The default value for North
11 x 17 in America is 8.5 x 11 in.
5.5 x 8.5 in The default value for Europe is A4.
A3 (297x420 mm)
A4 (210x297 mm)
A5 (148x210 mm)
A6 (105x148 mm)
B4 (257x364 mm)
B5 (182x257 mm)
7.5 x 10.5 in
8 x 13 in
8.5 x 13 in
8.25 x 13 in
Layout 1 up Allows you to specify the number of multiple
2 up pages you want to print on a single sheet of
4 up paper.
6 up The default value is 1 up.
9 up Note: An illustration of the layout displays on
16 up the left side of the window.

3-42
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Reduce or 25 to 400 percent Allows you to use your keyboard to specify the
Enlarge percentage by which you want to shrink or
enlarge the printed image.
The default value is 100 percent.
Orientation Portrait Allows you to select the icon that corresponds
Landscape to page orientation you want to use.
Rotate Landscape The default value is Portrait.

Printer Options Window

To access the Printer Options window, from the Page Setup window, click
the [Options] button. You use the Printer Options window to specify text
and graphics attributes for the print job. The following lists the descriptions
and parameters for the fields contained on the Printer Options window.

Field Parameter Description

Flip On Allows you to specify whether you want to print the
Horizontal Off document as a mirror image of the screen. The
default value is Off.
Flip Vertical On Allows you to specify whether you want to print the
Off document upside down.
The default value is Off.
Invert Image On Allows you to specify whether you want to print the
Off job as a negative. Areas that appear black on the
screen print as white, and areas that appear white on
the screen print as black.
The default value is Off.
Substitute On Allows you to specify whether you want the printer to
Fonts Off substitute PostScript printer fonts for Macintosh
screen fonts. When you select this option, your job
prints faster and uses less memory.
The default value is On.
Smooth On Allows you to specify whether you want the printer to
Graphics Off rasterize bitmap image output to improve the
appearance of graphics.
The default value is On.

3-43
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Precision On Allows you to specify whether you want to print
Bitmap Off bitmap graphics more precisely. Select this setting
Alignment when you use a low-resolution monitor The default
value is Off.
Unlimited On Allows you to specify whether you want the printer to
Downloadabl Off print without substituting printer fonts for Macintosh
e Fonts in a screen fonts. When you select this option, your print
Document job may print more slowly. However, the appearance
of your output matches the screen more closely.
The default value is Off.
Larger Print On Allows you to specify whether you want to use a
Area Off larger print area.
The default value is Off.

Print Options Window

To access the Print Options window, from the Page Setup window, click the
[Print] button. You use the Print Options window to specify printer attrib-
utes. The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields
contained on the Print Options window.

Field Parameter Description

Cover Page None Allows you to specify the manner in which you
Before want to print cover pages. Cover pages can be
document useful for separating individual documents in large
After document print runs. None specifies that you do not want to
print a cover page.
Before document specifies that you want to print a
cover page at the beginning of each document.
After document specifies that you want to print a
cover page at the end of each document. The
default value is None.

3-44
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Print Black and White Allows you to specify the manner in which you
Color/Grayscale want to print graphics.
ColorSync Black and White specifies that you want to print in
Color Matching black and white only.
PostScript Color/Grayscale specifies that you want the printer
Color Matching to render color images and text in shades of gray.
Use this setting when you want to print documents
that contain color or grayscale images, such as
photographs.
ColorSync Color Matching specifies that you want
to use color conversion on the Macintosh printer.
When you select this option, you must specify a
Printer Profile value. This option is available only
when the ColorSync software is installed. You
must use this option when you want color
conversions and have only a PostScript Level 1
printer.
Postscript Color Matching specifies that you want
to use color conversion on the Macintosh printer.
When you select this option, you must specify a
Printer Profile value. This option is available only
when the ColorSync software is installed. Use this
option when your printer is not color calibrated
and is a PostScript Level 2 printer.
The default value is Black and White.
Printer Allows you to select a printer profile for your color
Profile printer. When you select ColorSync Color
Matching or PostScript Color Matching for the
Print option, you must select a Printer Profile
value.
The default value is Printer’s Default.

3-45
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

PostScript No special Allows you to specify the manner in which you
error reporting want the printer to notify you when a PostScript
handling Summarize on error occurs. When an error occurs, the printer
screen completes the current job and performs a soft
Print detailed reset.
report However, when a fatal error occurs (when the
printer stops printing), you must turn the power to
the printer off and back on.
No special reporting specifies that you do not want
the printer to notify you of a PostScript error.
Summarize on screen specifies that you want the
printer to notify you of a PostScript error by
displaying an error message on your monitor. Print
detailed report specifies that you want the printer
to notify you of a PostScript error by printing a
PostScript error report.
The default value is No special reporting.
Auto Tray On Allows you to specify whether you want the printer
Switch Off to automatically switch to an empty output tray
when the currently selected output tray is full.
The default value is On.
Duplex Off Allows you to specify that you want the output
Long Edge printed in duplex format.
Binding Off specifies that you do not want to use duplex
Short Edge printing.
Binding Long Edge Binding specifies that, when printing in
Portrait mode, you want to bind your output along
the left edge of the paper, like a book. In
Landscape mode, this setting produces output that
you can bind along the top edge of the paper, like
a calendar.
Short Edge Binding specifies that, when printing in
Portrait mode, you want to bind your output along
the top edge of the paper, like a calendar. In
Landscape mode, this setting produces output that
you can bind along the left edge of the paper, like
a book.
The default value is Off.

3-46
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Job On Allows you to specify whether you want to use the
Separation Off job separation feature provided by the optional
finisher.
The separation is implemented either as a
mechanical offset, or with a sheet of paper,
depending on the type of trays installed on the
machine.
When a mechanical offset is used, the finisher
activates a jogger mechanism that moves the shift
tray slightly to the right or to the left for each job.
This makes it easy to determine where the end of
a set or job occurs. Job separation is especially
useful for separating collated jobs.
This option is available only when the optional
finisher is installed.
The default value is Off.
Staple Off Allows you to specify whether you want to use
One the stapling option, and if so, where you want to
Portrait staple the printed output.
One None species that you do not want stapling. One
Landscape Portrait specifies that you want one staple placed
Two at the top left corner of the portrait page.
Portrait One Landscape specifies that you want one staple
Two placed at the top left corner of the landscape page.
Landscape Two Portrait specifies that you want two staples
on the portrait page. The staples are placed along
the left side of the page when long edge feed is
used. The staples are placed along the top of the
page when short edge feed is used.
Two Landscape specifies that you want two
staples on the landscape page. The staples are
placed along the top of the page when long edge
feed is used. The staples are placed along the
left side of the page when short edge feed is
used.
This feature is available only when the optional
stapler is installed.
The default value is Off.
Print 1st Output Bin Allows you to specify an output tray.
Output Tray 2nd Output Bin The default value is 1st Output Bin.
3rd Output Bin

3-47
USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Field Parameter Description

Resolution 600 dpi Allows you to specify the printer resolution in dots
400 dpi per inch (dpi) for PostScript output.
300 dpi. The default value is 400 dpi.
Edge On Allows you to specify that you want to enhance
Smoothing Off print quality using edge smoothing. This feature
reduces ragged edges, providing printed output
with smooth curved and diagonal lines.
The default value is On.

3-48
 USING THE PRINTER DRIVERS

Printer Window
To access the Printer window, select Print from the File menu. You use the
Printer window to specify printing features for the current job. The [Op-
tions] button available on this window accesses the Printer Options window.
The following lists the descriptions and parameters for the fields contained
on the Print window.

Field Parameter Description

Copies 1 to 999 Allows you to specify the number of copies you
want to print.
The default value is 1.
Pages All Allows you to specify the portion of the
From/To document you want to print.
All specifies that you want to print the entire
document. From/To allows you to enter the
beginning and ending page numbers to specify
the portion of the document you want to print.
The default value is All.
Paper All Allows you to specify the manner in which you
Source First page from want the printer to select input trays for the
Remaining from print job.
All - specifies that you want to use a single
paper source for the entire document.
First page specifies the paper source you want
to use for the first page of the document. This
option is useful when you want to print a
document with a cover page, such as a report,
or a business letter using letterhead for the
first page only.
Remaining from specifies the paper source
you want to use for the remaining pages of the
document. This option is enabled only when
you select First page from.
The default value is All.
Destination Printer Allows you to specify the output destination for
File the print job.
The default value is Printer.

3-49
4. TROUBLESHOOTING

4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING

OVERVIEW
This chapter provides information that may be helpful when print quality
problems, clearing problems and error messages occur while you are using
your printer.

When an error requiring operator intervention occurs on the machine, the

Error Suspend screen displays on the control panel and the machine is set
to Offline mode. You must use the Reset and Continue buttons available
on the Error Suspend screen to correct the error and continue using the
machine.

When you specify On as the Auto Continue setting on the Configuration

menu and an error occurs, the Error Suspend screen displays and the
machine is set to Offline mode. When no operator intervention occurs for
the amount of time specified for the Auto Continue timeout setting (the
default is 30 seconds), the machine is set back to Online mode as though
the Continue button were pressed and the print jobs resume.

When a print job requires the use of the manual tray, the "Please open the
Bypass Tray" message displays. When the bypass tray is not opened
within the time specified (the default is 300 seconds, which is five minutes),
the print job is cancelled and the next job begins printing.

4-2
 TROUBLESHOOTING

PRINT QUALITY PROBLEMS

This section contains information on the print quality problems that may
occur while using the printer, as well as the actions you can take to solve
the problems. Table -1 lists the print quality problems and provides possible
solutions.

Table -1Print quality problems

Problem Description Action:

Background Toner is scattered on the page. This ❐ Make sure you are using paper or
Scatter problem is usually isolated to a transparencies designed for use with
specific area on the page. laser printers and copy machines (refer
to the "Specifications" chapter in this
manual for further information).
❐ When the back of a printed page has
background scatter, check for toner
buildup on the rollers or separation pad
inside of the printer.
Black Page The page prints entirely in black. ❐ Check that the toner cartridge is
installed correctly.
❐ Check for damage to the toner cartridge
or for a defective toner cartridge.
Character White areas are printing where ❐ Make sure you are using paper or
Voids characters should print in solid transparencies designed for use with
black. laser printers.
❐ Make sure that you are printing on the
correct side of the paper.
Dropouts Characters are printing incompletely ❐ When this occurs on one page only, the
or not at all. sheet of paper may be defective.
❐ Adjust the print density slide.
❐ Make sure that you are using paper or
transparencies designed for use with
laser printers.
Entire You sent a print job, but the entire ❐ Check the configuration to make sure
document does job did not print. that it is set to print the entire job and
not print not specific pages.

4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Description Action:

Faded Area A block of faded vertical white lines ❐ Check for low toner.
prints or an area of the printed ❐ Check that the paper surface is suitable
matter is faded. for the printer. Avoid using shiny, highly
textured, coated, or erasable typewriter
paper.
Fragments or Fragments or data, or data unrelated ❐ Check that you are using the correct
confusing data to your print job is printing. printer driver.
❐ Check that you have the correct
interface cable.
Horizontal Horizontal black streaks or smears ❐ Check for damage to the toner cartridge.
Lines print on the page. ❐ Check that the toner cartridge is
installed correctly.
Multiple Blank All pages are entirely white. ❐ Check whether you have completely
Pages removed the sealing tape from the toner
cartridge.
❐ Check for an empty toner cartridge.
❐ If none of the above are the cause of
the problem you may be experiencing
data loss. If this is the case, your
printer may need to be serviced.
No printing oc- You sent a print job, but the printer ❐ If this is the first time you have used the
curs is not producing a printed copy. printer, make sure that you have
correctly removed all of the packaging
materials from the printer.
❐ If the printer has worked previously,
check that the interface cables are
secure.
Printed image The printer output is too light. ❐ Check that the toner cartridge is
is too light positioned correctly. Verify whether the
toner is low.
❐ Check that the printing drum is
positioned correctly.

4-4
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Description Action:

Repeating Marks or shadows of characters ❐ Make sure that the paper path is not
Patterns print in a repeated pattern on each dirty.
page. ❐ Make sure that you are using paper or
transparencies designed for use with
laser printers and copy machines.
❐ Check for damage to the toner cartridge.
The toner cartridge can become
damaged from overexposure to bright
lights.
Single A page is entirely white. ❐ Make sure that the page length setting
Blank Page is correct for the paper size.
❐ Verify whether the network sharing
device is generating a blank separator
page.
❐ Check whether two or more pages fed
into the printer at the same time.
❐ Verify whether an extra page command
is being sent from your software
application. This may be caused by a
forced page break directly above or
below a natural page break.
❐ If none of the above are the cause of
the problem you may be experiencing
data loss. If this is the case, your
printer may need to be serviced.
Stains Small, black, round dots or ❐ Make sure that you are using paper that
inconsistent stains print on the page. is manufactured for use with laser
printers and copy machines.
❐ Make sure that you are printing on the
correct side of the paper.
❐ Check for buildup of toner on the printer
rollers.
❐ Check for damage to the toner cartridge.
Vertical Lines Vertical black streaks or smears ❐ Check for damage to the toner cartridge.
print on the page.

4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING

PRINTER PROBLEMS
This section contains information on the paper jam and printer problems that
may occur while using the printer, as well as the actions you can take to
solve the problems. Refer to the Copier Reference Guide for further
information on basic maintenance tasks (for example, adding toner, paper,
and staples).

Jam Recovery
When a paper jam occurs while printing is in progress and the jam recovery
feature is set to "On," the affected pages are retrieved from the hard disk
and are reprinted. Jam recovery is always on for those printing modes that
use the hard disk drive to temporarily sort image data. You can use the
"JAMRECOVERY" selection on the Configuration Menu to determine
whether jam recovery is on.

When the "JAMRECOVERY" selection on the Configuration Menu is set to

"On," the data for a page is retained on the hard drive until the page exits
the printer. This guarantees that all paper jams are recoverable. When the
"JAMRECOVERY" selection on the Configuration Menu is set to "Off," the
job may still recover from a jam. This recovery depends on where the jam
occurred and the number of pages that are being maintained by the printer.

Since more print data is retained when the "JAMRECOVERY" selection is

set to "On," printer performance may be slower than for print jobs not using
the hard disk drive.

4-6
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Solving Printer Problems

This section provides solutions to some of the printer problems you may
encounter while using your printer. Table -2 lists the basic problems that
may occur with your printer and the actions you can take to correct the
problems.

Table -2 Basic problem resolution

Condition Action
The printer does not acti- Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged in to an appropriate
vate when the main switch power outlet.
is turned on.
The printer has turned off. Turn on the main switch.
The printer is printing frag- Verify that you have
ments or confusing data. the correct interface cable.
Printed image is too light. Verify that the toner cartridge is positioned correctly. Verify whether the
toner is low.
Paper runs out. Add paper.
Stapling does not occur. Verify whether there are staples jammed in the stapler. If so, remove
the jammed staples.

Check if the staple cartridge is empty. If so, load a new staple cartridge
(after loading a new staple cartridge, staples may not be ejected the first
few times you use the stapler).

Turn over the paper in the feeder tray. If this does not correct the
problem, change to a paper stock with less curl.

4-7
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table -3 lists the printer conditions that may occur, and the action you can
take to correct the conditions.

Table -3 Printer condition resolution

Condition Action
Disk Error The printer suspends operation and waits for user confirmation when a
disk error is detected. When you confirm the disk error message, the
disk subsystem is disabled and the printer starts again without the disk
after you turn the power off and back on. When this occurs, any jobs in
progress or spooled are lost.

Note:Even if a disk error occurs, the copier function is available.

A flag is set in NVRAM to indicate that a disk error was detected.

When a power on occurs with this flag set, the printer operates without
disk services. You must perform a SYSTEM RESET to clear this flag.
Frequent misfeeds Verify that the size and weight of the paper you are using meets the
paper specifications for the printer.

Verify whether the paper is folded, wrinkled, damp, or curled.

Verify that the paper is correctly placed in the paper tray.

Check for any pieces of misfed paper or other foreign objects in the
machine.

Verify that the page size setting is correct for the paper contained in the
feeder tray.
Please open Bypass Tray The "Please open Bypass tray" message displays when a print job
specifying Bypass feed is ready to print and the Bypass tray door is
closed. This message is followed by a "No paper. Add size paper to
Bypass Tray" message. These messages are repeated when the
Bypass tray runs out of paper.

When the bypass tray is not opened within a specific time period, the
job will be canceled automatically. The time period is called the bypass
tray time-out. You can set the manual time-out using the Control Panel
menus.

To avoid manually fed paper (such as transparencies) from jamming in

the duplexer or stapling stack, manual feed print jobs cannot be
duplexed or stapled.

4-8
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Condition Action
Print Overrun Reduce the printer resolution and send the print job again. Print
overruns do not occur in Pre-image buffer mode. When you add SIMM
memory to the printer, a full page buffer of the requested paper size can
be utilized, and banding mode is not used.

When you encounter a printer problem and none of the information available
in this section solves the problem, contact your Service Representative.
Attempting to repair the printer yourself is not covered by the warranty and
may cause further damage to the printer. When you contact your Service
Representative, make sure to have the following information available:

❐ A record of the problem that occurred and the steps you took to elimi-
nate the problem.
❐ The name number of the printer.
❐ Configuration information for the printer.
❐ Information on the printer driver you are using.

4-9
TROUBLESHOOTING

ERROR MESSAGES
The ONLINE operation screen of the printer contains three fields and two
buttons. The current operation mode displays in the top field. The operating
status (which contains the READY status) displays in the next field. The
third field contains system messages and is blank during normal operation.
When a unique condition occurs, this field displays the error messages.

Table -4 lists the messages that display in this field and provides an
indication of what occurred to cause the message, and the action you can
take to eliminate the error.

Table -4 Error messages

Message Description Action

Add Staples. The machine is almost out of Place more staples in the finisher.
staples. This message is informational only.
Check tray. Set the The specified tray is open. Close the specified tray. When the
<tray> correctly. tray is closed, printing resumes
automatically.
Controller error. A hardware or software problem has Contact your service representative.
Please call for Service. occurred with the controller causing Although the printing function is not
a diagnostic error during power on. available, you can use the copy
function of the machine by pressing
the [COPY] button.

4-10
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Message Description Action

Controller disk error. A disk error has occurred during Turn off the machine and turn it on
Please call for service. printing. The current print data is again. When the error persists,
lost. A disk error can indicate a contact your service representative.
number of minor or serious Although the printing function is not
problems. available, you can use the copy
function of the machine by pressing
When a disk error first occurs, the the [COPY] button.
disk drive attempts the command
again, utilizes extensive error
correction capabilities, and remaps
transparent bad sectors. The printer
disk drive provides an error free
media, and no attempt is made to
maintain bad sector tables.

When all of these internal measures

fail, the "Disk Error" message
displays.
Cover Open A door is open on the machine. Follow the instructions that display
and close the specified door.
Duplex tray failure has The duplex tray has a mechanical Call your service representative.
occurred. problem.
Turn the machine off and back on
to use the printer for print jobs that
do not require the use of the duplex
tray.
Engine Fatal Error. An engine error occurred during Contact your service representative.
printing.

4-11
TROUBLESHOOTING

Message Description Action

Ethernet failure. An Ethernet error occurred during Check the Ethernet settings. Press
Network power up of the machine. The the [Continue] button to use the
communication is not network card was unable to machine without the network
available. establish communication with the connection.
network.

Note: When a network card is

installed in the machine, but is not
connected to a network, this error
does not display. This error occurs
only when the network card does
not initialize correclty. The
initialization process can take
several minutes to complete.
Faulty disk, or disk not A disk error (faulty disk, Press the [Continue] to restart the
found. Press disconnection) has occurred. After printer with diskless operation.
[Continue]. turning off the machine off and then
The printer restarts back on, the error message will no
with diskless operation. longer display.
Jam. A paper jam has occurred. Follow the instructions that display
to remove the paper jam from the
machine and press the [Continue]
button to resume printing.

Press the [Reset] button to cancel

the print job.
Memory overflow. The print job was too complex to be Press the [Continue] button to
interpreted by the memory available, resume printing. Only part of the
causing a memory overflow to occur data will print.
during printing.
Press the [Reset] button to cancel
the print job.

To print the job correctly, add more

memory to the machine.

4-12
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Message Description Action

No paper. Add <size> The specified tray has run out of Fill the specified tray with paper of
paper to <tray>. paper of the specified size. the specified size. When the tray is
full, printing resumes automatically.
Note: The <size> Note: When tray switching is
parameter specifies enabled and the specified paper size Press the [Continue] button to
both the paper size is available a secondary input tray, continue printing without filling the
and the paper direction. the secondary tray is used and this specified tray with paper of the
message does not display. specified size. When tray switching
is enabled, paper of an incorrect
size is used from a secondary tray.
When tray switching is not enabled,
the error displays again.

Press the [Reset] button to cancel

the print job.

Note: When tray switching is not

enabled, you can fill the specified
tray with an incorrect paper size
and press the [Continue] button to
continue printing.
No paper. Add <size> The manual feed tray has run out of Fill the manual feed tray with paper
paper Bypass tray. paper of the specified size. of the specified size. When the tray
is full, printing resumes
Note: The <size> automatically.
parameter specifies
both the paper size Press the [Reset] button to cancel
and the paper direction. the print job.
Please close the The print job does not require the Close the manual feed tray.
Bypass Tray. use of the manual feed tray, but the Printing does not continue until the
tray is open. manual feed tray is closed.
Please open the The print job requires the use of the Open the manual feed tray. When
Bypass Tray. manual feed tray. the bypass tray is not opened within
the time specified (the default is 300
seconds, which is five minutes), the
print job is cancelled and the next
job begins printing.

4-13
TROUBLESHOOTING

Message Description Action

Print overrun error. A print overrun has occurred on a Press the [Continue] button to
file that is being printed in banding resume printing.
mode. When the printer is in
banding mode, a complex page may Press the [Reset] button to cancel
not have enough time to image a the job.
band while the engine is printing the
previous band. To print the image correctly, add
more memory to the machine, or
The portion of the page after the reduce the resolution of the image
print overrun occurred will not print. and resend the job.

Printing is interrupted. A paper jam has occurred. Follow the instructions that display
Press [Continue], or to remove the paper jam from the
press [Reset] to machine and press the [Continue]
cancel the current job. button to continue printing.

Press [Reset] to cancel the print

job.

When Jam Recovery is set to Off,

the remainder of the print job is
cancelled and the next print job
prints when the paper jam is
removed.
Remove the paper in A paper jam has occurred in the Follow the instructions that display
the duplex tray. duplex tray. to remove the paper jam from the
machine and press the [Continue]
button to continue printing.

Press [Reset] to cancel the print

job.

When Jam Recovery is set to Off,

the remainder of the print job is
cancelled and the next print job
prints when the paper jam is
removed.

4-14
 TROUBLESHOOTING

Message Description Action

Remove the paper in A paper jam has occurred in the Follow the instructions that display
the staple unit. stapling area of the finisher. to remove the paper jam from the
machine and press the [Continue]
button to continue printing.

Press [Reset] to cancel the print

job.

When Jam Recovery is set to Off,

the remainder of the print job is
cancelled and the next print job
prints when the paper jam is
removed.
Serial communication A serial port communication error Check the serial port settings.
error. Please set up occurred during printing. When the serial port problem is
communication fixed, press [Reset] to cancel the
parameters again. print job.
Shift tray is full. A bin overflow occurred at the 1-bin Remove the printed output from the
Remove the copies. finisher. 1-bin finisher. When the output is
removed, printing resumes
automatically.
The spooling area of The spooling area available on the Press the [Continue] button to
the disk is full. Press disk is full. Input spooling is complete printing of the pages
[Continue] to resume temporarily disabled due to lack of already sent to the disk. The
printing. The current room on the hard disk drive. remaining data is then sent to the
print job will be split. hard disk and printed in the order
The spooling area of the disk received. Therefore, although the
contains both spooling data and entire job prints, the output is not in
page image data used for reverse the order specified.
order and duplex printing. The
spooling area is limited to allow for Press the [Reset] button to cancel
the space required by page image the print job.
data.
Note: Since the printing of all pages
already sent to the disk, including
multiple copies, must complete
before the remaining data can be
sent, the final output is collated
incorrectly.

4-15
TROUBLESHOOTING

Message Description Action

The used toner bottle is The used toner container is full. Replace the used toner container in
full. the machine. Printing cannot
resume until the used toner
container is replaced.
The used toner bottle is The used toner container is almost Replace the used toner container in
nearly full. full. the machine. This message is
informational only.
Token Ring failure. A Token Ring error occurred during Check the Token Ring settings.
Network power up of the machine. The Press the [Continue] button to use
communication is not network card was unable to the machine without the network
available. establish communication with the connection.
network.

Note: When a network card is

installed in the machine, but is not
connected to a network, this error
does not display. This error occurs
only when the network card does
not initialize correclty. The
initialization process can take
several minutes to complete.
Toner End. The toner bottle is empty. Replace the toner bottle. Printing
cannot resume until the toner bottle
is replaced.
Toner is almost used The toner bottle is almost empty. Replace the toner in the machine.
up. This message is informational only.
<tray> failure has The specified tray has a mechanical Call your service representative.
occurred. Please call problem.
for service. Turn the machine off and back on
to use the printer for print jobs that
do not require the use of this tray.
Warming up. The machine is warming up. This message is informational only.
Please wait. No action is required.

4-16
5. SPECIFICATIONS

5-1
SPECIFICATIONS

PRINTER
This section contains the electrical and hardware specifications for your
printer, including information on the feeders, finisher, and options. It also
provides information on the output capabilities of the printer.

Electrical and Hardware Specifications

This section contains the electrical and hardware specifications for your
printer, including information on the feeders, finisher, and options. Table 5-1
lists the basic printer information and specifications.

Note: All specifications are subject to change without notice.

Table 5-1.Basic printer information

Component Specification
Resolution: 300, 400, 600 dots per inch (dpi)
Paper weight: Upper tray - 60 to 105 gsm (16 to 28 lb)
Bypass tray - 60 to 157 gsm (16 to 42 lb)
Large capacity tray - 60 to 128 gsm (16 to 34 lb)
Paper capacity: Upper tray - 500 sheets or less than 53 mm, 2.08 in
Bypass tray - 40 sheets or less than 4 mm, 0.15 in
Large capacity tray - 1000 sheets or less than 120 mm, 4.72 in
Optional tray capacity: A3, 11 by 17 in - 200 sheets
B4 or smaller - 500 sheets
B5 or smaller - 200 sheets
Printing speed: 40 pages per minute at 300 or 400 dpi, long edge feed on letter size
paper
Toner replacement: Bottle exchange (700g)
Power source: 120V, 60Hz, more than 12.0A (15 or 20 AMP circuit) (U.S.)
220~240V, 50/60Hz, more than 6.5A (15 or 20 AMP circuit) (Europe)
Power consumption: Warm-up - less than 0.90 kilowatts (kw)
Stand-by - less than 0.22 kw
Maximum - less than 1.44 kw
Noise emission: Stand-by - 25 dB amperes (A)
Sound pressure level Printing - 59 dB (A)
*The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at the operator position
Noise emission: Sound Stand-by - 40 decibels (dB)
power level Printing - 69 dB (A)
* The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at the operator position

5-2
 SPECIFICATIONS

Component Specification
Standard Centronics- Standard 36-pin parallel cable and a parallel port available on the host
compatible interface: computer. Do not use a parallel cable that is longer than ten feet
(three meters).
Standard RS-232-C Standard 25-pin serial cable and a serial port available on the host
interface: computer. You can use a serial cable length of 10 feet to 50 feet (3 to
15 meters).
*Printer options: 1000 sheet tray unit
1500 sheet tray unit
Finisher bin
3-bin sorter
Memory expansion to 72 MB (including the 8MB of base memory)
Network interface card
PostScript kit
*Printer options may vary based on your country.

Use the following precautions for the power connection:

❐ Connect the machine to a dedicated power source that meets the
specifications listed in Table 5-1.
❐ Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10 percent.
❐ Make sure that the wall outlet is near the printer and easily accessible.
❐ Make sure that the printer plug is firmly inserted into the outlet.
❐ Do not set anything on top of the power cord.
Table 5-2 lists the printer size specifications.

Table 5-2. Printer size

Component Width Depth Height

Printer with input tray and paper tray unit 115 cm 65.5 cm 102.4 cm
45.3 in 25.8 in 40.4 in
Printer with finisher, and paper tray unit 172.2 cm 65.5 cm 111.0 cm
67.8 in 25.8 in 43.8 in

5-3
SPECIFICATIONS

Table 5-3 lists the printer weight specifications.

Table 5-3 Printer weight

Component Weight
Printer with input tray and paper tray unit 137.5 kg
303.2 lb
Printer with finisher, and paper tray unit 178.5 kg
393.6 lb

Table 5-4 lists the optional printer equipment specifications.

Table 5-4. Optional equipment

Component Specification
Finisher: Staple position: Top, bottom, two staples
Staple replenishment: Cartridge exchange (5,000 staples per)
Power source: DC 24V (from printer)
Power consumption: 48 W
Weight: 35 kg, 77.2 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 67.1 x 51.4 x 95.0 cm / 26.5 x 20.3 x 37.5 in
1000 sheet tray unit: Paper weight: 52 to 105 gsm (14 lb to 28 lb)
Paper capacity: 1,000 sheets (500 sheets of 80 gsm per tray)
Power source: DC 24V, 5V, AC 120V (from printer)
Power consumption: 50 W (average) to 110.5 W (maximum)
Weight: 36 kg, 79.4 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H):62.0 x 63.2 x 39.0 cm / 24.5 x 24.9 x 15.4 in
1500 sheet tray unit: Paper weight: 52 to 105 gsm (14 lb to 28 lb)
Paper capacity: 1,500 sheets (500 sheets of 80 gsm per tray)
Power source: DC 24V, 5V, AC 120V (from printer)
Power consumption: 50 W (average) to 110.5 W (maximum)
Weight: 38 kg, 83.8 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H):62.0 x 63.2 x 39.0 cm / 24.5 x 24.9 x 15.4 in
3-bin sorter: Paper weight:
(Face up) bin 1, 52 to 157 gsm (14 lb to 42 lb)
bins 2 and 3, 52 to 105 gsm (14 lb to 28 lb)

(Face down) 64 to 105 gsm (17 lb to 28 lb)

Power source: DC 24V, 5V, AC 120V (from printer)

Power consumption: 30W
Weight: 13 kg, 28.7 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 46.8 x 48.3 x 49 cm / 18.4 x 19 x 19.3 in

5-4
 SPECIFICATIONS

Component Specification
Network interface card: Required Ethernet or Token Ring card installed in the expansion
Input/Output (I/O) slot on the printer to connect to an Ethernet or Token
Ring network (refer to the Network Printer Manager and User Guide for
Printer Servers for further information on the network connection).
PostScript kit: Expansion ROM SIMM memory installed in the PostScript ROM
expansion slot.

Table 5-5 lists the environmental specifications.

Table 5-5.Environmental Information

Component Specification
Temperature: 10 to 30 degrees Centigrade
Humidity: 15 to 90 percent
Air circulation: 30 cubic meters, per person, per hour
Clearance: 28 inches above
1 inch on each side
5 inches in the rear
Altitude: No higher than 2,000 meters (6,600 feet) above
sea level

Avoid the following:

❐ Exposure to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1,500 lux)
❐ Dusty areas
❐ Areas with corrosive gasses
❐ Frequent strong vibrations
❐ Direct exposure to cold air from an air conditioner or heated air from a
heater (sudden temperature changes may cause condensation within
the printer).

5-5
SPECIFICATIONS

Printer Capabilities
This section contains information on the functionality of the printer bins as
well as information and illustrations on the output capabilities of the ma-
chine.

Tray and Bin Functionality

This section contains information on the functionality of the 500 sheet tray,
and the 1-bin finisher and 3-bin sorter.

The 500 sheet tray provides the following functionality:

❐ Face up
❐ Normal and reverse order
❐ Duplexing (face up)
❐ Document and Group sort
❐ Separation sheets.

The 1-bin finisher provides the following functionality:

❐ Face up
❐ Normal and reverse order
❐ Duplexing (face up)
❐ Document and Group sort
❐ Doggy tail separation
❐ Stapling.
Note: Stapling is not available when you specify normal order.

5-6
 SPECIFICATIONS

The 3-bin sorter (available for printing and copying functions) provides the
following functionality:
❐ Face up and face down
❐ Normal and reverse order
❐ Duplexing (face up)
❐ Document and Group sort
❐ Offset separation and separation sheets
❐ Bin selection.
Note: Offset separation is available only when job separation is set to ON
and the first bin is selected. Separations sheets are available only
when job separation is set to ON and the second or third bin is se-
lected.

Output Capabilities
This section contains information and illustrations on the output capabilities
of the machine.

Single copy

Reverse order Normal order Normal order, face Duplex

down, 3-bin sorter

5-7
SPECIFICATIONS

Single copy with job separation

Reverse order Normal order Normal order, face Duplex

down, 3-bin sorter

Multiple copies

Document sort Group sort normal Group sort normal Duplexing

reverse order order order 3-bin sorter

5-8
 SPECIFICATIONS

Multiple copies with job separation

Document sort Group sort normal Group sort normal Duplexing

reverse order order order 3-bin sorter

Note: Job separation sheets are available only when another paper tray is
loaded with paper of the same size in the opposite orientation (for
example, when the job prints on 81/2 x 11 SEF, 81/2 x 11 LEF must
be available for a separation sheet).

5-9
SPECIFICATIONS

Single copy Multiple copy

with duplexing (over 30/50 sheets) with duplexing (over 30/50 sheets)

When a duplexed When multiple copies

document exceeds 50 of a duplexed
sheets, a separation document exceed 50
sheet is inserted after sheets, a separation
every 50th sheet. sheet is inserted after
every 50th sheet.
Print stream:
1. Print duplexed Print stream (2 copies
pages 1-100. of a 104 page
2. Separation document):
sheet inserted. 1. Print pages
3. Print pages 1-100
101-104. (1st copy).
4. Separation 2. Separation
sheet inserted sheet inserted.
(end of job). 3. Print pages
1-100
(2nd copy).
4. Separation
sheet inserted.
5. Print pages
101-104
(1st copy).
6. Separation
sheet inserted.
7. Print pages
101-104
(2nd copy).
8. Separation
sheet inserted
(end of job).
Note: The threshold value of 30 or 50 sheets is set by the service techni-
cian.

5-10
 SPECIFICATIONS

INTERFACE
This section provides information on the types of connectors and cables you
use to connect your printer to your host computer. You can connect the
printer to your host computer using either a parallel or a serial port. It is your
responsibility to provide the cable necessary for the interface you want to
use to connect to your host computer. The cable is not provided with the
machine.

To use the machine with a PC network, you can connect to the network in
one of the following ways:
❐ Connect the machine to a computer that is connected to a local area
network (LAN). If the printing software for the network resides on the
computer to which you connect the machine, this computer can act as
a print server, spooling and managing print jobs for the users on the
network.
❐ Directly connect the machine to an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN by
providing the appropriate physical connection. When you connect to
the network in this manner, you do not have to dedicate a specific
computer as the print server.
Regardless of how you connect to the network, you will probably choose to
use a parallel interface for your connection as this interface can handle
more data than the serial interface in a shorter period of time.

Refer to the "Setting up the Printer" chapter in this manual for information
on how to connect the printer to your host computer.

5-11
SPECIFICATIONS

Serial Interface
The serial connection is a standard connector for serial port interfaces and
requires a standard serial cable and a serial port available on the host
computer. You can use a serial cable length of 10 feet to 50 feet (3 to 15
meters).

RS-232-C Serial Interface

The printer provides a standard RS-232-C 25-pin connector for a serial port
interface. Most IBM-compatible computers have a serial port, designated
COM1, that has a 25-pin connector.

Table 5-6 lists the 25-pin designations and associated signals for serial
communications.

Table 5-6. RS-232-C 9-pin serial pin designations

Code Signal Pin

GND Signal Ground 1
TD-232 Transmit Data 2
RD-232 Receive Data 3
(N/C) (Not Connected) 4
(N/C) (Not Connected) 5
DSR Data Set Ready 6
GND Signal Ground 7
(N/C) (Not Connected) 8
(N/C) (Not Connected) 9
(N/C) (Not Connected) 10
(N/C) (Not Connected) 11
(N/C) (Not Connected) 12
(N/C) (Not Connected) 13
(N/C) (Not Connected) 14
(N/C) (Not Connected) 15
(N/C) (Not Connected) 16
(N/C) (Not Connected) 17
(N/C) (Not Connected) 18
(N/C) (Not Connected) 19

5-12
 SPECIFICATIONS

Code Signal Pin

DTR Data Terminal Ready 20
(N/C) (Not Connected) 21
(N/C) (Not Connected) 22
(N/C) (Not Connected) 23
(N/C) (Not Connected) 24
(N/C) (Not Connected) 25

The wiring tables and diagrams below show the signal path and connection
configuration for a 25-pin to 25-pin configuration. Table 5-7 lists the 25-pin
to 25-pin signal path configuration.

Table 5-7. 25-pin printer to 25-pin computer signal path configuration

Printer Code Pin Pin PC Host Code

GND 1 1 GND
TXD 2 3 RXD
RXD 3 2 TXD
RTS 4 8 CD
CTS (NC) 5 5 8 CD
DSR 6 20 DTR
GND 7 7 GND
CD (NC) 8 4 RTS
CD (NC) 8 5 CTS
DTR 20 6 DSR

Parallel Interface
The parallel connection is a standard Centronics-compatible interface and
requires a standard 36-pin parallel cable and a parallel port available on the
host computer. Do not use a parallel cable that is longer than ten feet
(three meters). In general, parallel ports are used more frequently than
serial ports because they send data to the printer more quickly.

5-13
SPECIFICATIONS

Table 5-8 lists the Centronics parallel pin designations and associated
signals.

Table 5-8. Centronics Parallel pin designations

Code Signal Pin

STROBE Strobe 1
D<0> Data 2
D<1> Data 3
D<2> Data 4
D<3> Data 5
D<4> Data 6
D<5> Data 7
D<6> Data 8
D<7> Data 9
ACK* Acknowledge 10
BUSY Busy 11
PE Paper Error 12
SEL Select Out 13
AUTOFD* Auto Feed 14
(N/C) (Not Connected) 15
GND Ground 16
GND Ground 17
+5 VDC 5 Volts Direct Current 18
GND Ground 19
GND Ground 20
GND Ground 21
GND Ground 22
GND Ground 23
GND Ground 24
GND Ground 25
GND Ground 26
GND Ground 27
GND Ground 28
GND Ground 29
GND Ground 30
INIT* Initialization 31
FAULT* Fault 32
(N/C) (Not Connected) 33
(N/C) (Not Connected) 34
(N/C) (Not Connected) 35
SELIN Select In 36

5-14
 SPECIFICATIONS

MEDIA
To ensure good printing results, use only paper and transparencies that are
designed for use with laser printers.

Note: Make sure that any paper you use is free of wrinkles, rips, dust and
oil residue. Using print media that does not meet the media guide-
lines contained in this section can cause damage to your printer.

5-15
A. FONTS

A-1
FONTS

FONTS
This section contains information on the fonts that are supported by the
printer. This section also contains information on how to select supported
fonts and how to use additional fonts.

Fonts are the style of characters you can use for your printed documents,
for example, Times New Roman (abcdefg ABCDEFG) and Wingdings
( HIJKLMN$%&'()*). This section describes the fonts available with
the machine.

The two basic types of fonts are scaleable and bitmap. When you send a
document to the printer, you can specify that you want the printer to set the
scaleable fonts to the size you want. This allows you to print scaleable font
characters using almost any available font size. Bitmap fonts are predefined
and are not scaled or changed during printing. However, for each bitmap
font, you can specify a point size (height of the font), pitch (number of
characters per inch), and orientation (portrait or landscape).

Using Fonts
This section contains information on the fonts that are supported by the
printer, as well as information on how you can use these fonts in your print
jobs.

A-2
 FONTS

Built-In Fonts
Built-in fonts are provided with the printer for both the PCL 5e and Post-
Script printer languages.

Note: The PostScript fonts are only available when you have the PostScript
option.

PCL 5e Built-in Fonts - the PCL 5e built-in fonts consist of both scaleable
and bitmap fonts. The supported fonts and symbol sets are listed in this
section.
❐ The following PCL 5e scaleable fonts are provided with the printer:

A-3
FONTS

The following Symbol Sets, used for scaleable typefaces, are provided with
the printer:

♦ ASCII ♦ Legal ♦ PS Text

♦ Desktop ♦ Math-8 ♦ Roman-8
♦ ISO French ♦ MC Text1 ♦ Symbol1 (Συµβολ)
♦ ISO German ♦ Microsoft Publishing ♦ Ventura International
♦ ISO Italian ♦ Names ♦ Ventura Math
♦ ISO Latin 1 ♦ PC-8 ♦ Ventura US
♦ ISO Latin 2 ♦ PC-8 DN ♦ Windows 3.0 Latin 1
♦ ISO Latin 5 ♦ PC-850 ♦ Windows Latin 1
♦ ISO Norwegian ♦ PC-852 ♦ Windows Latin 2
♦ ISO Spanish ♦ PC-Turk ♦ Windows Latin 5
♦ ISO Swedish ♦ PI Font ♦ Wingdings1
♦ ISO United Kingdom ♦ PS Math

❐ The PCL 5e Line Printer bitmap font is provided with the printer. This
bitmap font is available in medium, 16.65 pitch, 8.5 points, landscape
and portrait, in six typefaces.
PostScript Fonts - the optional PostScript built-in fonts consist of Type I
scaleable fonts. These include text fonts, Zapf Dingbats, and Symbol fonts.
For Type I fonts, the character set determines which characters and special
symbols are available with a specific font.

The text fonts use the ISO Latin 1 character set, which includes the
standard alphabet of all uppercase and lowercase letters, standard punctua-
tion characters, the digits 0 through 9, and some special characters. The
Zapf Dingbats character set includes characters such as special bullets and
checkmarks. The Symbol character set includes math symbols and Greek
characters. The printer can interpret any PostScript Level I or Level II page
description file.

A-4
 FONTS

In addition, depending on the software you use to create the document you
want to print, the optional PostScript language provides you with the capa-
bility to manipulate the text contained in a PostScript file, allowing you to
perform tasks such as stretching, rotating, bending, defining the shape,
scaling, and clipping the text.

❐ The following PostScript Type I scaleable fonts are provided with the
printer when you have the PostScript option:

♦ Courier ♦ Helvetica Narrow Bold ♦ New Century

♦ Courier Bold ♦ Helvetica Narrow Bold Schoolbook Bold
Oblique Italic
♦ Courier Bold ♦ Helvetica Narrow Oblique
♦ New Century
Oblique Schoolbook Italic
♦ Courier Oblique ♦ ITC Avant Garde Book ♦ Palatino Roman
♦ Helvetica ♦ ITC Avant Garde ♦ Palatino Bold
Book Oblique
♦ Helvetica Bold ♦ ITC Avant Garde ♦ Palatino Bold Italic
Demi
♦ Helvetica Bold ♦ ITC Avant Garde ♦ Palatino Italic
Oblique Demi Oblique
♦ Helvetica Oblique ♦ ITC Bookman Demi ♦ Symbol (Συµβολ)
♦ Helvetica Condensed ♦ ITC Bookman Demi
Italic
♦ Helvetica Condensed ♦ ITC Bookman Light ♦ Times Roman
Bold
♦ Helvetica Condensed ♦ ITC Bookman Light ♦ Times Roman Bold
Bold Oblique Italic
♦ Helvetica Condensed ♦ ITC Zapf Chancery Medium ♦ Times Roman Bold Italic
Oblique Italic
♦ Helvetica Narrow ♦ ITC Zapf Dingbats ♦ Times Roman Italic
( ✤✽■▼▲)
♦ New Century
Schoolbook Roman
♦ New Century
Schoolbook Bold

A-5
FONTS

Additional Fonts
Additional fonts are available as follows:
❐ When you print a document, the software used to create the document
may download additional fonts. These downloaded fonts can include
TrueType fonts available from Windows and Macintosh software.
Note: When you have the PostScript option, documents previously format-
ted with TrueType fonts print using PostScript Type I fonts when the
TrueType font is not available. The machine automatically substitutes
the TrueType font with the closest matching PostScript Type I font.

❐ You can download additional soft fonts from diskettes to your printer
using a software utility designed for this purpose. Software of this type
includes Adobe Type Manager, which you can use to download Post-
Script soft fonts as necessary.

Downloading Soft Fonts (PCL only)

Before downloading soft fonts, consider the following:
❐ Downloaded fonts take up RAM and hard disk memory on your printer.
Therefore, you may want to limit the number of fonts you use at any
one time. If you need to use numerous fonts other than those resident
on the printer, you should expand the printer RAM.
❐ When more than one person is using the machine as a printer, you
should decide which fonts will be downloaded, and the ID numbers to
be used, before they are downloaded. When the printer is connected
to a network, the System Administrator should be consulted before any
fonts are downloaded.

A-6
 FONTS

❐ When you download soft fonts, make sure to follow the directions pro-
vided with your utility software. Regardless of what utility you use, you
must assign the font a status as follows:
♦ Font Status - The font status is designated as either temporary or
permanent. When you assign temporary status to a font, it remains
available until the printer is reset, the font is deleted, the job is
finished, or the printer is turned off. When you assign permanent
status to a soft font, it remains available until the font is deleted or
the printer is turned off.

Deleting Soft Fonts

Soft fonts are deleted when the following conditions occur:
❐ The printer is turned off.
❐ A new font is downloaded using the same ID number as an existing
font.
Selecting Fonts
You can select fonts for use in your print job as follows:
❐ Using your document software.
❐ Using the printer control panel.
Note: The printer defaults to the Control Panel settings for the font when no
software commands and no PCL printer commands are received.

A-7
B. MEMORY AND OPTIONS

B-1
MEMORY AND OPTIONS

MEMORY
This section contains information on the memory provided with, and avail-
able for, the machine. It also contains instructions on installing additional
DRAM SIMM modules.

Configuration
The machine is provided with an internal fixed hard disk and supports ROM
and RAM memory in static and expandable configurations.

Hard Disk
The machine is provided with an IDE hard disk. The disk is used to store
downloaded fonts, spool print input data, and store print image data, as
required for face-up output, and duplex printing.

B-2
 MEMORY AND OPTIONS

Partitioning
The hard disk partitioning is used as follows:
❐ Permanent Partition - used by PCL 5e for font and macro storage. This
partition is formatted by an explicit command received from the printer
Control Panel.
❐ PostScript Partition - used exclusively by the PostScript option. This
separate partition allows PostScript to format its disk as required by the
PostScript command programs without affecting the other disk parti-
tions.

Dynamic Random Access Memory

The base configuration of the machine includes eight megabytes (8 MB) of
onboard Dynamic Random Access Memory (DRAM). You can request
additional DRAM SIMM modules. Up to 64 MB of additional DRAM can be
requested for a maximum of 72 MB of DRAM. The DRAM specifications
are as follows:
❐ 72 pin
❐ 8, 16, or 32 MB DRAM SIMM module.
❐ 70 nanoseconds or faster.
Note: The machine allocates PostScript memory according to the recom-
mendations specified by Adobe. Based on the amount of RAM in-
stalled, a fixed amount of RAM is allocated for storage of incoming
input data.

Installing DRAM SIMM Modules

Installation of DRAM SIMM modules is performed by a service technician.

B-3
MEMORY AND OPTIONS

POSTSCRIPT
This section contains general information on the optional PostScript function
available with the machine. This information includes supported fonts,
supported languages, and programming references.

Features
The PostScript option is a page description language from Adobe Systems,
Inc. that is available with many IBM compatible and Macintosh software
applications. Your software application can use the PostScript language to
provide page information to the printer. During printing, this information is
interpreted by the printer to produce the specified page output.

The PostScript option supports Adobe PostScript Level II, provides 39

built-in typefaces, and can print each typeface in any point size.

The PostScript option also supports the downloading of PostScript Type I

fonts and includes a rasterizer that allows you to download TrueType fonts
as soft fonts. Resident PostScript TrueType fonts are not supported.

In addition, depending on the software you use to create the document you
want to print, the PostScript language provides you with the capability to
manipulate the text contained in a PostScript file, allowing you to perform
tasks such as stretching, rotating, bending, defining the shape, scaling, and
clipping the text.

Note: The PostScript language is different than other languages that use
control codes and basic printer commands such as Line Feed and
Form Feed are not used or understood. Therefore, you cannot use
the PostScript option with software applications that do not support
the PostScript language.

For more information on the PostScript language, ☛refer to the PostScript

Language Reference Manual.

B-4
 MEMORY AND OPTIONS

NETWORK INTERFACE
This section contains general information on the Network Interface option,
including the supported networks and protocols.

Features
The machine provides one expansion I/O slot that you use for network
connectivity. This I/O slot supports an Ethernet or Token Ring card. The
optional network connection card is installed by your service representative.

The following are the network operating systems and protocols supported by
the machine.
❐ IPX/SPX (Novell NetWare)
❐ TCP/IP
❐ Apple

For more information on network connectivity and how to connect the

machine to the network using a parallel or serial cable, ☛ refer to the
"Setting Up the Printer" chapter in this manual. For detailed information on
using the machine with a network connection, ☛ refer to the network
interface documentation provided with this option.

B-5
C. TRAY SPECIFICATIONS

C-1
TRAY SPECIFICATIONS

NORTH AMERICA TRAY SPECIFICATIONS

This section contains a table that illustrates the North America input tray and
duplex tray specifications for the machine. The following symbols are used
in this table:

}– Available for standard input tray operation

– Available for manual input tray operation
‹ – Available for duplex tray operation
V – Not available

Table C-1. North America paper tray specifications

Paper Name Standard Manual Bank Input LCT Duplex

Input Tray Input Tray Tray
DLT (11"x17") }  } V ‹
LG (81/2"x14") }  } V ‹
LT-SRT (81/2"x11") }  } V ‹
LT-LONG (11"x81/2") } V } } ‹
EXEC-SRT (71/4"x101/2") V  V V V
HLT-SRT (51/2"x81/2") V  V V V
HLT-LONG (81/2"x51/2") }*1 V V V V
A3 }  } V ‹
B4 }  } V ‹
FOLIO (81/4"x13") }  } V ‹
A4-SRT }  } V ‹
A4-LONG } V } } ‹
B5-SRT V  V V ‹
A5-SRT V  V V V
A5-LONG } V V V ‹
A6-SRT V  V V V
F/GL (8"x13") }  } V ‹
Foolscap (81/2"x13") }  } V ‹
*1.If equipping the 3-bin tray, this is not available
You can use B5 in the manual tray only. When you use the machine as a
printer, you cannot perform a duplex operation using the manual tray.

C-2
 TRAY SPECIFICATIONS

EUROPEAN TRAY SPECIFICATIONS

This section contains a table that illustrates the European input tray and
duplex tray specifications for the machine. The following symbols are used
in this table:

} - Available for standard input tray operation

 - Available for manual input tray operation
‹ - Available for duplex tray operation
V - Not available

Table C-2. European paper tray specifications

Paper Name Standard Manual Bank Input LCT Duplex

Input Tray Input Tray Tray
DLT (11"x17") }  } V ‹
LG (81/2"x14") }  V V ‹
LT-SRT (81/2"x11") }  } V ‹
LT-LONG (11"x81/2") } V } } ‹
EXEC-SRT (71/4"x101/2") V  V V V
HLT-SRT (51/2"x81/2") V  V V V
HLT-LONG (81/2"x51/2") }*1 V V V V
A3 }  } V ‹
B4 }  } V ‹
FOLIO (81/4"x13") }  } V ‹
A4-SRT }  } V ‹
A4-LONG } V } } ‹
B5-SRT }  V V ‹
B5-LONG } V } V ‹
A5-SRT V  V V V
A5-LONG } V V V ‹
A6-SRT V  V V V
F/GL (8"x13") }  } V ‹
Foolscap (81/2"x13") }  } V ‹
*1.If equipping the 3-bin tray, this is not available
When you use the machine as a printer, you cannot perform a duplex
operation using the manual tray.

C-3
GLOSSARY

G-1
GLOSSARY

ACRONYMS
This section contains a list of the acronyms you may use while working with
the printer and the printer documentation.

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ATP AppleTalk Transaction Protocol

bpi bits per inch

bps bits per second

cpi characters per inch

CPK Control Panel Kernel

CPU Central Processing Unit

CR Carriage Return

^D End of job indicator for PostScript

DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module

DMA Direct Memory Access

DOS Disk Operating System

dpi dots per inch

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

EBDCIC Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code

EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Mem-

ory

ENET Ethernet network

EOF End of File

G-2
 GLOSSARY

EOS End of Session

ESC Escape (ASCII character 0x1b)

ETX End of Text (ASCII character 0x03)

FF Form Feed (ASCII character 0x0c)

FIS Font Interchange Standard

GRS Graphics Services Module

HP Hewlett Packard

HPGL/2 Hewlett Packard Graphics Language level 2

IBM International Business Machines

I/O Input/Output

ips inches per second

IPX/SPX Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Ex-

change

LAN Local Area Network

LED Light Emitting Diode

LF Line Feed Character

LLAP LocalTalk Link Access Protocol

LPD line printer daemon

lpi lines per inch

MB Megabyte

MPT Multi-Purpose Tray

G-3
GLOSSARY

NIC Network Interface Card

NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory

OS Operating System

OSS Operating System Software

PC Personal Computer

PCL Printer Control Language

PCL5 Printer Control Language - Version 5

PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Associa-

tion

PDL Printer Description Language

PJL Printer Job Language

ppm pages per minute

RAM Random Access Memory

ROM Read Only Memory

SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface

SDD Serial Device Driver

SIMM Single Inline Memory Module

SOH Start of Header (ASCII character 0x01)

spi spots per inch

STX Start of Text (ASCII character 0X02)

TES terminate and stay resident terminal emulation program

UCS Universal Character Set

G-4
 GLOSSARY

UCSB Universal Character Set Buffer

VM Virtual Memory

XON Transmit On (ASCII character 0x11)

XOFF Transmit Off (ASCII character 0x13)

TERMS
This section contains a list of the terms you may use while working with the
printer and the printer documentation.

A3 Standard international paper size (11.69 in by 16.54 in

or 297 mm by 420 mm).

A4 Standard international paper size (8.27 in by 11.69 in or

210 mm by 297 mm).

AppleTalk Local area network (LAN) from Apple Computer that is

built into Macintosh computers.

application Software program used to process information.

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange.

Standard 7- or 8-bit code representing alphanumeric
and numerous nonprinting character by assigning to
each a binary number from 128 available characters.
Used for the exchange of information among data com-
munication and data processing systems and their as-
sociated equipment.

asynchronous Data communication transmission that are controlled by

start and stop characters, causing the time intervals
between the transmission of data blocks to be unequal
in length.

G-5
GLOSSARY

B4 Standard international paper size (9.84 in by 13.9 in or

250 mm by 353 mm).

baud rate Establishes the transmission speed of data for a serial

connection between the machine and a host computer.

bit Abbreviation for a binary digit. This is the smallest unit

of information recognized by a computer.

bitmap font Font that is predefined and not scaleable or changeable

when printing.

bps Bits per second. The rate at which data is transferred

during serial communication.

buffer Area of memory used for storage during the transfer of

data between two devices. built-in fonts Fonts provided
with the printer (also called internal fonts)

byte Number of bits (usually fixed at 8) that are processed

as a single binary value. C5 Standard international
envelope size (6.38 in by 9.02 in or 162 mm by 229
mm).

Centronics Standard type of parallel interface connector used to

connect the machine to a host computer.

character set PostScript term that refers to specific sets of letters,

numbers, punctuation marks, and special symbols.

configuration Settings required to allow your computer to communi-

cate properly with the machine. Also describes the
process of specifying the required settings.

cpi Characters per inch. Expression of the fixed-pitch font

size that allows the font to be set in increments of one
horizontal inch. See also pitch.

G-6
 GLOSSARY

data bits Serial port setting that allows you to specify the number
of bits used in print data.

default Value retained in the memory for use when input is not
specified by the user for a required variable.

DIN-8 Standard serial connector used to connect the machine

to a host computer.

Document (DDL) Printer language used to describe print jobs to a

Description laser printing system. DDL describes the input (type,
Language format, characteristics), performs the processing func-
tions (logical processing), and describes the output
(type, format, font selection, accounting options) for an
entire print job.

dot Printed element (in pixels). The number of dots that

print in an inch is used to measure the total resolution
(300 dots per inch).

dpi Dots per inch. The number of dots that print in an inch.
These are used to form a character or graphic on the
printed page.

drivers Software used to provide printer characteristics. Printer

drivers convert software commands into printer lan-
guage.

duplex Printing on two sides of a single sheet of paper.

emulation Simulating of the function of another software or hard-

ware product.

Embedded Option supported by some applications allowing a user

Printer to manually enter printer commands.
Commands

Escape PCL 5 commands beginning with an escape character

Sequence that are used to control printer functions. These com-
mands are usually sent by applications. However, they
can be sent manually by the user.

G-7
GLOSSARY

Ethernet Local area network (LAN) that provides the capability to

transmit data between devices through a cable.

fixed-pitch font Font for which each character is the same width.

font Set of characters for a specific typeface family, each

having the same point size, style, orientation, and
weight.

font character Symbol set, spacing, pitch, point size, style, stroke
istics weight, and typeface that specify the appearance of a
font.

font width The horizontal spacing of a font.

hexadecimal System of numbering using a base of 16.

image area Area of the printed page that can contain graphics or
text.

initialize Setting all computer system information to the starting

or default values.

internal fonts Fonts provided with the printer (also called built-in
fonts).

IPX Internetwork packet Exchange. Protocol that provides

connectionless service between nodes to transport
higher layer packets. Connectionless service is com-
munication in one direction that does not require an
acknowledgement (delivery is assumed).

keyword Required portion of a command.

landscape Printing orientation in which graphics and text are

printed parallel to the long edge of the paper.

Legal Standard international paper size (8.5 in by 14 in or 216

mm by 356 mm).

Letter Standard international paper size (8.5 in by 11 in or 216

mm by 279 mm).

G-8
 GLOSSARY

line feed Control character used to specify that the printer begins
printing in the current character position on the following
line. Also used to specify a line end.

line printer (LPD) Common print protocol.

daemon

long-edge feed Moving the paper through the machine in the direction
of the paper length.

Megabyte (MB) Unit made up of one million bytes.

monochrome Printing in one color.

network Hardware and software system that allows multiple us-

ers to share common resources, including printers, us-
ing connected computers and terminals.

Network Optional processor board (NIC) that provides the ma-

Interface card chine with an interface to a network.

offset Printed sets of output placed in varying positions in the

output bin to separate collated sets.

operating system Software that controls the low-level tasks in a computer

system (for example, input or output and memory man-
agement). The operating system is active when the
computer is running.

orientation Specifies whether the lines on the printed output are

parallel to the long edge of the paper (landscape) or the
short edge of the paper (portrait).

origin Upper left corner of a page.

Page (PDL) Printer language used to describe pages within

Description a print job to a laser printing system. PDL describes
Language the input (type, format, characteristics), performs the
processing functions (logical processing), and describes
the output (type, format, font selection, accounting op-
tions) for a page within a print job.

G-9
GLOSSARY

page end Command character (form feed) that terminates the

current page.

parameter Portion of a command, other than the keyword. See

also keyword.

parity Serial port setting used to detect transmission errors.

physical page Actual page size used during printing.

pica 1. Unit of measurement equal to twelve points

(approximately 1/6 of an inch).
2. 10-pitch typeface with ten characters per inch each
12 points in height. See also point.

pitch Width of a fixed-pitch font specified in characters per

horizontal inch.

pixel Acronym for a single element of a picture. This is the

smallest addressable point on a bitmapped screen to
which color and intensity can be assigned.

point A unit of measurement equal to 0.0139 of an inch.

Used to express type, size, and leading spaces. There
are 12 points to a pica and approximately 72 points to
an inch. See also pica.

PostScript Printer language (PS) created by Adobe Systems, Inc.

printer driver Software that allows a host computer to communicate

with a printer.

proportional- Characteristic of a font family in which characters are

space font assigned individual horizontal spacing. Proportionally
spaced fonts are used by publishing applications to
improve appearance and readability.

protocol Controls the signals used to establish the serial connec-

tion between the machine and a host computer.

queue Managed database of documents waiting to be proc-

essed.

G-10
 GLOSSARY

RAM Random Access Memory. Portion of memory where

print data, macros, and downloaded fonts are stored.

raster graphics Graphic created using a pattern of printed dots.

Raster image (RIP) Processor board that builds a raster image that is
processor passed to the printer.

rasterization Transformation of an image onto a page using bitmap

dots.

resolution Number of dots per inch (dpi) or spots per inch (spi).
The greater the number of dots or spots per inch, the
higher the resolution and the clearer the image. The
terms dots, spots, and pixels are synonymous.

RS-232 Standard serial interface connector used to connect the

machine to an IBM host computer.

RS-422 Standard serial interface connector used to connect the

machine to an Apple host computer.

scale Adjusting font or image size according to specified pro-

portions.

set Multiple copies of a single print job.

short-edge feed Moving the paper through the printer in the direction of
the paper width (the short side of a sheet of paper).

simplex printing Printing on one side of a single sheet of paper.

soft font Fonts available on diskettes for downloading to the

memory of the printer (also called downloadable fonts).

spacing Fixed or user-selected distance between individual

printed characters on a horizontal line.

G-11
GLOSSARY

spooling Process of releasing data from main memory and tem-

porarily storing it until a peripheral device is ready to
accept it (for example, storing print data before sending
it to a printer).

spot Single element of a picture element imaged by the

printer (also called a dot or a pixel).

SPX Sequenced Packet Exchange. Connection-oriented

protocol used to guarantee delivery and error control of
packets. The sender returns an acknowledgment of
receipt or failure.

statement Detailed instructions contained in a program step that is

written according to specific rules called syntax.

string Connected sequence of alphanumeric characters

treated as one unit of data by a program.

stroke weight Thickness of a character (for example, medium or bold).

style Shape of a font (for example, upright or italic).

symbol set Specialized sets of characters available for a specific

font.

syntax Rules governing the structure of expressions contained

in a programming language.

TES Terminate and stay resident terminal emulation pro-

gram. The printer server supports this protocol and
allows the user to use TEX for printer server login.

throughput Measure of the number of pages printed during a spe-

cific unit of time, usually expressed as pages per min-
ute.

Treatment Emphasis placed on a font (for example, italic or bold).

Treatment describes both style and stroke weights.

truncated Cut off before completion, as when data transfer from a

host to a printer is canceled before all data is transmit-
ted.

G-12
 GLOSSARY

typeface Features that give the font type a uniform appearance.

weight Perceived blackness of a character affected by varying

the width of the stroke. Weight is expressed in general
terms as either bold or roman.

G-13
A217

Operating Instructions
 na-1

INTRODUCTION
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and mainte-
nance of this copier. To get maximum versatility from this copier all opera-
tors should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please
keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.

Please read the next section before using this copier. It contains important
information related to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT
PROBLEMS.

SAFETY INFORMATION
When using your copier, the following safety precautions should always be
followed.

Important Symbols Used In This Manual

In this manual, the following important symbols are used.

$WARNING: Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or

even death.
$CAUTION: Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to
property.

Examples
$ A situation that requires you take care.

B Do NOT carry out the operation represented by the symbol >.

This example means "Do not take apart.

C A ● means you MUST perform this operation.

This example means "You must remove the wall plug."

i
 na-1

$ WARNINGS:
• Only connect the machine to the power source described on the

> inside front cover of this manual.

• Avoid multi-wiring
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it, pull it hard or bend it more than
necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Do not plug or unplug the power cord with your hands wet. Other-
wise, an electric shock might occur.

@
• Make sure the wall outlet is near the machine and freely accessible
so that in event of an emergency it can be unplugged easily.

• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those specified in

B this manual. Some parts of the machine are at a high voltage and
could give you an electric shock. Also, if the machine has laser
systems, direct (or indirect) reflected eye contact with the laser
beam may cause serious eye damage. When the machine needs to
be checked, adjusted, or repaired, contact your service repre-
sentative.
• Do not take apart or attempt any modifications to this machine.
There is a risk of fire, electric shock, explosion or loss of sight. If
the machine has laser systems, there is a risk of serious eye
damage.

• If the machine looks damaged or breaks down, smoke is coming

C out, there is a strange smell or anything looks unusual, immediately
turn off the main and AC switches then unplug the power cord from
the wall. Do not continue using the machine in this condition.
Contact your service representative.
• If metal, liquid or foreign matter falls into the machine, turn off the
main switches and unplug the main power cord. Contact your serv-
ice representive. Do not keep using the machine with a fault or
defect.

>
• Do not put any metal objects or containers holding water (e.g.vases,
flowerpots, glasses) on the machine. If the contents fall inside the
machine, a fire or electric shock could occur.

• Do not incinerate used toner or toner containers. Toner dust might

D ignite when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of the used toner
containers according to local regulations for plastics.

ii
 na-1

$ CAUTIONS:
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. A fire or an electric
> shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it
topples over, it could cause injury.

@ • After you move the machine, fix it with the caster fixture. Othewise,
the machine might move or come down to cause a personal injury.

• When you move the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall
C outlet to avoid fire or electric shock.
• When the machine will not be used for a long time, unplug the
power cord.

E
• When you pull out the plug from the socket, grip the plug to avoid
damaging the cord and causing fire or electric shock.

@
• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a
continuous air turnover.

>
• Do not re-use stapled paper. Do not use aluminum foil, carbon-con-
taining paper or other conductive paper. Otherwise, a fire might
occur.

? • When removing misfed paper, do not touch the fusing section

because it could be very hot.

$ • This machine has been tested for safety using this supplier’s parts
and consumables. We recommend you only use these specified
supplies.

$ • Do not eat or swallow toner.

• Keep toner or toner containers out of reach of children.

iii
 na-2

WHERE IS IT &
WHAT IS IT
SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................. 3
COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR ............................................................................................... 4
OPERATION PANEL ................................................................................................................. 6
Hard Keys............................................................................................................................................... 6
Touch Panel Display ............................................................................................................................. 8

1
 na-2

2
 na-2

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1

4
5

1. Document feeder Insert a stack of originals here. They will be fed

(Option) automatically.
2. Copy tray Completed copies are delivered here.
(Option)
3. Finisher Sorts, stacks, and staples copies.
(Option)
4. 1500-sheet tray unit Holds 1500 sheets of copy paper.
(Option)
5. 1000-sheet tray unit Holds 1000 sheets of copy paper.
(Option)

❐ Other options: platen cover and key counter

3
 na-2

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR

4
3
2 5
1

7
8

10

13

11
12

14
15

4
 na-2

COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR

1. Copy tray (option) Completed copies are delivered here. Regarding

the capacity of the tray, ☛ see page 166.
2. Main switch Switches the copier between on and standby con-
ditions.
3. Auto response When someone comes close to the copier, it will
(human) sensor automatically switch from Low Power mode to
standby mode.
4. Platen cover (option) Lower this cover over originals for copying.
5. Exposure glass* Position originals here face down for copying.
*After turning off the main switch, the exposure glass might be hot
because of the anticondensation function. This is not a problem.

6. Front cover Open to access the inside of the copier.

7. Unit for two-sided Makes two-sided copies.
copies (Duplex unit)

8. Paper tray Holds 500 sheets of copy paper.

9. Bypass tray Use to copy onto OHP sheets, adhesive labels,
translucent paper, post cards, and non-standard
size paper.
10. Large capacity tray Holds 1,000 sheets of copy paper.
11. Right cover of Open to remove misfed paper.
the optional tray unit
12. Key counter holder Insert the optional key counter here.
13. Operation panel Operator controls and touch panel are located
here. ☛ See the next page.
14. Toner bottle Replace the toner bottle when " Add Toner"f
is displayed on the display. ☛ See page 120.
15. Fusing unit Fuses the copy image to the paper. When ac-
cessing the inside of the copier, use caution.
This unit may be very hot.

5
 na-2

OPERATION PANEL

OPERATION PANEL
Hard Keys
2 3 4

1. Contrast Dial 5. Program key

Changes the brightness of the Press to select the program
display. mode. ☛ See page 54.

2. User Tools key 6. Job Recall key

Changes the basic settings and Use to recall your previous copy
copy features. ☛ See page 134. settings. ☛ See page 53.

3. Guidance key
Shows guidance for functions.
☛ See page 28.

4. Touch Panel Display

☛ See page 26.

6
 na-2

OPERATION PANEL

5 6 7

12 11 10

7. Clear Modes/Low Power Mode 10. Clear/Stop key

key While entering numbers, press to
Press to clear the previously en- cancel a number you have en-
tered copy job settings. Also use tered. While copying, press to
to switch to and from Low Power stop copying.
mode. ☛ See pages 24 and 137.
11. Enter key
8. Interrupt key Use to enter data in selected
Press to make interrupt copies modes.
during a copy run.
☛ See page 53. 12. Number keys
Use to enter the desired number
9. Start key of copies and data for selected
Press to start copying. Use to set modes.
the Auto Start. ☛ See page 37.

7
 na-2

OPERATION PANEL

Touch Panel Display

without optional finisher

Message area
Copier status and messages
Original Counter
Number of originals scanned so far.
Copy Set Total
Total number of copy
sets entered.

Copy Set Counter

Number of copy sets
made so far.

with optional finisher

Message area
Original Counter

Copy Set Total

Copy Set Counter

8
 na-2

OPERATION PANEL

❐ Regarding detailed information about each key and its functions, ☛ see page
12.
❐ For how to use the touch panel display, ☛ see page 26.

To save paper resources, the following modes are selected as a default set-
ting as shown on the previous page.
[Duplex/Series Copies]
Duplex (from one-sided originals to two-sided copies)
Number of originals: Even
Orientation: Top to Top
[Adjust Image]
Margin Adjustment
(0.2" width margin for right side of back side)
❐ You can change the above default setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages
141 and 143.
❐ To change the Duplex mode settings, touch the [Duplex/Series Copies] key
and change the setting.
❐ To change the Margin Adjustment settings, touch the [Adjust Image] key and
change the setting.

9
 na-2

OPERATION PANEL

10
 na-3

WHAT YOU CAN DO

WITH THIS COPIER

11
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

FUNCTIONS
without optional finisher
☛ See page 37. ☛ See page 37. ☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 39.

☛ See page 43.

☛ See page 41.

☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 36.

☛ See page 48.

☛ See page 44.

☛ See page 86. ☛ See page 70. ☛ See page 55.

☛ See page 74. ☛ See page 61.
with optional finisher
☛ See page 37. ☛ See page 37. ☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 39.

☛ See page 43.

☛ See page 41.

☛ See page 38.

☛ See page 36.

☛ See page 100.

☛ See page 96.

☛ See page 86. ☛ See page 70. ☛ See page 55.

☛ See page 74. ☛ See page 61.

12
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

Getting Help On The Display

☛ See page 28.

Adjusting Copy Image Density

☛ See page 37.

Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size

☛ See page 39.

Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction Ratios

☛ See page 41.

Selecting Original Type Setting

☛ See page 43.

Sorting Into Sets

☛ See page 44.

13
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page

☛ See page 48.

Copying From The Bypass Tray

☛ See page 50.

Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else

☛ See page 53.

Recalling Job Settings

☛ See page 53.

Storing Your Copy Settings In Memory

☛ See page 54.

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

☛ See page 55.

14
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps

☛ See page 56.
Using the [+] and [-] keys or Number keys

Stretching and squeezing the image

Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size

☛ See page 58.
Fitting the image in the copy area as it is

Stretching and squeezing the image into the copy area

15
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

Making Two-sided Copies

☛ See page 61.
From one-sided originals

From two-sided originals

From book originals (Single) (Multi)

Making One-sided Copies

☛ See page 68.

16
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

Combining Originals Into One Copy

☛ See page 70.

From 2 one-sided
originals

From 4 one-sided
originals

From 8 one-sided
originals

From 16 one-sided
originals

Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your Copies

☛ See page 74.

17
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies

☛ See page 75.

Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies

☛ See page 79.

Printing Dates And Page Numbers

☛ See page 81.

18
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

Copying The Image Twice On One Page

☛ See page 86.

Erasing The Center And The Border (Erase Center/Border)

☛ See page 88.

19
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

Adjusting The Margin

☛ See page 89.

Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy

☛ See page 91.

Reversing Black And White

☛ See page 93.

Merging Images

☛ See page 94.

20
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

Optional Finishing

Sorting into sets (123, 123, 123) ☛ See page 96.

Stapling ☛ See page 100.

21
 na-3

FUNCTIONS

22
 na-4

BASICS
STARTING THE COPIER............................................................................................................ 24
When The Main Switch Is In The Stand-by Position .......................................................................... 24
When The Display Is Off And The Indicator Of The Clear Modes/Low Power Mode Key Is Lit . 24
When The Copier Is Set For User Codes ............................................................................................ 25

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY....................................................................................... 26

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY ............................................................................................ 28
RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS....................................................... 29
Recommended Originals .................................................................................................................... 29
Non-recommended Originals For The Optional Document Feeder ............................................. 29

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS................................................................... 30

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF).............. 30
SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF) ......... 32

23
 na-4

STARTING THE COPIER

STARTING THE COPIER

When The Main Switch Is In The Stand-by Position

.
1 Turn on the main switch.

. for the copier to warm up. Dur-

2 Wait
ing the warm-up period (within 140
seconds), "u Please wait." ap-
pears on the display.

.After warm-up, "v

3 pears on the display.
Ready" ap-

When The Display Is Off And The Indicator Of The

Clear Modes/Low Power Mode Key Is Lit
The copier is in Low Power mode.

1 Hold down the Clear Modes/Low

Power Mode key until the indica-
tor is not lit. The machine will
return to the standby condition.
❐ For details about Low Power mode,
☛ see page 137.

24
 na-4

STARTING THE COPIER

❐ The following actions will also make the copier ready:

♦ The copier detects anyone operating it.
♦ Opening or closing the optional platen cover.
♦ Opening or closing the optional document feeder.
♦ Setting originals in the optional document feeder.
♦ Opening or closing the bypass tray.
♦ Pressing any key.

When The Copier Is Set For User Codes

1 The display instructs you to input

your user code, as shown in the
illustration.

2 Input your user code (6 digits)

using the Number keys.
1 2 3

4 5 6
❐ To change the entered code, touch the
Start
[C] key or press the Clear/Stop key.
7 8 9
Then, enter the new code. Clear/Stop

Enter
C
0
3 Touch the [#] key or press the
Enter key.
❐ To prevent others from making copies
with your user code, when you have
finished using the machine, hold down
the Clear/Stop key and press the
Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key.
❐ Regarding user codes, ☛ see page
140.

25
 na-4

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY

On the touch panel display, you can find keys, instructions and messages.
By touching keys on the display, you can select or deselect functions and
enter data for the selected modes. The display uses the following conven-
tions:

Keys that have the option of being selected.

Keys that have been selected.

Keys that have no option to select.

In this manual, we use the following convention:

Key on the display:

In the manual : [Auto Paper Select] key

$Caution: Do not press the touch panel display with any hard or sharp
object (pen, pencil, etc.). Always use your fingers or something
with a soft tip.

Initial display
Messages and instructions ap-
pears here.

tag sheets

26
 95.2.14 na-4

USING THE TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY

Display after selecting functions on the tag sheets

After selecting functions on tag sheets,

the clip appears on the tag.

[Check Modes] key

When you have selected functions on tag sheets, this key appears on the
upper right area on the touch panel display. Touch this key to see at a
glance all the modes you selected.

[Prev.] key

This key appears in the upper right corner of the display when you touch
the [Check Modes] key. Press to go back to the previous display.

[Change Modes] key

When you select functions on the tag sheets, this key appears on the dis-
play. Touch this key to change settings of the following modes:

image density, original type settings, copy paper size,

Auto Reduce\Enlarge, and finishing

27
 na-4

95.2.14

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY

GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY

Press the Guidance key when you want to know detailed information about
functions you use.

1 P r e s s t he Clear Modes/Low
Power Mode key then the Guid-
ance key.

2 Touch the key you want to know

about on the touch panel display.

For example, if you want to know

about "How to operate the dis-
play", touch the [How to operate
the display ] key.
❐ To go to the next page, touch the
[Next] key. To return to the previous
page, touch the [Prev.] key.
❐ To go back to the display shown af-
ter pressing the Guidance key, touch
the [Menu] key.
❐ To exit from the guidance display,
touch the [Exit] key.

28
 na-4

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED ORIGINALS

RECOMMENDED & NON-RECOMMENDED

ORIGINALS
Recommended Originals
❐ Regarding originals that the optional document feeder can handle, ☛ see page
169.

Non-recommended Originals For The Optional

Document Feeder

$CAUTION: The following types of originals are not recommended for use
with the document feeder. Place them directly on the expo-
sure glass.
❐ Originals thicker than 128 g/m2, 34 lb
❐ Originals thicker than 105 g/m2, 28 lb when using two-sided originals
❐ Originals thinner than 40 g/m2, 11 lb. But for originals between 40 and 52 g/m2
(11 and 14 lb), the document feeder must be set to Thin Paper mode. ☛ See
page 139.
❐ Originals larger than A3, 11" x 17"
❐ Originals smaller than A5, 51/2" x 81/2"
❐ Paper with any king of coating (such as carbon) on the back
❐ Folded, curled, creased, or damaged originals
❐ Mailing labels, or perforated originals
❐ OHP transparencies
❐ Translucent paper
❐ Pasted originals
❐ Damp originals
❐ Sticky originals
❐ Wavy originals
❐ Originals that are not made from paper
❐ Originals written in pencil on both sides, or two-sided carbon originals
❐ Thermal fax paper, CRO (camera ready original) or aluminum foil
❐ Originals with globs of ink from a ball-point pen

29
 na-4

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE GLASS

SETTING ORIGINALS ON THE EXPOSURE

GLASS
. the optional platen cover or
1 Lift
the optional document feeder.

.
2 exposure
Set the original face down on the
glass. The original
should be aligned to the rear left
corner.

. the optional platen cover

3 Lower
or the optional document feeder.

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE

OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)
You can insert a stack of originals (one-sided or two-sided) of the same size
into the document feeder. These originals are individually fed onto and
removed from the exposure glass.
❐ If you want to set originals of different sizes at the same time, use the user
tools. ☛ See page 151.

1 Correct any curl, fold, or crease

in the originals before setting.

30
 na-4

SETTING A STACK OF ORIGINALS IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (ADF)

2 Confirm that the Insert Original

indicator is lit before setting the
originals.

3 Confirm that no previous originals

remain on the exposure glass.

4 Adjust the guide to the original

size.

5 Set the originals face up into the

document feeder until the Insert
Original indicator goes off.
❐ The last page should be on the bot-
tom.
❐ The guide must touch the front side
of the originals.

❐ Do not stack originals above the limit

mark.

31
 na-4

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE

OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)
You can insert one original at a time into the document feeder. The original
is automatically fed onto and removed from the exposure glass.

1 Correct any curl, fold, or crease

in the originals before setting.

2 Confirm that the Insert Original

indicator is lit before setting the
originals.

3 Confirm that no previous originals

remain on the exposure glass.

4 Adjust the guide to the original

size.

5 Set the original face up into the

document feeder until the Insert
Original indicator goes off.
❐ If you are copying a stack of originals
one sheet at a time and you want to
keep them in order, start with the last
page of the originals.
❐ The original guide must touch the
front side of the original.

32
 na-4

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

6 Press the Start key.

7 While the Auto Feed indicator is

lit after an original is fed, set the
next original. The original is auto-
matically fed and copied.
❐ If you have set more than two origi-
nals, the Auto Feed indicator is not
lit after the last original is fed. In this
case, press the Start key again after
setting an original.

33
 na-4

SETTING ONE ORIGINAL AT A TIME IN THE OPTIONAL DOCUMENT FEEDER (SADF)

34
 na-5

COPYING
BASIC OPERATIONS................................................................................................................ 36
One-to-one Copying (Full Size Copying) .......................................................................................... 36
Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up Period (Auto Start).......................................... 37
Adjusting Copy Image Density ........................................................................................................... 37
Selecting The Copy Paper Size (Manual Paper Select).................................................................. 38
Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size(Auto Paper Select) ................................................... 39
Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction Ratios (Auto Reduce/Enlarge)........................... 41
Selecting Original Type Setting (Letter, Letter/Photo, Photo, Generation Copy) ....................... 43
Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort, Rotate Sort)............................................................................. 44
Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page (111,222,333) (Rotate Stack) ...................................... 48
Copying From The Bypass Tray ........................................................................................................... 50
Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy Something Else (Interrupt) ............................................ 53
Recalling Job Settings (Job Recall) ................................................................................................... 53
Storing Your Copy Setting In Memory (Program)............................................................................. 54

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge) ............................................................... 55

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios (Preset R/E) .............................................................. 55
Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps................................................................................................. 56
Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size ........................................................................... 58

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)........ 61

Making Two-sided Copies (Duplex) ................................................................................................... 61
Making One-sided Copies (Series Copies) ....................................................................................... 68

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine) ..................................................... 70

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp) ................................. 74
Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your Copies (Background Numbering) .................... 74
Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies (Auto Stamping) - English Only.................................. 75
Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies (User Stamping)..................................................... 79

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp) ................................. 79

Printing Dates And Page Numbers (Date Stamping, Page Numbering) .................................... 81

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)......................................................................... 86

Copying The Image Twice On One Page (Double Copies) .......................................................... 86
Erasing The Center And The Border (Erase Center/Border) .......................................................... 88
Adjusting The Margin (Margin Adjustment) ...................................................................................... 89
Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy (Image Repeat) ....................................................... 91
Reversing Black and White (Positive/Negative)............................................................................... 93
Merging Images (Overlay/Merge) ..................................................................................................... 94

OPTIONAL FINISHING............................................................................................................. 96
Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort) .................................................................................................. 96
Stapling (Staple) ................................................................................................................................... 100
Stapling Position And Original Setting ............................................................................................... 101
When Setting One Original At A Time ............................................................................................... 104
When Setting A Stack Of Originals In The Document Feeder ....................................................... 104

COMBINATION CHART .......................................................................................................... 105

35
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

BASIC OPERATIONS
One-to-one Copying (Full Size Copying)
You can make copies that are the same size as your originals.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change these settings, touch
the [Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change the
default settings with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

1 Set your original on the exposure

glass or in the optional document
feeder. ☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.

2 Enter the number of copies re-

quired using the Number keys.
1 2 3

❐ To change the number entered, 4 5 6

press the Clear/Stop key, then enter Start

the new number. 7 8 9 Clear/Stop

Enter
C
0

3 Confirm that the [Auto Paper Se-

lect] key is dark. If not, touch the
[Auto Paper Select] key, or se-
lect the proper paper size using
keys on the display.
❐ Regarding Auto Paper Select, ☛ see
page 39.
❐ Regarding selecting paper size,
☛ see page 38.

4 Make sure that the [Full Size]

key is dark. If not, touch it.

36
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

5 Press the Start key. Start

Clear/Stop
❐ To stop the copier during the multi-
copy run, press the Clear/Stop key. Enter
C
❐ Press the Start key to resume copy-
ing, or press the Clear/Stop key to
clear the entered copy number.

Entering Copy Job Settings During The Warm-up

Period (Auto Start)
During the warm-up period (within 140
seconds), the display is as shown. If
you enter your copy job settings and
press the Start key during the warm
up period, the copier will start copying
automatically when the copier reaches
the ready condition.
❐ To cancel Auto Start, press the
Clear/Stop key.

Adjusting Copy Image Density

Auto and manual image density

If the [Auto Image Density] key is
dark, Auto Image Density is selected.
If not, touch the [Auto Image Den-
sity] key.

If the [Auto Image Density] key is

light, Manual Image Density mode is
selected. To get a darker image,
touch the [Darker] key. To get a
lighter image, touch the [Lighter] key.

37
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Erasing Background (Erase Background)

Use this mode to mask out a dirty background (e.g. with a newspaper) and
get clear copies.

Confirm that the [Erase Background]

key is dark. If not, touch it.

Selecting The Copy Paper Size (Manual Paper

Select)
You can select the desired copy pa-
per size manually by touching one of
the tray keys in the display.
❐ Regarding setting copy paper in the
bypass tray, ☛ see page 50.

❐ The keys that have an * (asterisk)

cannot be used for Auto Paper Se-
lect.

38
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Having The Copier Choose The Paper Size(Auto

Paper Select)
The copier selects a suitable size of
copy paper based on the original size
and the reproduction ratio. Make sure
that the [Auto Paper Select] key is
dark. If not, touch the [Auto Paper
Select] key.

❐ If you use translucent or transparent originals or originals with tags, the original
size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When placing the original on the exposure glass directly, make sure that the
optional platen cover or optional document feeder is lowered before pressing
the Start key. Otherwise, the original size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When the original is set at a different direction from the copy paper in the paper
tray and the required paper size is A4, 81/2" x 11" or smaller, the copier auto-
matically rotates the original image by 90o to match the copy paper direction
and make copies.

❐ The tray keys that have an * (asterisk) cannot be used for the Auto Paper Select.
❐ Regarding the combination of the Auto Paper Select and Stapling, ☛ see page
101.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change these settings, touch
the [Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this
default setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

39
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

❐ When you use Auto Paper Select, refer to the following table for possible copy
paper sizes
Metric version
Original Possible selected paper sizes for copy
A or B type* A or B type*
8" x 13" 8" x 13"***, A or B type*
81/4" x 13" 81/4" x 13"***, A or B type*
81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 13"***, A or B type*
LT type**, 8" x 10" LT type**, 8"x 10", A or B type*
* :A type (A3, A4, A5), B type (B4, B5, B6)
** :LT type: 11" x 17", 81/2" x 11"
*** :F/F4 size selected by user tools. ☛ See page 138.

Inch version
Original Possible selected paper sizes for copy
LT type LT type
A4 A4, LT type
8" x 13" 8" x 13"**, LT type
81/4" x 13" 81/4" x 13"**, LT type
81/2" x 13" 81/2" x 13"**, LT type
11" x 15", 10" x 14", 8" x 10" 11" x 15", 10" x 14", 8" x 10", LT type
* :LT type: 11" x 17", 81/2" x 14", 81/2" x 11", 51/2" x 81/2"
** :F/F4 size selected by user tools. ☛ See page 138.

40
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Having The Copier Choose The Reproduction

Ratios (Auto Reduce/Enlarge)
The copier can choose an appropriate reproduction ratio based on the
paper and original sizes you select.
❐ If you use translucent or transparent originals or originals with tags, the original
size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When placing the original on the exposure glass directly, make sure that the
optional platen cover or optional document feeder is lowered before pressing
the Start key. Otherwise, the original size might not be detected correctly.
❐ When the original is set at the different direction from the selected copy paper,
the copier cannot rotate the image by 90o. Make sure to set the original in the
same direction as the copy paper.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change these settings, touch
the [Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this
default setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

Example:
Metric version: Original: A3 ;, Copy paper: A4 ;
Inch version: Original: 11" x 17" ;, Copy paper: 81/2" x 11" ;

1 Touch the [Auto/Reduce En-

large] key.

41
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

2 Set your original on the exposure

glass or in the optional document
feeder. ☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.

3 Select the copy size you require:

Metric version:
Touch the [A4 ;] paper tray key.

Inch version:
Touch the [81/2" x 11" ;] paper
tray key.

4 Press the Start key. The original

image is reduced to fit the se-
lected copy paper.

42
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Selecting Original Type Setting

(Letter, Letter/Photo, Photo, Generation Copy)
There are four types of original type setting. Select the appropriate original
type to match the kind of originals you are copying from.
❐ Letter mode is the default. You can change this setting using the user tools.
☛ See page 141.
Letter
Select Letter mode when your originals contain only letters (no picture).
Letter/Photo
Select Letter/Photo when your originals contain photographs or pictures with
letters.
Photo
Delicate tones of photographs and pictures can be reproduced with this
mode.
Generation copy
If your originals are copies, so called generation copies, the copy image can
be reproduced sharply and clearly.

1 Letter mode is selected by de-

fault. Select the desired setting
by touching one of four keys.

43
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort, Rotate Sort)

The copier puts images of more than two originals into memory and copies
are collated into sets. In Sort mode, every copy set is delivered on the copy
tray. In Rotate Sort mode, every other copy set is rotated by 90 o and
delivered to the copy tray, so that each set can be easily separated.
Notes for above modes
❐ You can make up to 999 copy sets at a time. However, when the number of
copies exceeds the capacity of the copy tray, remove copies from the copy
tray. Regarding the capacity of the copy tray, ☛ see page 166.
❐ After starting copying, the only setting you may change is image density, The
change will apply from the next copy. ☛ See page 37.
❐ The maximum number of pages that can be stored is as follows:
A4, 81/2" x 11": Approximately 100 pages (images)
❐ You can change the settings of these modes with the user tools. ☛ See page
151.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

Notes for Rotate Sort mode

❐ Paper sizes that can be used in Rotate Sort mode are as follows:
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11"
❐ Two paper trays that are identical in size and different in direction are required.
You can change this setting using the user tools. ☛ See page 151.
❐ This mode does not support different size originals.

44
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Notes for Sort mode

❐ When you make two-sided copies in Sort mode, the maximum number of cop-
ies stacked in the unit for two-sided copies (duplex unit) is as follows:
A3, 11" x 17": 30 sheets
Other sizes: 50 sheets
❐ Different size originals can be used only when you make one-sided copies
from one-sided originals.

1 Touch the [Sort], or [Rotate Sort]

key.

2 Enter the number of copy sets with the Number keys.

3 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see page 30 or 32). Then press the Start key. The copier
starts memorizing the original image.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green, or the Auto Feed indicator on the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original in the same direction as step ➊.
❐ When the memory reaches 0%, the copier stops memorizing. Press the
Start key to finish copy jobs which are already into memory. After that,
follow the instructions on the display.

➌ Repeat step ➋ until all originals are scanned.

➍ After all originals are put into memory, press the Enter key.
❐ If you are making one-sided copies, the first set of copies will have completed.

➎ Press the Start key.

45
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

3 When setting a stack of originals in the

document feeder
➊ Set a stack of the originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 30),
then press the Start key.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.
❐ When memory runs out during copying, the machine can be programmed to
behave in two ways with the user tools.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [Yes]

→ After all images in memory are copied, the machine will re-start
scanning automatically.
You should re-order your copies after all copy jobs are finished.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [No]

→ The machine will wait for you to press the Start key. At this point you
should remove your copies from the copy tray. Press the Start key
and then follow the instructions on the display to continue copying.

If you want to change the setting with the user tools, ☛ see page 151.
❐ If you make one-sided copies, the first set of copies has been completed
when all original images are stored in the memory.

46
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Stopping storing images and deleting stored images dur-

ing copying

1 Press the Clear/Stop key.

❐ The copying run of the 1st set and scanning will stop.

2
Press the Clear/Stop key again. If you want to delete stored images,
touch the [Yes] key following the instructions on the display.
❐ You cannot delete the stored images by press the Clear/Stop key, if copies
have been stacked in the unit for two-sided copies (duplex unit) when mak-
ing two-sided copies. In this case, after the step 1, press the Clear
Modes/Low Power Mode key. So that, all settings and stored images will
be cleared. Then remove copies in the duplex unit by opening the front
cover. For position of the duplex unit, ☛ see page 4.

47
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page

(111,222,333) (Rotate Stack)

Each original is copied together. Every other copies is delivered to the copy
tray, turned 90o.
❐ You can make up to 999 copy sets at a time. However, when the number of
copies exceeds the capacity of the copy tray, remove copies from the copy
tray. Regarding the capacity of the copy tray, ☛ see page 166.
❐ These modes do not support different size originals.
❐ After starting copying, the only setting you may change is image density, The
change will apply from the next copy. ☛ See page 37.
❐ Two paper trays that are identical in size and different in direction are required.
You can change this setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 151.
❐ The paper sizes that can be used in the Rotate Stack mode is as follows:
A4, B5, 81/2" x 11"
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

48
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

1 Touch the [Rotate Stack] key.

2 Enter the number of copies with the Number keys.

3 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see page 30 or 32). Then press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator on the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original in the same direction as step ➊.

➌ Repeat step ➋ until your copying is finished.

3 When setting a stack of originals in the

document feeder
➊ Set a stack of the originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 30),
then press the Start key.
❐ Last page should be on the bottom.

49
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Copying From The Bypass Tray

Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translu-
cent paper, post cards, and copy paper that cannot be set in the paper tray.
❐ Approximately 40 sheets of copy paper (64 g/m2, 17 lb) can be inserted at a time.
❐ Before making copies onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translucent
paper, and post cards, read the notes for them. ☛ See page 162.
❐ When you make copies using the bypass tray, it is recommended to set paper
in the bypass tray lengthwise (;).
❐ When using the bypass tray, the large capacity tray cannot be used.
❐ The following sizes can be used as standard size copy paper. If you use other
paper sizes, you should input vertical and horizontal dimensions.

Metric version Inch version

A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;, B5 : ;, A5 : ;, 11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;, 51/2" x 81/2" : ;,
B6 : ;, A6 : ;, 11" x 17" ; 8" x 13" ;,
❐ Regarding the functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ With the default setting, Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals
to two-sided copies in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width
right margin for the back side) are selected. In this case, touch the [Duplex/Series
Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys twice to cancel these modes. You can change
this default setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

1 Set your original on the exposure

glass or in the optional document
feeder. ☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.

2 Open the bypass tray. The [By-

pass Tray] key appears on the
display.
❐ If the [Bypass Tray] key is not dark,
touch it.

50
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

3 When copying onto standard size copy paper

➊ Slide the paper guides to the
paper width and, if necessary,
swing out the extender to sup-
port large size copy paper.

➋ Insert the copy paper into the

bypass tray until the beeper
sounds.
❐ The beeper can be canceled with
the user tools. ☛ See page 137.

➌ Press the Start key.

3 When copying onto non-standard size paper

Acceptable non-standard paper sizes:
Metric version:
Vertical: 100 ~ 297 mm (in 1 mm steps)
Horizontal: 148 ~ 432 mm (in 1 mm steps)
Inch version:
Vertical: 4.0" ~ 11.7" (in 0.1" steps)
Horizontal: 6.0" ~ 17.0" (in 0.1" steps)

➊ Press the Enter key.

➋ The display changes as shown.

51
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

➌ Enter the vertical size of the pa-

1 2 3
per using the Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered, 4 5 6
touch the [C] key or press the Start

Clear/Stop key. 7 8 9 Clear/Stop

Enter
C
➍ Touch the [#] key in the display 0
or press the Enter key.

➎ Enter the horizontal size of the

paper using the Number keys.
Then, touch the [#] key in the
display or press the Enter key.
➏ Touch the [Exit] key to close
this menu.

➐ The [Bypass Tray] key changes

to [Special Paper Size] key.

➑ Adjust the guides to copy paper

size and insert the copy paper
until the beeper sounds.
❐ The beeper can be canceled with
user tools. ☛ See page 137.

➒ Press the Start key.

52
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Temporarily Stopping One Job To Copy

Something Else (Interrupt)
You can make urgently needed copies
during a multicopy run by pressing the s/Energy Saver
Interrupt key. The interrupted copy job Interrupt
settings are stored in the machine’s
memory. After interrupt copying is com-
pleted, press this key again to recall the
previous copy job settings.
❐ In Interrupt mode,
the display.
& is displayed on

❐ If you use this function with the op-

tional document feeder, you might
have to reset originals not to be copied
after interrupt copying is finished. Fol-
low the instructions on the display.
❐ Regarding the functions that cannot
be used together with this function,
☛ see page 105.

Recalling Job Settings (Job Recall)

The previous copy job settings before
auto reset or Low Power mode can
be recalled by pressing the Job Re- Program Job Recall Clear Mod
call key. When the previous copy job
C
setting is saved, the Job Recall indi-
cator is lit.

53
 na-5

BASIC OPERATIONS

Storing Your Copy Setting In Memory (Program)

Your ten frequent copying jobs can be stored in the machine’s memory.
❐ The stored program cannot be deleted. If you want to change the stored pro-
gram, overwrite the stored program.

Storing your settings

1 Set the copy settings you want to

put into memory.

2 Press the Program key.

Program Job Recall

❐ If you want to cancel storing, touch the [Cancel] key.

3 Touch the [Store] key.

4 Touch one of the [1] ~ [10] keys

that you want to store your set-
tings in.
❐ A key with  has already settings in


it. If you want to overwrite settings,
touch the key with and follow the
instructions on the display.

Recalling a program

1 Press the Program key.

2 Make sure that the [Recall] key is dark. If not, touch it.

3 Touch one of the [1] ~ [10] keys that has  on it.

54
 na-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

REDUCING AND ENLARGING

(Reduce/Enlarge)
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

Reducing And Enlarging Using Preset Ratios

(Preset R/E)
You can select one of 12 preset ratios
(5 enlargement ratios, 7 reduction ra-
tios).

❐ You can add 2 fixed preset ratios using the user tools. ☛ See page 142.

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Confirm that the [Preset R/E] key
is dark. If not, touch the [Preset
R/E] key.

3
Touch the desired reproduction
ratio.
❐ Refer to the copy and paper sizes on
keys to select the appropriate ratio to
match your originals and copy paper.

55
 na-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

Reducing And Enlarging In 1% Steps

Using the [+] and [-] keys or Number keys (Zoom)

The reproduction ratio can be
changed from 32% to 400% in 1%
steps. There are two ways to change
ratios.

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Touch the [Zoom] key.

3 When using the [+] and [-] keys

➊ Enter the desired reproduction
ratios touching the [+] and [-]
keys on the display.

3 When using number keys

➊ Touch the [Number Keys] key.

56
 na-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

➋ Enter the desired ratio using the

Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key, then enter the
new number.

➌ Touch [#] key on the display or

press the Enter key.

Stretching and squeezing the image

(Directional Magnification)
Copies can be reduced or enlarged at
different reproduction ratios horizon-
tally and vertically. There are two
ways to change ratios.

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Touch the [D. Mag. (%)] key.

3 When using number keys

➊ Touch the [Horizontal] or [Ver-
tical] key that you want to
change the ratio.
➋ Enter the desired ratio using the
Number keys.
❐ To change the entered ratios,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key. Then, enter the
new ratios.

➌ Touch the [#] key or press the

Enter key.

57
 na-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

3 When using [+] and [-] keys

➊ Touch the [+- Keys] key.

➋ Touch the [Horizontal] or [Verti-

cal] key that you want to change
the ratio. Select the desired ratios
using [+] and [-] keys.

Fitting The Original To A Copy Of A Different Size

Fitting the image in the copy area as it is

(Size Magnification)
The suitable reproduction ratio will be
automatically selected when you enter
the lengths of the original and copy
image you want.

Original Copy size Copy

you want

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Touch the [Size Magnification]
key.

58
 na-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

3
Enter the original size with the
Number keys.
❐ To change the entered size, touch
the [C] key or press the Clear/Stop
key. Then, enter the new size.

4
Touch the [#] key or press the
Enter key.

5
Enter the copy size by the Num-
ber keys. Touch the [#] key or
press the Enter key.

Stretching and squeezing the image into the copy area

(Directional Size Magnification)
Copies can be reduced or enlarged to
match independent horizontal and
vertical size settings.

Original Copy size Copy

you want

1
Touch the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.

2
Touch the [D. Size Mag. (inch)]
key.

59
 na-6

REDUCING AND ENLARGING (Reduce/Enlarge)

3
Enter the original horizontal size
by the Number keys.
❐ To change the entered size, touch
the [C] key or press the Clear/Stop
key. Then, enter the new size.

4
Touch the [#] key or press the
Enter key.

5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter
the other sizes, following the dis-
play instructions.

60
 na-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS

AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)
Making Two-sided Copies (Duplex)

From one-sided originals From two-sided originals

(1 Sided ➝ 2 Sided) (2 Sided ➝ 2 Sided)

From book originals (Single) From book originals (Multi)

This mode makes two-sided copies This mode makes the copies face
from two facing pages of a bound each other exactly as the bound
(book) original. (book) originals do.

❐ When you make two-sided copies from one-sided originals, a right margin of 5
mm (0.2") is automatically set on the back side. You can change this setting
with the user tools. ☛ See pages 142 and 143.
❐ You can change a setting of this mode with the user tools. ☛ See page 150.
❐ Single and Multi modes do not support different size originals.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

61
 na-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

❐ The following paper limitations apply:

Metric version: Maximum size: A3 ;
Minimum size: A5 :
Weight: 64 ~ 105 g/m2
Inch version: Maximum size: 11" x 17" ;
Minimum size: 51/2" x 81/2" :
Weight: 17 ~ 24 lb
❐ Maximum number of copies (not in Sort, Rotate Sort, or Staple mode):
Metric version: 50 sheets
30 sheets (A3, 81 ~ 105 g/m2)
Inch version: 50 sheets
30 sheets (11" x 17", 22 ~ 24 lb)
❐ If you select Stapling ([Top]) and Page Numbering ([P1, P2...] or [1/5, 2/5...])
together when making two-sided copies, it is recommended to set Duplex and
Page Numbering modes as described below to avoid page numbers and staple
position overlap on the reverse side of copies.

1 At first, set the Duplex mode as you want.

2 Touch the [Stamp] key.
3 Touch the [Page Numbering] key and select [P1,P2...] or [1/5,2/5...].
☛ See pages 82 ~ 85.
4 If you select [Top to Top] in step 1, it is recommended that the [Shift
Position] key is selected (dark). If you select [Top to Bottom] in step 1,
it is recommended that the [Shift Position] key is not selected.

[Top to Top]

[Top to Bottom]

62
 na-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

❐ Notes for [1 Sided ➝ 2 Sided]

With the default setting, Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided origi-
nals to two-sided copies in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2"
width right margin for the back side) are selected. If this setting is acceptable,
you don’t need to do steps 1, 2, 3 (➊, ➋, ➌, and ➍) on page 65. If you want to
change setting, touch the [Duplex/Series Copies] key.
If you want to change margin setting, touch the [Adjust Image] key. You can
change this default setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 143.
❐ Notes for [2 Sided ➝ 2 Sided], [Single], and [Multi]
With the default setting, Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided origi-
nals to two-sided copies in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2"
width right margin for the back side) are selected. In this case, do steps 1, 2,
and 3 (➊) to change the setting. You can change this default setting with the
user tools. ☛ See page 141.
If you want to change margin setting, touch the [Adjust Image] key. You can
change this default setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 143.

63
 na-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

Originals and copies directions when making two-sided

copies from one-sided originals
When making two-sided copies from one-sided originals, you can select the
orientation ([Top to Top], [Top to Bottom]). Referring to the illustration
below, select one of them.
Original setting
Stapling
in the document Copies
position on the exposure glass
feeder

:
direction

[Top to ;
Top] direction

;
direction*

:
direction

[Top to ;
Bottom] direction*

;
direction*

❐ * recommended when your original is larger than B4, 81/2" x 14" or larger.

64
 na-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

1
Touch the [Duplex/Series Cop-
ies] key.

2
Confirm that the [Duplex] key is
dark. If not, touch the [Duplex] key.

3 When you want to make two-sided copies from

one-sided originals
➊ Touch the [1 Sided ➝ 2 Sided]
key.

➋ Select [Even] or [Odd] for the

number of originals.
➌ Select [Top to Top] or [Top to
Bottom] for the orientation re-
ferring to the table on page 64.
➍ Touch the [Exit] key.

➎ Set your originals (☛ see pages 30~33) and make your copies.
❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be
on the bottom.
❐ If you set one original in the optional document feeder at a time, start with
the last page to be copied. Follow the procedures on pages 32 ~ 33.
❐ If you place originals on the exposure glass, start with the last page to be
copied. After setting your original, press the Enter or Start key following the
instructions on the display.

65
 na-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

3 When you make two-sided copies from two-sided

originals
➊ Touch the [2 Sided ➝ 2 Sided]
key.

➋ Set your originals (☛ see pages 30 ~ 33) and make your copies.
❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be
on the bottom.
❐ If you set one original in the optional document feeder at a time, start with
the last page to be copied. Follow the procedures on pages 32 ~ 33.
❐ If you place originals on the exposure glass, start with the last page to be
copied. After setting your original, press the Enter or Start key following the
instructions on the display.

3 When you make two-sided copies from book originals

(Single, Multi)
➊ Touch the [Single] or [Multi] key.

➋ Touch the [Change Modes]

key and select the copy paper
size, because Auto Paper Se-
lect is canceled.

66
 na-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

➌ Confirm that the reproduction ratio is appropriate. If not, select the

proper ratio by touching the [Reduce/Enlarge] key referring to the fol-
lowing table.
Book original size Copy paper Ratio
A3 ; A4 : 100%
A4 ; A4 : 141%
11" x 17" ; 81/2" x 11" : 100%
81/2" x 11" ; 81/2" x 11" : 129%
➍ Set your originals. Start with the last page of your book original and
work your way to the beginning.

Place the original face down on

the exposure glass and align
the last page with the left scale.

Or, set the facing original in the

optional document feeder as
shown in the illustration. 2
1
3 4

❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be
on the bottom.
❐ If you place your original on the exposure glass, or set one original at a time
in the document feeder, start with the last page to be copied.

➎ Make your copies by pressing the Start key.

❐ If you select the [Multi] in step ➊ and set your original on the exposure
glass, repeat steps ➍ and ➎ until all originals are finished. To finish your
job, press the Enter key following the instructions on the display.
❐ If you select the [Multi] in step ➊ and set one original at a time in the
document feeder in step ➍, press the Enter key to finish your job following
the instructions on the display.

67
 na-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

Making One-sided Copies (Series Copies)

You can make one-sided copies from
two facing pages of bound (book)
originals and from two-sided originals.

Note: The optional document feeder is required when you select one-sided
copies from two-sided originals.
❐ When making one-sided copies from book originals, the maximum paper size
(: only) that can be used is as follows:
Metric version: A4 :
Inch version: 81/2" x 11" :
❐ Book ➝ 1 Sided mode does not support different size originals.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ With the default setting, Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided origi-
nals to two-sided copies in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2"
width right margin for the back side) are selected. In this case, do steps 1, 2,
and 3 to cancel the Duplex setting. You can change this default setting with the
user tools. ☛ See page 141.
If you want to change margin setting, touch the [Adjust Image] key. You can
change this default setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 143.

1
Touch the [Duplex/Series Cop-
ies] key.

2
Touch the [Series Copies] key.

3
Select the desired mode by
touching a key.

68
 na-6-2

WORKING WITH BOTH SIDES OF ORIGINALS AND COPIES (Duplex/Series Copies)

If you select the [Book ➝ 1 Sided] key in step 3, touch the [Change
4 Modes] key and select the copy paper size because Auto Paper Select
is canceled. Confirm that the reproduction ratio is appropriate. If not,
select the proper ratio by touching the [Reduce/Enlarge] key. ☛ See
the table on page 67.

Set your originals (☛ see pages 30 ~ 33) and make your copies.
5
❐ If you set originals in the optional document feeder, the last page should be on
the bottom. ☛ See the second illustration on page 67.
❐ When you set a book original on the exposure glass, start with the last page to
be copied aligning it with the left scale. ☛ See the top illustration on page 67.

6
Press the Start key.

69
 na-6-2

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY

(Combine)
From 2 One-sided Originals To 1 One-sided Copy

From 4 One-sided Originals

From 8 One-sided Originals To 1 Two-sided Copy

From 16 One-sided Originals To Booklet

70
 na-6-2

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

❐ If you want to make a booklet from

16 originals, fold copies as shown in
the illustration.
❐ If you want to make a booklet that
reads from right to left, change the
default setting with the user tools.
☛ See page 144.

❐ Even if the number of originals in the

optional document feeder is less than
the number required in the selected
mode, copies can be made as shown
in the illustration. You can change
this setting with the user tools.
☛ See page 150.

❐ If you add a blank sheet to the bot-

tom of the stack of your originals, the
copies can be made as shown in the
illustration.

❐ Auto Stamping, Date Stamping and

Page Numbering will be copied one
per copy paper as shown in the illus-
tration. This doesn’t apply to Booklet
mode.

❐ Auto Stamping, Date Stamping and

Page Numbering will be copied one
per original when you make a booklet
from 4 or 16 originals as shown in
the illustration.

71
 na-6-2

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

❐ When you make a booklet from 4 or 16 originals, the maximum paper size that
can be used is as follows:
Metric version: A4
Inch version: 81/2" x 11"
❐ In this mode, the copier selects the reproduction ratio automatically. This repro-
duction ratio depends on the original and copy paper sizes as follows:
Metric version: original: A4, copy paper: A4
Inch version: original: 81/2" x 11", copy paper: 81/2" x 11"
❐ Even if the direction of originals is different from that of copy paper, the copier
will automatically rotate the image by 90o to make copies properly.
❐ The original size is decided when the first original is stored in the memory. So,
you cannot use originals containing different sizes and directions together.
❐ Separation line between originals can be printed using the user tools. ☛ See
page 144.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ With the default setting, Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided origi-
nals to two-sided copies in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2"
width right margin for the back side) are selected. In this case, touch the [Du-
plex/Series Copies] key twice to cancel Duplex mode. You can change this
default setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 141.
If you want to change margin setting, touch the [Adjust Image] key. You can
change this default setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 143.

1
Touch the [Combine] key.

2
Select one of the desired com-
bine modes.
❐ The suitable reproduction ratio is se-
lected automatically.

3
Touch the [Change Modes] key.

72
 na-6-2

COMBINING ORIGINALS INTO ONE COPY (Combine)

4
Select the same size copy paper
as the original.

5 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set the original on the exposure glass or in the document feeder
(☛ see page 30 or 32). Then press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator on the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
➌ Repeat step ➋ until all originals are scanned.
❐ If the number of scanned originals is the required number in the selected
mode, copying will start automatically.

➍ To finish your copying job, press the Enter and Start keys following the
instructions on the display.

5 When setting a stack of originals in

the document feeder
➊ Set a stack of originals (☛ see page 30) in the document feeder and
press the Start key.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.

73
 na-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS,

AND MESSAGES (Stamp)
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

Printing Numbers On The Background Of Your

Copies (Background Numbering)
You can number your copies by print-
ing a number on the background of
the copy. This function can help you
to keep track of confidential docu-
ments.

❐ Background Numbering cannot be ro-

tated. For example, if you select Ro-
tate Sort with the Background Num-
bering, the copies will be as shown in
the illustration.

❐ You can change some settings (size, density) of the numbers with the user
tools. ☛ See page 150.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

1
Touch the [Stamp] key.

74
 na-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

2
Touch the [Background Num-
bering] key.

3
Enter the number you want to
print on the first set using the
Number keys.
❐ To change the entered number,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key. Then, enter the new
number.

4
Touch the [Exit] key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

5 30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

Printing Preset Messages On Your Copies

(Auto Stamping) - English Only
NOTE: If your machine is the metric version, this function cannot be used
as a default setting. If you want to use this function, contact your
sales or service representative.
One of the following seven messages
can be stamped on copies.

URGENT, COPY, PRIORITY

PRELIMINARY, CONFIDENTIAL,
For Your Information,
For Internal Use Only
*A frame is printed around the message.
❐ You can change some settings of Auto Stamping (stamping position, size, den-
sity) using the user tools. ☛ See pages 146 ~ 147.
❐ One message can be stamped at a time.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

75
 na-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Original setting, stamping position and direction

Key on Display
Stamping Position ➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ ➇ ➈

Direction: Horizontal
Original Setting
COPY COPY COPY

➀ ➁ ➂

COPY COPY COPY

➃ ➄ ➅

: direction COPY COPY COPY

➆ ➇ ➈ ➀ ➁ ➂
COPY COPY COPY
COPY COPY COPY
➃ ➄ ➅

➆ ➇ ➈
COPY COPY COPY
; direction

Direction: Vertical
COPY

COPY

COPY

Original Setting

➀ ➁ ➂
COPY

COPY

COPY

➃ ➄ ➅
➆ ➇ ➈
COPY

COPY

COPY

: direction ➀ ➁ ➂
COPY

COPY

COPY

COPY

COPY

COPY

➃ ➄ ➅
COPY

COPY

COPY

➆ ➇ ➈
; direction

76
 na-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

1
Touch the [Stamp] key.

2
Touch the [Auto Stamping] key.

3
Select the desired message by
touching a key.

4 If changing the stamping position and direction

➊ Touch the [Change] key.

➋ Select the desired position and

direction by touching keys. For
position and direction, refer to
the previous page. Touch the
[Exit] key.

77
 na-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

4 If stamping on the front page only

➊ Touch the [Front Page Only]
key.

➋ Enter the total number of pages

of your originals using the
Number keys.
❐ Example:
If you have 2 two-sided originals,
the number of pages is 4.
❐ When you want to change the en-
tered number, touch the [C] key
or press the Clear/Stop key.
Then, enter the new number.

➌ Touch the [Exit] key.

5
Touch the [Exit] key. Set your
originals (☛ see pages 30 ~ 33)
and press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

78
 na-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Printing Your Own Messages On Your Copies

(User Stamping)
Up to four messages which you use frequently can be stored in the
machine’s memory. You can make copies with your message stamped.
❐ Before using this function, you have to store your messages using the user
tools. ☛ See page 152.
❐ You can change some settings of User Stamping using the user tools. ☛ See
page 148.
❐ Regarding original setting, stamping position and stamping direction, ☛ see page
76.
❐ One message can be stamped at one time.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

1
Touch the [Stamp] key.

2
Touch the [User Stamping] key.

3
Select the desired number where
your message is stored by touch-
ing a key.
❐ Keys with no stored message cannot
be selected. In the illustration, user
stamps 1 and 2 have been stored.

79
 na-6-2

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

4 If changing the stamping position and direction

➊ Touch the [Change] key.

➋ Select the desired position and

direction by touching keys. For
position and direction, ☛ see
page 76.
➌ Touch the [Exit] key.

4 If stamping on the front page only

➊ Touch the [Front Page Only]
key.

➋ Enter the number of your origi-

nals using the Number keys.
❐ When you want to change the
number entered, touch the [C]
key or press the Clear/Stop key.
Then, enter the new number.

➌ Touch the [Exit] key.

5
Touch the [Exit] key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

6 30 ~33 ) and press the Start key.

80
 na-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

Printing Dates And Page Numbers

(Date Stamping, Page Numbering)

Date Stamping

❐ You can change the settings of Date Stamping with the user tools. ☛ See
page 148 ~ 149.
❐ If you select Date Stamping and Page Numbering together, the last stamping
direction selected takes priority.
❐ Regarding copies in Date Stamping and Combine mode, ☛ see page 71.
❐ The size and fonts of Date Stamping cannot be changed.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Original setting, stamping position and direction

Direction: Horizontal Top Left Bottom Right

Direction: Vertical Top Left Bottom Right

81
 na-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

1 Touch the [Stamp] key.

2 Touch the [Date Stamping] key.

3 Select the desired direction and

position of Date Stamping using
the keys on the display. Regard-
ing position and direction, ☛ see
previous page.

4 Touch the [Exit] key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

5 30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

Page Numbering
You can print page numbers on your
copy. There are three types of page
numbering (P1, P2..., 1/5, 2/5..., or
-1-, -2-...)

82
 na-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

❐ You can change the settings of page numbering with the user tools. ☛ See
pages 144 ~ 145.
❐ If you select Date Stamping and Page Numbering together, the last stamping
direction selected takes priority.
❐ Regarding copies in Page Numbering and Combine mode, ☛ see page 71.
❐ If you select Stapling ([Top]) and Page Numbering ([P1, P2...] or [1/5, 2/5...])
together when making two-sided copies, page numbers and staple position
might overlap. To avoid this, do the procedure described on page 62.
❐ The size and font of Page Numbering cannot be changed.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

Original setting, stamping position and direction

Original setting Horizontal

Vertical

1 Touch the [Stamp] key.

2 Touch the [Page Numbering]

key.

83
 na-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

3 Select the desired format and ori-

entation by touching the keys on
display. Then, touch the [Exit]
key.
❐ Regarding the [Shift Position] key,
☛ see page 62.

If you selected [P1, P2...] or [-1-,-2-...] in step 3

4
➊ Enter the total page number of
originals using the Number
keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key, and then enter a
new number.

➋ Touch the [Exit] key.

☛ Go to step 5

If you selected [1/5,2/5...] in step 3

4
➊ Confirm that the [Total pages]
key is dark. If not, touch it. En-
ter the total number of originals
using the Number keys.
❐ To change the number entered,
touch the [C] key or press the
Clear/Stop key, and then enter a
new number.

➋ Touch the [Exit] key.

❐ Regarding [Last page] key, ☛
see page 85.
☛ Go to step 5

84
 na-6-3

PRINTING ID NUMBERS, PAGE NUMBERS, AND MESSAGES (Stamp)

[Last page] key

In most cases, it is not necessary to input the data for this key. Use this key
for the following conditions:
❐ Example 1: If you want to make an insertion into a completed copy set (in this
case 2/3)

➊ Enter "3" for the [Total pages]

key.
➋ Enter "2" for the [Last page]
key.
➌ Using the original for 2/3 page,
make your copy.

❐ Example 2: If you have 80 originals, and want to make copies using 40 origi-
nals at a time.
First copy set Second copy set
➊ Set 80 ~ 41 pages of originals.
Enter "80" for the [Total pages]
key, and make your copies.
➋ Set 40 ~ 1 pages of originals.
Enter "80" for the [Total pages]
key. Enter "40" for the [Last
page] key, and make your cop-
ies.

5 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see pages 30 or 32). Then, press the Start key.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator of the docu-
ment feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original on
the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
➌ Repeat step ➋ until your copying is finished.

5 When setting a stack of originals in

the document feeder
➊ Set a stack of originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 30), then
press the Start key.
❐ Last page should be on the bottom.

85
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Copying The Image Twice On One Page
(Double Copies)
The one original image is copied
twice on one copy as shown in the
illustration. The separation line is cop-
ied in broken line.

❐ You can change the type of separation line or delete it with the user tools.
☛ See page 143.
❐ Please refer to the following table when you select original and copy paper
sizes with 100% ratio:
Metric version:
Original Copy paper
A5 ; A4 :
B6 ; B5 :

Inch version:
Original Copy paper
51/2" x 81/2" ; 81/2" x 11" :

❐ It is impossible to turn lengthwise (;) original images 90° on lengthwise (;)

copy paper. In this case, select : copy paper referring to the above table.
❐ A5 ;, B6 ; and 51/2" x 81/2" ; originals cannot be detected properly on the
exposure glass. Make sure to select the copy paper manually or set the origi-
nals in the optional document feeder. This setting can be changed by your
service representative. ☛ See page 153.

86
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

1 Confirm that the [Auto Paper Se-

lect] and [Full Size] keys are
dark.

2 Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

3 Touch the [Double Copies] key.

4 Set your originals in the optional

document feeder (☛ see page
30).
❐ If your original is A5 ;, B6 ; or
51/2" x 81/2" ; and you do not set
your originals in the document feeder,
select the copy paper manually before
making copies by touching the
[Change Modes] key.

5 Press the Start key.

87
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Erasing The Center And The Border

(Erase Center/Border)
This function erases the center and/or
all four sides of the original image,
such as book originals.

❐ The default setting of the erased margin is as follows. You can change this set-
ting using the user tools. ☛ See page 143.
Metric version: 10 mm
Inch version: 0.4"
❐ The position of the margin to be erased is determined according to the original
size and reproduction ratio. If your original is non-standard size, undesired ar-
eas might be erased.

: original copy ; original copy

❐ If you select copy paper manually, make sure to select the same direction as
that of your original.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

88
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

1 Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2 Touch the [Erase Center/Border]

key.

3 Select keys.

4 Touch [Exit] key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

5 30 ~33) and press the Start key.

Adjusting The Margin (Margin Adjustment)

You can shift the image either left or
right to make a binding margin.

❐ The margin width default is as follows. You can change this setting using the
user tools. ☛ See page 142.
Metric version: 5 mm
Inch version: 0.2"
❐ Margin for two-sided copies (orientation: Top to Top):
For copies that read from left to right, set the front left and back right margins.
For copies that read from right to left, set the front right and back left margins.

89
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

❐ When you make two-sided copies from one sided originals, a right margin 5
mm (0.2") is set on the back side automatically as a default setting. You can
change this setting using the user tools. ☛ See page 143.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the Duplex mode
setting, touch the [Duplex/Series Copies] key. If you want to change the mar-
gin setting, touch the [Adjust Image] key (step 1). You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

1 Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2 Touch the [Margin Adjustment]

key.

3 Set the margin width by touching

the right or left arrow key.
❐ To clear the width entered, touch the
[Clear] key.

4 Touch the [Exit] key.

Set your original (☛ see pages

5 30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

90
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Repeating An Image Over The Entire Copy

(Image Repeat)
The original image is copied repeat-
edly.

❐ The number of repeated images depends on the original size, copy paper size,
and reproduction ratio. Refer to the following table.
Metric version:
Original size Copy Paper Size Reproduction ratio and number of repeat image
A5 : A4 : 71% ➝ 4 images
A5 ; A4 ; 35% ➝ 16 images
A5 : A4 ; 100% ➝ 2 images
A5 ; A4 : 50% ➝ 8 images
Inch version:
Original size Copy Paper Size Reproduction ratio and number of repeat image
51/2" x 81/2 " : 81/2" x 11" : 65% ➝ 4 images
51/2" x 81/2" ; 81/2" x 11" ; 32% ➝ 16 images
51/2" x 81/2" : 81/2" x 11" ; 100% ➝ 2 images
51/2" x 81/2" ; 81/2" x 11" : 50% ➝ 8 images

❐ Separate lines between repeated images can be printed using the user tools.
☛ See page 144.
❐ Part of a repeated image might not be copied depending on copy paper size,
copy paper direction, or reproduction ratio.
❐ If your original is non-standard size, the copier might not detect the original size
correctly. It is recommended to use originals of standard size.
❐ The copying speed might be slower in this mode.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

91
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies

in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

1 Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2 Touch the [Image Repeat] key.

3 Touch the [Change Modes] key.

4 Select the copy paper size by

touching a key referring to the
table on the previous page.

5 Select the reproduction ratio by

touching the [Reduce/Enlarge]
key referring to the table on the
previous page.

6 Set your originals (☛ see pages

30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

92
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Reversing Black and White (Positive/Negative)

Black and white images of the original
are reversed.

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

1 Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2 T o uc h t he [Positive/Negative]
key.

Set your originals (☛ see pages

3 30 ~ 33) and press the Start key.

93
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

Merging Images (Overlay/Merge)

Making 1 image from 2 (Overlay)

Two different originals can be merged
onto the same copy paper.

Merging a template into several copies (Copy Merge)

The image of the original which is
copied first will be a background image
(master) on all copies. Then, the re-
maining originals which follow the first
one will be copied with the background.

❐ The copying speed might be slower in this mode.

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.
❐ With the default setting, Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided origi-
nals to two-sided copies in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2"
width right margin for the back side) are selected. In this case, touch the [Du-
plex/Series Copies] key twice to cancel the Duplex mode. You can change
this default setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 141.
If you want to change margin setting, touch the [Adjust Image] key. You can
change this default setting with the user tools. ☛ See page 143.

1 Touch the [Adjust Image] key.

2 Touch the [Overlay/Merge] key.

94
 na-6-3

EDITING THE COPY IMAGE (Adjust Image)

3 Select the [Overlay] or [Copy

Merge] key.

4 Touch the [Exit] key.

5 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see page 30 or 32). Then, press the Start key.
❐ When you select the [Copy Merge] in step 3, the original for the template
(master) should be read first.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green or the Auto Feed indicator of the docu-
ment feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original on
the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
➌ Repeat step ➋ until your copying is finished.
❐ To clear the template (master), or finish your copying, press the Enter key.

5 When setting a stack of originals in the

document feeder
➊ Set a stack of originals (☛ see page 30) in the document feeder and
press the Start key.
❐ When you select the [Copy Merge] in step 3, the original for the template
(master) should be on the bottom.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.
❐ To clear the template (master) or finish your copying, press the Enter key.

95
 na-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

OPTIONAL FINISHING
❐ Duplex mode (from an even number of one-sided originals to two-sided copies
in Top to Top orientation) and Margin Adjustment (0.2" width right margin for
the back side) are default settings. If you want to change the modes, touch the
[Duplex/Series Copies] and [Adjust Image] keys. You can change this default
setting with the user tools. ☛ See pages 141 and 143.

Sorting Into Sets (123,123,123) (Sort)

Copies can be assembled as sets in
sequential order by sliding the shift
tray from side to side.

Note: This function can be used only when your machine is equipped with
the optional finisher.

Notes for Sort mode

❐ You can make up to 999 copy sets at a time. However, when the number of
copies exceeds the capacity of the shift tray, remove copies from the copy tray.
Regarding the capacity of finisher, ☛ see the table on page 97.
❐ Different size originals can be used only when you make one-sided copies from
one-sided originals.
❐ After starting copying, the only setting you may change is image density, The
change will apply from the next copy. ☛ See page 37.
❐ The maximum number of pages that can be stored is as follows:
A4, 81/2" x 11": Approximately 100 pages (images)
❐ You can change settings of this mode using the user tools. ☛ See page 151.
❐ When you make two-sided copies, the maximum number of copies stacked in
the duplex unit at a time is limited. For details, ☛ see page 45.

96
 na-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

❐ For this finisher, the following limitations apply:

Metric version
Paper size Paper weight Maximum capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum A4 or smaller: 1,500 sheets
A3 A5 157 g/m 2 52 g/m2 B4 or larger: 1,000 sheets

Inch version
Paper size Paper weight Maximum capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum 81/2" x 11" or smaller: 1,500 sheets
11" x 17" 51/2" x 81/2" 42 lb 14 lb 81/2" x 14" or larger: 1,000 sheets

❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

1 To select Sort mode, touch the

[Sort] key.

2 Enter the number of copies re-

quired using the Number keys.

97
 na-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

3 When setting one original at a time

➊ Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document
feeder (☛ see pages 30 or 32). Then press the Start key. The copier
starts memorizing the original image.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

➋ When the Start key turns green, or the Auto Feed indicator of the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step ➊, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original in the same direction as step ➊.
❐ When the memory capacity reaches 0%, the copier stops memorizing.
Press the Start key to finish copy jobs which are already in memory. After
that, follow the instructions on the display.

➌ Repeat step ➋ until all originals are scanned.

➍ After all originals are put into memory, press the Enter key.
➎ Press the Start key.
❐ If you want to stop storing images or to delete stored images, ☛ see page
47.
❐ If you make one-sided copies, the first set of copies has been completed
when all originals are stored in memory.

98
 na-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

3 When setting a stack of originals in the

document feeder
➊ Set a stack of the originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 32),
then press the Start key.
❐ Last page should be on the bottom.
❐ When memory runs out during copying, the machine can be programmed to
behave in two ways with the user tools.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [Yes]

→ After all images in memory are copied, the machine will re-start
scanning automatically.
You should re-order your copies after all copy jobs are finished.

♦ Memory Full Auto Scan Restart = [No]

→ The machine will wait for you to press the Start key. At this point you
should remove your copies from the copy tray. Press the Start key
and then follow the instructions on the display to continue copying.

If you want to change the user tools setting, ☛ see page 151.
❐ If you want to stop storing images or to delete stored images, ☛ see page
47.

99
 na-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stapling (Staple)

Note: This function can be used only when your machine is equipped with
the optional finisher.
❐ For this mode, the following limitations apply:
Metric version:
Paper size Paper weight Stapler capacity Shift tray capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum A4 or smaller:
A4: 1,500 sheets
from 2 to 50 sheets
(30 sets of 50 sheets)
A3 B5 80 g/m2 64 g/m2 B4 or larger: A3: 1,000 sheets
from 2 to 30 sheets
Inch version
Paper size Paper weight Stapler capacity Shift tray capacity
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum 81/2"x11" or smaller:
81/2"x11": 1,500 sheets
from 2 to 50 sheets
(30 sets of 50 sheets)
11" x 17" 81/2" x 11" 21 lb 17 lb 81/2"x14" or larger: 11"x17": 1,000 sheets
from 2 to 30 sheets

❐ Post cards, tracing paper, OHP sheets, and adhesive labels, and paper that is
curled or has low stiffness cannot be used.
❐ If the number of copies is over the stapler capacity, the copies will be delivered
to the shift tray without stapling.
❐ If memory reaches 0% during copying, the copies will be delivered to the shift
tray without stapling.
❐
If " Add Staples" is displayed during copying, copies might be delivered to
the shift tray without stapling.
❐ Copy paper with different sizes and directions cannot be stapled.
❐ Regarding functions that cannot be used together with this function, ☛ see
page 105.

100
 na-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stapling Position And Original Setting

Single staple in the top left corner in Auto Paper Select

If you select Stapling with the Auto Paper Select and there is no paper that
matches the direction of originals, the copier automatically rotates the copy
image. As a result, you can get copies stapled in the left upper corner.
❐ The maximum original image size that can be rotated is as follows:
Metric version: A4
Inch version: 81/2" x 11"
❐ The copy image cannot be rotated if you select [2 Staples].
If your original is A4, 81/2" x 11", set originals and select the [Top] key to
get copies stapled at the left upper corner.
Stapling
Original Original setting Stapled copies
position
on the exposure glass When the image is not rotated.

: direction in the document feeder When the image is rotated.

[Top]
on the exposure glass When the image is not rotated.

; direction in the document feeder

When the image is rotated.

101
 na-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

❐ If your original is larger than A4, 81/2" x 11", (ex. or 11" x 17"), the original
image cannot be rotated. In this case, set original and select the [Top] or [Bot-
tom] keys as shown to get copies stapled at the left upper corner.

Stapling
Original setting Stapled copies
position
on the exposure glass

If your
original is
[Bottom] portrait in the document feeder
direction.

on the exposure glass

If your
original is
[Top]
landscape in the document feeder
direction.

102
 na-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

Stapling positions when there is copy paper that is identical

in size and direction as your original
Stapling Original setting
Copies
position on the exposure glass in the document feeder

:
direction

[Top]

;
direction

:
direction

[Bottom]

;
direction*

(SP

:
direction

[2 Staples]

;
direction*

❐ * recommend when your original is larger than B4, 81/2" x 14" or larger.

103
 na-6-3

OPTIONAL FINISHING

When Setting One Original At A Time

1 Select one of three stapling by

touching a key.

2 Set an original on the exposure glass or in the optional document

feeder. (☛ See pages 30 or 32.) Then, press the Start key. The copier
starts memorizing the original images.
❐ Start with the last page to be copied.

3 When the Start key turns green, or the Auto Feed indicator of the
document feeder is lit, set the next original. If you have set the original
on the exposure glass in step 2, press the Start key.
❐ Set the original at the same direction in step 2.

3 until all originals are scanned.

4 Repeat step

5 After all originals are put into memory, press the Enter key.

6 Follow the instructions on the display. In some cases, you must press
the Start key.

When Setting A Stack Of Originals In The

Document Feeder

1 Select one of three stapling by touching a key.

2 Set a stack of originals in the document feeder (☛ see page 30) , then
press the Start key.
❐ The last page should be on the bottom.

104
 na-6-5

COMBINATION CHART

COMBINATION CHART
The combination chart on pages 106 and 107 shows which modes can be
used together. When you read the chart, please refer to the following tables.

BLANK CELL means that these modes can be used together.

➙ means that the mode after you select will be the mode you’re working in.
✗ means that these modes cannot be used together.

A Setting originals
B Finishing
C Selecting copy paper
D Image Rotation
E [Duplex]
F [Series Copies]
G [Combine]
H [Overlay/Merge]
I [Reduce/Enlarge]
J [Adjust Image]
K Adjusting image density
L Selecting original setting
M [Stamp]

105
 na-6-5

COMBINATION CHART

Mode after you select A B C D

Mode before you select 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 Setting original on the exposure glass ➙ ➙
A 2 Setting an original in the DF (SADF) ➙ ➙
3 Setting a stack of originals in the DF (ADF) ➙ ✗
4 Sort ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗
5 Rotate Sort ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗
B 6 Rotate Stack ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗
7 Sort with optional finisher ➙ ✗ ✗
8 Staple with optional finisher ➙ ✗ ✗
9 Using the bypass tray (standard size) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗
✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗
C 10 Using the bypass tray (non-standard size)
11 Selecting paper size manually ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙
12 Auto Paper Select ➙ ➙ ➙
13 Image Rotation in Auto Paper Select ➙ ➙ ➙
D
14 Image Rotation in Duplex ✗ ✗
15 one-sided → two-sided ✗ ✗
E 16 two-sided → two-sided ✗ ✗ ➙
17 Single (from book original) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙
18 Multi (from book original) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙
19 two-sided → one-sided ➙
F
20 Book → one-sided ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙
21 2 one-sided → 1 one-sided (2 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
22 4 one-sided → 1 one-sided (4 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
G 23 4 one-sided → 1 two-sided (4 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
24 8 one-sided → 1 two-sided (8 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
25 4 one-sided → booklet (4 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
26 16 one-sided → booklet (16 in 1) ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
H 27 Overlay/Merge ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
28 Reducing/Enlarging
I
29 Auto Reduce/Enlarge ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙
30 Double Copies ✗ ✗ ✗
31 Image Repeat ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
32 Erase Center
J 33 Erase Border
34 Margin Adjustment for front side ✗ ✗
35 Margin Adjustment for back side ✗ ✗
36 Positive/Negative
37 Erase Background
K 38 Auto Image Density
39 Manual Image Density
40 Letter mode
L 41 Letter/Photo mode
42 Photo mode
43 Generation Copy mode
44 Auto Stamping ✗ ✗
45 User Stamping ✗ ✗
M 46 Date Stamping ✗ ✗
47 Page Numbering ✗ ✗
48 Background Numbering
49 Interrupt Copying ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗

106
 na-6-5

COMBINATION CHART

E F G H I J K L M
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
1
A 2
3
4 ✗ ✗
5 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
B 6 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
7 ✗ ✗
8 ✗ ✗
9 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
10 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
C
11
12 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙
13 ➙ ✗
D
14 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
15 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
16 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
E
17 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
18 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
19 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
F
20 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
21 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
22 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
G 23 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
24 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
25 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
26 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
H 27 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
28 ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙ ➙
I
29 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ➙ ➙
30 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
31 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗
32
J 33
34
35
36
37 ➙
K 38 ➙
39 ➙
40 ➙ ➙ ➙
41 ➙ ➙ ➙
L
42 ➙ ➙ ➙
43 ➙ ➙ ➙
44
45
M 46
47
48
49 ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗ ✗

107
 na-6-5

COMBINATION CHART

108
 na-7

WHAT TO DO IF
SOMETHING GOES
WRONG
IF YOUR COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE AS YOU WANT......................................................... 110
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES ............................................................................... 112
IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT .................................................................. 113
LOADING PAPER..................................................................................................................... 117
Non-recommended Paper ................................................................................................................. 117
Notes For Paper .................................................................................................................................... 117
Loading Paper In The Paper Tray....................................................................................................... 118
Loading Paper In The Large Capacity Tray...................................................................................... 119

ADDING TONER ...................................................................................................................... 120

ADDING STAPLES .................................................................................................................... 121
CLEARING MISFEEDS .............................................................................................................. 122
Check The Display................................................................................................................................ 122
When Misfeeds Occur In A, B, C, Y, Or Z Section ............................................................................ 123
When Misfeed Occurs At The Large Capacity Tray........................................................................ 123
When Misfeed Occurs In P Section.................................................................................................... 124
When Misfeeds Occur In R Section ................................................................................................... 124

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES .............................................................................................. 125

109
 na-7

IF YOUR COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE AS YOU WANT

IF YOUR COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE AS

YOU WANT
Copier’s Condition Action
Check the power cord. Is it properly plugged into the
Nothing happens when the main switch outlet?
is turned on.
➠ Plug it in firmly.
The machine has automatically switches
Turn on the main switch.
itself off (Auto Off).
The indicator of the Clear Modes/Low The copier is in Low Power mode.
Power Mode key is lit, and the display ➠ Press the Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key.
is off.
and messages are displayed. Follow the instructions on the display.
Paper runs out. Load paper. ☛ See page 117.
f is displayed. Add toner. ☛ See page 120.
i is displayed. Add staples. ☛ See page 121.
Y is displayed. Remove misfed paper. ☛ See page 122.
Z is displayed.
k is displayed. Close the indicated doors or covers.
Set the fusing unit correctly. For position of the fusing
is displayed.

unit, ☛ see page 4.

is displayed. Remove the jammed staples. ☛ See page 125.

 is displayed.
Turn the main switch off, wait a few seconds, and then
turn it on. If  appears again, call your service


representative.
is displayed. Used toner bottle is full. Call your service representative.

110
 na-7

IF YOUR COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE AS YOU WANT

Copier’s Condition Action

After loading a new staple cartridge, staples might not
be ejected the first few times you try to use the stapler.
➠ Try again.
Staples do not come out at all. A few sheets might not be stapled. To correct this, try
turning over the paper stack in the tray unit. If there is
no improvement, change to copy paper with less curl.
There are jammed staples in the stapler.
➠ Remove jammed staples. ☛ See page 125.
Is the right kind of paper in the paper tray?
➠ Paper size and weight must be within the
specification for this copier.
Is folded, wrinkled, damp, or curled paper in the paper
tray?
➠ Always use dry, undamaged paper.
Misfeeds occur frequently. Is the paper properly set in the paper tray?
➠ Always load paper correctly.
Are there any pieces of misfed paper or other foreign
objects in the machine?
➠ Make sure that the paper path is completely clear of
paper and other material after a misfeed.
Copy paper size setting is not correct.
➠ Set the proper paper size using the user tools.
☛ See page 138.
❐ If you cannot correct the problem by taking the above actions, please contact
your service representative.

111
 na-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE CLEAR COPIES

Problem Cause Action
Adjust the image density.
The image density is too dark.
☛ See page 37.
Confirm that the [Erase
Erase Background is not
Copies appear dirty. Background] key is dark. If not,
selected.
touch it.
The platen cover, exposure
glass, or document feeder belt is Clean them. ☛ See page 156.
dirty.
Adjust the image density.
The image density is too dark.
☛ See page 37.
The reverse side of an
original image is copied. Confirm that the [Erase
Erase Background is not
Background] key is dark. If not,
selected.
touch it.
The original has a low contrast
image. Adjust the image density.
☛ See page 37.
Copies are too light. The image density is too light.
Damp or rough grain paper is Use dry paper without rough
used. grain.
Toner bottle is almost empty. Add toner. ☛ See page 120.
The same copy area is The platen cover, exposure
dirty whenever making cop- glass, or document feeder belt is Clean them. ☛ See page 156.
ies. dirty.
Set originals correctly.
The original is not set correctly.
Parts of the image are not ☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.
copied. An improper paper size is
Select the proper paper size.
selected.
Set originals correctly.
Copies are blank. The original is not set correctly.
☛ See pages 30 ~ 33.
A moire pattern is pro-
duced on copies as shown
in the illustration.
Your original has dot pattern Place the original on the
image or many lines. exposure glass at a slight angle.

❐ If you cannot correct the problem by taking the above actions, please contact
your service representative.

112
 na-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU

WANT
Finishing
Problem Cause Action
After loading a new staple cartridge, staples might not be ejected the
first few times you try to use the stapler.
A few sheets might not be stapled. To correct this, try turning over
the paper stack in the tray unit. If there is no improvement, change to
Copies are not stapled. copy paper with less curl.
There are jammed staples in the Remove jammed staples. ☛ See
stapler. page 125.
The number of copies exceeds Check the stapler capacity.
the capacity of the stapler. ☛ See page 100.
Staples are wrongly posi- Set originals correctly.
Originals are not set correctly.
tioned. ☛ See pages 101 ~ 103.

Adjust Image
Problem Cause Action
In Double Copies mode, Select the proper original and
Combination of original and copy
parts of the original image copy paper.
paper is not correct.
are not copied. ☛ See the table on page 86.
In Center/Border mode, You set the wide erased margin. Set the narrower margin using
parts of the original image Your original has narrow margins the user tools.
are not copied. on four sides. ☛ See page 143.

113
 na-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

Adjust Image (continued)

Problem Cause Action
In Margin Adjustment Set the narrower margin using
mode, parts of the original You set the wide margin. the user tools.
image are not copied. ☛ See page 142.
Select copy paper larger than
You selected the same size copy originals.
In Image Repeat mode, the ☛ See page 91.
paper as originals, and did not
original image is not copied
select the proper reproduction Select the proper reproduction
repeatedly.
ratio. ratio.
☛ See page 91.

Stamp
Problem Cause Action
Auto Stamping does not ap- Set originals correctly.
The original is not set correctly.
pear on copies. ☛ See page 76.
Change the density of Auto
Original image and Auto You selected the solid density. Stamping using the user tools.
Stamping overlap on cop- ☛ See page 146.
ies and original image can-
not be read. Your original has narrow margins Change the stamping position.
on four sides. ☛ See page 76.
Register User Stamping again
User Stamping is not registered
using the user tools.
correctly.
☛ See page 152.
User Stamping does not ap- Register User Stamping again
pear on copies. The low density image is with the high density original
registered. using the user tools.
☛ See page 152.
Set originals correctly.
The original is not set correctly.
☛ See page 76.

114
 na-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

Stamp (continued)
Problem Cause Action
Date Stamping does not ap-
pear in the desired direc- The stamping position decided
tion. You have selected Date
afterwards takes priority. Select
Stamping and Page Numbering
Page Numbering does not together. the same directions for both
appear in the desired modes.
direction.
Set originals as follows:

Background Numbering cannot

Directions of Background
be rotated. If you set originals
Numbering and original im-
incorrectly, the Background
ages on copies do not
Numbering does not appear
match.
copies in correct direction.

Date Stamping does not ap- Set originals correctly.

The original is not set correctly.
pear on copies. ☛ See page 81.

Duplex
Problem Cause Action
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder, the last
Order of copies is not cor- You set originals in the incorrect page should be on the bottom.
rect. order. If you set a original on the
exposure glass, start with the
last page to be copied.
Orientation of copies (Top You set originals in an incorrect Select the correct orientation, or
to Top, or Top to Bottom) direction or the orientation setting set originals correctly.
is not correct. is incorrect. ☛ See page 64.

115
 na-7

IF YOU CANNOT MAKE COPIES AS YOU WANT

Combine
Problem Cause Action
You cannot make a booklet Change setting using the user
Combine Original Booklet Format
from 16 originals by folding tools.
is not correct.
copies. ☛ See page 144.
The maximum original size that
Your original is larger than A4 or
can be used is A4, 81/2" x 11".
81/2" x 11".
Use the correct original.
Copy paper must be the same
Parts of the image are not size as your original. Select the
copied. You selected a different size correct paper size.
copy paper from your originals.
Select the correct reproduction
ratio before using Combine mode.
Your originals are not identical in Use originals that are identical in
size and direction. size and direction.
When setting a stack of originals
in the document feeder, the last
Order of copies is not cor- You set originals in the incorrect page should be on the bottom.
rect. order. If you set an original on the
exposure glass, start with the
last page to be copied.

116
 na-7

LOADING PAPER

LOADING PAPER
❐ Regarding paper sizes that can be set, see the following pages:
1st tray ☛ See page 128, 130, and 131.
optional tray unit ☛ See page 133.
large capacity tray ☛ See page 153.
❐ If you want to change the paper size, see the following pages:
1st tray ☛ See page 128, 130, and 131.
optional tray unit ☛ See page 133.
large capacity tray ☛ See page 153.

Non-recommended Paper
❐ Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper
❐ Torn paper
❐ Perforated paper
❐ Paper with conductive or low electrical resistance coating such as carbon or
silver coating
❐ Thermal paper, art paper
❐ Thin paper that has low stiffness

Notes For Paper

❐ Load paper with the copy side down in the 500-sheet trays, and with the copy
side up in the large capacity tray. If copies are curled, try turning the copy
paper over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy paper with
less curl.
❐ Do not use copy paper that has been already copied on.
❐ The following types of paper cannot be fed from the paper tray. Load them in
the bypass tray. ☛ See page 50.
• OHP transparencies • adhesive labels • translucent paper
• post card
❐ Correct curls in copy paper before loading.
❐ Fan copy paper to get air between the sheets before loading.

117
 na-7

LOADING PAPER

Loading Paper In The Paper Tray

1 Pull out the paper tray until it

stops.

2 Load paper in the paper tray. Do

not stack paper above the limit
mark inside the paper tray.

3 Push the tray in until it stops.

118
 na-7

LOADING PAPER

Loading Paper In The Large Capacity Tray

1 If the Down key is not lit, press it

to lower the bottom plate. The
key will blink while the bottom
plate is moving down.
❐ If the key is lit or blinking, proceed to
step 2.

2 After the Down key stops blinking

and lights, open the cover.

3 Load paper into the tray (not

more than 1,000 sheets). The pa-
per stack must be flush with the
left side.

4 Close the cover.

119
 na-7

ADDING TONER

ADDING TONER
When " f Add Toner" is displayed on the display, it is time to supply toner.
$WARNING: Do not incinerate the used toner bottle. Toner bottle
might ignite when exposed to open flame.

$WARNING: Dispose of the used toner bottle according to your local

regulations.
NOTE: When adding toner, do not turn off the main switch. If you do, your
copy settings are cleared.
NOTE: Before setting the new toner bottle, shake it well at least 5 or 6
times.
NOTE: Do not remove the toner cap of the new toner bottle.

1 Open the front cover of the cop-

ier.

You can find the sticker (with f

2 at the top) explaining how to add
toner, inside the front cover as
shown in the illustration.

3 Load the new toner bottle follow-

ing the instructions on the sticker.

120
 na-7

ADDING STAPLES

ADDING STAPLES
When " i Add Staples" is displayed, add staples as follows:
❐ Do not remove the tape before set-
ting the new staple refill in the car- cartridge
tridge. If you do, the staples fall into
pieces.

refill tape

1 Open the front door of the fin-

isher.

You can find a sticker (with i at

2 the top) explaining how to add a
staple cartridge, inside the front
door as shown in the illustration.

3 Add the new staple cartridge fol-

lowing the instructions on the
sticker.

121
 na-7

CLEARING MISFEEDS

CLEARING MISFEEDS
Since some parts of the copier are supplied with
?IWARNING:
high electrical voltage, touch only the parts specified
in the instructions on the sticker inside the ma-
chine’s cover.
When removing misfed paper from sections B and C,
?IWARNING:
use cautions. The fusing unit may be very hot. See
page 4 for the position of the fusing unit.

$CAUTION: Do not leave any torn scraps within the machine.

NOTE: When clearing misfeeds, make sure that all units and levers are
returned to their original positions and all covers are closed.
NOTE: Do not touch originals in the optional document feeder when a pa-
per misfeed occurs in the copier. If you do, the copier cannot know
which originals have been copied, and which should be copied.

Check The Display

The display shows the location of mis-
fed paper. Remove them following in-
structions.
❐ P is indicated only when your ma-
chine is equipped with the optional
document feeder.
❐ R1 and R2 are indicated only when
your machine is equipped with the
optional finisher.

122
 na-7

CLEARING MISFEEDS

When Misfeeds Occur In A, B, C, Y, Or Z Section

1 Open the front cover of the cop-

ier.

2 You can find a sticker (with Y at

the top) explaining how to re-
move misfed paper, inside the
front cover as shown in the illus-
tration.

3 Remove misfed paper following

the instructions on the sticker.

When Misfeed Occurs At The Large Capacity Tray

1 Swing out the tray grasping the

tray handle, and remove any mis-
fed paper.

2 Return the tray to its original po-

sition.

123
 na-7

CLEARING MISFEEDS

When Misfeed Occurs In P Section

1 You can find a sticker, explaining

how to remove the misfed paper,
P
on the optional document feeder
as shown in the illustration.

2 Remove the misfed original refer-

ring to the sticker.

When Misfeeds Occur In R Section

1 Open the front door of the op-

tional finisher.

2 You can find a sticker (with Y at

the top) explaining how to re-
move misfed paper, inside the
front door as shown in the illus-
tration.

3 Remove misfed paper following

the instructions on the sticker.

124
 na-7

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

When "
Check Staple Unit" is displayed, staples are jammed in the
optional finisher. Remove jammed staples as follows:

Since some parts of the finisher are supplied with

?IWARNING:
high electrical voltage, touch only the parts specified
in the instructions on the sticker inside the finisher’s
cover.
❐ After loading a new staple cartridge, staples might not be ejected the first few
times you try to use the stapler.

1 Open the front door of the op-

tional finisher.

2 You can find a sticker (with

at
the top) explaining how to re-
move jammed staples, inside the
front door as shown in the illus-
tration.

3 Remove jammed staples follow-

ing the instructions on the sticker.

125
 na-7

REMOVING JAMMED STAPLES

126
 na-8

CHANGING THE
COPIER’S SETTINGS
CHANGING PAPER SIZE ......................................................................................................... 128
Changing Paper Size In The 1st Tray.................................................................................................. 128
Changing The Paper Size In The Optional Tray Unit (Trays 2, 3, and 4)........................................ 133

USER TOOLS ............................................................................................................................ 134

User Tools Menu .................................................................................................................................... 134
How To Change The Basic Settings And Copy Features ................................................................ 136
Basic Settings......................................................................................................................................... 137
Copy Features....................................................................................................................................... 141
How To Register User Stamp ............................................................................................................... 152

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS...................................................................................... 153

127
 na-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

Changing Paper Size In The 1st Tray

Standard size paper

❐ You can select paper of the following sizes:

Metric version Inch version

A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;, B5 : ;, A5 : 11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
81/2" x 11" : ; 51/2" x 81/2" :, A3 ;, A4 : ;, A5 :

1
Pull the paper tray out until it
stops.

2
Remove the copy paper.

3
Remove the left guide as shown
in the illustration.
2

128
 na-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

4
Set the left guide to the paper
size you want to use as shown in
the illustration. 1

5
Load paper in the tray.
❐ Do not stack paper over the limit
mark.

6
While pressing the release lever
on the front guide, slide the front
and rear guides to the paper size
you want to use.

7
Select the paper size by adjusting
the paper size selector on the
back side of the tray.

8
Push the paper tray in until it
stops.

129
 na-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

F/F4 size paper (8" x 13", 81/4" x 13", or 81/2" x 13)

1 6
1
Follow steps to on pages
128 and 129.

2
Select "F/F4" by adjusting the pa-
per size selector on the back side
of the tray.

3 Press the User Tools key.

User Tools Guidance

4
Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

5
Touch the [Next] key three times to reach the paper size setting menu.

6
In the "Tray 1 <F/F4> Paper Size Setting" menu, the present size
setting is displayed. Touch the [Change] key. Select the new paper
size by touching a key. Then, touch the [Exit] key.

7
Press the User Tools key, then push the paper tray in until it stops.

130
 na-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

Special size paper

❐ You can select paper of the following sizes:

Metric version Inch version

11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 51/2" x 81/2" :, 11" x 15" ;, 10" x 14" ;, 8" x 101/2" ;,
8" x 10" ; 8" x 10" ;, B4 ;

1 6
1
Follow steps to on pages
128 and 129.

2 Select * by adjusting the paper

size selector on the back side of
the tray.

3
Press the User Tools key.

User Tools Guidance

4
Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

131
 na-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

5
Touch the [Next] key three times to reach the paper size setting menu.

6 In the "Tray 1 <*> Paper Size Setting" menu, the present size setting is
displayed. Touch the [Change] key. Select the new paper size by
touching a key. Then, touch the [Exit] key.

*
❐ " " (asterisk) is displayed on the key for paper sizes that cannot be detected in
some modes (ex. Auto Paper Select).

7
Press the User Tools key, then push the paper tray in until it stops.

132
 na-8

CHANGING PAPER SIZE

Changing The Paper Size In The Optional Tray Unit

(Trays 2, 3, and 4)
❐ You can select paper of the following sizes:

Metric version Inch version

11" x 17" ;, 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;, B5 : ;
11" x 15" ;, 10" x 14" ;, 8" x 101/2" ;,
11" x 17" ; , 81/2" x 14" ;, 81/2" x 11" : ;,
8" x 10" ;, A3 ;, B4 ;, A4 : ;,
8" x 10" ;, 8" x 13" ;, 81/2" x 13" ;,
8" x 13" ;, 81/2" x 13" ;,
81/4" x 13" ;
81/4" x 13" ;

1 6
1
Follow steps to on pages
128 and 129.

2
Press the User Tools key.

User Tools Guidance

3
Touch the [Basic Settings] key.

4
Touch the [Next] key three times to reach the paper size setting menu.

5
Find the paper tray (2, 3, or 4) and touch the [Change] key. Select the
new paper size by touching a key. Then, touch the [Exit] key.

6
Press the User Tools key, then push the paper tray in until it stops.

133
 na-8

USER TOOLS

USER TOOLS
This section is for the key operators in charge of this copier. You can
change or set the copier’s default settings using the following user tools.

User Tools Menu

Menu ☛ See
Auto Response (Human) Sensor
Operation panel beeper
Copy count display page 137
Set date
Set time
Auto Reset
Basic Settings

page 137
Low Power Timer
Auto Off Timer page 138
Paper Type Display (for each tray) page 138
Tray 1 <*> Paper Size Setting
Tray 1 <F/F4>Paper Size Setting page 138
Paper Size Setting (for tray 2, 3, and 4 (option))
Paper Tray Priority
Original: <F/F4> Size Setting page 139
ADF: Thin Paper Mode
Auto Tray Switching
Set User Code(s) page 140

Menu ☛ See
Copy Auto Paper Select Priority
Copy Features

Modes Auto Image Density Priority

Original Mode Priority page 141
Full Main Menu Display
Duplex Mode Priority
User Reproduction Ratio 1, 2
Maximum copy quantity page 142
Original beeper

134
 na-8

USER TOOLS

Menu ☛ See
Adjust Margin Adjust Front
Image Margin Adjust Back page 142

Erase Border
Erase Center page 143
1 → 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust
Double Copies Separation Line page 143
Combine Originals Booklet Format
page 144
Image Repeat/Combine Separation Line
Stamp Page Numbering Format page 144
P1,P2 1/5,2/5... Format Position
page 145
-1-,-2- Format Position
Copy Features (continued)

Auto Stamping
Size page 146
Stamp Layout Density
Position page 147
User Stamp
Size
User Stamp Layout Density page 148
Position
Number of Stamps Per Page
Date Format
Orientation
Date Position/Format Position
Position Top Left page 149
Position Bottom Right
Background Numbering Size
page 150
Background Numbering Density
Input/ Duplex Remaining Copy Exit
Output Combine Remaining Copy Exit page 150

SADF Auto Reset Time

Mixed Original Sizes page 151
Auto Sort Mode
Memory Full Auto Scan Restart
page 151
Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue

135
 na-8

USER TOOLS

How To Change The Basic Settings And Copy Features

1
Confirm that the copier is in the in-
itial condition. If not, press the Clear
Modes/Low Power Mode key.

2
Press the User Tools key.

User Tools Guidance

3
Touch the [Basic Settings] or
[Copy Features] key.

4
Select the desired settings following the instruction on the display.

❐ [▼Next] : Use to go to the next page.

[▲Prev.] : Use to go back to the previous page.
[Exit] : Touch this key after entering the new data.
In the "User Tools Main Menu", touch to exit the User Tools condition.
[Cancel] : Touch to return to the previous menu without changing any data.
[Menu] : Use to go back to the previous menu.

5
To return to the initial condition, press the User Tools key.

136
 na-8

USER TOOLS

Basic Settings

MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Response When the auto response sensor does not detect anyone
(Human) Sensor operating it, the copier will be in the some Reset modes (Auto
Reset, Low Power mode, Auto Off, or SADF Auto Reset) after
the selected time in each menu. You can cancel this setting.
❐ Default: Yes (On)
Operation panel The beeper (key tone) can be turned on or off.
beeper ❐ Default: On
Copy count display The copy counter can be set to show the number of copies
made (count up) or the number of copies remaining to be made
(count down).
❐ Default: Up (count up)
Set date Use to set the date and copier’s internal clock. Set the date and
Set time clock following the touch panel display instructions.
❐ Date of the Date Stamping mode depends on these.
❐ If necessary, remember to adjust the clock for daylight saving time
(summer time), or return it to the standard time.
[▼ Next]
Auto Reset The copier returns to its initial condition automatically after your
job is finished. The automatic reset time can be set from 10
seconds to 180 seconds in 10 seconds steps or no auto reset
(0 second).
❐ Default: 30 seconds
Low Power Timer The copier will automatically enter a Low Power condition after
the selected time after the last copying job has been completed.
This time can be set from 1 to 240 minutes in 1 minute steps.
❐ Default: 15 minutes
❐ The operator can activate the Low Power mode by pressing the
Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key for more than one second.
❐ Time required to return to a ready condition from the Low Power
mode is less than 30 seconds.
❐ In this mode, power consumption is reduced from less than 0.22kW
(standby) to less than 0.19 kW.

137
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Basic Settings)
MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Off Timer To conserve energy, this copier automatically turns off 60
minutes after the last copying job has been completed. This
time can be set from 10 to 240 minutes in 10 minutes steps.
❐ Default: 60 minutes
❐ To exit Auto Off mode, turn on the main switch. The main switch for
this copier has three positions, press it all the way, and hold for 1 -
2 seconds.
❐ In Auto Off mode, power consumption is reduced from less than
0.22kW (standby) to less than 0.04 W.
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]
Paper Type Display When recycled paper or special paper is in the paper trays,
paper type can be indicated on the touch panel display.
❐ Default: No display
❐ You cannot select both of recycled paper and special paper for one
tray.
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]
Tray 1 <*> Paper Size If you want to use special paper size, you can set the paper
Setting size for tray 1.
❐ Default: Metric version: 11" x 17"
Inch version: 10" x 14"
❐ Regarding procedures and paper sizes that can be selected,
☛ see page 131.
❐ Make sure to select * by adjusting the paper size selector on the
back side of the tray.
❐ * (asterisk) is displayed on the keys of paper sizes that cannot be
used in the Auto Paper Select.
Tray 1 <F/F4> Paper If you want to use 81/2" x 13, 8" x 13", or 81/4" x 13" paper for
Size Setting the 1st tray, use this user tool.
❐ Default: 81/2" x 13
❐ Regarding procedures, ☛ see page 130.
❐ Make sure to select F/F4 by adjusting the paper size selector on the
back side of the tray.
Paper Size Setting Use to change the paper sizes in the optional tray unit.
Tray 2, 3, and 4 ❐ Default: Metric version: A4 :
(option) Inch version: 81/2" x 11" :
❐ Make sure to change the paper size setting, when changing the
paper size in the tray. If not, misfeed might occur.
❐ Make sure to select the paper size when installing the optional tray
unit.
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]

138
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Basic Settings)
MENU DESCRIPTION
[▲ Prev.] [▼ Next]
Paper Tray Priority You can choose the tray which will be active under the
following conditions:
♦ when the main switch is turned on.
♦ after the Auto Reset or Low Power mode
♦ after pressing the Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key
❐ Default: Tray T (1000-sheet large capacity tray)
Original: <F/F4> Size You can select one of the following original sizes to be detected
Setting in the Auto Paper Select and Auto Reduce/Enlarge modes as F
size.
81/2" x 13, 81/4" x 13", or 8" x 13"
❐ Default: 81/2" x 13"
ADF: Thin Paper Mode Use when changing the type of originals to be fed into the
optional document feeder. Select this setting when you use thin
originals (40 ~ 52 g/m2 or 11 ~ 14 lb).
❐ Default: Normal (Not Thin)
Auto Tray Switching If you load paper of the same size and in the same direction in
two or more trays, the copier automatically shifts to another tray
when the tray in use runs out of paper. You can cancel this
setting.
❐ Default: Yes
❐ Trays for special paper and recycled paper can be used only when
the Special Paper Size setting is the same.

139
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Basic Settings)
MENU DESCRIPTION

Set User Code(s)

If the copier is set to use the User Code function, operators must input their user codes
before the machine can operate. The copier keeps count of the number of copies made
under each user code. To have the machine set to the User Code mode, please use the
user tool "Set User Code Mode" and after that contact your sales/service representative.

Check/Reset/Print You can check the number of copies made under each user
Copy Counter code.
You can clear each code’s counter, or clear all codes’ counters.
You can print the counter data for all user codes on the paper
loaded in the large capacity tray.
❐ It takes about 2 minutes to print them out.
❐ If the beeper sounds twice when selecting [Print], load paper in the
Large capacity tray, or close the bypass tray.

User Code
Use to register, change, delete one user code, or delete all user
Register/Change/Delete
codes.
❐ Up to 250 user codes (6 digits) can be registered.
❐ When changing user codes, the number of copies made under the
old code is added to that made under the new user code.
❐ When deleting user codes, the number of copies made under the
deleted code is deleted.
❐ Registered codes will be sorted in numerical order.

Assign/Activate If you select [Yes], only operators who know the key operator
Key Operator Code code can access the user tools for the User Code mode.
❐ Default: No
❐ If you select [Yes], you should register the key operator access
code. ☛ Use the "Key Operator Code" menu.

Key Operator Code Use to register or change the key operator code.

Set User Code Mode You can select the User Code mode.
❐ Default: No (not User Code mode)
❐ After select [Yes], please contact your sales/service representative
to set your machine to the User Code mode.
[▲ Prev.]

140
 na-8

USER TOOLS

Copy Features

Copy Modes
MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Paper Select As a default setting, Auto Paper select is selected. You can
Priority cancel this setting.
❐ Default: Yes
Auto Image Density As a default setting, Auto Image Density is selected. You can
Priority cancel this setting.
❐ Default: Yes
Original Mode As a default setting, Letter is selected. You can change it to
Priority Letter/Photo, Photo, or Generation Copy.
❐ Default: Letter
Full Main Menu As a default setting, the tray keys are displayed only when
Display Auto Paper Select is canceled, original type setting keys are
displayed only when Letter mode is canceled, and the manual
image density keys are shown only when the Auto Image
Density is canceled. You can cancel this setting and have all
keys displayed always.
❐ Default: Hide
Duplex Mode Priority As a default setting, from even number of one-sided originals
to a two-sided copies mode (orientation: Top to Top) is
selected. You can cancel this setting, and can select one of
the following modes.
♦ [1 Sided → 1 Sided]
(from one-sided originals to one-sided copies)
♦ [2 Sided → 2 Sided]
(from two-sided originals to two-sided copies)
❐ Default: [1 Sided → 2 Sided]
♦ from one-sided originals to two-sided copies
♦ Number of originals: Even
♦ Orientation: Top to Top

[▼ Next]

141
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Copy Modes in Copy Features)

[▼ Next]
User Reproduction Up to 2 reproduction ratios (from 32 ~ 400%) which you
Ratio 1, 2 frequently use can be registered.
Maximum copy The maximum copy quantity can be set between 1 and 999.
quantity ❐ Default: 999
Original beeper The beeper sounds and a message is displayed, when an
operator forgets to remove originals after copying.
❐ Default: On
❐ If the Operation panel beeper setting is set to Off (☛ see page
137), the beeper does not sound and only the message is
displayed.
❐ If the Auto Response (Human) Sensor is set to No (☛ see page
137), this function does not work.
[▲ Prev.]

Adjust Image
MENU DESCRIPTION
Margin Adjust Front The default setting of the margin widths on the front and back
Margin Adjust Back page in the Margin Adjustment mode can be changed as
follows:
Metric version: 0 ~ 30 mm in 1 mm steps*
Inch version: 0" ~ 1.0" in 0.1" steps*
*both left and right
❐ Default: Metric version: front 5 mm on left
back 5 mm on right
Inch version: front 0.2" on left
back 0.2" on right
❐ Margin Adjust Back takes effect only when making two sided
copies.
❐ The margin set in the Margin Adjust Back is added on the back
side of copies automatically when making two-sided copies from
one-sided originals if you select [Yes] in the "1 → 2 Duplex Auto
Margin Adjust" menu.

142
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Adjust Image in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Erase Border The default setting of the width of the erased margins in the
Erase Center Erase Center/Border mode can be changed as follows:
Metric version: 3 ~ 50 mm in 1 mm steps
Inch version: 0.1" ~ 2.0" in 0.1" steps
❐ Default: Metric version: 10 mm
Inch version: 0.4"
1 → 2 Duplex Auto As a default setting, the image on the back side of copies is
Margin Adjust shifted automatically to create the binding margin when
making two-sided copies from one-sided originals. This margin
is decided in the Margin Adjust Back. You can cancel this
setting.
❐ Default: Yes
❐ If you use the Margin Adjustment function, this setting does not
come effect.
[▼ Next]
Double Copies You can select a separation line in the Double Copies mode
Separation Line from broken line, solid line, crop marks, or no line.
❐ Default: Broken

None Solid Broken Crop Marks

143
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Adjust Image in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Combine Originals When making a booklet from 16 originals in the Combine mode,
Booklet Format you can select a booklet that reads from left to right or from
right to left.
❐ Default: L to R
R to L L to R

front front
side side

back back
side side

Image Repeat/Combine As a default setting, no separation line is printed on copies in

Separation Line the Image Repeat and Combine modes. You can cancel this
setting and print a solid separation line.
❐ Default: No
[▲ Prev.]

Stamp
MENU DESCRIPTION
Page Numbering As a default setting, [P1, P2...] is selected when entering in
Format the Page Numbering mode. You can cancel this setting and
select other formats ([1/5,2/5...] or [-1-,-2-...]).
❐ Default: P1, P2 ⋅⋅⋅

144
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
P1, P2 The printing position of Page Numbering (P1, P2 and 1/5, 2/5)
1/5, 2/5... can be shifted up/down from the top edge and left/right from the
Format Position right edge as follows:
Metric version: 4 ~ 40 mm in 4 mm steps
Inch version: 0.16" ~ 1.60" in 0.16" steps
❐ P1, P2 and 1/5, 2/5 formats can be printed on the right top corner.
❐ Default: Metric version: 8 mm (from the top edge)
12 mm (from the right edge)
Inch version: 0.32" (from the top edge)
0.48" (from the right edge)

4 ~ 40 mm or
0.16" ~ 1.60"
40 ~ 4 mm or
1.60" ~ 0.16"

-1-, -2- The printing position of Page Numbering (-1-, -2-) can be shifted
Format Position up down from the bottom edge and left/right from the center of
paper as follows:
Metric version: up/down: 4 ~ 40 mm in 4 mm steps
left/right: 0 (center) ~ 20 mm in 2 mm steps
Inch version: up/down: 0.16" ~ 1.60" in 0.16" steps
left/right: 0" (center) ~ 0.80" in 0.08" steps
❐ Only -1-, -2- format can be printed on the center of the bottom.
❐ Default: Metric version: 8 mm (from the bottom edge)
0 mm (center)
Inch version: 0.32" (from the bottom edge)
0" (center)

center ~ 20 mm or center ~ 20 mm or
center ~ 0.80" center ~ 0.80"

40 ~ 4 mm or 1.60" ~ 0.16"

145
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Auto Stamping As a default setting, "URGENT" is selected when entering in the
Auto Stamping mode. You can cancel this setting and select
other messages (CONFIDENTIAL, COPY, PRIORITY,
PRELIMINARY, For Your Information, or For Internal Use Only).
❐ If your machine is the metric version, the Auto Stamping cannot be
used as a default setting. If you want to use this function, contact
your sales or service representative.
❐ Default: URGENT
Stamp Layout
You can change the size, density, and position of each message of Auto Stamping (UR-
GENT, COPY, PRIORITY, PRELIMINARY, CONFIDENTIAL, For Your Information, and
For Internal Use Only)
❐ If your machine is the metric version, the Auto Stamping cannot be used as a default setting. If
you want to use this function, contact your sales/service representative.

Size There are four sizes of Auto Stamping message:

1 X, 2 X, 4 X, 8 X.
❐ Default: 1 X (32 mm x 64 mm, 1.28" x 2.56")

Density There are three density levels (Solid, Fine Screen, and Coarse
Screen).
❐ Default: Solid
❐ If the copy image overlaps the Auto Stamping in
Solid, the copy image cannot be seen.
Fine Screen, the copy image can be seen.
Coarse Screen, the copy image can be seen more.

146
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Stamp Layout (continued)
Position The default printing position of Auto Stamping can be selected
from one of nine positions. Also, the default printing position can
be adjusted as follows:
❐ Default: Top Right
Metric version: 24 mm from top and right edge
Inch version: 0.96" from top and right edge

Top left Top right

Top Center

Center
Center Center
left right

Bottom
Bottom left Center Bottom right

Metric version Inch version

➀ from the left edge 4 ~ 104 mm 0.16" ~ 4.16"
➁ from the top edge 4 ~ 144 mm 0.16" ~ 5.76"
➂ from the right edge 4 ~ 104 mm 0.16" ~ 4.16"
➃ from the bottom
4 ~ 144 mm 0.16" ~ 5.76"
edge
➄ from the horizontal
above 72 mm ~ below 72 mm above 2.88" ~ below 2.88"
center line of paper
➅ from the vertical
left 52 mm ~ right 52 mm left 2.08" ~ right 2.08"
center line of paper
❐ Metric version: in 4 mm steps
Inch version: in 0.16" steps
[▼ Next]

147
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
[▼ Next]
User Stamp Using the [Register] key, you can register your own messages
as user stamps. Up to four stamp can be registered. Also, you
can delete registered user stamps using the [Delete] key.
To perform this function, ☛ see page 152.
❐ A key with  has a registered stamp in it.
User Stamp Layout
You can set the size, density, and position for each user stamp. The procedure is the
same as the "Stamp Layout" on pages 146 and 147.
Size ☛ See page 146.
Density ☛ See page 146.
Position ☛ See page 147.
Number of As a default setting, one user stamp is printed on a copy. You
Stamps Per Page can cancel this setting, and print a user stamp repeatedly on a
overall copy.
❐ Default: Single
Date Position/Format
Date Format You can select the date stamping format from one of three
(mm/dd/yyyy, dd.mm.yyyy, or dd/mm/yyyy).
❐ Default: Metric version: dd.mm.yyyy
Inch version: mm/dd/yyyy

Orientation The orientation can be selected horizontal or vertical.

❐ Default: Horizontal
<Horizontal> <Vertical>
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

148
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Date Position/Format (continued)
Position The date can be printed at Top Left or Bottom Right.
❐ Default: Top Left
<Top Left> <Top Left>

<Bottom Right> <Bottom Right>

Position Top Left The stamping position can be shifted as follows.

Position Top Right Metric version: 4 ~ 40 mm in 4 mm steps
Inch version: 0.16" ~ 1.60" in 0.16" steps
❐ Top Left Default
Metric version: 8 mm from the top edge
20 mm from the left edge
Inch version: 0.32" from the top edge
0.80" from the left edge
4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~1.60"
(from the top edge)
4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~ 1.60"
(from the left edge)

❐ Bottom Right Default

Metric version: 8 mm from the bottom edge
12 mm from the right edge
Inch version: 0.32" from the bottom edge
0.48" from the right edge

4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~ 1.60"
(from the right edge)
4 ~ 40 mm or 0.16" ~ 1.60"
(from the bottom edge)

149
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Stamp in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
Background There are three sizes of the Background Numbering.
Numbering Size The size of one letter can be changed as follows:
Large (approximately 64 x 32 mm or 2.56" x 1.28")
Medium (approximately 32 x 16 mm or 1.28" x 0.64")
Small (approximately 8 x 4 mm or 0.32" x 0.16")
❐ Default: Medium
Background There are four density levels: Very Light, Light, Medium, or Dark.
Numbering Density ❐ Default: Light
[▼ Next]

Input/Output
MENU DESCRIPTION
Duplex Remaining As a default setting, when making two-sided copies from one-
Copy Exit sided, or using Multi mode with the optional document feeder,
the last copy paper can exit automatically with the back side
blank under the following conditions. You can cancel this setting.
♦ When you select [Even], although the number of originals
are odd.
♦ When you select [Odd], although the number of originals
are even.
♦ When your originals are finished in the Multi mode.

❐ Default: Yes
❐ This function does not come effect, when you set one original at a
time in the document feeder or set an original on the exposure glass.
Combine As a default setting, even if the number of originals in the
Remaining Copy optional document feeder is less than the number required in the
Exit selected Combine mode, copies can be made. You can cancel
this setting.
❐ Default: Yes
❐ This function does not come effect, when you set one original at a
time in the document feeder or set an original on the exposure glass.

150
 na-8

USER TOOLS

(Input/Output in Copy Features)

MENU DESCRIPTION
SADF Auto Reset When you set one original at a time in the optional document
Time feeder, the Auto Feed indicator lights for a selected time after an
original is fed to show that the document feeder is ready for
another original. You can adjust this time from 3 seconds to 60
seconds in 1 second steps.
❐ Default: 10 seconds
Mixed Original As a default setting, you cannot use originals of different sizes
Sizes and directions when you set originals in the optional document
feeder. You can cancel this setting.
❐ Default: No
❐ If you set the copier in this mode, the copying speed becomes slower
in some modes.
Auto Sort Mode As a default setting, Sort mode is not selected. You can cancel
this setting and can select Sort mode as a default setting.
❐ Default: No
[▼ Next]
Memory Full Auto When memory runs out during copying, the machine can be
Scan Restart programmed to behave in two ways with the user tools.
[Yes]: After all images in memory are copied, the machine will re-
start scanning automatically. You should re-order your copies
after all copy jobs are finished.
[No]: The machine will wait for you to press the Start key. At
this point you should remove your copies from the copy tray.
Press the Start key and then follow the instructions on the
display to continue copying.
❐ Default: No
Rotate Sort Auto As a default, two paper trays identcal in size but different in
Paper Continue direction must be available in the Rotate Sort or Rotate Stack
mode.
If there are not two paper trays identical in size but different in
direction, the copier stops copying. Also, the copier stops if one
of the selected paper trays in use runs out of paper.
You can change this setting, so that the copier continues
copying using paper trays identical in size and direction.
❐ Default: No
[▲ Prev.]

151
 na-8

USER TOOLS

How To Register User Stamp

1
Confirm that the copier is in the ready condition.

2
Press the User Tools key.

User Tools Guidance

3
Touch the keys in the following order.
[Copy Features] key
[Stamp] key
[Next] key
[Register] key of the User Stamp menu

4
Select the user stamp number by
touching a key.
❐ A key with  has a registered stamp
in it. If you want to overwrite it, follow


the instructions on the display after
touching the key with .

5
Place your message on the expo-
0.5 mm
sure glass face down as shown
(0.02")
in the illustration. Then, touch the
topscale
[Scan] key.
32 mm
❐ The area that can be registered is 64 (1.28")
mm x 32 mm (2.56" x 1.28") as leftscale
shown in the illustration.
64 mm (2.56")
❐ Margins from the top and left scale 1 mm (0.04")
cannot be registered as shown in the
illustration.

6
Press the User Tools key to re-
turn to the ready condition.

152
 na-8

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS

Some features can be adjusted by your service representative to suit your
needs. This section gives a brief description of these features. For more
information, contact your service representative.

LCT Paper Size Change

The large capacity tray holds A4 : (for the metric version) or 81/2" x 11" :
(for the inch version) copy paper. If you need, A4 : can be set for the inch
version, and 81/2" x 11" : can be set for the metric version.

Auto Stamping (for metric version)

If your machine is the metric version, Auto Stamping cannot be used as a
default setting. You can cancel this setting and use this function.

A3, 11" x 17" Double Count

When you use A3, 11" x 17" paper, your service representative can set the
copier to count each A3, 11" x 17" as two copies.

Auto Image Density Level Selection

Auto Image Density level can be adjusted to lighter or darker.

APS A5/51/2" x 81/2" Detection

Your service representative can set the copier to detect the original size on
the exposure glass as A5 ; (for metric version) or 51/2" x 81/2" ; (for inch
version) whenever the copier cannot detect it with Auto Paper Select.

Set User Code Mode

☛ See page 140.

153
 na-8

SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE SETTINGS

154
 na-9

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER

DO’S AND DON’TS
REMARKS
WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER
USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER ................................................................................................ 156

Copier .................................................................................................................................................... 156
Document Feeder (Option) ................................................................................................................ 156

DO’S AND DON’TS.................................................................................................................. 157

Copier .................................................................................................................................................... 157
Document Feeder (Option) ................................................................................................................ 158
Finisher (Option).................................................................................................................................... 158

REMARKS................................................................................................................................. 159
Copier .................................................................................................................................................... 159

WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER................................................................................................ 160

Copier Environment ............................................................................................................................. 160
Power Connection ............................................................................................................................... 160
Access To The Copier .......................................................................................................................... 161

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ........................................................................................... 162

Copy Paper........................................................................................................................................... 162
Paper Storage....................................................................................................................................... 163
Toner Storage........................................................................................................................................ 163

155
 na-9

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER

MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER

To maintain high copy quality, clean the following parts and units regularly
with a damp cloth and wipe them with a dry cloth.

Copier
Exposure glass Platen cover

Document Feeder (Option)

Feed-in unit Belt

156
 na-9

DO’S AND DON’TS

DO’S AND DON’TS

Copier

General operations
❐ When you make copies using the bypass tray, paper should be set in the bypass
tray lengthwise (;).
❐ Do not place sheets of paper or originals on the cover of the large capacity tray.
❐ Do not move the copier when the main switch is turned on.
❐ Do not move the copier a few minutes after the main switch is turned off.

When adding toner

❐ Do not incinerate toner or toner containers. Toner dust might ignite when ex-
posed to open flame.
❐ Dispose of the used toner bottle according to local regulations.
❐ When adding toner, do not turn off the main switch. If you do, your copy settings
are cleared.
❐ Before setting the new toner, shake it well, at least 5 or 6 times.
❐ Do not remove the inner cap of the new toner bottle.

When removing misfed paper

❐ Since some parts of the copier are supplied with high electrical voltage, touch
only the parts specified in the instructions on the sticker inside the machine’s
cover.
❐ When removing misfed paper from sections B and C, use cautions. The fusing
unit may be very hot. ☛ See page 4 for the position of the fusing unit.
❐ Do not leave any torn scrapes within the copier.
❐ When clearing misfeeds, do not turn off the main switch. If you do, your copy
settings are cleared.
❐ After clearing misfeeds, make sure that all units and levers are returned to their
original positions and all covers are closed.

157
 na-9

DO’S AND DON’TS

Document Feeder (Option)

❐ While originals are fed from the original table to the exposure glass, do not pull
out the originals.
❐ Do not lift the document feeder until the last original has been completely fed out.
❐ Do not press down or hold originals after inserting them.
❐ Do not press any parts of the document feeder strongly.

Finisher (Option)
❐ Do not remove copies from the shift tray while copying.

158
 na-9

REMARKS

REMARKS
Copier
❐ To avoid problems caused by curly copies, try turning over the paper stack in the
500-sheet or large capacity tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy
paper with less curl.
❐ Load paper with the copy side down in the 500-sheet trays, and with the copy
side up in the large capacity tray. If copies are curled, try turning the copy paper
over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the copy paper with less curl.
❐ Leading and side edges of the original image are not copied, as shown in the
illustration.

a a: 2 + 2.5 mm
2 − 1.5 mm
b: 2 ± 1.5 mm
c: 3 ± 2 mm
Paper feed direction d: 2 ± 2 mm

c d

159
 na-9

WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER

WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER

Copier Environment
The installation location should be carefully chosen because environmental
conditions greatly affect the performance of a copier.
Optimum environmental conditions
o
❐ Temperature: 10 - 30 C
❐ Humidity: 15 - 90 %
❐ A strong and level base.
❐ To avoid possible built-up of ozone, make sure to locate this copier in a large well
ventilated room which has an air turnover of more than 30 m3/hr/person.
❐ The copier must be level within 5 mm both front or rear and left to right.

Environments to avoid
❐ Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1,500 lux).
❐ Dusty areas.
❐ Areas with corrosive gasses.
❐ Places higher than 2,000 m above sea level.
❐ Places where the copier might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.
❐ Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air from a
heater. (Sudden temperature changes might cause condensation within the cop-
ier.)

Power Connection
❐ Connect the copier to a power source meeting the specifications given on the
inside from cover of this manual.
❐ Do not set anything on the power cord.
❐ Voltage must not fluctuate more than 10 %.
❐ Avoid multiwiring.
❐ Make sure that the wall outlet is near the copier and easily accessible.
❐ Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
❐ Always turn the copier off when you have finished copying for the day, but leave
it plugged in.

160
 na-9

WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER

Access To The Copier

Place the copier near a power source, providing clearance as shown.
Copier More than 10 cm or 4.0"

More than 39 cm More than 50 cm

or 15.4" or 19.7"
More than 70 cm
or 27.6"

Copier with the optional finisher

More than 10 cm or 4.0"

More than 72 cm or 28.4" More than 50 cm

or 19.7"

More than 70 cm or 27.6"

General Information
❐ Always turn the copier off when you have finished copying for a day, but leave it
plugged in.
❐ When the copier will not be used for a long period, disconnect the power cord.
❐ If the copier must be transported by vehicle, please contact your service repre-
sentative.
❐ When the main switch is in teh Stand-by position, the optional heaters are on. In
case of emergency, unplug the machine’s power cord.
❐ To disconnect the power source, the main plug must be pulled.

161
 na-9

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

Copy Paper
❐ Copy paper of the types or in the conditions listed below are not recommended
for this copier.
• Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper.
• Torn paper
• Damp paper
• Perforated paper
• Paper with conductive or low electrical resistance such as carbon or silver
coating.
• Wavy paper
• Thermal paper, art paper
• Thin paper that has low stiffness
❐ Use the bypass tray to copy onto OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, translu-
cent paper, and post cards. Before making copies onto them, read the following:
• Adhesive labels should be fed from the bypass tray one sheet at a time.
• OHP transparencies should be fed from the bypass tray. You can set ten
sheets at a time. However, if misfeed or multi-feed occurs, set one sheet at a time.
• OHP transparencies should be fanned to get air between the sheets before loading.
• Translucent paper should be fed from the bypass tray.
• Translucent paper should be fanned to get air between the sheets and any curls
should be corrected before loading.
• Post cards should be fed from the bypass tray.
• It is recommended to feed one post card at a time.
• Correct any curl in post cards before loading.
❐ For good copy quality, please use the type of OHP transparencies recommended
by your sales and service representatives.
❐ When using the bypass tray, the large capacity tray cannot be used.
❐ Do not touch copy paper if your fingers are wet or oily; finger prints many appear
on the copy.
❐ Do not use copy paper that has been already copied on.
❐ Do not set copy paper over the limit mark inside the tray.
❐ To avoid problems caused by curly copies, try turning over the paper stack in the
500-sheet or large capacity tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy
paper with less curl.
❐ Load paper with the copy side down in the 500-sheet trays, and with the copy
side up in the large capacity tray. If copies are curled, try turning the copy paper
over in the tray. If there is no improvement, change the copy paper with less curl.

162
 na-9

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

Paper Storage
Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly stored paper might
result in poor image reproduction. creased copies, and paper misfeeds.
Generally, avoid curling and absorption of moisture.
❐ Avoid storing paper in humid areas. Under high temperature and high humidity, or
low temperature and low humidity conditions, store paper in a vinyl bag.
❐ Do not store paper where it will be exposed to heat.
❐ Store on a flat surface.
❐ Use older stock first.
❐ Do not lay heavy objects on paper.
❐ Keep open reams of paper in the package, and store as you would unopened
paper.

Toner Storage
❐ Store toner bottles vertically in a cool, dark place.
❐ Never store toner where it will be exposed to heat.
❐ Do not lay heavy objects on toner bottles.

163
 na-9

USE AND STORAGE OF SUPPLIES

164
 na-10

SPECIFICATIONS
COPIER .................................................................................................................................... 166
DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)............................................................................................... 169
FINISHER (OPTION) ................................................................................................................. 170
1000-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION) .......................................................................................... 171
1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION) .......................................................................................... 171

165
 na-10

COPIER

COPIER
Configuration: Desktop
Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Memory capacity: approximately 1GB hard disk
Scanning method: Flatbed solid state scanner
Resolution: 400 x 400 dpi
Gray scale: 256 levels
Originals: Sheet, book
Original thickness: less than 30 mm, 1.18"
Original size: Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Copy paper size: ☛ See pages 128, 130, and 131.
Copy paper weight: 1st paper tray:
60 ~ 105 g/m2 (16 ~ 28 lb)
bypass tray:
60 ~ 157 g/m2 (16 ~ 42 lb)
large capacity tray:
60 ~ 128 g/m2 (16 ~ 34 lb)
when making two-sided copies:
64 ~ 105 g/m2 (17 ~ 28 lb)
Copy paper capacity: 1st paper tray:
500 sheets or less than 53 mm, 2.08"
bypass tray:
40 sheets or less than 4 mm, 0.15"
large capacity tray:
1000 sheets or less than 120 mm, 4.72"
Optional copy tray A3, 11" x 17": 200 sheets
capacity: B5 or smaller: 200 sheets
B4 or smaller: 500 sheets
Copying speed: 50 copies/minute
(A4 :, 81/2" x 11" :, in Full Size mode)
First copy time: less than 4.5 seconds
(A4 :, 81/2" x 11" :, feeding from the large capac-
ity tray)
Warm-up time: less than 140 seconds (20°C, 68°F)

166
 na-10

COPIER

Toner replacement: Bottle exchange (700 g)

Power source: 120V , 60Hz, more than 12A
Preset reproduction 5 enlargement and 7 reduction
ratios:
Metric version Inch version
400% 400%
200% 200%
Enlargement 141% 155%
122% 129%
115% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
93% 93%
87% 85%
82% 77%
Reduction 71% 74%
65% 65%
50% 50%
35% 35%

Power consumption:
Copier only Full system*
Warm-up less than 1.05 kW less than 1.07 kW
Stand-by less than 0.22 kW less than 0.24 kW
Copying less than 1.30 kW less than 1.35 kW
Maximum less than 1.44 kW less than 1.44 kW
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit

Noise emission:
Sound pressure level (The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at the
operator position)
Copier only Full system
Stand-by 28 dB (A) 28 dB (A)
Copying 53 dB (A) 59 dB (A)
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit

Sound power level (The measurements are made according to ISO 7779.)
Copier only Full system
Stand-by 40 dB (A) 41 dB (A)
Copying 67 dB (A) 69 dB (A)
* Full system: copier with document feeder, finisher, and paper tray unit

167
 na-10

COPIER

Dimensions:

Width Depth Height

Copier with platen cover, copy tray, and pa- 1,150 mm 655 mm 1,024 mm
per tray unit 45.3" 25.8" 40.4"
Copier with document feeder, finisher, and 1,551 mm 655 mm 1,110 mm
paper tray unit 61.1" 25.8" 43.8"

Weight:

Copier with platen cover, copy tray, and 1500- 139.0 kg

sheet paper tray unit 306.5 lb
Copier with document feeder, finisher, and 180.0 kg
1500-sheet paper tray unit 396.9 lb

Optional equipment: Document feeder

Finisher
Copy tray
Platen cover
1500-sheet tray unit
1000-sheet tray unit
❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

168
 na-10

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)

DOCUMENT FEEDER (OPTION)

Original feed: Automatic reverse document feed (ARDF)
two-sided originals mode
Automatic document feed (ADF)
one-sided originals mode
Semi-automatic document feed (SADF)
Single copies mode
Original size & weight:

Number of originals to be set:

Paper weight (g/m2) 40 47 53 64 81 105 128
Paper weight (lb) 11 12.5 14 17 22 28 34
Maximum number of
50 50 50 50 50 30 25
originals to be set
A3 lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
A4
sideways ✩ ✩ ● ● ● ● ★
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
A5
sideways ✩ ✩ ● ● ● ● ★
B4 lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✩
B5
sideways ✩ ✩ ● ● ● ● ★
lengthwise ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
B6
sideways ✩ ✩ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
●: ARDF (2 sided originals), ADF (1 sided originals), SADF, Single copies mode
❍: ARDF, ADF, SADF
★: ADF, SADF, Single copies mode
✩: ADF, SADF
Original set: Face up, first sheet on top
Original transport: One flat belt
Power consumption: DC 24V ± 10 % (from copier)
Power consumption: 45 W
Weight: Approximately 10.5 kg, 23.2 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 610 x 507 x 130 mm, 24.1" x 20.0" x 5.2"
❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

169
 na-10

FINISHER (OPTION)

FINISHER (OPTION)
Paper size: ☛ See page 97.
•When the shift tray is not shifted, A6 can be stacked.
Staple mode: ☛ See page 100.
Paper weight: ☛ See page 97.
Staple mode: ☛ See page 100.
Paper capacity: ☛ See page 97.
Staple mode: ☛ See page 100.
Staple position:

Top Bottom 2 Staples

a= 6 ± 3 mm a= 6 ± 3 mm a= 6 ± 3 mm
b= 6 ± 3 mm b= 6 ± 3 mm b= 132 ± 2 mm
c= 66 ± 3 mm

Staple replenishment: Cartridge exchange (5,000 pieces/cartridge)

Power source: DC 24V (from copier)
Power consumption: 48 W
Weight: 35 kg, 77.2 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 671 x 514 x 950 mm, 26.5" x 20.3" x 37.5"

❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

170
 na-10

1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

1000-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

1000-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

Paper size: ☛ See page 133.
Paper weight: 52 - 105 g/m2 (14 lb - 28 lb)
Paper capacity: 1,000 sheets
(500 sheets (80 g/m2) for each tray)
Power source: DC 24V, 5V, AC 120V (from copier)
Power consumption: Average: less than 50 W (copying)
Maximum: less than 110.5 W (copying)
Weight: Approximately 36 kg, 79.4 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 620 x 632 x 390 mm, 24.5" x 24.9" x 15.4"

❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

Paper size: ☛ See page 133.
Paper weight: 52 - 105 g/m2 (14 lb - 28 lb)
Paper capacity: 1,500 sheets
(500 sheets (80 g/m2) for each tray)
Power source: DC 24V, 5V, AC 120V (from copier)
Power consumption: Average: less than 50 W (copying)
Maximum: less than 110.5W (copying)
Weight: Approximately 38 kg, 83.8 lb
Dimensions (W x D x H): 620 x 632 x 390 mm, 24.5" x 24.9" x 15.4"

❐ Specifications are subject to change without notice.

171
 na-10

1500-SHEET TRAY UNIT (OPTION)

172
INDEX

173
INDEX

INDEX
Operation panel beeper, 137
A Original: /F4 Size Setting, 139
Paper Size SettingTray 2, 3, and 4(op-
A3, 11" x 17" Double Count, 153 tion), 138
ADF, 30 - 31 Paper Tray Priority, 139
ADF: Thin Paper Mode, 139 Paper Type Display, 138
Adjust Image, 86 - 95, 142 Set date/Set time, 137
1 -- 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust, 143 Set User Code(s), 140
Combine Originals Booklet Format, 144 Tray 1 * Paper Size Setting, 138
Double Copies, 86 Tray 1 /F4 Paper Size Setting, 138
Double Copies Separation Line, 143 book originals, 66, 68
Erase Border/Erase Center, 143 bypass tray, 5, 50
Erase Center/Border, 88 non-standard size paper, 51
Erase Center\Border, 89 standard size copy paper, 51
Image Repeat, 91
Image Repeat/Combine Separation Line, C
144
Margin Adjust Front/Back, 142 CAUTION, i
Overlay/Merge, 94 CHANGING PAPER SIZE, 128 - 133
Positive/Negative, 93 Clear Modes/Low Power Mode key, 7, 24
APS A5/5 1/2" x 8 1/2" Detection, 153 Clear/Stop key, 7
Auto Image Density, 37 COMBINATION CHART, 105 - 108
Auto Image Density Level Selection, 153 Combine, 70 - 73
Auto Image Density Priority, 141 Combine Originals Booklet Format, 144
Auto Off Timer, 138 Combine Remaining Copy Exit, 150
Auto Paper Select, 39 Contrast Dial, 6
Auto Paper Select Priority, 141 copier, 157, 166 - 168
Auto Reduce/Enlarge, 41 COPIER EXTERIOR & INTERIOR, 4 - 5
Auto Reset, 137 Copy count display, 137
Auto Response (Human) Sensor, 137 Copy Features, 141
auto response sensor, 5 Adjust Image, 142
Auto Sort Mode, 151 Copy Modes, 141
Auto Stamping, 75, 146 Input/Output, 150
Auto Stamping (for metric version), 153 Stamp, 144
Auto Start, 37 Copy Modes, 141
Auto Tray Switching, 139 Auto Image Density Priority, 141
Auto Paper Select Priority, 141
B Duplex Mode Priority, 141
Full Main Menu Display, 141
Background Numbering, 74 Maximum copy quantity, 142
Background Numbering Density, 150 Original beeper, 142
Background Numbering Size, 150 Original Mode Priority, 141
Basic Settings, 137 User Reproduction Ratio 1, 2 , 142
ADF: Thin Paper Mode, 139 copy paper, 162
Auto Off Timer, 138 copy paper, loading, 117 - 119
Auto Reset, 137 Copy Set Counter, 8
Auto Response (Human) Sensor, 137 Copy Set Total, 8
Auto Tray Switching, 139 copy tray, 3, 5
Copy count display, 137
Low Power Timer, 137

174
 INDEX

Auto Sort Mode, 151

D Combine Remaining Copy Exit, 150
Duplex Remaining Copy Exit, 150
Date Position/Format, 148 Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 151
Date Stamping, 81 Mixed Original Sizes, 151
Directional Magnification, 57 Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue, 151
Directional Size Magnification, 59 SADF Auto Reset Time, 151
DO’S AND DON’TS, 157 - 158 installation environments, 160 - 161
document feeder, 3, 158, 169 Interrupt Copying mode, 53
Double Copies, 86 Interrupt key, 7
Double Copies Separation Line, 143
Duplex, 61 J
Duplex Mode Priority, 141
Duplex Remaining Copy Exit, 150 Job Recall key, 6
duplex unit, 5 Job Recall mode, 53
Duplex/Series Copies, 61 - 69
Duplex, 61 K
Series Copies, 68
key counter holder, 5
E
L
Enter key, 7
Erase Background, 38 large capacity tray, 5
Erase Border/Erase Center, 143 large capacity tray, loading paper, 119
Erase Center/Border, 88 LCT Paper Size Change, 153
exposure glass, 5 Letter mode, 43
Letter/Photo mode, 43
F Low Power mode, 24
Low Power Timer, 137
finisher, 3, 158, 170
finishing, 96 - 104 M
front cover, 5
Full Main Menu Display, 141 main switch, 5, 24
Full Size Copying, 36 MAINTAINING YOUR COPIER, 156
fusing unit, 5 Manual Image Density, 37
Margin Adjust Front/Back, 142
G Margin Adjustment, 89
Maximum copy quantity, 142
Generation Copy mode, 43 Memory Full Auto Scan Restart, 151
GETTING HELP ON THE DISPLAY, 28 message area, 8
Guidance key, 6, 28 misfeeds, 122 - 124
Mixed Original Sizes, 151
H
N
hard keys, 6
Number keys, 7
I
O
image density, adjusting, 37
Image Repeat, 91 one-sided originals, 65
Image Repeat/Combine Separation Line, operation panel, 5 - 10
144 hard keys, 6
Input/Output, 150 Operation panel beeper, 137

175
INDEX

options, 3 Rotate Sort, 44

Original beeper, 142 Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue, 151
Original Counter, 8 Rotate Stack, 48
Original Mode Priority, 141
original setting S
Date Stamping, 81
Duplex, 64 SADF, 32 - 34
Erase Center/Border, 88 SADF Auto Reset Time, 151
Page Numbering, 83 SAFETY INFORMATION, i
Stamp, 76 Series Copies, 68
Staple, 103 Set date/Set time, 137
Staple & Auto Paper Select, 101 Set User Code Mode, 153
original type, setting, 43 Set User Code(s), 140
Original: /F4 Size Setting, 139 Size Magnification, 58
originals, 29 Sort, 44
originals, setting, 29 Sort, optional, 96
Overlay/Merge, 94 Sorting Into Sets, 44, 96
specifications
P 1000-sheet tray unit, 171
1500-sheet tray unit, 171
P1, P2, 1/5, 2/5...Format Position, 145 copier, 166 - 168
Page Numbering, 82 document feeder, 169
Page Numbering Format, 144 finisher, 170
paper, 162 Stacking Together All Copies Of A Page,
Paper Size SettingTray 2, 3, and 4(op- 48
tion), 138 Stamp, 74 - 80, 144
paper tray, 5 -1-, -2- Format Position, 145
Paper Tray Priority, 139 Auto Stamping, 75, 146
paper tray unit, 3 Background Numbering, 74
paper tray, loading paper, 118 Background Numbering Density, 150
Paper Type Display, 138 Background Numbering Size, 150
paper, changing size, 128 - 133 Date Position/Format, 148
1st tray, 128 Date Stamping, 81
optional tray unit, 133 P1, P2, 1/5, 2/5...Format Position, 145
paper, loading, 117 - 119 Page Numbering, 82
paper, selecting, 38 Page Numbering Format, 144
Photo mode, 43 Stamp Layout, 146
platen cover, 5 User Stamp, 148
Positive/Negative, 93 User Stamp Layout, 148
Preset R/E, 55 User Stamping, 79
Program key, 6 Stamp Layout, 146
Program mode, 54 Staple, optional, 100
staples, adding, 121
R staples, jammed, 125
Start key, 7
Reduce/Enlarge, 55 - 60 SYSTEM OVERVIEW, 3
Directional Magnification, 57
Directional Size Magnification, 59 T
Preset R/E, 55
Size Magnification, 58 toner, 163
Zoom, 56 toner bottle, 5
REMARKS, 159 toner, adding, 120

176
 INDEX

Touch Panel Display, 6, 8, 26 - 27 [Last Page] key, 85

Tray 1 * Paper Size Setting, 138 [Menu] key, 136
Tray 1 /F4 Paper Size Setting, 138 [Next] key, 136
troubleshooting [Prev.] key, 27, 136
copies, 112 [Shift Position] key, 62
copies, Adjust Image, 113
copies, Combine, 116
copies, Duplex, 115
copies, finishing, 113 - 116
copies, Stamp, 114
jammed staples, 125 - 126
mechanical, 110 - 111
misfeeds, 122 - 124
two-sided copies, 61
two-sided originals, 66, 68

U
User Code mode, 25
User Reproduction Ratio 1, 2 , 142
User Stamp, 148
User Stamp Layout, 148
User Stamp, registering, 152
User Stamping, 79
User Tools, 134 - 152
Basic Settings, 137
Copy Features, 141
User Tools key, 6

W
WARNING, i
WHERE TO PUT YOUR COPIER, 160 -
161

Z
Zoom, 56

etc
-1-, -2- Format Position, 145
1 -- 2 Duplex Auto Margin Adjust, 143
1000-sheet tray unit, 171
1500-sheet tray unit, 171
16 in 1, 70 - 73
2 in 1, 70
4 in 1, 70 - 73
8 in 1, 70 - 73
[Cancel] key, 136
[Change Modes] key, 27
[Check Modes] key, 27
[Exit] key, 136

177